1. DL manuals
  2. B&R Industries
  3. I/O Systems
  4. X20 System
  5. User Manual

B&R Industries X20 System User Manual

Summary of X20 System

  • Page 1

    X20 system user's manual version: 3.10 (may 2015) model no.: max20-eng all information contained in this manual is current as of its creation/publication. B&r reserves the right to change the contents of this manual without notice. The information contained herein is believed to be accurate as of th...

  • Page 3

    Table of contents x20 system user's manual 3.10 3 1 general information................................................................................................ 50 1.1 manual history..................................................................................................................

  • Page 4

    Table of contents 4 x20 system user's manual 3.10 3 mechanical and electrical configuration...............................................................78 3.1 dimensions....................................................................................................................................

  • Page 5

    Table of contents x20 system user's manual 3.10 5 3.22 combining x2x link systems...................................................................................................................103 3.22.1 general information.............................................................................

  • Page 6

    Table of contents 6 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.4.8 behavior in the event of a short circuit............................................................................................156 4.3.4.9 register description.................................................................................

  • Page 7

    Table of contents x20 system user's manual 3.10 7 4.3.10.8 register description....................................................................................................................... 270 4.3.11 x20ai4622....................................................................................

  • Page 8

    Table of contents 8 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.4.3.5 pinout............................................................................................................................................... 404 4.4.3.6 connection example.................................................................

  • Page 9

    Table of contents x20 system user's manual 3.10 9 4.4.9.4 led status indicators.......................................................................................................................490 4.4.9.5 pinout.......................................................................................

  • Page 10

    Table of contents 10 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.5.4.12 additional documentation and import files (eds)..........................................................................526 4.5.5 x20bc0063.......................................................................................................

  • Page 11

    Table of contents x20 system user's manual 3.10 11 4.5.9.11 saving an ip address in flash memory..........................................................................................551 4.5.10 x20bc00e3.................................................................................................

  • Page 12

    Table of contents 12 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.6.4.8 register description......................................................................................................................... 582 4.7 bus modules...................................................................................

  • Page 13

    Table of contents x20 system user's manual 3.10 13 4.8.3.1 general information..........................................................................................................................607 4.8.3.2 order data.................................................................................

  • Page 14

    Table of contents 14 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.10.5.5 pinout............................................................................................................................................. 641 4.10.5.6 connection examples...............................................................

  • Page 15

    Table of contents x20 system user's manual 3.10 15 4.11.7.2 order data...................................................................................................................................... 701 4.11.7.3 technical data.......................................................................

  • Page 16

    Table of contents 16 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.13.4 led status indicators................................................................................................................... 781 4.11.13.5 pinout.....................................................................................

  • Page 17

    Table of contents x20 system user's manual 3.10 17 4.12.2.6 operating and connection elements..............................................................................................903 4.12.2.7 slot for application memory............................................................................

  • Page 18

    Table of contents 18 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.3.8 input filter....................................................................................................................................... 945 4.13.3.9 register description..............................................................

  • Page 19

    Table of contents x20 system user's manual 3.10 19 4.13.9.1 general information....................................................................................................................... 986 4.13.9.2 order data.................................................................................

  • Page 20

    Table of contents 20 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.14.7 input circuit diagram.................................................................................................................. 1022 4.13.14.8 input filter...............................................................................

  • Page 21

    Table of contents x20 system user's manual 3.10 21 4.14.2 x20dm9324....................................................................................................................................... 1056 4.14.2.1 general information...................................................................

  • Page 22

    Table of contents 22 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.6.11 operating principle..................................................................................................................... 1095 4.15.6.12 open line detection.......................................................................

  • Page 23

    Table of contents x20 system user's manual 3.10 23 4.15.11.9 switching inductive loads (rev. H0 and higher)........................................................................ 1142 4.15.11.10 operation with 2 a.........................................................................................

  • Page 24

    Table of contents 24 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.16.6 connection example.................................................................................................................. 1192 4.15.16.7 output circuit diagram........................................................................

  • Page 25

    Table of contents x20 system user's manual 3.10 25 4.15.21.9 register description................................................................................................................... 1232 4.15.22 x20do8232....................................................................................

  • Page 26

    Table of contents 26 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.27.4 status leds............................................................................................................................... 1283 4.15.27.5 pinout..................................................................................

  • Page 27

    Table of contents x20 system user's manual 3.10 27 4.16.3.8 circuit diagram for the encoder supply and leds.......................................................................1335 4.16.3.9 calculating the maximum encoder cable length...................................................................

  • Page 28

    Table of contents 28 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.3.4 led status indicators...................................................................................................................1478 4.18.3.5 pinout.......................................................................................

  • Page 29

    Table of contents x20 system user's manual 3.10 29 4.19.2.11 sg4.............................................................................................................................................1712 4.19.3 x20bc8083.............................................................................

  • Page 30

    Table of contents 30 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.21.2.1 general information......................................................................................................................1747 4.21.2.2 order data..................................................................................

  • Page 31

    Table of contents x20 system user's manual 3.10 31 4.23.3.4 led status indicators...................................................................................................................1774 4.23.3.5 operating and connection elements............................................................

  • Page 32

    Table of contents 32 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.9.5 operating and connection elements............................................................................................1796 4.23.9.6 profibus dp interface...................................................................................

  • Page 33

    Table of contents x20 system user's manual 3.10 33 4.23.15.8 firmware.....................................................................................................................................1823 4.23.16 x20if1086-2.............................................................................

  • Page 34

    Table of contents 34 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.22.1 general information....................................................................................................................1849 4.23.22.2 order data..................................................................................

  • Page 35

    Table of contents x20 system user's manual 3.10 35 4.24 x20 hub system...................................................................................................................................... 1882 4.24.1 brief information.....................................................................

  • Page 36

    Table of contents 36 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.2.4 led status indicators...................................................................................................................1915 4.25.2.5 pinout.......................................................................................

  • Page 37

    Table of contents x20 system user's manual 3.10 37 4.25.5.12 overvoltage cutoff...................................................................................................................... 1963 4.25.5.13 overtemperature cutoff (at 85°c)..........................................................

  • Page 38

    Table of contents 38 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.4.1 general information......................................................................................................................2227 4.26.4.2 order data..................................................................................

  • Page 39

    Table of contents x20 system user's manual 3.10 39 4.26.10.6 connection example.................................................................................................................. 2327 4.26.10.7 output circuit diagram........................................................................

  • Page 40

    Table of contents 40 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.29.2.2 order data....................................................................................................................................2367 4.29.2.3 technical data.........................................................................

  • Page 41

    Table of contents x20 system user's manual 3.10 41 4.31.3.1 general information......................................................................................................................2391 4.31.3.2 order data..................................................................................

  • Page 42

    Table of contents 42 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.32.2 x20tb06/x20tb12............................................................................................................................ 2475 4.32.2.1 general information........................................................................

  • Page 43

    Table of contents x20 system user's manual 3.10 43 5.4.4.1 general information........................................................................................................................2509 5.4.4.2 order data..................................................................................

  • Page 44

    Table of contents 44 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.8 bus receivers and bus transmitters..........................................................................................................2538 5.8.1 brief information................................................................................

  • Page 45

    Table of contents x20 system user's manual 3.10 45 5.12.1 brief information.................................................................................................................................2569 5.12.2 x20cdm9324.............................................................................

  • Page 46

    Table of contents 46 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.17 expandable bus controllers system modules.........................................................................................2599 5.17.1 brief information........................................................................................

  • Page 47

    Table of contents x20 system user's manual 3.10 47 5.21.1 brief information.................................................................................................................................2627 5.21.2 x20cpd2113.............................................................................

  • Page 48

    Table of contents 48 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.26.2.2 order data....................................................................................................................................2655 5.26.2.3 technical data.........................................................................

  • Page 49

    Table of contents x20 system user's manual 3.10 49 b.3 b&r id codes sorted by model number.................................................................................................. 2698.

  • Page 50: 1 General Information

    General information 50 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1 general information 1.1 manual history version date comment 3.10 may 2015 book updated existing module groups updated • counter modules • motor modules • x20 electronics module communication • digital signal processor modules chapter "coated mod...

  • Page 51

    General information x20 system user's manual 3.10 51 version date comment 2.00 july 2007 book updated new module groups added • cpu modules • compact cpus • compact cpu system modules • fieldbus cpus • fieldbus cpu system modules • communication in the x20 if module • x20 electronics module communic...

  • Page 52

    General information 52 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1.2 safety notices 1.2.1 introduction programmable logic controllers, operating and monitoring devices (e.G. Industrial pcs, power panels, mobile pan- els etc.) as well as the uninterruptible power supplies have all been designed, developed, and p...

  • Page 53

    General information x20 system user's manual 3.10 53 1.2.3 protection against electrostatic discharge electrical components that can be damaged by electrostatic discharge (esd) must be handled accordingly. 1.2.3.1 packaging • electrical components with a housing … do not require special esd packagin...

  • Page 54

    General information 54 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1.2.4 transport and storage during transport and storage, devices must be protected against undue stress (mechanical loads, temperature, moisture, corrosive atmospheres, etc.). Devices contain components sensitive to electrostatic charges that can...

  • Page 55

    General information x20 system user's manual 3.10 55 1.2.6 operation 1.2.6.1 protection against touching electrical parts to operate programmable logic controllers, operating and monitoring devices, and uninterruptible power supplies, certain components must carry dangerous voltage levels. Touching ...

  • Page 56

    General information 56 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1.3 terminology term explanation sg3 system generation 3 (sg3) - cpus with motorola processors the following cpus belong to this series: • if161, ip161 • xp152 • cp100, cp104, cp152, cp153, cp200, cp210, cp260, cp430, cp470, cp474, cp476, cp770, c...

  • Page 57: 2 System Features

    System features x20 system user's manual 3.10 57 2 system features 2.1 setting the standards in automation there are many different i/o slice systems. With the x20 system, b&r continues to set standards according to its motto "perfection in automation". Born from experience gained from applications ...

  • Page 58

    System features 58 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2.1.2 3 x 1 = 1 three basic elements make up one module: terminal block – electronic module – bus module this modularity results in a system that combines the advantages of both rack and i/o slice systems: • prewiring without the module • hot pluggabl...

  • Page 59

    System features x20 system user's manual 3.10 59 2.2 optimized design x20 modules consist of three submodules to provide maximum ease of use throughout their entire life cycle. This division into bus module, electronics module and terminal block has several advantages. • preconfigured for different ...

  • Page 60: Note:

    System features 60 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2.3 remote backplane the main idea: remote backplane for a rack system – in other words, the cable is the backplane. All modules are connected to the uniform backplane (x2x link). Directly connected x20, x67 or xv modules can each be placed at a dista...

  • Page 61

    System features x20 system user's manual 3.10 61 2.4 x20 cpus 2.4.1 general information the optimally scaled x20 system cpu line satisfies a wide range of needs. It can be implemented anywhere, from standard applications to the most demanding applications with the highest performance requirements. I...

  • Page 62

    System features 62 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2.4.3 b&r automation studio b&r automation studio is the only programming tool needed for all platforms. It can be used to create application software in all relevant iec 61131-3 languages as well as c. Integrated visualization, nc and soft cnc functi...

  • Page 63

    System features x20 system user's manual 3.10 63 2.5 x20 compact cpus 2.5.1 general information with a width of 37.5 mm the x20 compact cpus are extremely compact, yet surprisingly powerful. Less powerful than the pc-based cpus, there are several models of compact cpus available in 2 performance cla...

  • Page 64

    System features 64 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2.6 x20 fieldbus cpus 2.6.1 general information remote design of i/o systems is one of the standard topologies used in automation solutions for machines and equipment. In addition, fieldbuses with bus controllers are normally used. Larger topologies o...

  • Page 65

    System features x20 system user's manual 3.10 65 2.7 for all fieldbuses, integration through standardization the x20 system is ideally suited for expanding existing control systems using standard fieldbus technology. For example, a bus controller allows the x20 system to be used as a powerful i/o ex...

  • Page 66

    System features 66 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2.8 complete system 2.8.1 ip67 - then x67 the x67 is the robust version of the x20 for use outside the control cabinet. The same basic technology, with an ex- tremely robust housing and 4 to 32 channel modules, guarantees economical solutions in the r...

  • Page 67: Information:

    System features x20 system user's manual 3.10 67 2.9 easy wiring industrial control cabinet construction streamlines production cycles. Prefabricated cable trees enable faster and easier assembly directly on the machine or system. The x20 system supports efficient prewiring of the entire control cab...

  • Page 68

    System features 68 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2.10 sophisticated mechanics the name b&r stands for many years of experience in developing and manufacturing industrial electronics. But it's also the mechanics of the x20 system that have been thought through to the last detail. Its robust design, l...

  • Page 69

    System features x20 system user's manual 3.10 69 2.11 diagnostics outstanding diagnostic options are needed for errors to be found quickly. The x20 system offers several levels of diagnostics: • direct on the module using visual led displays. Bus status, i/o status and channel states are displayed i...

  • Page 70

    System features 70 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2.11.1 re leds each x20 system module has a leds for diagnostics at the top. The operating state of the module firmware is indicated by the two topmost leds r (green) and e (red). Additional leds depend on the module and generally indicate the status ...

  • Page 71

    System features x20 system user's manual 3.10 71 2.12 embedded parameter chip information such as module type, serial number, functionality and version number is contained in the embedded parameter chip of the x20 module. This information is automatically evaluated by the programming environment (au...

  • Page 72

    System features 72 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2.15 configurable x2x link address the remote x2x link backplane, which connects the individual i/o modules with each other, is set up to be self- addressing. Because of this, it is not necessary to set the node numbers. The module address is assigned...

  • Page 73

    System features x20 system user's manual 3.10 73 2.16 universal 1, 2, 3-wire connections consistent connection types for all requirements – no additional jumper terminals are needed. All connection types can also be mixed and matched. Universal 3-wire connections integrated supply and ground for sen...

  • Page 74

    System features 74 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2.17 coated x20 system the x20 system includes modules with a protective coating for the electronics. These modules are suitable for use in adverse atmospheric conditions and are protected against condensation and corrosive gases. Data sheets can be f...

  • Page 75

    System features x20 system user's manual 3.10 75 2.20 x20 system configuration the x20 system is designed so that can be connected to standard fieldbuses (with a bus controller) or the remote x2x link backplane (with a bus receiver). The connection to the next station is made with a bus transmitter....

  • Page 76

    System features 76 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2.20.1 fieldbus connection several bus controllers for standard fieldbus technologies like powerlink, devicenet, profibus, canopen, modbustcp or ethernet/ip are available to connect x20 modules to existing control systems. Fieldbus configura- tors tra...

  • Page 77

    System features x20 system user's manual 3.10 77 2.20.2 connection to x2x link backplane the bus receiver x20br9300 is used to connect the x20 system directly to the remote x2x link backplane. Bu s re ce iv er x 20 br 93 00 su pp ly b us m od ul e x2 0b m 01 po w er s up pl y m od ul e x2 0p s2 11 x...

  • Page 78

    Mechanical and electrical configuration 78 x20 system user's manual 3.10 3 mechanical and electrical configuration 3.1 dimensions 3.1.1 x20 cpus with one slot for interface modules 150 +0.2 99 85 figure 16: dimensions of the x20 cpus with one slot 3.1.2 x20 cpus with three slots for interface module...

  • Page 79

    Mechanical and electrical configuration x20 system user's manual 3.10 79 3.1.3 compact cpus and bus controllers 37.5 +0.2 99 75 figure 18: dimensions of the compact cpus and bus controllers 3.1.4 fieldbus cpus and expandable bus controller 3.1.4.1 with an additional slot 62.5 +0.2 99 75 figure 19: d...

  • Page 80

    Mechanical and electrical configuration 80 x20 system user's manual 3.10 3.1.5 i/o modules 12.5 +0.2 99 75 figure 21: dimensions of the i/o modules 3.1.6 cad support to ensure cad support, the dimensions are included in the ecad macros in 2d. Step data is available to allow 3d viewing. The step data...

  • Page 81

    Mechanical and electrical configuration x20 system user's manual 3.10 81 3.2 design support 3.2.1 macros for ecad systems the electronics in a machine must be designed in a way that optimizes use of available space and materials. Graphic ecad systems have proven themselves as the right tool for this...

  • Page 82: Information:

    Mechanical and electrical configuration 82 x20 system user's manual 3.10 3.3 installation a top-hat rail conforming to the en 60715 standard (th35-7.5) is required to mount the plc. The conductive top- hat rail is fastened to the back wall of the control cabinet. The complete system including all in...

  • Page 83: Information:

    Mechanical and electrical configuration x20 system user's manual 3.10 83 3.3.2 vertical installation 10 h = n · 12 .5 1) +0 .2 10 40.2 35 99 35 1) n ... Number of modules figure 23: x20 system - vertical installation for optimal cooling and air circulation, there must be at least 35 mm free space to...

  • Page 84: Information:

    Mechanical and electrical configuration 84 x20 system user's manual 3.10 3.4 wiring in order to achieve a secure connection in the terminal blocks, wires must be stripped accordingly. 7 to 9 mm figure 24: wire stripping for a secure connection information: the wire stripping length must not be more ...

  • Page 85: Information:

    Mechanical and electrical configuration x20 system user's manual 3.10 85 3.6 shielding in principle, the shield must be grounded in all shielded cables: • analog signals (inputs and outputs) • interface modules • counter modules • x2x link cables • fieldbus connections (profibus dp, can bus, etc. ) ...

  • Page 86

    Mechanical and electrical configuration 86 x20 system user's manual 3.10 3.6.2 x20 cable shield clamp the x20 cable shield clamp (model number x20ac0sg1) is latched to the terminal block and connected to the bus module's ground connection using a cable lug. Cable ties are used to press the shield ag...

  • Page 87

    Mechanical and electrical configuration x20 system user's manual 3.10 87 3.6.3 x20 shielding bracket the x20 shielding bracket (model number x20ac0sf9.0010) is installed below the x20 system. The shield is pressed against the shielding bracket using ground terminals from another manufacturer (e.G. P...

  • Page 88

    Mechanical and electrical configuration 88 x20 system user's manual 3.10 3.6.4 shielding via top-hat rail or bus bar ① figure 29: shielding via top-hat rail or bus bar grounding terminals from other manufacturers (such as gogatec) can be used to achieve shielding right on the top-hat rail or on spec...

  • Page 89: Information:

    Mechanical and electrical configuration x20 system user's manual 3.10 89 3.7 wiring guidelines for x20 modules with an ethernet cable a number of x20 modules are based on ethernet technology. Powerlink cables offered by b&r can be used for the necessary wiring. Model number connection type x20ca0e61...

  • Page 90: Danger!

    Mechanical and electrical configuration 90 x20 system user's manual 3.10 3.8 the supply concept danger! In order to guarantee a specific supply voltage, a selv power supply that conforms to iec 60204 must be used to supply the bus and i/o. 3.8.1 bus module rack replacement bus supply contacts bus da...

  • Page 91

    Mechanical and electrical configuration x20 system user's manual 3.10 91 3.9 x20 system infrastructure potential group "in" potential group "out 1" potential group "out 2" figure 32: simple implementation of different potential groups different potential groups can be implemented with the appropriat...

  • Page 92

    Mechanical and electrical configuration 92 x20 system user's manual 3.10 3.12 output modules with supply generally, a power supply module is also necessary for current output modules with many channels, such as the 8 channel output module with 2 amp outputs. This is not the case with the x20 system....

  • Page 93

    Mechanical and electrical configuration x20 system user's manual 3.10 93 3.19 x20 system protection the protection for the x20 system depends on the supply concept. 3.19.1 potential groups using the x20bm01 bus module and organizing the power supply bus modules accordingly allows various potential g...

  • Page 94: Information:

    Mechanical and electrical configuration 94 x20 system user's manual 3.10 3.20 x2x link supply 3.20.1 extended and redundant x2x link supply the x2x link remote backplane is supplied separately from the i/o points. This ensures that the remote backplane doesn't fail if there is a power failure on the...

  • Page 95

    Mechanical and electrical configuration x20 system user's manual 3.10 95 3.20.3 example for redundant x2x link supply multiple x20ps3300 power supply modules can be set up in parallel. It is possible to set up potential groups through the use of different supplies. U1/24 vdc u2/24 vdc x2x link x2x l...

  • Page 96

    Mechanical and electrical configuration 96 x20 system user's manual 3.10 3.21 safe cutoff 3.21.1 general information the operating principle "safe cutoff of a potential group" allows the user to implement safety functions that satisfy the requirements of iso 13849 within a b&r system when using an e...

  • Page 97

    Mechanical and electrical configuration x20 system user's manual 3.10 97 3.21.5 application in the x20 system the operating principle applies to a potential group in the x20 system. For information about how to create a potential group in the x20 system, see section 3.11 "potential groups". When imp...

  • Page 98: Information:

    Mechanical and electrical configuration 98 x20 system user's manual 3.10 3.21.6 general notices 3.21.6.1 installation notes modules must be protected against impermissible dirt and contaminants. The maximum permissible level of dirt and contaminants is pollution level ii as specified in the iec 6066...

  • Page 99

    Mechanical and electrical configuration x20 system user's manual 3.10 99 safety function request worst-case cutoff load-dependent cutoff worst-case time = 500 ms u u u t application t spec time in off figure 37: output behavior following safety request 3.21.6.3 potential group structure the potentia...

  • Page 100

    Mechanical and electrical configuration 100 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2. Two-channel with feedback the following example shows a load being cutoff using the e-stop safety function. Thanks to the feedback, errors in the actuator are detected, and with the full two-channel circuit, the cutoff is e...

  • Page 101

    Mechanical and electrical configuration x20 system user's manual 3.10 101 3.21.6.5 wiring notices the operating principle "safe cutoff of a potential group" only applies to the b&r modules used. All other parts of the safety chain, such as the application, upstream sensors or downstream actuators ar...

  • Page 102: Danger!

    Mechanical and electrical configuration 102 x20 system user's manual 3.10 3.21.7 safety guidelines this section provides a summary of safety notices for the user. Danger! Please observe the following safety notices. Failure to observe one of the following notices can lead to loss of safety functiona...

  • Page 103

    Mechanical and electrical configuration x20 system user's manual 3.10 103 3.22 combining x2x link systems 3.22.1 general information the x2x link provides a complete remote backplane, which is used for communicating between bus modules and over the x2x link cable. Systems based on x2x link can be co...

  • Page 104

    Mechanical and electrical configuration 104 x20 system user's manual 3.10 3.22.3 connection examples 3.22.3.1 x20 system connection examples are listed in the module description: • x20br9300 bus receiver: 604 • x20bt9100 bus transmitter: 609 3.22.3.2 compact i/o system 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 2 in:...

  • Page 105

    Mechanical and electrical configuration x20 system user's manual 3.10 105 3.22.3.3 valve connection connection example with 7xvxxx.Xx-11/-12 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 2 in: in: in: out: out: out: x2x x2x⊥ x2x\ x2x x2x⊥ x2x\ + - + - shield +24 vdc for i/o shield supply ⊥ x2x link and i/o supply blue whit...

  • Page 106

    Mechanical and electrical configuration 106 x20 system user's manual 3.10 connection example with 7xvxxx.Xx-51/-62 status 2 status 1 module supply supply module supply routing x2x link x2x link signal cable type model number x67ca0x01.Xxxx x2x link connection cables 1) x67ca0x11.Xxxx x67ca0p00.Xxxx ...

  • Page 107: Information:

    Mechanical and electrical configuration x20 system user's manual 3.10 107 information about power consumption the power consumption of individual modules can be found on the respective technical data sheet. Information about power consumption can be found in the technical data under "general informa...

  • Page 108

    Mechanical and electrical configuration 108 x20 system user's manual 3.10 potential group 2 module bus power [w] i/o-internal power [w] i/o-external power [w] 1) sensor/actuator supply [w] 2) x20do2322 0.13 0.33 24.00 12.00 x20do6322 0.18 0.71 72.00 - x20do8332 0.22 - - 3) - subtotal 1.04 96.00 12.0...

  • Page 109

    Mechanical and electrical configuration x20 system user's manual 3.10 109 potential group 1 is supplied by the supply module integrated in the x20br9300 bus receiver. The total power supplied by the bus, including all bus modules, is 3.04 w (= 1.22 w +1.82 w). The total amount of power that must be ...

  • Page 110

    Mechanical and electrical configuration 110 x20 system user's manual 3.10 3.24 power supply module power loss 3.24.1 general information power supply modules are used to provide power to an x20 system. The power supply modules are either a separate module or part of a cpu or a bus controller. The po...

  • Page 111

    Mechanical and electrical configuration x20 system user's manual 3.10 111 3.24.2 power supply modules without x2x link supply module power consumption - bus [w] power consumption - i/o-internal [w] power consumption - x67 x2x link-internal [w] x20ps2100 0.2 0.1 + i io 2 × 0.005 - x20ps2110 0.2 0.1 +...

  • Page 112

    Mechanical and electrical configuration 112 x20 system user's manual 3.10 3.24.6 example calculating the total internal power consumption of a br9300 bus receiver with the following hardware configura- tion: module bus power [w] i/o-internal power [w] x20di4371 0.14 0.59 x20di2371 0.12 0.29 x20do432...

  • Page 113

    Mechanical and electrical configuration x20 system user's manual 3.10 113 3.24.6.2 calculating the internal i/o power consumption of the x20br9300 the i/o summation current of all i/o modules supplied by the x20br9300 is needed to calculate the internal i/o power consumption. The i/o summation curre...

  • Page 114

    Mechanical and electrical configuration 114 x20 system user's manual 3.10 connections and currents of the second x20do4322: gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc do ac tu at or 1 ac tu at or 2 ac tu at or 3 0.45 a 0.35 a 0.07 a 0.09 a 0.5 a 0.1 a figure 46: connections and currents of the second x20do4322 calcula...

  • Page 115

    Mechanical and electrical configuration x20 system user's manual 3.10 115 3.24.6.3 total internal power consumption of the x20br9300 the following 3 power values must be added together to calculate the total internal power of the x20br9300: • power consumption - bus • power consumption - i/o-interna...

  • Page 116: 4 X20 System Modules

    X20 system modules • module overview: alphabetically 116 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4 x20 system modules 4.1 module overview: alphabetically product id short description on page 0acs100a.00-1 acceleration sensor, nominal sensitivity 100 mv/g, top exit 2204 0acs100a.90-1 acceleration sensor, nomin...

  • Page 117

    X20 system modules • module overview: alphabetically x20 system user's manual 3.10 117 product id short description on page x20bb81 x20 bus base with 1 expansion slot for x20 base module (bc, hb, ...) and an x20 auxiliary module (if, hb, ...) and x20 power supply module, x20ac0sl1/x20ac0sr1 x20 end ...

  • Page 118

    X20 system modules • module overview: alphabetically 118 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id short description on page x20cp1584 x20 cpu, atom 0.6 ghz, 512 mb ddr2 ram, 1 mb sram, removable application memory: compactflash, 1 insert slot for x20 interface modules, 2 usb ports, 1 rs232 interface...

  • Page 119

    X20 system modules • module overview: alphabetically x20 system user's manual 3.10 119 product id short description on page x20dm9324 x20 digital mixed module, 8 inputs, 24 vdc, sink, configurable input filter, 4 outputs, 24 vdc, 0.5 a, source, 1-wire connections 1056 x20do2321 x20 digital output mo...

  • Page 120

    X20 system modules • module overview: alphabetically 120 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id short description on page x20if1091-1 x20 interface module for expandable bus controller, 1 x2x link master interface, electrically isolated, order 1x tb704 terminal block separately. 1742 x20if10a1-1 x...

  • Page 121

    X20 system modules • module overview: grouped x20 system user's manual 3.10 121 4.2 module overview: grouped cpu modules product id short description on page x20cp1483 x20 cpu, x86 100 mhz intel compatible, 32 mb dram, 128 kb sram, removable application memory: com- pactflash, 1 insert slot for x20 ...

  • Page 122

    X20 system modules • module overview: grouped 122 x20 system user's manual 3.10 all modules product id short description on page x20do6325 x20 digital output module, 6 outputs, 24 vdc, 0.5 a, source, open line and overload detection, 2-wire connec- tions 1210 analog input modules x20ai1744 x20 analo...

  • Page 123

    X20 system modules • module overview: grouped x20 system user's manual 3.10 123 product id short description on page x20bt9400 x20 bus transmitter x2x link, feed for internal i/o supply, x2x link supply for x67 modules, reverse polari- ty protection, short circuit protection, overload protection, pa...

  • Page 124

    X20 system modules • module overview: grouped 124 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id short description on page x20do6322 x20 digital output module, 6 outputs, 24 vdc, 0.5 a, source, 2-wire connections 1202 x20do6529 x20 digital output module, 6 relays, normally open contacts, 115 vac / 0.5 a, ...

  • Page 125

    X20 system modules • module overview: grouped x20 system user's manual 3.10 125 product id short description on page x20hb2886 x20 hub expansion module, integrated active 2x hub, 2 fiber optic connections 2386 system modules for bus controllers x20bb80 x20 bus base for x20 base module (bc, hb, ...) ...

  • Page 126

    X20 system modules • module overview: grouped 126 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id short description on page x20cp1585 x20 cpu, atom 1.0 ghz, 512 mb ddr2 ram, 1 mb sram, removable application memory: compactflash, 1 insert slot for x20 interface modules, 2 usb interfaces, 1 rs232 interface, ...

  • Page 127

    X20 system modules • module overview: grouped x20 system user's manual 3.10 127 product id short description on page x20 redundancy systems x20hb8884 x20 compact link selector, 2x rj45 connection, order bus base, power supply module and terminal block sep- arately. 2353.

  • Page 128

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • brief information 128 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3 analog input modules analog input modules convert measured values (voltages, currents) into numerical values, which can be processed by the plc. In the plc, analog data is always in 16-bit 2s compleme...

  • Page 129

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai1744, x20ai1744-3 x20 system user's manual 3.10 129 4.3.2 x20ai1744, x20ai1744-3 4.3.2.1 general information the x20ai1744 and x20ai1744-3 modules work with both 4-line and 6-line strain gauge cells. If a 6-line strain gauge cell is connected, the lin...

  • Page 130

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai1744, x20ai1744-3 130 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20ai1744 x20ai1744-3 connection 4- or 6-wire connections 2) input type differential, used to evaluate a full-bridge strain gauge digital converter resolution 24-bit conversion time depend...

  • Page 131

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai1744, x20ai1744-3 x20 system user's manual 3.10 131 product id x20ai1744 x20ai1744-3 mechanical characteristics note order 1x x20tb12 terminal block separately order 1x x20bm11 bus module separately spacing 12.5 +0.2 mm table 19: x20ai1744, x20ai1744-...

  • Page 132

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai1744, x20ai1744-3 132 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.2.6 connection examples full-bridge strain gauge with 4-line connection gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc ⊥ + - ai full-bridge strain gauge +u figure 49: connection example - full-bridge strain gauge with ...

  • Page 133

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai1744, x20ai1744-3 x20 system user's manual 3.10 133 parallel connection of 2 full-bridge strain gauges with 4-line connections for parallel connection of full-bridge strain gauges, please refer to the manufacturer's guidelines. Gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc...

  • Page 134

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai1744, x20ai1744-3 134 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.2.8 filter characteristics of the sigma-delta adc 4 x 0 8 x 12 x 16 x 20 x 24 x 1 x f data frequency g ai n 4.3.2.9 effective resolution of the ad converter the ad converter on the ai1744 provide...

  • Page 135

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai1744, x20ai1744-3 x20 system user's manual 3.10 135 4.3.2.10 calculation example / quantization in a weighing application, the corresponding weight located on the connected load cell should be determined from the value derived from the x20ai1744. The ...

  • Page 136

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai1744, x20ai1744-3 136 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.2.11 register description 4.3.2.11.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic 2 statusinput01 usint ● 4 analoginput01 dint ● 16 configoutput01 ...

  • Page 137

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai1744, x20ai1744-3 x20 system user's manual 3.10 137 4.3.2.11.4 register for "standard" and "bus controller" function model 4.3.2.11.4.1 module status name: statusinput01 the current state of the module is indicated in this register. Data type value us...

  • Page 138

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai1744, x20ai1744-3 138 x20 system user's manual 3.10 measurement range ±256mv/v ±128mv/v ±64mv/v ±32mv/v data rate f data [hz] bits scope bits scope bits scope bits scope 2.5 23 ±4,194,000 22.6 ±3,179,000 22.1 ±2,248,000 21.7 ±1,703,000 5 22.3 ±2,582,0...

  • Page 139: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai1744, x20ai1744-3 x20 system user's manual 3.10 139 synchronous mode beginning with firmware version 2, the analog/digital converter (adc) on the x20ai1744 module can be operated and read synchronously with the x2x link. Synchronous mode is activated ...

  • Page 140: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai1744, x20ai1744-3 140 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.2.11.4.5 adc clock frequency shift name: adcclkfreqshift01 in rare cases, x20ai1744 connected to neighboring slots can influence one another. This can result in tempo- rary, minimal deviations in...

  • Page 141

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai1744, x20ai1744-3 x20 system user's manual 3.10 141 4.3.2.11.5 register for "multiple sampling" function model 4.3.2.11.5.1 module status name: statusinput01 the current state of the module is indicated in this register. Data type value usint see bit ...

  • Page 142

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai1744, x20ai1744-3 142 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.2.11.5.3 adc configuration name: configoutput01 (x20ai1744) configgain01_multisample (x20ai1744-3) the measurement range for the ad converter can be configured in this register. Data type value u...

  • Page 143

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai1744, x20ai1744-3 x20 system user's manual 3.10 143 4.3.2.11.6 minimum cycle time the minimum cycle time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced without communication errors occurring. It should be noted that very fast cycles decrease the idle ti...

  • Page 144

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2222 144 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.3 x20ai2222 4.3.3.1 general information the module is equipped with 2 inputs with 13-bit (including sign) digital converter resolution. It can be used to capture voltage signals in the range from ±10 v. This ...

  • Page 145

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2222 x20 system user's manual 3.10 145 product id x20ai2222 output of the digital value during overload below lower limit 0x8001 above upper limit 0x7fff conversion procedure sar input filter 3rd-order low pass / cutoff frequency 1 khz max. Error at 2...

  • Page 146

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2222 146 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.3.5 pinout ai + 1 u ai - 1 u ai + 2 u ai - 2 u x 20 a i 2 22 2 r 1 e 2 figure 54: pinout 4.3.3.6 connection example gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc ai + + 4.3.3.7 input circuit diagram ai + x u ai - x u a/d converter...

  • Page 147

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2222 x20 system user's manual 3.10 147 4.3.3.8 register description 4.3.3.8.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic analog signal - configuration 16 configuring the input filter usint ● 20 l...

  • Page 148

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2222 148 x20 system user's manual 3.10 input ramp limitation is well suited for suppressing disturbances (spikes). The following examples show the function of the input ramp limitation based on an input jump and a disturbance. Example 1 the input valu...

  • Page 149

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2222 x20 system user's manual 3.10 149 4.3.3.8.5.2 filter level a filter can be defined to prevent large input jumps. This filter is used to bring the input value closer to the actual analog value over a period of several bus cycles. Filtering takes p...

  • Page 150: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2222 150 x20 system user's manual 3.10 example 2 a disturbance interferes with the input value. The diagram shows the calculated value with the following settings: input ramp limitation = 0 filter level = 2 or 4 0 8000 16000 t [ms] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 inp...

  • Page 151: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2222 x20 system user's manual 3.10 151 4.3.3.8.8 upper limit value name: configoutput04 this register can be used to configure the upper limit for analog values. If the analog value goes above the limit value, it is frozen at this value and the corres...

  • Page 152

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2237 152 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.4 x20ai2237 4.3.4.1 general information the x20ai2237 module is equipped with two voltage inputs with 16-bit digital converter resolution. Each voltage input has its own sensor supply. The two channels with t...

  • Page 153

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2237 x20 system user's manual 3.10 153 product id x20ai2237 input protection up to 30 vdc, reverse polarity protection open line detection yes, via software permitted input signal max. ±30 v output of the digital value during overload configurable con...

  • Page 154

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2237 154 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.4.4 status leds image led color status description operating status off module supply not connected single flash unlink mode blinking quickly sync mode blinking slowly preoperational mode r green on run mode ...

  • Page 155

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2237 x20 system user's manual 3.10 155 4.3.4.6 connection examples 4.3.4.6.1 2-wire connection a 2-wire connection can be implemented as follows: • 2-wire transducer • active voltage source gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc ai vo lta ge s ou rc e 2-wire transdu...

  • Page 156

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2237 156 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.4.7 input circuit diagram sensor supply x + sensor supply x - channel x + channel x - a/d converter processor input protection input protection dc/dc converter 25 v dc/dc 28 v dc/dc 5 v electrical isolation i...

  • Page 157

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2237 x20 system user's manual 3.10 157 4.3.4.9 register description 4.3.4.9.1 register overview - standard read write registers name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic analog input - configuration 390 434 analogfilter01 analogfilter02 uint ● 386 ...

  • Page 158

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2237 158 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.4.9.2 register overview - bus controller read write registers name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic analog input - configuration 390 434 analogfilter01 analogfilter02 uint ● 386 430 analogmode01 analog...

  • Page 159

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2237 x20 system user's manual 3.10 159 4.3.4.9.3 general information the x20ai2237 provides two electrically isolated channels. Each channel can read an electrical voltage signal in the ±10 v range, and the supply the signal encoder with 24 vdc. 4.3.4...

  • Page 160

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2237 160 x20 system user's manual 3.10 the "level of input filter" limits the permissible changes to the input value. The calculation is recursive, which means the current value depends on the previously filtered input value. The curve of the filtered...

  • Page 161

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2237 x20 system user's manual 3.10 161 the higher the filter level is set, the lower the absolute amplitude of the evaluated input value. Due to the recursive calculation, however, the spike has a considerable after-effect. It is therefore recommended...

  • Page 162

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2237 162 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.4.9.4.1 analogfilter name: analogfilter01 analogfilter02 if required by the application, the "analogfilter" register can be used to limit the slew rate of the input value. Data type values uint see bit struct...

  • Page 163: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2237 x20 system user's manual 3.10 163 4.3.4.9.4.3 upperlimit, lowerlimit name: upperlimit01 upperlimit02 lowerlimit01 lowerlimit02 if the value range needs to be restricted further, the "upperlimit" and "lowerlimit registers can be used to enter new ...

  • Page 164: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2237 164 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.4.9.4.6 preparationinterval name: preparationinterval01 preparationinterval02 if the last valid measurement value should be kept when violating the limit value, then preparationinterval must be defined. The m...

  • Page 165

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2237 x20 system user's manual 3.10 165 4.3.4.9.5 analog input - communication the measured voltage data can be obtained via two different registers: the unevaluated measurement value ("measurand") contains the scaled converter value. The evaluated mea...

  • Page 166

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2237 166 x20 system user's manual 3.10 sensorerroranaloginput: in addition to the analog input, the module also provides the option of supplying the connected encoder with 24 vdc. If the input impedance for the sensor is too high, however, the integra...

  • Page 167

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 167 4.3.5 x20ai2322 4.3.5.1 general information the module is equipped with 2 inputs with 12-bit digital converter resolution. It is possible to select between the two current ranges 0 to 20 ma and 4 to 20 ma. This m...

  • Page 168

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2322 168 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20ai2322 output of the digital value during overload below lower limit 0x0000 above upper limit 0x7fff conversion procedure sar input filter 3rd-order low pass / cutoff frequency 1 khz max. Error at 2...

  • Page 169

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 169 4.3.5.5 pinout ai +1 i ai -1 i ai +2 i ai -2 i x 20 a i 2 32 2 r 1 e 2 figure 65: pinout 4.3.5.6 connection example gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc ai + + 4.3.5.7 input circuit diagram ptc shunt ai + x i ai - x i a/d con...

  • Page 170

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2322 170 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.5.8 register description 4.3.5.8.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic analog signal - configuration 16 configuring the input filter usint ● 18 c...

  • Page 171

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 171 input ramp limitation is well suited for suppressing disturbances (spikes). The following examples show the function of the input ramp limitation based on an input jump and a disturbance. Example 1 the input valu...

  • Page 172

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2322 172 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.5.8.5.2 filter level a filter can be defined to prevent large input jumps. This filter is used to bring the input value closer to the actual analog value over a period of several bus cycles. Filtering takes p...

  • Page 173

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 173 example 2 a disturbance interferes with the input value. The diagram shows the calculated value with the following settings: input ramp limitation = 0 filter level = 2 or 4 0 8000 16000 t [ms] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 inp...

  • Page 174: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2322 174 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.5.8.7 channel type name: configoutput02 this register can be used to set the range of the current signal. This is determined by how they are configured. The following input signals can be set: • 0 to 20 ma cu...

  • Page 175

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 175 4.3.5.8.10 input status name: statusinput01 this register is used to monitor the module inputs. A change in the monitoring status generates an error message. Data type value usint see bit structure. Bit structure...

  • Page 176

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2437 176 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.6 x20ai2437 4.3.6.1 general information the x20ai2437 module is equipped with two inputs that have 16-bit digital converter resolution. Each current measurement input has its own sensor supply. The two channe...

  • Page 177

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2437 x20 system user's manual 3.10 177 4.3.6.3 technical data product id x20ai2437 short description i/o module 2 analog inputs, 4 to 20 ma or 0 to 25 ma general information b&r id code 0xb784 status indicators i/o function per channel, operating stat...

  • Page 178

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2437 178 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20ai2437 maximum voltage ripple up to 100 khz ≤2.2 mv up to 1 mhz ≤22 mv higher ≤100 mv short circuit current typical maximum 60 ma behavior in the event of a short circuit current limitation operatin...

  • Page 179

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2437 x20 system user's manual 3.10 179 4.3.6.5 pin assignments shielded twisted pair cables are generally used to minimize disturbance. Use either one cable for each channel or a multiple twisted pair cable for both channels. R v 1 e v 2 x 20 a i 2 43...

  • Page 180

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2437 180 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.6.9 register description 4.3.6.9.1 register overview - function model 0 (standard) read write heading name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic channel 1 (electrically isolated) analog signal - communicati...

  • Page 181

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2437 x20 system user's manual 3.10 181 4.3.6.9.2 variable assignment in automation studio (x2x master) read write name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic channel 1 (electrically isolated) analog signal - communication analogstatus01 usint ● under...

  • Page 182

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2437 182 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.6.9.3 register overview - bus controller function model 254 read write heading name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic channel 1 (electrically isolated) analog signal - communication 0 analoginputevaluat...

  • Page 183

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2437 x20 system user's manual 3.10 183 4.3.6.9.4 variable assignment in automation studio (canio) read write name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic channel 1 (electrically isolated) analog signal - communication analogstatus01 usint ● underflowa...

  • Page 184

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2437 184 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.6.9.5 analog signal - communication the x20ai2437 module has two independent electrically isolated channels. Both channels can be used to read in an analog signal. Two registers need to be configured for one ...

  • Page 185

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2437 x20 system user's manual 3.10 185 4.3.6.9.5.3 analogsampletime names (pchannelname): analogsampletime01 analogsampletime01_16bit analogsampletime01_32bit analogsampletime02 analogsampletime02_16bit analogsampletime02_32bit the registers return th...

  • Page 186

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2437 186 x20 system user's manual 3.10 open line: according to the configuration, measurement information is checked for values to detect a failure signal. Open line detection takes place using a configurable hysteresis value (default: 100 µa, "hyster...

  • Page 187

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2437 x20 system user's manual 3.10 187 4.3.6.9.6 analog signal - configuration how the analog signal is displayed can be adapted to the requirements of the application. Separate configuration registers per channel are available to aid in this. 4.3.6.9...

  • Page 188: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2437 188 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.6.9.6.3 openlooplimit names (pchannelname): openlooplimit_1 openlooplimit_2 the limit value for the respective analog input must be set when open circuit monitoring is enabled and if required by the configure...

  • Page 189

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2437 x20 system user's manual 3.10 189 4.3.6.9.6.5 replacementupper, replacementlower names (pchannelname): replacementupper_1 replacementupper_2 replacementlower_1 replacementlower_2 the "replace" registers are used to predefine the static values tha...

  • Page 190

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2437 190 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.6.9.6.6 upperlimit, lowerlimit names (pchannelname): upperlimit_1 upperlimit_2 lowerlimit_1 lowerlimit_2 if the value range needs to be restricted further, the "upperlimit" and "lowerlimit registers can be us...

  • Page 191

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2437 x20 system user's manual 3.10 191 4.3.6.9.6.8 errordelay names (pchannelname): errordelay_1 errordelay_2 this register specifies the number of consecutive conversion procedures where an error is pending until the cor- responding individual error ...

  • Page 192

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2437 192 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.6.9.7 function models name number automation studio canopen devicenet modbus/tcp canio standard function model 0 ● bus controller function model 254 ● ● ● ● a function model specifies the registers on the mod...

  • Page 193

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 193 4.3.7 x20ai2438 4.3.7.1 general information the x20ai2438 module is equipped with two inputs with 16-bit digital converter resolution. It supports the hart communication standard for data transfer, parameter conf...

  • Page 194

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 194 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.7.3 technical data product id x20ai2438 short description i/o module 2 analog inputs, 4 to 20 ma or 0 to 25 ma general information b&r id code 0xb3a9 status indicators i/o function per channel, operating stat...

  • Page 195

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 195 product id x20ai2438 short circuit protection yes, continuous electrical isolation sensor supply - channel no sensor supply - sensor supply yes maximum voltage ripple up to 100 khz ≤2.2 mv up to 1 mhz ≤22 mv high...

  • Page 196

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 196 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.7.4 status leds image led color status description operating mode off module supply not connected single flash unlink mode blinking quickly sync mode blinking slowly preoperational mode r green on run mode mo...

  • Page 197

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 197 4.3.7.6 connection examples 4.3.7.7 input circuit diagram sensor supply x + sensor supply x - channel x + channel x - a/d converter hart modem processor protection and filter input protection rts (request to send...

  • Page 198

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 198 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.7.9 register description 4.3.7.9.1 register overview - function model 0 (standard) read write heading name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic analog signal - communication channel 01 0 analoginputevaluat...

  • Page 199

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 199 read write heading name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic hart - communication channel 02 1074 + index*4 pvnodecomstatus02_01 pvnodecomstatus02_[02…15] uint ● 1114 + index*24 pvsampletime02_01_16bit pvsampl...

  • Page 200

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 200 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.7.9.2 variable assignment in automation studio (x2x master) read write name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic analog signal - communication channel 01 analogstatus01 usint ● underflowanaloginput01 bool ...

  • Page 201

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 201 4.3.7.9.3 register overview - function model 254 (bus controller) read write heading name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic analog signal - communication channel 01 0 analoginputevaluated01 int uint ● 30 an...

  • Page 202

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 202 x20 system user's manual 3.10 read write heading name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic 546 pvcounthartframeerror01 uint ● 554 pvnodefound01 uint ● 558 pvnodeerror01 uint ● 1546 hartprottimeout_1 uint ● 1550 hartprotretry_1 uint ● 1554 ...

  • Page 203

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 203 4.3.7.9.4 variable assignment in automation studio (canio) read write name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic analog signal - communication channel 01 analogstatus01 usint ● underflowanaloginput01 bool ● ove...

  • Page 204

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 204 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.7.9.5 general information the x20ai2438 module has two independent electrically isolated channels with integrated hart modems. Both channels can be used to read in an analog signal and handle hart communicati...

  • Page 205

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 205 4.3.7.9.6 analog signal - communication 4.3.7.9.6.1 analoginputevaluated names (pchannelname): analoginputevaluated01 analoginputevaluated02 these registers take the values from the "analoginput" registers and us...

  • Page 206

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 206 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.7.9.6.3 analogstatus names (pchannelname): analogstatus01 analogstatus02 the current error status of the module channels is displayed in this register, regardless of the configured replace- ment value strateg...

  • Page 207

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 207 i/o supply error: this error is activated immediately as soon as the module detects that the necessary supply voltage is no longer being provided ( 4.3.7.9.6.4 analogsampletime names (pchannelname): analogsamplet...

  • Page 208

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 208 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.7.9.7 analog signal - configuration how the analog signal is displayed can be adapted to the requirements of the application. Separate configuration registers per channel are available to aid in this. 4.3.7.9...

  • Page 209: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 209 4.3.7.9.7.3 openlooplimit names (pchannelname): openlooplimit_1 openlooplimit_2 the limit value for the respective analog input must be set when open circuit monitoring is enabled and if required by the configure...

  • Page 210

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 210 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.7.9.7.5 replacementupper, replacementlower names (pchannelname): replacementupper_1 replacementupper_2 replacementlower_1 replacementlower_2 the "replace" registers are used to predefine the static values tha...

  • Page 211

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 211 4.3.7.9.7.6 upperlimit, lowerlimit names (pchannelname): upperlimit_1 upperlimit_2 lowerlimit_1 lowerlimit_2 if the value range needs to be restricted further, the "upperlimit" and "lowerlimit registers can be us...

  • Page 212

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 212 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.7.9.7.7 hysteresis names (pchannelname): hysteres_1 hysteres_2 if the user-specific limit values are being used, then a hysteresis range should also be defined. The "hysteresis" registers configure how far a ...

  • Page 213

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 213 4.3.7.9.8 hart hart (highway addressable remote transducer) is a protocol for communicating with intelligent field devices. It was developed in order to more efficiently use the infrastructure for transferring an...

  • Page 214

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 214 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.7.9.8.1 hart - register names (pchannelname) • hart configuration: hartnodecnt_1 hartnodecnt_2 hartburstnode_1 hartburstnode_2 hartmode_1 hartmode_2 • hart communication: pvinput01_[01...15] pvinput02_[01...1...

  • Page 215: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 215 4.3.7.9.8.2 hart - configuration hart modules are analog modules equipped with a hart modem. For each channel, a separate hart network can be managed by the module, which acts as a primary master. Once configured...

  • Page 216: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 216 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.7.9.8.3 hart - communication once the configuration has been completed, the information is retrieved automatically and transferred to the module's registers. A separate register in the module is implemented f...

  • Page 217: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 217 pvsampletime the registers return the timestamp for when the module reads the current channel mapping. The values are pro- vided as signed 2-byte or 4-byte values. Data type values [µs] int -32768 to 32767: netti...

  • Page 218

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 218 x20 system user's manual 3.10 pvcounthartrequest the "pvcounthartrequest" registers are increased once the module is ready to transmit a message to the corre- sponding channel. Data type values uint 0 to 65535 pvcountharttimeout the "pvcounth...

  • Page 219

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 219 pvnodefound the "pvnodefound" registers provide information about which nodes were detected on which channel (slave identified successfully). Data type values uint see bit structure bit structure: bit name inform...

  • Page 220

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 220 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.7.9.8.4 extended configuration the additional configuration registers are specified values when the module is started. In most systems, the user does not need to make any adjustments here. Register values sho...

  • Page 221

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 221 4.3.7.9.9 flatstream communication 4.3.7.9.9.1 introduction b&r offers an additional communication method for some modules. "flatstream" was designed for x2x and powerlink networks and allows data transmission to...

  • Page 222

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 222 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.7.9.9.2 message, segment, sequence, mtu the physical properties of the bus system limit the amount of data that can be transmitted during one bus cycle. With flatstream communication, all messages are viewed ...

  • Page 223

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 223 4.3.7.9.9.3 the flatstream principle requirements: before flatstream can be used, the respective communication direction must be synchronized, i.E. Both commu- nication partners cyclically query the sequence coun...

  • Page 224: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 224 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.7.9.9.4 registers for flatstream mode five registers are available for configuring flatstream. The default configuration can be used to transmit small amounts of data relatively easily. Information: the cpu c...

  • Page 225: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 225 flatstream operation when using flatstream, the communication direction is enormously important. For sending data to a module ("out- put" direction), the tx bytes are used. For receiving data from a module ("inpu...

  • Page 226

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 226 x20 system user's manual 3.10 outputsequence the "outputsequence" register contains information about the communication status of the cpu. It is written by the cpu and read by the module. Data type value usint see bit structure bit structure:...

  • Page 227: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 227 inputsequence the "inputsequence" register contains information about the communication status of the module. It is written by the module and should only be read by the cpu. Data type value usint see bit structur...

  • Page 228

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 228 x20 system user's manual 3.10 synchronization during synchronization, a communication channel is opened. It is important to make sure that a module is present and that the current value of the sequencecounter is stored on the station receivin...

  • Page 229

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 229 transmitting and receiving if a channel is synchronized, then the opposite station is ready to receive messages from the transmitter. Before the transmitter can send data, it needs to first create a transmit arra...

  • Page 230

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 230 x20 system user's manual 3.10 a unique control byte must be generated for each segment. In addition, the c0 control byte is generated to keep communication on standby. C0 (control byte 0) c1 (control byte 1) c2 (control byte 2) - segmentlengt...

  • Page 231: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 231 transmitting data to a module (output) when transmitting data, the transmit array must be generated in the application program. Sequences are then transmitted one by one using flatstream and received by the modul...

  • Page 232

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 232 x20 system user's manual 3.10 message larger than the outputmtu: the transmit array, which needs to be created in the program sequence, consists of several elements. The user has to arrange the control and data bytes correctly and transfer th...

  • Page 233

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 233 receiving data from a module (input) when receiving data, the transmit array is generated by the module, transferred via flatstream and must then be reproduced in the receive array. The structure of the incoming ...

  • Page 234

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 234 x20 system user's manual 3.10 general flow chart: se gm en t d at a ha nd lin g sy nc hr on iz at io n no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no no no yes yes no yes no inputsyncack = 1? Inputsequenceack > 0? Inputsyncack = 1 (inputsequencecount...

  • Page 235: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 235 details it is recommended to store transmitted messages in separate receive arrays. After a set messageendbit is transmitted, the subsequent segment should be added to the receive array. The message is then compl...

  • Page 236: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 236 x20 system user's manual 3.10 flatstream mode register in the input direction, the transmit array is generated automatically. This register offers two options to the user that allow an incoming data stream to have a more compact arrangement. ...

  • Page 237: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 237 multisegmentmtus allowed: with this option, the inputmtu is completely filled (if enough data is pending). The previously unfilled rx bytes transmit the next control bytes and their segments. This allows the enab...

  • Page 238

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 238 x20 system user's manual 3.10 using both options: it is also possible to use both options at the same time. Bus cycle 1 control byte with messageendbit = 0 bus cycle 2 bus cycle 3 - - - me1 c me1 c me0 c me1 c control byte with messageendbit ...

  • Page 239

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 239 flatstream adjustment if the way messages are structured is changed, then the way data in the transmit/receive array is arranged is also different. The following changes apply to the example given earlier on. Mul...

  • Page 240: Warning!

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 240 x20 system user's manual 3.10 a unique control byte must be generated for each segment. In addition, the c0 control byte is generated to keep communication on standby. C1 (control byte 1) c2 (control byte 2) c3 (control byte 3) - segmentlengt...

  • Page 241: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 241 large segments: segments are limited to a maximum of 63 bytes. This means they can be larger than the active mtu. These large segments are divided among several sequences when transmitted. It is possible for sequ...

  • Page 242

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 242 x20 system user's manual 3.10 large segments and multisegmentmtu: example: three autonomous messages (7 bytes, 2 bytes and 9 bytes) are being transmitted using an mtu with a width of 7 bytes. The configuration allows transmission of large seg...

  • Page 243

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 243 4.3.7.9.9.5 example of forward functionality on x2x link forward functionality is a method that can be used to substantially increase the flatstream data rate. The basic principle is also used in other technical ...

  • Page 244

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 244 x20 system user's manual 3.10 configuration the forward function only has to be enabled for the input direction. Two additional configuration registers are available for doing so. Flatstream modules have been optimized in such a way that they...

  • Page 245

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 245 transmitting and receiving with forward the basic algorithm for transmitting and receiving data remains the same. With the forward function, up to seven unacknowledged sequences can be transmitted. Sequences can ...

  • Page 246: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 246 x20 system user's manual 3.10 details/background: 1. Illegal sequencecounter size (counter offset) error situation: mtu not enabled if the difference between sequencecounter and sequenceack is larger than allowed during transmission, then a t...

  • Page 247

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 247 errors when using forward in industrial environments, it is often the case that many different devices from various manufacturers are being used side by side. The electrical and/or electromagnetic properties of t...

  • Page 248

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2438 248 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.7.9.10 hart with flatstream when using flatstream communication, the module acts as a bridge between the x2x master and an intelligent field device connected to the module. Flatstream mode can be used for eit...

  • Page 249

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2622 x20 system user's manual 3.10 249 4.3.8 x20ai2622 4.3.8.1 general information the module is equipped with 2 inputs with 13-bit (including sign) digital converter resolution. It is possible to select between the current and voltage signal using di...

  • Page 250

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2622 250 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.8.3 technical data product id x20ai2622 short description i/o module 2 analog inputs ±10 v or 0 to 20 ma / 4 to 20 ma general information b&r id code 0x1b9e status indicators i/o function per channel, operati...

  • Page 251

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2622 x20 system user's manual 3.10 251 product id x20ai2622 crosstalk between channels non-linearity voltage 3) current 4) isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 v eff operating conditions mounting orientation horizontal yes vertical yes instal...

  • Page 252

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2622 252 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.8.5 pinout ai + 1 i ai + 1 u ai - 1 u/i ai + 2 i ai + 2 u ai - 2 u/i 1 x 20 a i 2 62 2 2 r e figure 91: pinout 4.3.8.6 connection example gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc + + voltage measurement current measurement 4....

  • Page 253

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2622 x20 system user's manual 3.10 253 4.3.8.8 register description 4.3.8.8.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic 0 analoginput01 int ● 2 analoginput02 int ● 16 configoutput01 usint ● 18 configo...

  • Page 254

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2622 254 x20 system user's manual 3.10 input ramp limitation is well suited for suppressing disturbances (spikes). The following examples show the function of the input ramp limitation based on an input jump and a disturbance. Example 1 the input valu...

  • Page 255

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2622 x20 system user's manual 3.10 255 adjustable filter levels: value filter level 0 filter switched off 1 filter level 2 2 filter level 4 3 filter level 8 4 filter level 16 5 filter level 32 6 filter level 64 7 filter level 128 the following example...

  • Page 256

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2622 256 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.8.8.6 configuring the input filter name: configoutput01 this register is used to define the filter level and input ramp limitation of the input filter. Data type value usint see bit structure. Bit structure: ...

  • Page 257: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2622 x20 system user's manual 3.10 257 4.3.8.8.8 limit values the input signal is monitored at the upper and lower limit values. These must be defined according to the operating mode: limit value (default) voltage signal ±10 v current signal 0 to 20 m...

  • Page 258

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai2622 258 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.8.8.9 input status name: statusinput01 this register is used to monitor the module inputs. A change in the monitoring status generates an error message. The following states are monitored depending on the set...

  • Page 259

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai4222 x20 system user's manual 3.10 259 4.3.9 x20ai4222 4.3.9.1 general information the module is equipped with 4 inputs with 13-bit (including sign) digital converter resolution. It can be used to capture voltage signals in the range from ±10 v. • 4 a...

  • Page 260

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai4222 260 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20ai4222 max. Error at 25°c gain 0.08% 2) offset 0.015% 3) max. Gain drift 0.006 %/°c 2) max. Offset drift 0.002 %/°c 3) common-mode rejection dc 70 db 50 hz 70 db common-mode range ±12 v crosstalk be...

  • Page 261

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai4222 x20 system user's manual 3.10 261 4.3.9.5 pinout ai + 1 u ai - 1 u ai + 2 u ai - 2 u ai + 3 u ai - 3 u ai + 4 u ai - 4 u r 1 3 e 2 4 figure 96: pinout 4.3.9.6 connection example gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc ai + + + + 4.3.9.7 input circuit diagram ai ...

  • Page 262

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai4222 262 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.9.8 register description 4.3.9.8.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic analog signal - configuration 16 configuring the input filter usint ● 20 l...

  • Page 263

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai4222 x20 system user's manual 3.10 263 input ramp limitation is well suited for suppressing disturbances (spikes). The following examples show the function of the input ramp limitation based on an input jump and a disturbance. Example 1 the input valu...

  • Page 264

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai4222 264 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.9.8.5.2 filter level a filter can be defined to prevent large input jumps. This filter is used to bring the input value closer to the actual analog value over a period of several bus cycles. Filtering takes p...

  • Page 265: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai4222 x20 system user's manual 3.10 265 example 2 a disturbance interferes with the input value. The diagram shows the calculated value with the following settings: input ramp limitation = 0 filter level = 2 or 4 0 8000 16000 t [ms] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 inp...

  • Page 266: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai4222 266 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.9.8.8 upper limit value name: configoutput04 this register can be used to configure the upper limit for analog values. If the analog value goes above the limit value, it is frozen at this value and the corres...

  • Page 267

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai4322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 267 4.3.10 x20ai4322 4.3.10.1 general information the module is equipped with 4 inputs with 12-bit digital converter resolution. It is possible to select between the two current ranges 0 to 20 ma and 4 to 20 ma. • 4 ...

  • Page 268

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai4322 268 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20ai4322 max. Error at 25°c gain 0 to 20 ma 0.08% 1) 4 to 20 ma 0.1% 1) offset 0 to 20 ma 0.03% 2) 4 to 20 ma 0.16% 2) max. Gain drift 0 to 20 ma 0.009 %/°c 1) 4 to 20 ma 0.0113 %/°c 1) max. Offset dr...

  • Page 269

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai4322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 269 4.3.10.5 pinout ai + 1 i ai - 1 i ai + 2 i ai - 2 i ai + 3 i ai - 3 i ai + 4 i ai - 4 i r 1 3 e 2 4 figure 102: pinout 4.3.10.6 connection example gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc ai + + + + 4.3.10.7 input circuit diagram...

  • Page 270

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai4322 270 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.10.8 register description 4.3.10.8.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic analog signal - configuration 16 configuring the input filter usint ● 18...

  • Page 271

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai4322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 271 input ramp limitation is well suited for suppressing disturbances (spikes). The following examples show the function of the input ramp limitation based on an input jump and a disturbance. Example 1 the input valu...

  • Page 272

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai4322 272 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.10.8.5.2 filter level a filter can be defined to prevent large input jumps. This filter is used to bring the input value closer to the actual analog value over a period of several bus cycles. Filtering takes ...

  • Page 273

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai4322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 273 example 2 a disturbance interferes with the input value. The diagram shows the calculated value with the following settings: input ramp limitation = 0 filter level = 2 or 4 0 8000 16000 t [ms] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 inp...

  • Page 274: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai4322 274 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.10.8.7 channel type name: configoutput02 this register can be used to set the range of the current signal. This is determined by how they are configured. The following input signals can be set: • 0 to 20 ma c...

  • Page 275

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai4322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 275 4.3.10.8.10 input status name: statusinput01 this register is used to monitor the module inputs. A change in the monitoring status generates an error message. Data type value usint see bit structure. Bit structur...

  • Page 276

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai4622 276 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.11 x20ai4622 4.3.11.1 general information the module is equipped with 4 inputs with 13-bit (including sign) digital converter resolution. It is possible to select between the current and voltage signal using ...

  • Page 277

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai4622 x20 system user's manual 3.10 277 4.3.11.3 technical data product id x20ai4622 short description i/o module 4 analog inputs ±10 v or 0 to 20 ma / 4 to 20 ma general information b&r id code 0x1baa status indicators i/o function per channel, operat...

  • Page 278

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai4622 278 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20ai4622 crosstalk between channels non-linearity voltage 3) current 4) isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 v eff operating conditions mounting orientation horizontal yes vertical yes instal...

  • Page 279

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai4622 x20 system user's manual 3.10 279 4.3.11.5 pinout ai + 1 i ai + 1 u ai - 1 u/i ai + 2 i ai + 2 u ai - 2 u/i 1 x 20 a i 4 62 2 2 ai + 3 i ai + 3 u ai - 3 u/i ai + 4 i ai + 4 u ai - 4 u/i 3 4 r e figure 108: pinout 4.3.11.6 connection example gnd +...

  • Page 280

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai4622 280 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.11.8 register description 4.3.11.8.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic 0 analoginput01 int ● 2 analoginput02 int ● 4 analoginput03 int ● 6 analoginpu...

  • Page 281

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai4622 x20 system user's manual 3.10 281 input ramp limitation is well suited for suppressing disturbances (spikes). The following examples show the function of the input ramp limitation based on an input jump and a disturbance. Example 1 the input valu...

  • Page 282

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai4622 282 x20 system user's manual 3.10 adjustable filter levels: value filter level 0 filter switched off 1 filter level 2 2 filter level 4 3 filter level 8 4 filter level 16 5 filter level 32 6 filter level 64 7 filter level 128 the following example...

  • Page 283

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai4622 x20 system user's manual 3.10 283 4.3.11.8.6 configuring the input filter name: configoutput01 this register is used to define the filter level and input ramp limitation of the input filter. Data type value usint see bit structure. Bit structure:...

  • Page 284: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai4622 284 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.11.8.8 limit values the input signal is monitored at the upper and lower limit values. These must be defined according to the operating mode: limit value (default) voltage signal ±10 v current signal 0 to 20 ...

  • Page 285

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai4622 x20 system user's manual 3.10 285 4.3.11.8.9 input status name: statusinput01 this register is used to monitor the module inputs. A change in the monitoring status generates an error message. The following states are monitored depending on the se...

  • Page 286

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai8221 286 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.12 x20ai8221 4.3.12.1 general information the module is equipped with 8 inputs with 13-bit (including sign) digital converter resolution. It can be used to capture voltage signals in the range from ±10 v. • 8...

  • Page 287

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai8221 x20 system user's manual 3.10 287 product id x20ai8221 conversion procedure sar input filter 3rd-order low pass / cutoff frequency 1 khz max. Error at 25°c gain 0.08% 2) offset 0.015% 3) max. Gain drift 0.006 %/°c 2) max. Offset drift 0.002 %/°c ...

  • Page 288

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai8221 288 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.12.5 pinout ai + 1 u ai + 2 u ai + 3 u ai− 1 u ai− 2 u ai− 3 u ai + 4 u ai + 5 u ai + 6 u ai− 4 u ai− 5 u ai− 6 u ai + 7 u ai− 7 u ai + 8 u ai− 8 u 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 s figure 113: pinout 4.3.12.6 connection exa...

  • Page 289

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai8221 x20 system user's manual 3.10 289 4.3.12.8 register description 4.3.12.8.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic analog signal - configuration 16 configuring the input filter usint ● 20...

  • Page 290

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai8221 290 x20 system user's manual 3.10 input ramp limitation is well suited for suppressing disturbances (spikes). The following examples show the function of the input ramp limitation based on an input jump and a disturbance. Example 1 the input valu...

  • Page 291

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai8221 x20 system user's manual 3.10 291 4.3.12.8.5.2 filter level a filter can be defined to prevent large input jumps. This filter is used to bring the input value closer to the actual analog value over a period of several bus cycles. Filtering takes ...

  • Page 292: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai8221 292 x20 system user's manual 3.10 example 2 a disturbance interferes with the input value. The diagram shows the calculated value with the following settings: input ramp limitation = 0 filter level = 2 or 4 0 8000 16000 t [ms] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 inp...

  • Page 293: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai8221 x20 system user's manual 3.10 293 4.3.12.8.8 upper limit value name: configoutput04 this register can be used to configure the upper limit for analog values. If the analog value goes above the limit value, it is frozen at this value and the corre...

  • Page 294

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai8321 294 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.13 x20ai8321 4.3.13.1 general information the module is equipped with 8 inputs with 12-bit digital converter resolution. It is possible to select between the two current ranges 0 to 20 ma and 4 to 20 ma. • 8 ...

  • Page 295

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai8321 x20 system user's manual 3.10 295 product id x20ai8321 input filter 3rd-order low pass / cutoff frequency 1 khz max. Error at 25°c gain 0 to 20 ma 0.08% 1) 4 to 20 ma 0.1% 1) offset 0 to 20 ma 0.03% 2) 4 to 20 ma 0.16% 2) max. Gain drift 0 to 20 ...

  • Page 296

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai8321 296 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.13.5 pinout ai + 1 i ai + 2 i ai + 3 i ai− 1 i ai− 2 i ai− 3 i ai + 4 i ai + 5 i ai + 6 i ai− 4 i ai− 5 i ai− 6 i ai + 7 i ai− 7 i ai + 8 i ai− 8 i 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 s figure 120: pinout 4.3.13.6 connection exa...

  • Page 297

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai8321 x20 system user's manual 3.10 297 4.3.13.8 register description 4.3.13.8.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic analog signal - configuration 16 configuring the input filter usint ● 18...

  • Page 298

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai8321 298 x20 system user's manual 3.10 input ramp limitation is well suited for suppressing disturbances (spikes). The following examples show the function of the input ramp limitation based on an input jump and a disturbance. Example 1 the input valu...

  • Page 299

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai8321 x20 system user's manual 3.10 299 4.3.13.8.5.2 filter level a filter can be defined to prevent large input jumps. This filter is used to bring the input value closer to the actual analog value over a period of several bus cycles. Filtering takes ...

  • Page 300

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai8321 300 x20 system user's manual 3.10 example 2 a disturbance interferes with the input value. The diagram shows the calculated value with the following settings: input ramp limitation = 0 filter level = 2 or 4 0 8000 16000 t [ms] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 inp...

  • Page 301: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai8321 x20 system user's manual 3.10 301 4.3.13.8.7 channel type name: configoutput02 this register can be used to set the range of the current signal. This is determined by how they are configured. The following input signals can be set: • 0 to 20 ma c...

  • Page 302

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ai8321 302 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.13.8.10 input status name: statusinput01 to statusinput02 this register is used to monitor the module inputs. A change in the monitoring status generates an error message. Data type value usint see bit struct...

  • Page 303

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 303 4.3.14 x20ap31x1 4.3.14.1 general information power monitoring these modules measure active, reactive and apparent power individually for each of the three phases and for all of them collectively. The power consu...

  • Page 304

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 304 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.14.2 order data model number short description analog input modules x20ap3111 x20 energy measurement module, 3 analog inputs 480 vac, 50/60 hz, 4 analog inputs 20 ma ac, calculates effective, reactive and app...

  • Page 305

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 305 product id x20ap3111 x20ap3121 x20ap3131 x20ap3161 max. Display value 655 vac resolution 10 mv, with voltage connected directly rated frequency 50 and 60 hz current inputs quantity 4 ac inputs 4 ac voltage inputs...

  • Page 306: Danger!

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 306 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.14.4 led status indicators figure led color status description operating status off no power to module single flash unlink mode double flash boot mode (during firmware update) 1) blinking quickly sync mode bl...

  • Page 307: Caution!

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 307 4.3.14.6 current transformer potential-free measurement of the ac current requires a current transformer. The current transformer is a trans- ducer that delivers a secondary signal proportional to the primary cur...

  • Page 308

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 308 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.14.8 input circuit diagram ac voltage inputs anti-aliasing filter a/d transformer input value protective impedance filter u lx u n figure 128: input circuit diagram of voltage inputs ac current inputs ap3111,...

  • Page 309

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 309 4.3.14.9 typical connection examples for different mains configurations general information there are many different mains configurations around the world. This section will present a few typical connection examp...

  • Page 310

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 310 x20 system user's manual 3.10 connection example 3 - mains c this example involves a 3-element, 3-phase, 3-line star measurement with grounded neutral conductor and optional fault current detection. I l1a u n u l3 u l2 u l1 i l2a i l3a i na i...

  • Page 311

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 311 connection example 5 - mains e this example involves a 2-element, 2-phase, 3-line star measurement with grounded neutral line conductor. I l1a u n u l3 u l2 u l1 i l2a i l3a i na i l1b i l2b i l3b i nb l1 l3 n op...

  • Page 312: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 312 x20 system user's manual 3.10 connection example 7 - mains g this example involves a 3-element, 3-phase, 4-line delta measurement with grounded neutral. Information: the maximum voltage value specified in the data sheet must not be exceeded! ...

  • Page 313

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 313 4.3.14.10 register description 4.3.14.10.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic standard register 2 pmeant int ● 4 qmeant int ● 6 smeant int ● 8 aener...

  • Page 314

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 314 x20 system user's manual 3.10 read write register name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic 798 qmeana int ● 802 qmeanb int ● 806 qmeanc int ● 810 smeant int ● 814 smeana int ● 818 smeanb int ● 822 smeanc int ● 826 pfmeant int ● 830 ...

  • Page 315

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 315 read write register name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic 1378 ugainc_w uint ● 1382 igainc_w uint ● 1386 uoffsetc_w int ● 1390 ioffsetc_w int ● 1394 igainn_w uint ● 1398 ioffsetn_w int ● adc power ca...

  • Page 316

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 316 x20 system user's manual 3.10 read write register name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic oversampling buffer oversampling array[16]: oversampling line 6146 + ((16-n)*40) iactn_samplen (index n = 1 to 16) int ● 6150 + ((16-n)*40) i...

  • Page 317

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 317 4.3.14.10.2 function model 254 - bus controller read write register offset 1) name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic standard register 778 2 pmeant int ● 794 4 qmeant int ● 810 6 smeant int ● 4404 8 a...

  • Page 318

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 318 x20 system user's manual 3.10 read write register offset 1) name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic 806 - qmeanc int ● 810 - smeant int ● 814 - smeana int ● 818 - smeanb int ● 822 - smeanc int ● 826 - pfmeant int ● 830 - pfmeana in...

  • Page 319

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 319 read write register offset 1) name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic 1386 - uoffsetc_w int ● 1390 - ioffsetc_w int ● 1394 - igainn_w uint ● 1398 - ioffsetn_w int ● adc power calibration – read 1758 - ...

  • Page 320

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 320 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.14.10.3 general information the modules are used for power monitoring and for a machine's energy management. Examples of where this would be used: • multi-phase energy measurement for class 0.5s or class 1 fo...

  • Page 321

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 321 energy measurement the power measurement (energy measurement) is based on the integration of the measured values with a sampling rate of 1 mhz. The collected energy values are made available as energy pulses with...

  • Page 322

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 the user can configure which one to use for displaying the status. Phase angle the phase angle is calculated based on the zero-crossing detection. Frequency frequency measurement is based on phase a. If a fails, ...

  • Page 323

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 323 4.3.14.10.3.4 event generation zero-crossing detection zero-crossing detection can be configured for each phase for cu or voltage and edge and forms the basis for frequency and angle measurements and subsequently...

  • Page 324

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 324 x20 system user's manual 3.10 detection of voltage dip or power failure event description voltage dip the threshold for voltage dips is typically set to 78% of the standard voltage (approx. 170 vrms). The status flag is set if more than three...

  • Page 325: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 325 4.3.14.10.4 interface for transferring process variable mapping due to the amount of potential cyclic input data and the limitation to 30 byte cyclic x2x data, the extended flat stream interface, dps = data point...

  • Page 326

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 326 x20 system user's manual 3.10 adc_reg_status typedef struct adc_reg_status adc_reg_status; struct adc_reg_status { unsigned short sysstatus0; // system status 0 unsigned short sysstatus1; // system status 1 unsigned short enstatus0; // meteri...

  • Page 327

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 327 adc_reg_thd_angle typedef struct adc_reg_thd_angle adc_reg_thd_angle; struct adc_reg_thd_angle { // thd+n, frequency, angle and temperature registers unsigned short thdnua; // phase a voltage thd+n unsigned short...

  • Page 328

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 328 x20 system user's manual 3.10 adc_reg_dft typedef struct adc_reg_dft adc_reg_dft; struct adc_reg_dft { // arithmetic ratio, 2 bits integer and 14 bits fractional; // that is: harmonic ratio (%) = register value / 163.84 unsigned short dftai[3...

  • Page 329

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 329 4.3.14.10.5 standard register 4.3.14.10.5.1 total active power name: pmeant the value in the register equals a fourth of the actual power. The calculation can be performed in either absolute or arithmetic mode (s...

  • Page 330

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 330 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.14.10.5.6 status signals and responses name: statusinput the signals are recorded in 200 µs intervals. Data type value uint see bit structure bit structure: bit name value information 0 not yet calculated 0 c...

  • Page 331

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 331 4.3.14.10.6 analog status registers 4.3.14.10.6.1 read timestamp for i/o register (+0x0022 = 16 bit) name: sampletime01_32bit network timestamp for the readout of the status, rms, power register. Data type value ...

  • Page 332

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 332 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.14.10.6.3 adc system status 2 name: sysstatus2 data type value uint see bit structure bit structure: bit name value information 0 no change of direction 0 revpchgc, the direction of the active energy for phas...

  • Page 333

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 333 4.3.14.10.6.5 adc system status 4 name: sysstatus4 data type value uint see bit structure bit structure: bit name value information 0 voltage is higher 0 lossphasec, voltage lower than value in the register "phas...

  • Page 334

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 334 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.14.10.6.8 phase status name: phasestatus this register corresponds to the sysstatus4 register. It contains the status of phases a, b und c. Data type value uint see bit structure bit structure: bit name value...

  • Page 335

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 335 4.3.14.10.7 analog rms registers 4.3.14.10.7.1 current rms neutral line measured name: irmsn measured value of the neutral current between the p and n connections on the current terminal, multiplied with the tran...

  • Page 336

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 336 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.14.10.8 analog thd and angle registers 4.3.14.10.8.1 thd+n value voltage phase a/b/c name: thdnua thdnub thdnuc data type value information uint 0 to 10000 resolution 0.01% harmonic content = (sqr(rms total ^...

  • Page 337

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 337 4.3.14.10.9 analog power register 4.3.14.10.9.1 vector sum of the total apparent power lsw name: svmeantlsb the value in the register equals a fourth of the actual power. Data type value information int -32,767 t...

  • Page 338

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 338 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.14.10.9.6 reactive power on phase a/b/c name: qmeana qmeanb qmeanc reactive power on the phase. Each phase can be separately enabled for the power calculation (see register "meteringmode" ). Data type value i...

  • Page 339

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 339 4.3.14.10.9.12 fundamental wave active power on phase a/b/c name: pmeanaf pmeanbf pmeancf active power of fundamental wave on the phase. Data type value information int -32,767 to 32,767 resolution 1 w 4.3.14.10....

  • Page 340

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 340 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.14.10.10 analog energy registers 4.3.14.10.10.1 read timestamp for energy registers (+0x0022 = 16 bit) name: sampletime02_32bit network timestamp for the readout of the energy register. Data type value inform...

  • Page 341

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 341 4.3.14.10.10.5 reverse active energy on phase a/b/c name: anenergya anenergyb anenergyc active energy in reverse direction of the phase. Data type value information udint 0 to 4,294,967,295 resolution 0.1 or 0.01...

  • Page 342

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 342 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.14.10.10.8 reverse total reactive energy name: rnenergyt total reactive energy in reverse direction. Data type value information udint 0 to 4,294,967,295 resolution 0.1 or 0.01 cf, depending on the power line...

  • Page 343

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 343 4.3.14.10.10.11 apparent energy on phase a/b/c name: senergya senergyb senergyc data type value information udint 0 to 4,294,967,295 resolution 0.1 or 0.01 cf, depending on the power line factor (e.G. Kws) commen...

  • Page 344

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 344 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.14.10.10.14 forward fundamental wave active energy on phase a/b/c name: apenergyaf apenergybf apenergycf fundamental wave of active energy in forward direction of the phase. Data type value information udint ...

  • Page 345

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 345 4.3.14.10.10.17 forward harmonics total active energy name: apenergyth harmonics of total active energy in forward direction. Data type value information udint 0 to 4,294,967,295 resolution 0.1 or 0.01 cf, depend...

  • Page 346

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 346 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.14.10.10.20 reverse harmonics active energy on phase a/b/c name: anenergyah anenergybh anenergych harmonics of active energy in reverse direction of the phase. Data type value information udint 0 to 4,294,967...

  • Page 347

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 347 4.3.14.10.11 analog dft registers 4.3.14.10.11.1 read timestamp for dft register (+0x0022 = 16 bit) name: sampletime03_32bit network timestamp for the readout of the dft register. Data type value information dint...

  • Page 348

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 348 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.14.10.12 module configuration 4.3.14.10.12.1 analog mode register name: chancontrol data type value uint see bit structure bit structure: bit name value information 0 disabled 0 channel status led for phase a...

  • Page 349: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 349 4.3.14.10.12.3 current transformer rating phase a/b/c/n name: i_ratioa i_ratiob i_ratioc i_ration data type value information uint 10 to x current transformer rating in the modules ap311, 21 and 31, the rated cur...

  • Page 350

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 350 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.14.10.13 adc status configuration 4.3.14.10.13.1 adc hardware signal allocation name: zxconfig data type value uint see bit structure bit structure: bit name value information 0 enabled 0 zero cross signals 1...

  • Page 351

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 351 4.3.14.10.13.4 warning threshold for the calculated neutral current name: inwarnth0 current value for monitoring the calculated neutral line current. Data type value information uint 0 to 65000 resolution 0.001 a...

  • Page 352

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 352 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.14.10.14 adc measurement configuration checksum 0 4.3.14.10.14.1 high word for power line constants name: plconsth data type value uint 0 to 65,535 basis value of power line constant = 0x4a817c80 = 1,250,000,...

  • Page 353

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 353 4.3.14.10.15 user calibration of current and voltage values use the following procedure to properly calculate gain and offset: • read out the predefined values: see section 4.3.14.10.16 "adc rms comparison – read...

  • Page 354

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 354 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.14.10.17 adc rms comparison checksum 3 4.3.14.10.17.1 voltage rms gain phase a/b/c name: ugaina_w ugainb_w ugainc_w data type value information uint 0 to 65,535 voltage rms gain, phase-based the resulting gai...

  • Page 355: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 355 4.3.14.10.18 user calibration of power values use the following procedure to properly calculate the power angle correction: 1 calculate the values 2 write the value 0xffff to register cs1update 3 read register cs...

  • Page 356

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 356 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.14.10.18.2 adc power calibration checksum 1 name: phia_w phib_w phic_w these registers can be used to correct phase shifts at runtime. This can be necessary if the transformers used distort the phase shift. D...

  • Page 357

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 357 4.3.14.10.19 flatstream communication 4.3.14.10.19.1 introduction b&r offers an additional communication method for some modules. "flatstream" was designed for x2x and powerlink networks and allows data transmiss...

  • Page 358

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 358 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.14.10.19.2 message, segment, sequence, mtu the physical properties of the bus system limit the amount of data that can be transmitted during one bus cycle. With flatstream communication, all messages are view...

  • Page 359

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 359 4.3.14.10.19.3 the flatstream principle prerequisites and requirements before flatstream can be used, the respective communication direction must be synchronized, i.E. Both commu- nication partners cyclically que...

  • Page 360: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 360 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.14.10.19.4 registers for flatstream mode five registers are available for configuring flatstream. The default configuration can be used to transmit small amounts of data relatively easily. Information: the cp...

  • Page 361: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 361 flatstream operation when using flatstream, the communication direction is enormously important. For sending data to a module ("out- put" direction), the tx bytes are used. For receiving data from a module ("inpu...

  • Page 362: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 362 x20 system user's manual 3.10 messageendbit the "messageendbit" is set if the subsequent segment completes a message. The message has then been com- pletely transmitted and is ready for further processing. Information: in the output direction...

  • Page 363

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 363 communication status of the module name: inputsequence the "inputsequence" register contains information about the communication status of the module. It is written by the module and should only be read by the cp...

  • Page 364: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 364 x20 system user's manual 3.10 relationship between outputsequence and inputsequence 0 - 2 3 outputsequencecounter outputsyncbit 4 - 6 7 inputsequenceack inputsyncack 0 - 2 3 inputsequencecounter inputsyncbit 4 - 6 7 outputsequenceack outputsy...

  • Page 365

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 365 synchronization during synchronization, a communication channel is opened. It is important to make sure that a module is present and that the current value of the sequencecounter is stored on the station receivin...

  • Page 366

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 366 x20 system user's manual 3.10 transmitting and receiving if a channel is synchronized, then the opposite station is ready to receive messages from the transmitter. Before the transmitter can send data, it needs to first create a transmit arra...

  • Page 367

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 367 first, the messages must be split into segments. In the default configuration, it is important to ensure that each sequence can hold an entire segment, including the associated control byte. The sequence is limit...

  • Page 368: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 368 x20 system user's manual 3.10 transmitting data to a module (output) when transmitting data, the transmit array must be generated in the application program. Sequences are then transmitted one by one using flatstream and received by the modul...

  • Page 369

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 369 message larger than the outputmtu the transmit array, which needs to be created in the program sequence, consists of several elements. The user has to arrange the control and data bytes correctly and transfer the...

  • Page 370

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 370 x20 system user's manual 3.10 receiving data from a module (input) when receiving data, the transmit array is generated by the module, transferred via flatstream and must then be reproduced in the receive array. The structure of the incoming ...

  • Page 371

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 371 general flow chart se gm en t d at a ha nd lin g sy nc hr on is at io n no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no no no yes yes no yes no inputsyncack = 1 ? Inputsequenceack > 0 ? Inputsyncack = 1 (inputsequencecoun...

  • Page 372: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 372 x20 system user's manual 3.10 details it is recommended to store transmitted messages in separate receive arrays. After a set messageendbit is transmitted, the subsequent segment should be added to the receive array. The message is then compl...

  • Page 373: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 373 flatstream mode name: flatstreammode in the input direction, the transmit array is generated automatically. This register offers two options to the user that allow an incoming data stream to have a more compact a...

  • Page 374: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 374 x20 system user's manual 3.10 multisegmentmtus allowed with this option, the inputmtu is completely filled (if enough data is pending). The previously unfilled rx bytes transmit the next control bytes and their segments. This allows the enabl...

  • Page 375

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 375 using both options it is also possible to use both options at the same time. Bus cycle 1 control byte with messageendbit = 0 bus cycle 2 bus cycle 3 - - - me1 c me1 c me0 c me1 c control byte with messageendbit =...

  • Page 376

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 376 x20 system user's manual 3.10 adjusting the flatstream if the way messages are structured is changed, then the way data in the transmit/receive array is arranged is also different. The following changes apply to the example given earlier. Mul...

  • Page 377: Warning!

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 377 first, the messages must be split into segments. As in the default configuration, it is important for each sequence to begin with a control byte. The free bits in the mtu at the end of a message are filled with d...

  • Page 378: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 378 x20 system user's manual 3.10 large segments segments are limited to a maximum of 63 bytes. This means they can be larger than the active mtu. These large segments are divided among several sequences when transmitted. It is possible for seque...

  • Page 379

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 379 large segments and multisegmentmtu example three autonomous messages (7 bytes, 2 bytes and 9 bytes) are being transmitted using an mtu with a width of 7 bytes. The configuration allows transmission of large segme...

  • Page 380

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 380 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.14.10.19.5 example of forward functionality on x2x link forward functionality is a method that can be used to substantially increase the flatstream data rate. The basic principle is also used in other technic...

  • Page 381

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 381 configuration the forward function only has to be enabled for the input direction. Two additional configuration registers are available for doing so. Flatstream modules have been optimized in such a way that they...

  • Page 382

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 382 x20 system user's manual 3.10 transmitting and receiving with forward the basic algorithm for transmitting and receiving data remains the same. With the forward function, up to seven unacknowledged sequences can be transmitted. Sequences can ...

  • Page 383: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 383 details/background 1. Illegal sequencecounter size (counter offset) error situation: mtu not enabled if the difference between sequencecounter and sequenceack is larger than allowed during transmission, then a tr...

  • Page 384

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 384 x20 system user's manual 3.10 errors when using forward in industrial environments, it is often the case that many different devices from various manufacturers are being used side by side. The electrical and/or electromagnetic properties of t...

  • Page 385

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 385 4.3.14.10.20 force analog energy registers name: the registers are described under 4.3.14.10.10 "analog energy registers". Comparison: force registers read registers frc_apenergyt frc_apenergytf frc_apenergyth "a...

  • Page 386

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 386 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.14.10.21 oversampling buffer 4.3.14.10.21.1 general information a sample line contains the present values for currents (4 channels) and voltages (3 channels), as well as a consecutive number and the network t...

  • Page 387

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 387 4.3.14.10.21.8 sample - voltage on phase c name: uactc_sample1 to uactc_sample16 data type value information int -32,767 to 32,767 present voltage value on phase c, resolution 0.01 v this value must be converted ...

  • Page 388

    X20 system modules • analog input modules • x20ap31x1 388 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.3.14.10.22 environment variables 4.3.14.10.22.1 operating time in seconds name: ontime the operating time since startup is saved in seconds in this register. Data type value udint 0 to 4,294,967,295 4.3.14.10.2...

  • Page 389

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • brief information x20 system user's manual 3.10 389 4.4 analog output modules analog output modules convert plc internal numerical values into voltages or currents. The numerical values which are to be converted must be in 16-bit 2s complement. The conver...

  • Page 390

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2437 390 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.4.2 x20ao2437 4.4.2.1 general information the x20ao2437 module is equipped with two current outputs with 16-bit digital converter resolution. The two channels are electrically isolated from each other. The use...

  • Page 391

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2437 x20 system user's manual 3.10 391 product id x20ao2437 max. Error at 25°c gain 4 to 20 ma 0.025% 1) 0 to 20 ma 0.022% 1) 0 to 24 ma 0.020% 1) offset 4 to 20 ma 0.025% 2) 0 to 20 ma 0.022% 2) 0 to 24 ma 0.020% 2) output protection short circuit p...

  • Page 392

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2437 392 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.4.2.4 led status indicators figure led color status description operating status off no power to module single flash unlink mode double flash boot mode (during firmware update) 1) blinking quickly sync mode bl...

  • Page 393

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2437 x20 system user's manual 3.10 393 4.4.2.6 connection example 4-wire actuator 4-wire actuator gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc ao with external power supply figure 160: connection example 4.4.2.7 osp hardware requirements in order to best use osp mode, ma...

  • Page 394

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2437 394 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.4.2.9 derating to ensure proper operation, the derating values listed below must be adhered to: horizontal installation ambient temperature [°c] 0 -10 -20 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 40 30 20 10 50 60 lo ad [Ω ]...

  • Page 395

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2437 x20 system user's manual 3.10 395 4.4.2.10 register description 4.4.2.10.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic analog signal - configuration 386 394 analogmode01 analogmode02 uint ● ...

  • Page 396: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2437 396 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.4.2.10.4 analog signal - configuration the module has two electrically isolated channels. All registers have a dual design. Channels can be configured and operated independently of one another. Specific featur...

  • Page 397

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2437 x20 system user's manual 3.10 397 4.4.2.10.4.2 dacslewrate name: dacslewrate01 to dacslewrate02 these registers limit the rate at which the analog signal is modified. This makes it possible to define a sort of upper limit frequency. The followin...

  • Page 398: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2437 398 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.4.2.10.5 analog signal - communication in order to output the required current signal (default: 4 to 20 ma), the module must be provided with the standard- ized output value (default: 0 to 32767). 4.4.2.10.5.1...

  • Page 399: Warning!

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2437 x20 system user's manual 3.10 399 4.4.2.10.6 "osp" function model in the "osp" function model (operator set predefined), the user defines an analog value or digital pattern. This osp value is output as soon as communication between the module an...

  • Page 400: Warning!

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2437 400 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.4.2.10.6.3 define the osp analog output value name: cfgospvalue01 to cfgospvalue02 this register contains the analog output value, which is output in "replace with static value" mode during osp operation. Data...

  • Page 401

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 401 4.4.3 x20ao2438 4.4.3.1 general information the x20ao2438 module is equipped with two current outputs with 16-bit digital converter resolution. It supports the hart communication standard for data transfer, para...

  • Page 402

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 402 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20ao2438 data output rate with hart 210 ms (default) analog 1 ms without ramp max. Error at 25°c gain 4 to 20 ma 0.025% 1) 0 to 20 ma 0.022% 1) 0 to 24 ma 0.020% 1) offset 4 to 20 ma 0.025% 2) 0 to 2...

  • Page 403

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 403 product id x20ao2438 mechanical characteristics note order 1x x20tb12 terminal block separately order 1x x20bm11 bus module separately spacing 12.5 +0.2 mm table 83: x20ao2438 - technical data 1) based on the cu...

  • Page 404

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 404 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.4.3.5 pinout r 1 l e e 2 l e channel 1 + channel 1 − channel 2 + channel 2 − figure 164: pinout 4.4.3.6 connection example 4-wire actuator 4-wire actuator gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc ao with external power supply ...

  • Page 405

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 405 4.4.3.8 output circuit diagram hart error hart link i/o status led (red) led (green) led (orange) channel x + channel x - power sections processor d/a converter electrical isolation i/o power supply hart modem r...

  • Page 406

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 406 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.4.3.9 operation 4.4.3.9.1 derating to ensure proper operation, the derating values listed below must be adhered to: horizontal installation ambient temperature [°c] 0 -10 -20 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 40 30 20...

  • Page 407

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 407 4.4.3.9.2 hart communication standard this module supports the hart communication standard for data transfer, parameter configuration and diagnos- tics. The hart standard is used for the current range 4 to 20 ma...

  • Page 408

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 408 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.4.3.10 register description 4.4.3.10.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic analog signal - configuration 386 394 analogmode01 analogmode02 uint ● ...

  • Page 409

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 409 read write register name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic 1857 inputsequence usint ● 1857 + index*2 rxbyten (index n = 1 to 15) usint ● 1889 outputsequence usint ● 1889 + index*2 txbyten (index n = ...

  • Page 410

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 410 x20 system user's manual 3.10 read write register name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic flatstream interface - configuration 1793 outputmtu usint ● 1795 inputmtu usint ● 1797 flatstreammode usint ● 1799 forward usint ● 1802 forw...

  • Page 411

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 411 read write register offset 1) name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic 562 + index*4 1116 + index*24 - - pvnodecomstatus01_n (index n = 01 to 15) pvnodecomstatus02_n (index n = 01 to 15) uint ● hart - ...

  • Page 412

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 412 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.4.3.10.4 analog signal - configuration the x20ao2438 module has two independent electrically isolated channels with integrated hart modems. Both channels can be used to output an analog signal and handle hart ...

  • Page 413: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 413 4.4.3.10.4.1 analogmode name: analogmode01 to analogmode02 these registers are used to predefine the operating parameters that the module will be using for the respective channel. Each channel must be activated ...

  • Page 414

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 414 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.4.3.10.4.2 dacslewrate name: dacslewrate01 to dacslewrate02 these registers limit the rate at which the analog signal is modified. This makes it possible to define a sort of upper limit frequency. The followin...

  • Page 415: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 415 4.4.3.10.5 analog signal - communication in order to output the required current signal (default: 4 bis 20 ma), the module must be assigned the default output value (default: 0 to 32767). In this way, the x20ao2...

  • Page 416: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 416 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.4.3.10.6 hart hart (highway addressable remote transducer) is a protocol for communicating with intelligent field devices. It was developed in order to more efficiently use the infrastructure for transferring ...

  • Page 417: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 417 4.4.3.10.6.1 hart - configuration hart modules are analog modules equipped with a hart modem. For each channel, a separate hart network can be managed by the module, which acts as a primary master. Once configur...

  • Page 418: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 418 x20 system user's manual 3.10 hartmode name: hartmode_1 to hartmode_2 the user can use these registers to configure the communication behavior of each of the hart channels. Gener- ally, the hart nodes are polled individually. This register c...

  • Page 419: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 419 pvinput name: pvinput_01 to pvinput_15 these registers return the current value of the process variable that has been read. Information: these registers are of data type real, which means that the available byte...

  • Page 420

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 420 x20 system user's manual 3.10 pvnodecomstatus name: pvnodecomstatus01 to pvnodecomstatus02 pvnodecomstatus01_01 to pvnodecomstatus01_15 pvnodecomstatus02_01 to pvnodecomstatus02_15 these registers return information about whether a value tha...

  • Page 421

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 421 pvcounthartrxerror name: pvcounthartrxerror01 to pvcounthartrxerror02 these registers are increased if communication errors occur on layer 1 of the osi model (e.G. Transmission error as per parity bit). Data typ...

  • Page 422

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 422 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.4.3.10.6.3 extended configuration the additional configuration registers are specified values when the module is started. In most systems, the user does not need to make any adjustments here. Register values s...

  • Page 423

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 423 4.4.3.10.7 flatstream communication 4.4.3.10.7.1 introduction b&r offers an additional communication method for some modules. "flatstream" was designed for x2x and powerlink networks and allows data transmission...

  • Page 424

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 424 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.4.3.10.7.2 message, segment, sequence, mtu the physical properties of the bus system limit the amount of data that can be transmitted during one bus cycle. With flatstream communication, all messages are viewe...

  • Page 425

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 425 4.4.3.10.7.3 the flatstream principle requirements before flatstream can be used, the respective communication direction must be synchronized, i.E. Both commu- nication partners cyclically query the sequence cou...

  • Page 426: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 426 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.4.3.10.7.4 registers for flatstream mode five registers are available for configuring flatstream. The default configuration can be used to transmit small amounts of data relatively easily. Information: the cpu...

  • Page 427: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 427 flatstream operation when using flatstream, the communication direction is enormously important. For sending data to a module ("out- put" direction), the tx bytes are used. For receiving data from a module ("inp...

  • Page 428: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 428 x20 system user's manual 3.10 messageendbit the "messageendbit" is set if the subsequent segment completes a message. The message has then been com- pletely transmitted and is ready for further processing. Information: in the output directio...

  • Page 429

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 429 communication status of the module name: inputsequence the "inputsequence" register contains information about the communication status of the module. It is written by the module and should only be read by the c...

  • Page 430: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 430 x20 system user's manual 3.10 relationship between outputsequence and inputsequence 0 - 2 3 outputsequencecounter outputsyncbit 4 - 6 7 inputsequenceack inputsyncack 0 - 2 3 inputsequencecounter inputsyncbit 4 - 6 7 outputsequenceack outputs...

  • Page 431

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 431 synchronization during synchronization, a communication channel is opened. It is important to make sure that a module is present and that the current value of the sequencecounter is stored on the station receivi...

  • Page 432

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 432 x20 system user's manual 3.10 transmitting and receiving if a channel is synchronized, then the opposite station is ready to receive messages from the transmitter. Before the transmitter can send data, it needs to first create a transmit arr...

  • Page 433

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 433 first, the messages must be split into segments. In the default configuration, it is important to ensure that each sequence can hold an entire segment, including the associated control byte. The sequence is limi...

  • Page 434: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 434 x20 system user's manual 3.10 transmitting data to a module (output) when transmitting data, the transmit array must be generated in the application program. Sequences are then transmitted one by one using flatstream and received by the modu...

  • Page 435

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 435 message larger than the outputmtu the transmit array, which needs to be created in the program sequence, consists of several elements. The user has to arrange the control and data bytes correctly and transfer th...

  • Page 436

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 436 x20 system user's manual 3.10 receiving data from a module (input) when receiving data, the transmit array is generated by the module, transferred via flatstream and must then be reproduced in the receive array. The structure of the incoming...

  • Page 437

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 437 general flow chart se gm en t d at a ha nd lin g sy nc hr on is at io n no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no no no yes yes no yes no inputsyncack = 1 ? Inputsequenceack > 0 ? Inputsyncack = 1 (inputsequencecou...

  • Page 438: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 details it is recommended to store transmitted messages in separate receive arrays. After a set messageendbit is transmitted, the subsequent segment should be added to the receive array. The message is then comp...

  • Page 439: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 439 flatstream mode name: flatstreammode in the input direction, the transmit array is generated automatically. This register offers two options to the user that allow an incoming data stream to have a more compact ...

  • Page 440: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 440 x20 system user's manual 3.10 multisegmentmtus allowed with this option, the inputmtu is completely filled (if enough data is pending). The previously unfilled rx bytes transmit the next control bytes and their segments. This allows the enab...

  • Page 441

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 441 using both options it is also possible to use both options at the same time. Bus cycle 1 control byte with messageendbit = 0 bus cycle 2 bus cycle 3 - - - me1 c me1 c me0 c me1 c control byte with messageendbit ...

  • Page 442

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 442 x20 system user's manual 3.10 adjusting the flatstream if the way messages are structured is changed, then the way data in the transmit/receive array is arranged is also different. The following changes apply to the example given earlier. Mu...

  • Page 443: Warning!

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 443 first, the messages must be split into segments. As in the default configuration, it is important for each sequence to begin with a control byte. The free bits in the mtu at the end of a message are filled with ...

  • Page 444: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 444 x20 system user's manual 3.10 large segments segments are limited to a maximum of 63 bytes. This means they can be larger than the active mtu. These large segments are divided among several sequences when transmitted. It is possible for sequ...

  • Page 445

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 445 large segments and multisegmentmtu example three autonomous messages (7 bytes, 2 bytes and 9 bytes) are being transmitted using an mtu with a width of 7 bytes. The configuration allows transmission of large segm...

  • Page 446

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 446 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.4.3.10.7.5 example of forward functionality on x2x link forward functionality is a method that can be used to substantially increase the flatstream data rate. The basic principle is also used in other technica...

  • Page 447

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 447 configuration the forward function only has to be enabled for the input direction. Two additional configuration registers are available for doing so. Flatstream modules have been optimized in such a way that the...

  • Page 448

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 448 x20 system user's manual 3.10 transmitting and receiving with forward the basic algorithm for transmitting and receiving data remains the same. With the forward function, up to seven unacknowledged sequences can be transmitted. Sequences can...

  • Page 449: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 449 details/background 1. Illegal sequencecounter size (counter offset) error situation: mtu not enabled if the difference between sequencecounter and sequenceack is larger than allowed during transmission, then a t...

  • Page 450

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 450 x20 system user's manual 3.10 errors when using forward in industrial environments, it is often the case that many different devices from various manufacturers are being used side by side. The electrical and/or electromagnetic properties of ...

  • Page 451

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 451 4.4.3.10.8 hart with flatstream when using flatstream communication, the module acts as a bridge between the x2x master and an intelligent field device connected to the module. Flatstream mode can be used for ei...

  • Page 452: Warning!

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 452 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.4.3.10.9 "osp" function model in the "osp" function model (operator set predefined), the user defines an analog value or digital pattern. This osp value is output as soon as communication between the module an...

  • Page 453: Warning!

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 453 4.4.3.10.9.3 define the osp analog output value name: cfgospvalue01 to cfgospvalue02 this register contains the analog output value, which is output in "replace with static value" mode during osp operation. Data...

  • Page 454

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2622 454 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.4.4 x20ao2622 4.4.4.1 general information the module is equipped with two outputs with 13-bit (including sign) digital converter resolution. It is possible to select between the current and voltage signal usin...

  • Page 455

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2622 x20 system user's manual 3.10 455 4.4.4.3 technical data product id x20ao2622 short description i/o module 2 analog outputs ±10 v or 0 to 20 ma / 4 to 20 ma 1) general information b&r id code 0x1ba2 status indicators i/o function per channel, op...

  • Page 456

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2622 456 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20ao2622 environmental conditions temperature operation horizontal installation -25 to 60°c vertical installation -25 to 50°c derating - storage -40 to 85°c transport -40 to 85°c relative humidity op...

  • Page 457

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2622 x20 system user's manual 3.10 457 4.4.4.6 connection example gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc + ao voltage current lo ad lo ad 4.4.4.7 output circuit diagram ao + x i ao + x u ao - x u/i ssr reset d/a converter output value i/o status led (orange).

  • Page 458

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2622 458 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.4.4.8 register description 4.4.4.8.1 function model 0 - standard and function model 1 - i/o with fast reaction read write register name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic configuration 18 configoutp...

  • Page 459

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2622 x20 system user's manual 3.10 459 4.4.4.8.4 analog outputs each channel can be configured for either current or voltage signals. The type of signal is also determined by the connection terminals used. 4.4.4.8.4.1 output values of the analog outp...

  • Page 460

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2632 460 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.4.5 x20ao2632 4.4.5.1 general information the module is equipped with two outputs with 16-bit (including sign) digital converter resolution. It is possible to select between the current and voltage signal usin...

  • Page 461

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2632 x20 system user's manual 3.10 461 product id x20ao2632 max. Error at 25°c voltage gain 0.045% 1) offset 0.025% 2) current gain 0.090% 1) offset 0.045% 2) output protection short circuit protection output format voltage int 0x8000 - 0x7fff / 1 ls...

  • Page 462

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2632 462 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.4.5.5 pinout each channel can be configured for either current or voltage signals. The type of signal is also determined by the connection terminals used. Ao + 1 i ao + 1 u ao - 1 u/i ao + 2 i ao + 2 u ao - 2 ...

  • Page 463

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2632 x20 system user's manual 3.10 463 4.4.5.8 register description 4.4.5.8.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic analog output - configuration 0 configoutput01 uint ● 594 598 cfo_channel...

  • Page 464

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2632 464 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.4.5.8.4.1 setting the channel type name: configoutput01 this register can be used to set the channel type of the outputs. Each channel is capable of handling either current or voltage signals. The type of sign...

  • Page 465: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2632 x20 system user's manual 3.10 465 4.4.5.8.5 analog output - communication in standard mode, the module's outputs are enabled. Based on the configuration and analogoutput value, they output the corresponding current or voltage. If the application...

  • Page 466

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2632 466 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.4.5.8.5.4 enabling/disabling the output channels name: analogoutput01enable to analogoutput02enable analogoutput01enablereadback to analogoutput02enablereadback the "outputenable" byte is only needed for the c...

  • Page 467

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2632-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 467 4.4.6 x20ao2632-1 4.4.6.1 general information the module is equipped with two outputs with 16-bit (including sign) digital converter resolution. It is possible to select between the current and voltage signal ...

  • Page 468

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2632-1 468 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20ao2632-1 max. Error at 25°c voltage gain 0.050% 1) offset 0.015% 2) current gain 0.080% 1) offset 0.050% 2) output protection short circuit protection output format voltage int 0x8000 - 0x7fff / ...

  • Page 469

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2632-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 469 4.4.6.5 pinout each channel can be configured for either current or voltage signals. The type of signal is also determined by the connection terminals used. Ao + 1 i ao + 1 u ao - 1 u/i ao + 2 i ao + 2 u ao - ...

  • Page 470

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2632-1 470 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.4.6.8 register description 4.4.6.8.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic analog output - configuration 0 configoutput01 uint ● 594 598 cfo_chann...

  • Page 471

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2632-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 471 4.4.6.8.4 analog output - configuration each channel is configured independently. The user can also define an optional time-based monitor. To make this possible, two watchdog timers were implemented, which can...

  • Page 472: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2632-1 472 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.4.6.8.5 analog output - communication in standard mode, the module's outputs are enabled. Based on the configuration and analogoutput value, they output the corresponding current or voltage. If the applicati...

  • Page 473

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao2632-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 473 4.4.6.8.5.4 enabling/disabling the output channels name: analogoutput01enable to analogoutput02enable analogoutput01enablereadback to analogoutput02enablereadback the "outputenable" byte is only needed for the...

  • Page 474

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao4622 474 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.4.7 x20ao4622 4.4.7.1 general information the module is equipped with four outputs with 13-bit (including sign) digital converter resolution. It is possible to select between the current and voltage signal usi...

  • Page 475

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao4622 x20 system user's manual 3.10 475 product id x20ao4622 max. Error at 25°c voltage gain 0.080% 2) offset 0.050% 3) current gain 0.090% 2) offset 0.050% 3) output protection short circuit protection output format voltage int 0x8001 - 0x7fff / 1 ls...

  • Page 476

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao4622 476 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.4.7.5 pinout each channel can be configured for either current or voltage signals. The type of signal is also determined by the connection terminals used. Ao + 1 i ao + 1 u ao - 1 u/i ao + 2 i ao + 2 u ao - 2 ...

  • Page 477

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao4622 x20 system user's manual 3.10 477 4.4.7.8 module operation to ensure proper operation, the following items must be taken into consideration: • the following derating listings must be taken into consideration • for mixed operation with one curren...

  • Page 478

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao4622 478 x20 system user's manual 3.10 vertical installation from revision j0 before revision j0 ambient temperature [°c] -10 -20 1 2 4 6 8 10 40 30 20 50 lo ad [k Ω ] voltage output prohibited range 60 lo ad [k Ω ] ambient temperature [°c] 0 1 2 4 6...

  • Page 479

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao4622 x20 system user's manual 3.10 479 4.4.7.9 register description 4.4.7.9.1 function model 0 - standard and function model 1 - i/o with fast reaction read write register name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic analog signal - configurati...

  • Page 480

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao4622 480 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.4.7.9.4 analog outputs each channel can be configured for either current or voltage signals. The type of signal is also determined by the connection terminals used. 4.4.7.9.4.1 output values of the analog outp...

  • Page 481

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao4632 x20 system user's manual 3.10 481 4.4.8 x20ao4632 4.4.8.1 general information the module is equipped with four outputs with 16-bit (including sign) digital converter resolution. It is possible to select between the current and voltage signal usi...

  • Page 482

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao4632 482 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20ao4632 max. Error at 25°c voltage gain 0.040% 1) offset 0.022% 2) current gain 0.090% 1) offset 0.045% 2) output protection short circuit protection output format voltage int 0x8001 - 0x7fff / 1 ls...

  • Page 483

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao4632 x20 system user's manual 3.10 483 4.4.8.5 pinout each channel can be configured for either current or voltage signals. The type of signal is also determined by the connection terminals used. 1 x 20 a o 4 63 2 2 ao + 3 i ao + 3 u ao - 3 u/i ao + ...

  • Page 484

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao4632 484 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.4.8.8 module operation to ensure proper operation, the following items must be taken into consideration: • the following derating listings must be taken into consideration • for mixed operation with one curren...

  • Page 485

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao4632 x20 system user's manual 3.10 485 vertical installation from revision j0 before revision j0 ambient temperature [°c] -10 -20 1 2 4 6 8 10 40 30 20 50 lo ad [k Ω ] voltage output prohibited range 60 lo ad [k Ω ] ambient temperature [°c] 0 1 2 4 6...

  • Page 486: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao4632 486 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.4.8.9 register description 4.4.8.9.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic analog signal - configuration 0 configoutput01 uint ● analog signal - com...

  • Page 487

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao4632 x20 system user's manual 3.10 487 4.4.8.9.4.2 value for delayed output name: analogoutputdelayed00 to analogoutputdelayed03 these registers contain the values with which the analog outputs are overwritten after the delay configured with outputde...

  • Page 488

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao4632 488 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.4.8.9.5 minimum cycle time the minimum cycle time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced without communication errors occurring. It should be noted that very fast cycles decrease the idle time available ...

  • Page 489

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao4632-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 489 4.4.9 x20ao4632-1 4.4.9.1 general information the module is equipped with four outputs with 16-bit (including sign) digital converter resolution. It is possible to select between the current and voltage signal...

  • Page 490

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao4632-1 490 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20ao4632-1 output format voltage int 0x8000 - 0x7fff / 1 lsb = 0x0001 = 335.693 µv flow int 0x0000 - 0x7fff / 1 lsb = 0x0001 = 671.386 na load per channel voltage max. ±11 ma, load ≥1 kΩ flow max. ...

  • Page 491

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao4632-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 491 1 x 20 a o 4 63 2- 1 2 ao + 3 i ao + 3 u ao - 3 u/i ao + 1 i ao + 1 u ao - 1 u/i ao + 4 i ao + 4 u ao - 4 u/i ao + 2 i ao + 2 u ao - 2 u/i 3 4 r e figure 191: pinout 4.4.9.6 connection example gnd +24 vdc gnd ...

  • Page 492

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao4632-1 492 x20 system user's manual 3.10 horizontal installation ambient temperature [°c] 0 -10 -20 1 2 4 6 8 10 40 30 20 10 50 lo ad [k ] Ω voltage output horizontal installation prohibited range figure 192: derating the load with a voltage output a...

  • Page 493

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao4632-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 493 vertical installation ambient temperature [°c] 0 -10 -20 1 2 4 6 8 10 40 30 20 10 50 lo ad [k ] Ω voltage output vertical installation prohibited range figure 194: derating the load with a voltage output and v...

  • Page 494

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao4632-1 494 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.4.9.9 register description 4.4.9.9.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic analog output - configuration 0 configoutput01 uint ● 590 + index*4 cfo...

  • Page 495

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao4632-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 495 4.4.9.9.4 analog output - configuration each channel is configured independently. The user can also define an optional time-based monitor. To make this possible, four watchdog timers were implemented, which ca...

  • Page 496: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao4632-1 496 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.4.9.9.5 analog output - communication in standard mode, the module's outputs are enabled. Based on the configuration and analogoutput value, they output the corresponding current or voltage. If the applicati...

  • Page 497

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao4632-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 497 4.4.9.9.5.4 enabling/disabling the output channels name: analogoutput01enable to analogoutput04enable analogoutput01enablereadback to analogoutput04enablereadback the "outputenable" byte is only needed for the...

  • Page 498

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao4635 498 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.4.10 x20ao4635 4.4.10.1 general information the module is equipped with four outputs with 16-bit (including sign) digital converter resolution. It is possible to select between the current and voltage signal u...

  • Page 499

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao4635 x20 system user's manual 3.10 499 product id x20ao4635 output protection short circuit protection output format voltage int 0x8000 - 0x7fff / 1 lsb = 0x0001 = 305.176 µv current int 0x0000 - 0x7fff / 1 lsb = 0x0001 = 610.352 na load per channel ...

  • Page 500

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao4635 500 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.4.10.5 pinout each channel can be configured for either current or voltage signals. The type of signal is also determined by the connection terminals used. Ao + 1 i ao + 1 u ao - 1 u/i ao + 2 i ao + 2 u ao - 2...

  • Page 501

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao4635 x20 system user's manual 3.10 501 4.4.10.8 module operation to ensure proper operation, the following items must be taken into consideration: • the following derating listings must be taken into consideration • for mixed operation with one curre...

  • Page 502

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao4635 502 x20 system user's manual 3.10 vertical installation ambient temperature [°c] 0 -10 -20 1 2 4 6 8 10 40 30 20 10 50 lo ad [k ] Ω voltage output vertical installation prohibited range figure 199: derating the load with a voltage output and ver...

  • Page 503

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao4635 x20 system user's manual 3.10 503 4.4.10.9 register description 4.4.10.9.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic configuration 0 configoutput01 uint ● communication 2 analogoutput01 in...

  • Page 504: Information:

    X20 system modules • analog output modules • x20ao4635 504 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.4.10.9.3 analog outputs each channel can be configured for either current or voltage signals. The type of signal is also determined by the connection terminals used. 4.4.10.9.3.1 output values of the analog ou...

  • Page 505

    X20 system modules • bus controllers x20 system user's manual 3.10 505 4.5 bus controllers the bus controllers adhere to the completely modular strategy used for the i/o modules. Made up of a base module, a supply module to supply the voltage for the entire system, and a fieldbus interface, the bus ...

  • Page 506

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • brief information 506 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.5.1 brief information product id short description on page x20bc0043 x20 bus controller, canopen interface, order 1x tb2105 terminal block separately. Order bus base, power supply module and terminal block s...

  • Page 507: Information:

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0043 x20 system user's manual 3.10 507 4.5.2 x20bc0043 4.5.2.1 general information can (controller area network) systems are widespread in the field of automation technology. Can topology is based on a line structure and uses twisted pair wires for data tr...

  • Page 508

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0043 508 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20bc0043 additional power dissipation caused by the actua- tors (resistive) [w] - electrical isolation fieldbus - x2x link no fieldbus - i/o yes certification ce yes culus yes ccsaus hazloc class 1 divisio...

  • Page 509

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0043 x20 system user's manual 3.10 509 50 500 3 200 200 1000 200 200 200 200 1000 200 200 all times in ms green/red flickering flashing blinking single flash triple flash 800 400 long flash figure 201: status led - blinking patterns 4.5.2.5 operating and c...

  • Page 510

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0043 510 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.5.2.7 terminating resistor on off terminating resistor switch a terminating resistor is already integrated on the bus controller. It can be turned on and off with a switch on the bottom of the housing. An active ter...

  • Page 511

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0043 x20 system user's manual 3.10 511 4.5.2.9 automatic transfer rate detection after booting, the bus controller goes into "listen only" mode. This means the bus controller behaves passively on the bus and only listens. The bus controller attempts to rec...

  • Page 512

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0043 512 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.5.2.11 deleting parameters various parameters can be stored in the bus controller's flash memory: • communication parameters • vendor-specific parameters • application parameters (device profile) • fixed transfer ra...

  • Page 513: Information:

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0043-10 x20 system user's manual 3.10 513 4.5.3 x20bc0043-10 4.5.3.1 general information can (controller area network) systems are widespread in the field of automation technology. Can topology is based on a line structure and uses twisted pair wires for d...

  • Page 514

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0043-10 514 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.5.3.2 order data model number short description figure bus controllers x20bc0043-10 x20 bus controller, canopen interface, configuration support- ed by the b&r fieldbusdesigner, order 1x tb2105 terminal block sep...

  • Page 515

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0043-10 x20 system user's manual 3.10 515 product id x20bc0043-10 relative humidity operation 5 to 95%, non-condensing storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing mechanical characteristics note order 1x tb2105 terminal block separa...

  • Page 516

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0043-10 516 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.5.3.5 operating and connection elements led status indicator canopen interface node number switches terminal block for bus controller and i/o supply terminating resistor switch on the bottom of the module figure ...

  • Page 517

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0043-10 x20 system user's manual 3.10 517 4.5.3.8 node number and transfer rate node numbers and transfer rates are configured using the two bus controller number switches. The transfer rate can be specified in two ways: • automatic detection by bus contro...

  • Page 518

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0043-10 518 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.5.3.10 setting the transfer rate the bus controller will detect the transfer rate automatically by default. Switch positions 0x80 - 0x88 can be used to set a fixed transfer rate, or 0x89 can be used to enable aut...

  • Page 519: Information:

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0043-10 x20 system user's manual 3.10 519 4.5.3.11 save automatic configuration the node number position 0x92 can be used to save automatically generated configurations. This makes it possible to work with a standardized configuration without having to ada...

  • Page 520

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0043-10 520 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.5.3.12 deleting parameters various parameters can be stored in the bus controller's flash memory: • communication parameters • vendor-specific parameters • application parameters (device profile) • fixed transfer...

  • Page 521: Information:

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0053 x20 system user's manual 3.10 521 4.5.4 x20bc0053 4.5.4.1 general information devicenet was developed by allen bradley as a can bus based automation network. It is based on a produc- er/consumer protocol. From the user's point of view, all data is han...

  • Page 522

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0053 522 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20bc0053 power consumption bus 1.5 w additional power dissipation caused by the actua- tors (resistive) [w] - electrical isolation fieldbus - x2x link no fieldbus - i/o yes certification ce yes culus yes c...

  • Page 523

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0053 x20 system user's manual 3.10 523 figure led color status description off no power, offline: • bus sense error: if the "mod" led is also off, there is no 24 v devicenet voltage. • no transfer rate: if the ps9400's "run" led is active (preoperational o...

  • Page 524

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0053 524 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.5.4.7 terminating resistor on off terminating resistor switch a terminating resistor is already integrated on the bus controller. It can be turned on and off with a switch on the bottom of the housing. An active ter...

  • Page 525: Information:

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0053 x20 system user's manual 3.10 525 4.5.4.9 automatic transfer rate detection after booting, the bus controller goes into "listen only" mode. This means the bus controller behaves passively on the bus and only listens. The bus controller attempts to rec...

  • Page 526

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0053 526 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.5.4.11 automatic configuration of the i/o modules the automatic configuration of the connected i/o modules by the bus controller is supported starting with rev.D0 (firmware ≥v 1.23) of the bus controller. To prevent...

  • Page 527: Information:

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0063 x20 system user's manual 3.10 527 4.5.5 x20bc0063 4.5.5.1 general information profibus dp is based on the physics of the rs485 interface. Data transfer is controlled using a hybrid bus access procedure. Active stations receive communication rights via...

  • Page 528

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0063 528 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.5.5.3 technical data product id x20bc0063 short description bus controller profibus dp v0 slave general information b&r id code 0x1f1c status indicators module status, bus function, data transfer diagnostics module ...

  • Page 529

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0063 x20 system user's manual 3.10 529 4.5.5.4 led status indicators figure led description status indicator for profibus dp bus controller. Status (green) error (red) description off off hardware fault / power fail on on bus off on blinking wait for confi...

  • Page 530

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0063 530 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.5.5.6 operating and connection elements led status indicator profibus dp interface node number switches terminal block for bus controller and i/o supply figure 207: operating and connection elements 4.5.5.7 profibus...

  • Page 531

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0063 x20 system user's manual 3.10 531 4.5.5.9 automatic transfer rate detection after booting or after a communication timeout, the bus controller goes into the status "baud search". This means the bus controller behaves passively on the bus. The bus cont...

  • Page 532: Information:

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0073 532 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.5.6 x20bc0073 4.5.6.1 general information the x20bc0073 bus controller makes it possible to connect x2x link i/o nodes to can i/o. Can i/o is a transfer protocol based on standard can bus fully integrated in the b&r...

  • Page 533

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0073 x20 system user's manual 3.10 533 product id x20bc0073 certification ce yes culus yes ccsaus hazloc class 1 division 2 yes atex zone 2 yes kc yes gost-r yes interfaces fieldbus can i/o slave design 5-pin male multipoint connector max. Distance 1000 m ...

  • Page 534

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0073 534 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.5.6.5 operating and connection elements led status indicator can i/o connection node number switches terminal block for bus controller and i/o supply terminating resistor switch on the bottom of the module figure 20...

  • Page 535

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0073 x20 system user's manual 3.10 535 4.5.6.8 node number and transfer rate node numbers and transfer rates are configured using the two bus controller number switches. The switch posi- tions 0x00 to 0x40 and 0x60 enable automatic transfer rate detection ...

  • Page 536

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0073 536 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.5.6.10 sg4 the module comes with preinstalled firmware. The firmware is also part of the b&r automation runtime operating system for the plc. If the two versions are different, the automation runtime firmware is loa...

  • Page 537

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0083 x20 system user's manual 3.10 537 4.5.7 x20bc0083 4.5.7.1 general information the x20bc0083 bus controller makes it possible to connect x2x link i/o nodes to powerlink. It is also possible to operate the x2x link cycle synchronously 1:1 or synchronous...

  • Page 538

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0083 538 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.5.7.3 technical data product id x20bc0083 short description bus controller powerlink (v1/v2) controlled node general information b&r id code 0x1f1e status indicators module status, bus function diagnostics module st...

  • Page 539

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0083 x20 system user's manual 3.10 539 4.5.7.4 led status indicators figure led color status description off no power supply or mode is not_active. In this mode, the bus controller waits for about 5 seconds after restarting. No communication with the bus c...

  • Page 540

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0083 540 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.5.7.5 operating and connection elements led status indicator powerlink connection with 2 x rj45 connectors for simple wiring node number switches terminal block for bus controller and i/o supply figure 210: operatin...

  • Page 541

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0083 x20 system user's manual 3.10 541 4.5.7.7 rj45 ports information about cabling x20 modules with an ethernet interface can be found in the module's download section on the b&r website ( www.Br-automation.Com ). Rj45 port 1 (if1) rj45 port 2 (if2) pinou...

  • Page 542: Information:

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0087 542 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.5.8 x20bc0087 4.5.8.1 general information established in 1979, the modbus protocol has approved the use of ethernet with both modbus/tcp and mod- bus/udp. Today, modbus/tcp is an open internet draft standard introdu...

  • Page 543

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0087 x20 system user's manual 3.10 543 product id x20bc0087 power consumption bus 2.0 w additional power dissipation caused by the actua- tors (resistive) [w] - electrical isolation fieldbus - x2x link yes fieldbus - i/o yes certification ce yes culus yes ...

  • Page 544

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0087 544 x20 system user's manual 3.10 figure led color status description blinking ethernet activity taking place on the rj45 port (if1, if2) indicated by the respec- tive led on indicates an established connection (link), but no communication is taking p...

  • Page 545

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0087 x20 system user's manual 3.10 545 4.5.8.7 modbus/tcp network address switch switch position description 0x00 this switch position is the factory default setting. In this position, the address switches have no effect on system parame- ters. The bus con...

  • Page 546

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0087 546 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.5.8.9 automatic ip assignment by a dhcp server if a network address switch setting between 0x80 and 0xef is configured, the bus controller will attempt to request an ip address from the dhcp server. To query this ip...

  • Page 547: Information:

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0088 x20 system user's manual 3.10 547 4.5.9 x20bc0088 4.5.9.1 general information ethernet/ip is a fieldbus based on ethernet/ip that was developed by allen-bradley (rockwell automation) and later handed off to the open devicenet vendor association (odva)...

  • Page 548

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0088 548 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20bc0088 power consumption bus 2.0 w additional power dissipation caused by the actua- tors (resistive) [w] - electrical isolation fieldbus - x2x link yes fieldbus - i/o yes certification ce yes culus yes ...

  • Page 549

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0088 x20 system user's manual 3.10 549 figure led color status description blinking the respective led blinks when ethernet activity is detected on the correspond- ing rj45 port (if1, if2). On connection (link) established, but no communication is taking p...

  • Page 550

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0088 550 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.5.9.7 ethernet/ip address switching positions switch position description 0x00 the ip address saved in flash memory is used. The adapter is started via dhcp if attribute 3 (configuration control) of the tcp/ip inter...

  • Page 551

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0088 x20 system user's manual 3.10 551 4.5.9.9 automatic ip assignment by dhcp server at an address switch position between 0x80 and 0xef, the bus controller attempts to request an ip address from the dhcp server. To query this ip address, simply run a "pi...

  • Page 552

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc00e3 552 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.5.10 x20bc00e3 4.5.10.1 general information profinet (process field network) is an industrial ethernet protocol. It uses tcp/ip and is real-time capable. Profinet io was developed for real-time (rt) and synchronous ...

  • Page 553

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc00e3 x20 system user's manual 3.10 553 4.5.10.3 technical data product id x20bc00e3 short description bus controller profinet rt slave general information b&r id code 0xbb7d status indicators module status, bus function diagnostics module status yes, with ...

  • Page 554

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc00e3 554 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.5.10.4 led status indicators the following table lists the status leds available on the bus controller. Exact blink times are specified in the timing diagram in the next section. Figure led color status description ...

  • Page 555

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc00e3 x20 system user's manual 3.10 555 4.5.10.5 operating and connection elements led status indicator profinet rt connection with 2 x rj45 connectors for simple wiring node number switches terminal block for bus controller and i/o supply figure 214: opera...

  • Page 556

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc00e3 556 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.5.10.7 node number switches the bus controller has 2 node number switches. The bus controller can be set to different operating modes using certain, pre-defined switch positions. They can also be used to configure v...

  • Page 557: Information:

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc00e3 x20 system user's manual 3.10 557 information about the current firmware version. Information concerning module diagnostics is incorporated into a tree structure. Expanding and collapsing the individual module nodes provides an overview of the configu...

  • Page 558: Information:

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc00g3 558 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.5.11 x20bc00g3 4.5.11.1 general information ethercat is an ethernet-based fieldbus developed by beckhoff. The protocol is suitable for hard and soft real-time requirements in automation technology. In addition to a ...

  • Page 559

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc00g3 x20 system user's manual 3.10 559 product id x20bc00g3 diagnostics module status yes, with status led and software status bus function yes, with status led and software status power consumption bus 1.68 w additional power dissipation caused by the act...

  • Page 560

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc00g3 560 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.5.11.4 led status indicators figure led color status description on the bus controller is operational. Blinking pre-operational status single flash safe-operational status flickering the bus controller has started a...

  • Page 561

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc00g3 x20 system user's manual 3.10 561 4.5.11.6 rj45 ports information about cabling x20 modules with an ethernet interface can be found in the module's download section on the b&r website ( www.Br-automation.Com ). In (if1) out (if2) in out pinout interfa...

  • Page 562: Information:

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0143-10 562 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.5.12 x20bc0143-10 4.5.12.1 general information can (controller area network) systems are widespread in the field of automation technology. Can topology is based on a line structure and uses twisted pair wires for...

  • Page 563

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0143-10 x20 system user's manual 3.10 563 4.5.12.3 technical data product id x20bc0143-10 short description bus controller canopen slave general information b&r id code 0xad3e status indicators module status, bus function, data transfer diagnostics module ...

  • Page 564

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0143-10 564 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.5.12.4 led status indicators figure led color status description off no power supply flashing 5 s window for deleting all configuration settings green on boot procedure ok, i/o modules ok double flash successfull...

  • Page 565

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0143-10 x20 system user's manual 3.10 565 4.5.12.6 can bus interface the can bus interface is a 9-pin dsub plug. Interface pin can 1 reserved 2 can_l can low 3 can_gnd can ground 4 reserved 5 reserved 6 reserved 7 can_h can high 8 reserved 5 1 9 6 9 reserv...

  • Page 566

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0143-10 566 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.5.12.8 automatic transfer rate detection after booting, the bus controller goes into "listen only" mode. This means the bus controller behaves passively on the bus and only listens. The bus controller attempts to...

  • Page 567: Information:

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0143-10 x20 system user's manual 3.10 567 4.5.12.10 save automatic configuration the node number position 0x92 can be used to save automatically generated configurations. This makes it possible to work with a standardized configuration without having to ad...

  • Page 568

    X20 system modules • bus controllers • x20bc0143-10 568 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.5.12.11 deleting parameters various parameters can be stored in the bus controller's flash memory: • communication parameters • vendor-specific parameters • application parameters (device profile) • fixed transfe...

  • Page 569

    X20 system modules • bus controllers system modules • brief information x20 system user's manual 3.10 569 4.6 bus controllers system modules the x20 system bus controllers are made up of a bus controller fieldbus interface, a bus controller system module and an x20tb12 terminal block. Bus controller...

  • Page 570

    X20 system modules • bus controllers system modules • x20bb80 570 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.6.2 x20bb80 4.6.2.1 general information the following modules are used on the x20bb80 bus module: • x20 base module (bc, hb, etc.) • x20 supply module the left and right end plates are included in the d...

  • Page 571

    X20 system modules • bus controllers system modules • x20bb80 x20 system user's manual 3.10 571 product id x20bb80 relative humidity operation 5 to 95%, non-condensing storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing mechanical characteristics note left and right x20 end plates in...

  • Page 572

    X20 system modules • bus controllers system modules • x20ps9400 572 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.6.3 x20ps9400 4.6.3.1 general information the supply module is used together with an x20 bus controller. It is equipped with a feed for the bus controller, the x2x link and the internal i/o supply. • ...

  • Page 573

    X20 system modules • bus controllers system modules • x20ps9400 x20 system user's manual 3.10 573 product id x20ps9400 bus controller / x2x link supply output nominal output power 7.0 w parallel operation yes 2) redundant operation yes overload behavior short circuit / temporary overload protection ...

  • Page 574

    X20 system modules • bus controllers system modules • x20ps9400 574 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.6.3.5 pinout reserved reserved reserved s r i e x 20 p s 9 40 0 rs232 gnd rs232 rxd rs232 txd gnd +24 v i/o +24 v i/o gnd +24 v bc/x2x l. +24 v bc/x2x l. Figure 221: pinout 4.6.3.6 using the service i...

  • Page 575

    X20 system modules • bus controllers system modules • x20ps9400 x20 system user's manual 3.10 575 with a supply and jumper ps gnd +24 vdc + _ i/o- power supply 10 a slow-blow jumper figure 223: connection example with a supply and jumper 4.6.3.8 derating the rated output current for the supply is 7....

  • Page 576

    X20 system modules • bus controllers system modules • x20ps9400 576 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.6.3.9 register description 4.6.3.9.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic module status usint statusinput01 bit 0 0 statusinput02 bit 2 ● ...

  • Page 577

    X20 system modules • bus controllers system modules • x20ps9400 x20 system user's manual 3.10 577 4.6.3.9.6 minimum cycle time the minimum cycle time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced without communication errors occurring. It should be noted that very fast cycles decrease the idle time a...

  • Page 578

    X20 system modules • bus controllers system modules • x20ps9402 578 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.6.4 x20ps9402 4.6.4.1 general information the supply module is used together with an x20 bus controller. It is equipped with a feed for the bus controller, the x2x link and the internal i/o supply. Th...

  • Page 579

    X20 system modules • bus controllers system modules • x20ps9402 x20 system user's manual 3.10 579 product id x20ps9402 reverse polarity protection yes bus controller / x2x link supply output nominal output power horizontal installation 7.0 w at 45°c and 5.0 w at 55°c vertical installation 7.0 w at 4...

  • Page 580

    X20 system modules • bus controllers system modules • x20ps9402 580 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.6.4.5 pinout x 20 p s 9 40 2 gnd +24 v i/o +24 v i/o gnd +24 v bc/x2x l. +24 v bc/x2x l. I r e reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved figure 224: x20ps9402 - pinout 4.6.4.6 connection e...

  • Page 581

    X20 system modules • bus controllers system modules • x20ps9402 x20 system user's manual 3.10 581 4.6.4.7 derating for bus controller / x2x link supply the rated output current for the bus controller / x2x link supply is 7.0 w. Derating must be taken into consideration based on mounting orientation....

  • Page 582

    X20 system modules • bus controllers system modules • x20ps9402 582 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.6.4.8 register description 4.6.4.8.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic module status usint statusinput01 bit 0 0 statusinput02 bit 2 ● ...

  • Page 583

    X20 system modules • bus modules • brief information x20 system user's manual 3.10 583 4.7 bus modules in the x20 system, a bus module takes the place of a rack. Bus supply contacts bus data contacts i/o supply contacts x20bm11 x20bm01 figure 228: the bus module replaces the rack in the x20 system t...

  • Page 584

    X20 system modules • bus modules • x20bm01 584 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.7.2 x20bm01 4.7.2.1 general information the x20bm01 bus module is the base for all x20 supply modules. • basis for all x20 supply modules • for creating voltage groups • the internal i/o supply is isolated to the left 4.7...

  • Page 585

    X20 system modules • bus modules • x20bm01 x20 system user's manual 3.10 585 product id x20bm01 relative humidity operation 5 to 95%, non-condensing storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing mechanical characteristics spacing 12.5 +0.2 mm table 184: x20bm01 - technical data...

  • Page 586

    X20 system modules • bus modules • x20bm05 586 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.7.3 x20bm05 4.7.3.1 general information the x20bmx5 safety bus modules have node number switches that can be used to set permanent addresses. Placing one of these modules at the beginning of an x20 block ensures a unique ...

  • Page 587

    X20 system modules • bus modules • x20bm05 x20 system user's manual 3.10 587 product id x20bm05 environmental conditions temperature operation horizontal installation -25 to 60°c vertical installation -25 to 50°c derating - storage -40 to 85°c transport -40 to 85°c relative humidity operation 5 to 9...

  • Page 588

    X20 system modules • bus modules • x20bm11 588 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.7.4 x20bm11 4.7.4.1 general information the bus module serves as the base for all 24 vdc x20 i/o modules. The internal i/o supply is interconnected. • bus module for 24 vdc i/o modules • the internal i/o supply is interco...

  • Page 589

    X20 system modules • bus modules • x20bm11 x20 system user's manual 3.10 589 product id x20bm11 relative humidity operation 5 to 95%, non-condensing storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing mechanical characteristics spacing 12.5 +0.2 mm table 188: x20bm11 - technical data...

  • Page 590

    X20 system modules • bus modules • x20bm12 590 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.7.5 x20bm12 4.7.5.1 general information the bus module serves as the base for all 240 vac x20 i/o modules. The internal i/o supply is interconnected. • bus module for 240 vac i/o modules • the internal i/o supply is inter...

  • Page 591

    X20 system modules • bus modules • x20bm12 x20 system user's manual 3.10 591 product id x20bm12 relative humidity operation 5 to 95%, non-condensing storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing mechanical characteristics spacing 12.5 +0.2 mm table 190: x20bm12 - technical data...

  • Page 592

    X20 system modules • bus modules • x20bm15 592 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.7.6 x20bm15 4.7.6.1 general information the x20bmx5 safety bus modules have node number switches that can be used to set permanent addresses. Placing one of these modules at the beginning of an x20 block ensures a unique ...

  • Page 593

    X20 system modules • bus modules • x20bm15 x20 system user's manual 3.10 593 product id x20bm15 environmental conditions temperature operation horizontal installation -25 to 60°c vertical installation -25 to 50°c derating - storage -40 to 85°c transport -40 to 85°c relative humidity operation 5 to 9...

  • Page 594

    X20 system modules • bus modules • x20bm21 594 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.7.7 x20bm21 4.7.7.1 general information the x20bm21 bus module serves as a basis for all double-width x20 i/o modules. The internal i/o supply is isolated to the left. This allows the x20bm21 bus module to be used to set ...

  • Page 595

    X20 system modules • bus modules • x20bm21 x20 system user's manual 3.10 595 product id x20bm21 relative humidity operation 5 to 95%, non-condensing storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing mechanical characteristics spacing 25 +0.2 mm table 194: x20bm21 - technical data 4...

  • Page 596

    X20 system modules • bus modules • x20bm31 596 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.7.8 x20bm31 4.7.8.1 general information the x20bm31 bus module serves as a basis for all double-width x20 i/o modules. The internal i/o supply is interconnected. • bus module for double-width i/o modules • the internal i/...

  • Page 597

    X20 system modules • bus modules • x20bm31 x20 system user's manual 3.10 597 product id x20bm31 relative humidity operation 5 to 95%, non-condensing storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing mechanical characteristics spacing 25 +0.2 mm table 196: x20bm31 - technical data 4...

  • Page 598

    X20 system modules • bus modules • x20bm32 598 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.7.9 x20bm32 4.7.9.1 general information the bus module serves as the base for all double-width 240 vac x20 i/o modules. The internal i/o supply is interconnected. • bus module for double-width 240 vac i/o modules • the in...

  • Page 599

    X20 system modules • bus modules • x20bm32 x20 system user's manual 3.10 599 product id x20bm32 relative humidity operation 5 to 95%, non-condensing storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing mechanical characteristics spacing 25 +0.2 mm table 198: x20bm32 - technical data 4...

  • Page 600

    X20 system modules • bus receivers and bus transmitters • brief information 600 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.8 bus receivers and bus transmitters the bus receiver x20br9300is used to connect the x20 system directly to the remote x2x link backplane. The bus transmitter x20bt9100 is used to connect...

  • Page 601: Information:

    X20 system modules • bus receivers and bus transmitters • x20br9300 x20 system user's manual 3.10 601 4.8.2 x20br9300 4.8.2.1 general information the bus receiver x20br9300 is used to connect the x20 system to the x2x link. The module is equipped with a feed for the x2x link as well as the internal ...

  • Page 602

    X20 system modules • bus receivers and bus transmitters • x20br9300 602 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.8.2.3 technical data product id x20br9300 short description bus receiver x2x link bus receiver with supply for i/o and bus general information b&r id code 0x1bc1 status indicators x2x bus function...

  • Page 603

    X20 system modules • bus receivers and bus transmitters • x20br9300 x20 system user's manual 3.10 603 4.8.2.4 led status indicators for a description of the various operating modes, see the 2.11.1 "re leds" section. Figure led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode b...

  • Page 604

    X20 system modules • bus receivers and bus transmitters • x20br9300 604 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.8.2.6 connection examples with two separate supplies gnd +24 vdc br x2x\ x2x x2x⊥ + _ i/o power supply x2x link power supply + _ 10 a slow-blow with a supply and jumper gnd +24 vdc br x2x\ x2x x2x...

  • Page 605

    X20 system modules • bus receivers and bus transmitters • x20br9300 x20 system user's manual 3.10 605 4.8.2.8 register description 4.8.2.8.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic module status usint statusinput01 bit 0 0 statusinput02 bit ...

  • Page 606

    X20 system modules • bus receivers and bus transmitters • x20br9300 606 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.8.2.8.6 minimum cycle time the minimum cycle time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced without communication errors occurring. It should be noted that very fast cycles decrease the idle ti...

  • Page 607: Information:

    X20 system modules • bus receivers and bus transmitters • x20bt9100 x20 system user's manual 3.10 607 4.8.3 x20bt9100 4.8.3.1 general information the bus transmitter provides for the seamless expansion of the x20 system. The stations can be up to 100 m away from each other. • x2x link bus transmitte...

  • Page 608

    X20 system modules • bus receivers and bus transmitters • x20bt9100 608 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.8.3.3 technical data product id x20bt9100 short description bus transmitter x2x link bus transmitter with supply for i/o general information b&r id code 0x1bc2 status indicators x2x bus function, ...

  • Page 609

    X20 system modules • bus receivers and bus transmitters • x20bt9100 x20 system user's manual 3.10 609 4.8.3.4 led status indicators figure led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mode r green on run mode off no power to module or everything...

  • Page 610

    X20 system modules • bus receivers and bus transmitters • x20bt9100 610 x20 system user's manual 3.10 with feed for internal i/o supply see also 4.8.3.7 "supply via bus transmitter". Gnd +24 vdc bt + _ i/o power supply x2x x2x\ x2x⊥ 10 a slow-blow figure 240: connection example - with feed for inter...

  • Page 611

    X20 system modules • bus receivers and bus transmitters • x20bt9100 x20 system user's manual 3.10 611 4.8.3.8 connection to next x2x link i/o node the bus transmitter establishes the connection to the next x2x link based i/o node. It is important to be sure that only the data lines are connected on....

  • Page 612

    X20 system modules • bus receivers and bus transmitters • x20bt9100 612 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.8.3.9 register description 4.8.3.9.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic module status usint statusinput01 bit 0 0 statusinput02 bit ...

  • Page 613: Information:

    X20 system modules • bus receivers and bus transmitters • x20bt9400 x20 system user's manual 3.10 613 4.8.4 x20bt9400 4.8.4.1 general information to connect an x20 system to an x67 system, a bus transmitter is simple added to the end of the x20 block, so that the x2x link cable can be connected. The...

  • Page 614

    X20 system modules • bus receivers and bus transmitters • x20bt9400 614 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.8.4.3 technical data product id x20bt9400 short description bus transmitter x2x link bus transmitter with supply for i/o and integrated supply for the x67 system general information b&r id code 0x...

  • Page 615

    X20 system modules • bus receivers and bus transmitters • x20bt9400 x20 system user's manual 3.10 615 4.8.4.4 led status indicators for a description of the various operating modes, see the 2.11.1 "re leds" section. Figure led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode b...

  • Page 616

    X20 system modules • bus receivers and bus transmitters • x20bt9400 616 x20 system user's manual 3.10 with a supply and jumper + _ gnd +24 vdc i/o power supply x2x x2x\ x2x ⊥ x2x+ bt jumper 10 a slow-blow figure 244: connection example with a supply and jumper no feed for internal i/o supply gnd +24...

  • Page 617: Information:

    X20 system modules • bus receivers and bus transmitters • x20bt9400 x20 system user's manual 3.10 617 u1/24 vdc u2/24 vdc x2x link i/o i/o i/o br 93 00 + b m 01 ps 21 00 + b m 01 i/o m od ul e + bm 01 bt 9x 00 + b m 11 10 a slow-blow 10 a slow-blow 1 a slow-blow 1) 10 a slow-blow figure 246: protect...

  • Page 618

    X20 system modules • bus receivers and bus transmitters • x20bt9400 618 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.8.4.9 register description 4.8.4.9.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic module status usint statusinput01 bit 0 0 statusinput02 bit ...

  • Page 619

    X20 system modules • bus receivers and bus transmitters • x20bt9400 x20 system user's manual 3.10 619 4.8.4.9.6 minimum cycle time the minimum cycle time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced without communication errors occurring. It should be noted that very fast cycles decrease the idle ti...

  • Page 620

    X20 system modules • compact cpus 620 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.9 compact cpus the modular structure of the compact cpus allows the user to assemble a cpu that meets their unique power supply and interface requirements. Compact cpu base x20 bb 2x compact cpu x20 cp 02xx terminal block x20 tb 1...

  • Page 621

    X20 system modules • compact cpus • brief information x20 system user's manual 3.10 621 4.9.1 brief information product id short description on page x20cp0201 x20 cpu, compact cpu µp 16, 100 kb sram, 1 mb flashprom, support of rs232 and can according to compact cpu base, order bus base, power supply...

  • Page 622

    X20 system modules • compact cpus • x20cp0201, x20cp0291, x20cp0292 622 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.9.2 x20cp0201, x20cp0291, x20cp0292 4.9.2.1 general information compact cpus are ideal for situations where cycle times in the millisecond range are sufficient and a cost-benefit analysis plays a ...

  • Page 623

    X20 system modules • compact cpus • x20cp0201, x20cp0291, x20cp0292 x20 system user's manual 3.10 623 4.9.2.2 order data cp0201 cp0291, cp0292 model number short description compact cpus x20cp0201 x20 cpu, compact cpu µp 16, 100 kb sram, 1 mb flashprom, support of rs232 and can according to compact ...

  • Page 624

    X20 system modules • compact cpus • x20cp0201, x20cp0291, x20cp0292 624 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.9.2.3 technical data product id x20cp0201 x20cp0291 x20cp0292 short description interfaces - 1x ethernet onboard 1x onboard ethernet system module cpu general information b&r id code 0x22a2 0x22a4...

  • Page 625

    X20 system modules • compact cpus • x20cp0201, x20cp0291, x20cp0292 x20 system user's manual 3.10 625 product id x20cp0201 x20cp0291 x20cp0292 relative humidity operation 5 to 95%, non-condensing storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing mechanical characteristics note orde...

  • Page 626

    X20 system modules • compact cpus • x20cp0201, x20cp0291, x20cp0292 626 x20 system user's manual 3.10 x20cp0291 and x20cp0292 led status indicators if1 - rs232 if3 - can bus (with bb27) if2 - ethernet node number switch terminal block for cpu and i/o supply rs232 connection can bus connection (with ...

  • Page 627: Information:

    X20 system modules • compact cpus • x20cp0201, x20cp0291, x20cp0292 x20 system user's manual 3.10 627 4.9.2.7 ethernet interface (if2) figure 251: x20 compact cpus - ethernet interface for x20cp0291 and x20cp0292 the x20cp0291 and x20cp0292 are equipped with an ethernet interface. The connection is ...

  • Page 628: Information:

    X20 system modules • compact cpus • x20cp0201, x20cp0291, x20cp0292 628 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.9.2.8 programming the system flash memory general information cpus are delivered with a runtime system. When delivered, the node number switch is set to switch position 0x00 (bootstrap loader mode...

  • Page 629

    X20 system modules • compact cpus system modules • brief information x20 system user's manual 3.10 629 4.10 compact cpus system modules the x20 system compact cpus consist of the compact cpu, compact cpu system modules and the x20tb12 terminal block. The compact cpu system modules also include the x...

  • Page 630

    X20 system modules • compact cpus system modules • x20bb22 630 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.10.2 x20bb22 4.10.2.1 general information the x20bb22 bus module is the base for all x20 compact cpus. The left and right end plates are included in the delivery. • base for all x20 compact cpus • rs232 co...

  • Page 631

    X20 system modules • compact cpus system modules • x20bb22 x20 system user's manual 3.10 631 product id x20bb22 relative humidity operation 5 to 95%, non-condensing storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing mechanical characteristics note left and right x20 end plates inclu...

  • Page 632

    X20 system modules • compact cpus system modules • x20bb27 632 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.10.3 x20bb27 4.10.3.1 general information the x20bb27 bus module is the base for all x20 compact cpus. The left and right end plates are included in the delivery. • base for all x20 compact cpus • rs232 co...

  • Page 633

    X20 system modules • compact cpus system modules • x20bb27 x20 system user's manual 3.10 633 product id x20bb27 environmental conditions temperature operation horizontal installation -25 to 60°c vertical installation -25 to 50°c storage -40 to 85°c transport -40 to 85°c relative humidity operation 5...

  • Page 634

    X20 system modules • compact cpus system modules • x20ps9500 634 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.10.4 x20ps9500 4.10.4.1 general information the x20ps9500 supply module is used together with an x20 compact or fieldbus cpu. It has a feed for the compact or fieldbus cpu, the x2x link and the internal ...

  • Page 635

    X20 system modules • compact cpus system modules • x20ps9500 x20 system user's manual 3.10 635 4.10.4.3 technical data product id x20ps9500 brief description power supply module 24 vdc supply module for compact or fieldbus cpu, x2x link supply and i/o interfaces 1x rs232, 1x can bus 1) general infor...

  • Page 636

    X20 system modules • compact cpus system modules • x20ps9500 636 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20ps9500 relative humidity operation 5 to 95%, non-condensing storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing mechanical characteristics note order 1x x20tb12 terminal block...

  • Page 637

    X20 system modules • compact cpus system modules • x20ps9500 x20 system user's manual 3.10 637 4.10.4.6 connection examples with 2 separate supplies ps gnd +24 vdc + _ + _ i/o supply cpu / x2x link supply 10 a slow-blow figure 255: connection example with 2 separate supplies with a supply and jumper...

  • Page 638

    X20 system modules • compact cpus system modules • x20ps9500 638 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.10.4.8 register description 4.10.4.8.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic module status usint statusinput01 bit 0 0 statusinput02 bit 2 ● 2...

  • Page 639

    X20 system modules • compact cpus system modules • x20ps9502 x20 system user's manual 3.10 639 4.10.5 x20ps9502 4.10.5.1 general information the x20ps9502 supply module is used together with an x20 compact or fieldbus cpu. It is equipped with a feed for the compact or fieldbus cpu, the x2x link and ...

  • Page 640

    X20 system modules • compact cpus system modules • x20ps9502 640 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20ps9502 power consumption 2) bus 1.44 w internal i/o 0.6 w additional power dissipation caused by the actua- tors (resistive) [w] - electrical isolation cpu/x2x link feed - cpu/x2x link supply...

  • Page 641

    X20 system modules • compact cpus system modules • x20ps9502 x20 system user's manual 3.10 641 4.10.5.4 led status indicators figure led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mode r green on run mode off no power to module or everything ok e ...

  • Page 642

    X20 system modules • compact cpus system modules • x20ps9502 642 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.10.5.6 connection examples with 2 separate supplies ps gnd +24 vdc + _ + _ i/o supply cpu / x2x link supply 10 a slow-blow figure 258: connection example with 2 separate supplies with a supply and jumper...

  • Page 643

    X20 system modules • compact cpus system modules • x20ps9502 x20 system user's manual 3.10 643 4.10.5.7 derating for cpu / x2x link supply the rated output power for the cpu / x2x link supply is 7.0w. Derating may be necessary depending on the mounting orientation. Ambient temperature [°c] -25 0 5 7...

  • Page 644

    X20 system modules • compact cpus system modules • x20ps9502 644 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.10.5.8 register description 4.10.5.8.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic module status usint statusinput01 bit 0 0 statusinput02 bit 2 ● 4 suppl...

  • Page 645

    X20 system modules • counter modules • brief information x20 system user's manual 3.10 645 4.11 counter modules counter modules are used for position detection. Each signal on a counter module is assigned to a status led. 4.11.1 brief information product id short description on page x20cm1941 x20 re...

  • Page 646

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20cm1941 646 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.2 x20cm1941 4.11.2.1 general information the module is equipped with a resolver input and a configurable abr output. • resolver input (differential), with angular position and cyclic counter • 14-bit resolution f...

  • Page 647

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20cm1941 x20 system user's manual 3.10 647 product id x20cm1941 abr output encoder signal rs422 type abr differential abr output (starting with firmware version 5) 8-bit to 12-bit 3500 rpm abr output (up to firmware version 4) 1) 8-bit max. 2343 rpm 9-bit max....

  • Page 648

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20cm1941 648 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.2.4 led status indicators for a description of the various operating modes, see the 2.11.1 "re leds" section. Figure led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode double flash boot m...

  • Page 649

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20cm1941 x20 system user's manual 3.10 649 4.11.2.7 input circuit diagram adc sin /sin adc cos /cos band-pass 10 khz 4.11.2.8 output circuit diagram b /b a /a r /r ref /ref fpga band-pass 10 khz.

  • Page 650: Information:

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20cm1941 650 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.2.9 abr encoder up to firmware version 4 the module measures the resolver's current angular position every 100 µs. The value for a, b or r is generated immediately from the highest value bits (depending on config...

  • Page 651

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20cm1941 x20 system user's manual 3.10 651 4.11.2.10 register description 4.11.2.10.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic configuration 20 configoutput01 uint ● 22 configoutput02 usint ● communication 0 ...

  • Page 652

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20cm1941 652 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.2.10.5 current encoder position name: position the current angle position of the resolver is shown in this register. The value consists of: • the two upper bytes, which correspond to the number of rotations count...

  • Page 653

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1176 x20 system user's manual 3.10 653 4.11.3 x20dc1176 4.11.3.1 general information the module is equipped with 1 input for an abr incremental encoder with 5 v encoder signal. The encoder inputs are monitored (a, b, r, a\, b\, r\). • 1 abr incremental enc...

  • Page 654

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1176 654 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20dc1176 switching threshold low high >15 vdc isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 v eff abr incremental encoder encoder inputs 5 v, symmetrical counter size 16/32-bit input frequency max. 600 khz...

  • Page 655

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1176 x20 system user's manual 3.10 655 4.11.3.4 led status indicators for a description of the various operating modes, see the 2.11.1 "re leds" section. Figure led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode double flash boot m...

  • Page 656

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1176 656 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.3.7 input circuit diagram counter inputs abr gnd 24 v encoder 24 v ptc gnd abr recipient with monitoring 24 v encoder 5 v input status i/o status led (green) dc dc standard inputs vdr input x input status i/o sta...

  • Page 657

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1176 x20 system user's manual 3.10 657 4.11.3.8 register description 4.11.3.8.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic encoder - communication 683 sdclifecount sint ● 6342 int 6340 encoder01 dint ● 6310...

  • Page 658

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1176 658 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.3.8.2 function model 254 - bus controller read write register offset 1) name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic encoder - communication 6342 0 encoder01 int ● 6310 2 encoder01timevalid int ● 6358 4 encoder01...

  • Page 659

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1176 x20 system user's manual 3.10 659 4.11.3.8.3 encoder - configuration the following registers are used for setting functions and configuring the module. 4.11.3.8.3.1 enabling error monitoring for the signal lines name: cfo_bwcntenablemaskchannel7_0 thi...

  • Page 660

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1176 660 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.3.8.3.4 signal channels for triggering latch procedure name: cfo_latchcomparator this register defines the signal channels and their level for triggering the latch procedure. • this mainly configures which channe...

  • Page 661

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1176 x20 system user's manual 3.10 661 constant register "cfo_phyioconfigch03" name: cfo_phyioconfigch03 data type value information usint 0 only default in the bus controller module constant register "cfo_phyioconfigch04" name: cfo_phyioconfigch04 data ty...

  • Page 662

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1176 662 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.3.8.4 encoder - communication 4.11.3.8.4.1 counter for verifying the data frame name: sdclifecount the 8-bit counter register is needed for the sdc software package. It is incremented with the system clock to all...

  • Page 663

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1176 x20 system user's manual 3.10 663 4.11.3.8.4.5 counter value at the time of the last latch name: encoder01latch the counter value at the time of the last latch is displayed as a 16 or 32-bit value. Only the 16-bit value is available in the bus control...

  • Page 664

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1176 664 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.3.8.4.8 input status of signal lines name: encoder01_a encoder01_b encoder01_r digitalinput01 to digitalinput02 this register displays the input status of the signal lines from the encoder and the digital inputs....

  • Page 665

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1176 x20 system user's manual 3.10 665 acknowledging error status of signal lines name: bw_quitchannel_a bw_quitchannel_b bw_quitchannel_r this register can be used to acknowledge the latched error states of the signal lines from the encoder. However, if t...

  • Page 666

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1176 666 x20 system user's manual 3.10 manual acknowledgment of latched error states the latched error states of the signal lines from the encoder can be acknowledged manually. However, if there are still pending errors remaining, then the error status rem...

  • Page 667

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1176 x20 system user's manual 3.10 667 automatic acknowledgment of latched error states in addition to manual acknowledgment, automatic acknowledgment of the latched error states after a specified amount of time can also be enabled. Make sure that the time...

  • Page 668

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1176 668 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.3.8.4.10 status of encoder supplies name: powersupply01 to powersupply02 this register shows the status of the integrated encoder supplies. A faulty encoder power supply is displayed as a warning. Data type value...

  • Page 669

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1178 x20 system user's manual 3.10 669 4.11.4 x20dc1178 4.11.4.1 general information this module is equipped with one input for ssi absolute encoders with 5 v encoder signal. The data signal is monitored (data, data\). • 1 ssi absolute encoder 5 v • monito...

  • Page 670

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1178 670 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20dc1178 switching threshold low high >15 vdc isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 v eff ssi absolute encoder counter size encoder-dependent up to 32-bit max. Transfer rate 1 mbit/s keying gray/bi...

  • Page 671

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1178 x20 system user's manual 3.10 671 4.11.4.4 led status indicators for a description of the various operating modes, see section 2.11.1 "re leds". Figure led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode double flash boot mode ...

  • Page 672

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1178 672 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.4.7 input circuit diagram counter input gnd 24 v encoder 24 v ptc gnd recipient with monitoring 24 v encoder 5 v input status i/o status led (green) data data dc dc standard inputs vdr input x input status i/o st...

  • Page 673

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1178 x20 system user's manual 3.10 673 4.11.4.9 register description 4.11.4.9.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic configuration 650 cfo_systemcycleprescaler uint ● 2049 cfo_cycleselect usint ● 2951...

  • Page 674

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1178 674 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.4.9.2 function model 254 - bus controller read write register offset 1) name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic configuration 650 - cfo_systemcycleprescaler uint ● 2049 - cfo_cycleselect usint ● 2951 - cfo_p...

  • Page 675

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1178 x20 system user's manual 3.10 675 4.11.4.9.3 encoder - configuration the following registers are used for setting functions and configuring the module. 4.11.4.9.3.1 setting the ssi sampling cycle time the following two registers define the cycle time ...

  • Page 676

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1178 676 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.4.9.3.2 setting operating parameters name: cfo_physicalmode this register defines the operating parameters for the ssi encoder to correctly evaluate the data from the encoder. • parity: data with or without parit...

  • Page 677

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1178 x20 system user's manual 3.10 677 4.11.4.9.3.5 timing for automatic error acknowledgment name: cfo_bwquittime_0 this register can be used to enable an additional automatic acknowledgment of the error status through timing. If a valid time is set, then...

  • Page 678

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1178 678 x20 system user's manual 3.10 automatic acknowledgment of latched error states in addition to manual acknowledgment, automatic acknowledgment of the latched error states after a specified amount of time can also be enabled. Make sure that the time...

  • Page 679

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1178 x20 system user's manual 3.10 679 manual acknowledgment of latched error states the latched error states of the signal lines from the encoder can be acknowledged manually. However, if there are still pending errors remaining, then the error status rem...

  • Page 680

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1178 680 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.4.9.3.6 enable/disable error monitoring for the signal channels name: cfo_bwssienablemaskchannel7_0 this register allows error monitoring for each of the signal channels to be enabled individually. "open line", "...

  • Page 681

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1178 x20 system user's manual 3.10 681 4.11.4.9.4 encoder - communication 4.11.4.9.4.1 counter for verifying the data frame name: sdclifecount the 8-bit counter register is needed for the sdc software package. It is incremented with the system clock to all...

  • Page 682

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1178 682 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.4.9.4.5 net time of the last counter value change name: encoder01timechanged for slow x2x link cycles, the net time of the last counter value change can be used to more accurately determine the speed. The net tim...

  • Page 683

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1178 x20 system user's manual 3.10 683 4.11.4.9.4.8 status of signal lines name: bw_channel_d this register displays the error state of the signal line from the encoder. The error state is latched when it occurs and is maintained until acknowledged. The co...

  • Page 684

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1196 684 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.5 x20dc1196 4.11.5.1 general information the module is equipped with 1 input for an abr incremental encoder with 5 v encoder signal. • 1 abr incremental encoder 5 v • 2 additional inputs e.G. For home enable swit...

  • Page 685

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1196 x20 system user's manual 3.10 685 product id x20dc1196 input resistance 7.19 kΩ switching threshold low high >15 vdc isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 v eff abr incremental encoder encoder inputs 5 v, symmetrical counter size 16/32-bit inp...

  • Page 686

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1196 686 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.5.4 led status indicators for a description of the various operating modes, see section 2.11.1 "re leds". Figure led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode double flash boot mode ...

  • Page 687

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1196 x20 system user's manual 3.10 687 4.11.5.7 input circuit diagram counter inputs abr gnd 24 v encoder 24 v ptc gnd abr rs485 driver recipient 24 v encoder 5 v input status i/o status led (green) dc dc standard inputs vdr input x input status i/o status...

  • Page 688

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1196 688 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.5.8 register description 4.11.5.8.1 function model 0 - standard and function model 1 - standard with 32-bit encoder counter value the difference between function model 0 and function model 1 is the size of the da...

  • Page 689

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1196 x20 system user's manual 3.10 689 4.11.5.8.3 abr encoder - configuration registers 4.11.5.8.3.1 reference pulse the following registers must be configured by a single acyclic write with the listed values so that the homing procedure is completed on th...

  • Page 690

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1196 690 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.5.8.3.3 homing with reference enable input regardless of the referencing mode, it is possible using this register to prevent the home position from being applied when the corresponding reference input voltage lev...

  • Page 691

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1196 x20 system user's manual 3.10 691 4.11.5.8.4 abr encoder - configuration registers 4.11.5.8.4.1 counter state of the encoder name: encoder01 the encoder values are represented as 16-bit or 32-bit counter values in this register. Data type value int -3...

  • Page 692

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1196 692 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.5.8.4.4 status of the homing procedure name: statusinput01 this register contains information regarding whether the referencing process is off, active or complete. Data type value usint see bit structure. Bit str...

  • Page 693

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1196 x20 system user's manual 3.10 693 4.11.5.8.5 minimum cycle time the minimum cycle time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced without communication errors occurring. It should be noted that very fast cycles decrease the idle time available for h...

  • Page 694

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1198 694 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.6 x20dc1198 4.11.6.1 general information this module is equipped with one input for ssi absolute encoders with 5 v encoder signal. • 1 ssi absolute encoder 5 v • 2 additional inputs • 5 vdc, 24 vdc and gnd for en...

  • Page 695

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1198 x20 system user's manual 3.10 695 product id x20dc1198 switching threshold low high >15 vdc isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 v eff ssi absolute encoder encoder inputs 5 v, symmetrical counter size 32-bit max. Transfer rate 1 mbit/s keying...

  • Page 696

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1198 696 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.6.4 led status indicators for a description of the various operating modes, see section 2.11.1 "re leds". Figure led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode double flash boot mode ...

  • Page 697

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1198 x20 system user's manual 3.10 697 4.11.6.7 input circuit diagram counter input data data rs485 driver recipient input status i/o status led (green) gnd 24 v encoder 24 v ptc gnd 24 v encoder 5 v dc dc standard inputs vdr input x input status i/o statu...

  • Page 698

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1198 698 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.6.9 register description 4.11.6.9.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic configuration 7176 configoutput14 uint ● 7172 configadvanced udint ● communication ...

  • Page 699

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1198 x20 system user's manual 3.10 699 4.11.6.9.3 ssi encoder configuration register 4.11.6.9.3.1 standard configuration name: configoutput14 this configuration register is used to set the coding, the clock rate and the number of bits. Default = 0. This mu...

  • Page 700

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1198 700 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.6.9.4 ssi encoder - configuration registers 4.11.6.9.4.1 ssi position values name: encoder01 the ssi encoder value is displayed as a 32-bit position value. The ssi position value is generated synchronously with t...

  • Page 701

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc11a6 x20 system user's manual 3.10 701 4.11.7 x20dc11a6 4.11.7.1 general information the module is equipped with 1 input for an abr incremental encoder with 5 v encoder signal. The encoder inputs are monitored (a, b, r, a\, b\, r\). • 1 abr incremental enc...

  • Page 702

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc11a6 702 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20dc11a6 switching threshold low high >15 vdc isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 v eff abr incremental encoder encoder inputs 5 v, symmetrical counter size 16/32-bit input frequency max. 5 mhz e...

  • Page 703

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc11a6 x20 system user's manual 3.10 703 4.11.7.4 led status indicators for a description of the various operating modes, see the 2.11.1 "re leds" section. Figure led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode double flash boot m...

  • Page 704

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc11a6 704 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.7.7 input circuit diagram counter inputs abr gnd 24 v encoder 24 v ptc gnd abr recipient with monitoring 24 v encoder 5 v input status i/o status led (green) dc dc standard inputs vdr input x input status i/o sta...

  • Page 705

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc11a6 x20 system user's manual 3.10 705 4.11.7.8 register description 4.11.7.8.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic encoder - communication 683 sdclifecount sint ● 6342 int 6340 encoder01 dint ● 6310...

  • Page 706

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc11a6 706 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.7.8.2 function model 254 - bus controller read write register offset 1) name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic encoder - communication 6342 0 encoder01 int ● 6310 2 encoder01timevalid int ● 6358 4 encoder01...

  • Page 707

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc11a6 x20 system user's manual 3.10 707 4.11.7.8.3 encoder - configuration the following registers are used for setting functions and configuring the module. 4.11.7.8.3.1 enabling error monitoring for the signal lines name: cfo_bwcntenablemaskchannel7_0 thi...

  • Page 708

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc11a6 708 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.7.8.3.4 signal channels for triggering latch procedure name: cfo_latchcomparator this register defines the signal channels and their level for triggering the latch procedure. • this mainly configures which channe...

  • Page 709

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc11a6 x20 system user's manual 3.10 709 constant register "cfo_phyioconfigch03" name: cfo_phyioconfigch03 data type value information usint 0 only default in the bus controller module constant register "cfo_phyioconfigch04" name: cfo_phyioconfigch04 data ty...

  • Page 710

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc11a6 710 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.7.8.4 encoder - communication 4.11.7.8.4.1 counter for verifying the data frame name: sdclifecount the 8-bit counter register is needed for the sdc software package. It is incremented with the system clock to all...

  • Page 711

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc11a6 x20 system user's manual 3.10 711 4.11.7.8.4.5 counter value at the time of the last latch name: encoder01latch the counter value at the time of the last latch is displayed as a 16 or 32-bit value. Only the 16-bit value is available in the bus control...

  • Page 712

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc11a6 712 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.7.8.4.8 input status of signal lines name: encoder01_a encoder01_b encoder01_r digitalinput01 to digitalinput02 this register displays the input status of the signal lines from the encoder and the digital inputs....

  • Page 713

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc11a6 x20 system user's manual 3.10 713 acknowledging error status of signal lines name: bw_quitchannel_a bw_quitchannel_b bw_quitchannel_r this register can be used to acknowledge the latched error states of the signal lines from the encoder. However, if t...

  • Page 714

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc11a6 714 x20 system user's manual 3.10 manual acknowledgment of latched error states the latched error states of the signal lines from the encoder can be acknowledged manually. However, if there are still pending errors remaining, then the error status rem...

  • Page 715

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc11a6 x20 system user's manual 3.10 715 automatic acknowledgment of latched error states in addition to manual acknowledgment, automatic acknowledgment of the latched error states after a specified amount of time can also be enabled. Make sure that the time...

  • Page 716

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc11a6 716 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.7.8.4.10 status of encoder supplies name: powersupply01 to powersupply02 this register shows the status of the integrated encoder supplies. A faulty encoder power supply is displayed as a warning. Data type value...

  • Page 717

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1376 x20 system user's manual 3.10 717 4.11.8 x20dc1376 4.11.8.1 general information the module is equipped with 1 input for an abr incremental encoder with 24 v encoder signal. The encoder inputs are monitored (a, b, r). • 1 abr incremental encoder 24 v, ...

  • Page 718

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1376 718 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20dc1376 input resistance 7.03 kΩ switching threshold low high >15 vdc isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 v eff abr incremental encoder encoder inputs 24 v, asymmetrical (single-ended) counter s...

  • Page 719

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1376 x20 system user's manual 3.10 719 4.11.8.4 led status indicators for a description of the various operating modes, see the 2.11.1 "re leds" section. Figure led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode double flash boot m...

  • Page 720

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1376 720 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.8.7 input circuit diagram counter inputs gnd 24 v encoder 24 v ptc vdr gnd i/o status led (green) abr input status recipient with monitoring standard inputs vdr input x input status i/o status led (green).

  • Page 721

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1376 x20 system user's manual 3.10 721 4.11.8.8 register description 4.11.8.8.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic encoder - communication 683 sdclifecount sint ● 6342 int 6340 encoder01 dint ● 6310...

  • Page 722

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1376 722 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.8.8.2 function model 254 - bus controller read write register offset 1) name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic encoder - communication 6342 0 encoder01 int ● 6310 2 encoder01timevalid int ● 6358 4 encoder01...

  • Page 723

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1376 x20 system user's manual 3.10 723 4.11.8.8.3 encoder - configuration the following registers are used for setting functions and configuring the module. 4.11.8.8.3.1 enabling error monitoring for the signal lines name: cfo_bwcntenablemaskchannel7_0 thi...

  • Page 724

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1376 724 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.8.8.3.4 signal channels for triggering latch procedure name: cfo_latchcomparator this register defines the signal channels and their level for triggering the latch procedure. • this mainly configures which channe...

  • Page 725

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1376 x20 system user's manual 3.10 725 constant register "cfo_phyioconfigch03" name: cfo_phyioconfigch03 data type value information usint 0 only default in the bus controller module constant register "cfo_phyioconfigch04" name: cfo_phyioconfigch04 data ty...

  • Page 726

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1376 726 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.8.8.4 encoder - communication 4.11.8.8.4.1 counter for verifying the data frame name: sdclifecount the 8-bit counter register is needed for the sdc software package. It is incremented with the system clock to all...

  • Page 727

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1376 x20 system user's manual 3.10 727 4.11.8.8.4.6 counter value of latch event name: encoder01latchcount the latch events are counted and stored in a cyclic 8-bit counter. This counter is incremented with each latch event, thereby indicating a new occurr...

  • Page 728

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1376 728 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.8.8.4.9 error status of signal lines the error states are latched when they occur and are maintained until acknowledged. The counter and time reg- isters are not updated if there are pending or unacknowledged err...

  • Page 729

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1376 x20 system user's manual 3.10 729 manual acknowledgment of latched error states the latched error states of the signal lines from the encoder can be acknowledged manually. However, if there are still pending errors remaining, then the error status rem...

  • Page 730

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1376 730 x20 system user's manual 3.10 automatic acknowledgment of latched error states in addition to manual acknowledgment, automatic acknowledgment of the latched error states after a specified amount of time can also be enabled. Make sure that the time...

  • Page 731

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1376 x20 system user's manual 3.10 731 4.11.8.8.4.10 status of encoder supply name: powersupply01 this register shows the status of the integrated encoder supply. A faulty encoder power supply is displayed as a warning. Data type value usint see bit struct...

  • Page 732

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc137a 732 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.9 x20dc137a 4.11.9.1 general information the module is equipped with 1 input for an abr incremental encoder with 24 v differential signals. The encoder inputs are monitored (a, b, r, a\, b\, r\). • 1 abr incremen...

  • Page 733

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc137a x20 system user's manual 3.10 733 product id x20dc137a switching threshold low high >15 vdc isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 v eff abr incremental encoder encoder inputs 24 v, differential counter size 16/32-bit input frequency max. 300 k...

  • Page 734

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc137a 734 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.9.4 led status indicators for a description of the various operating modes, see the 2.11.1 "re leds" section. Figure led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode double flash boot m...

  • Page 735

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc137a x20 system user's manual 3.10 735 4.11.9.7 input circuit diagram counter inputs gnd 24 v encoder 24 v ptc vdr gnd i/o status led (green) abr input status recipient with monitoring vdr abr\ standard inputs vdr input x input status i/o status led (green...

  • Page 736

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc137a 736 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.9.8 register description 4.11.9.8.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic encoder - communication 683 sdclifecount sint ● 6342 int 6340 encoder01 dint ● 6310...

  • Page 737

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc137a x20 system user's manual 3.10 737 4.11.9.8.2 function model 254 - bus controller read write register offset 1) name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic encoder - communication 6342 0 encoder01 int ● 6310 2 encoder01timevalid int ● 6358 4 encoder01...

  • Page 738

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc137a 738 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.9.8.3 encoder - configuration the following registers are used for setting functions and configuring the module. 4.11.9.8.3.1 enabling error monitoring for the signal lines name: cfo_bwcntenablemaskchannel7_0 thi...

  • Page 739

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc137a x20 system user's manual 3.10 739 4.11.9.8.3.4 signal channels for triggering latch procedure name: cfo_latchcomparator this register defines the signal channels and their level for triggering the latch procedure. • this mainly configures which channe...

  • Page 740

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc137a 740 x20 system user's manual 3.10 constant register "cfo_phyioconfigch03" name: cfo_phyioconfigch03 data type value information usint 0 only default in the bus controller module constant register "cfo_phyioconfigch04" name: cfo_phyioconfigch04 data ty...

  • Page 741

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc137a x20 system user's manual 3.10 741 4.11.9.8.4 encoder - communication 4.11.9.8.4.1 counter for verifying the data frame name: sdclifecount the 8-bit counter register is needed for the sdc software package. It is incremented with the system clock to all...

  • Page 742

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc137a 742 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.9.8.4.6 counter value of latch event name: encoder01latchcount the latch events are counted and stored in a cyclic 8-bit counter. This counter is incremented with each latch event, thereby indicating a new occurr...

  • Page 743

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc137a x20 system user's manual 3.10 743 4.11.9.8.4.9 error status of signal lines the error states are latched when they occur and are maintained until acknowledged. The counter and time reg- isters are not updated if there are pending or unacknowledged err...

  • Page 744

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc137a 744 x20 system user's manual 3.10 manual acknowledgment of latched error states the latched error states of the signal lines from the encoder can be acknowledged manually. However, if there are still pending errors remaining, then the error status rem...

  • Page 745

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc137a x20 system user's manual 3.10 745 automatic acknowledgment of latched error states in addition to manual acknowledgment, automatic acknowledgment of the latched error states after a specified amount of time can also be enabled. Make sure that the time...

  • Page 746

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc137a 746 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.9.8.4.10 status of encoder supply name: powersupply01 this register shows the status of the integrated encoder supply. A faulty encoder power supply is displayed as a warning. Data type value usint see bit struct...

  • Page 747

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1396 x20 system user's manual 3.10 747 4.11.10 x20dc1396 4.11.10.1 general information the module is equipped with 1 input for an abr incremental encoder with 24 v encoder signal. • 1 abr incremental encoder 24 v • 1 additional input e.G. For home enable s...

  • Page 748

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1396 748 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20dc1396 isolation voltage between home enable switch and bus 500 v eff switching threshold low high >15 vdc abr incremental encoder encoder inputs 24 v, asymmetrical counter size 16/32-bit input frequency...

  • Page 749

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1396 x20 system user's manual 3.10 749 4.11.10.4 led status indicators for a description of the various operating modes, see section 2.11.1 "re leds". Figure led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode double flash boot mode...

  • Page 750

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1396 750 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.10.7 input circuit diagram counter inputs abr gnd 24 v encoder 24 v ptc vdr gnd input status i/o status led (green) standard input vdr input x input status i/o status led (green).

  • Page 751

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1396 x20 system user's manual 3.10 751 4.11.10.8 register description 4.11.10.8.1 function model 0 - standard and function model 1 - standard with 32-bit encoder counter value the difference between function model 0 and function model 1 is the size of the ...

  • Page 752

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1396 752 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.10.8.3 abr encoder - configuration registers 4.11.10.8.3.1 reference pulse the following registers must be configured by a single acyclic write with the listed values so that the homing procedure is completed on ...

  • Page 753

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1396 x20 system user's manual 3.10 753 4.11.10.8.3.3 homing with reference enable input regardless of the referencing mode, it is possible using this register to prevent the home position from being applied when the corresponding reference input voltage le...

  • Page 754

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1396 754 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.10.8.4 abr encoder - configuration registers 4.11.10.8.4.1 counter state of the encoder name: encoder01 the encoder values are represented as 16-bit or 32-bit counter values in this register. Data type value int ...

  • Page 755

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1396 x20 system user's manual 3.10 755 4.11.10.8.4.4 status of the homing procedure name: statusinput01 this register contains information regarding whether the referencing process is off, active or complete. Data type value usint see bit structure. Bit st...

  • Page 756

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1396 756 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.10.8.5 minimum cycle time the minimum cycle time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced without communication errors occurring. It should be noted that very fast cycles decrease the idle time available for ...

  • Page 757

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1398 x20 system user's manual 3.10 757 4.11.11 x20dc1398 4.11.11.1 general information this module is equipped with one input for ssi absolute encoders with 24 v encoder signal. • 1 ssi absolute encoder 24 v • 1 additional input • 24 vdc and gnd for encode...

  • Page 758

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1398 758 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20dc1398 switching threshold low high >15 vdc isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 v eff ssi absolute encoder encoder inputs 24 v, asymmetrical counter size 32-bit max. Transfer rate 125 kbit/s en...

  • Page 759

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1398 x20 system user's manual 3.10 759 4.11.11.4 led status indicators for a description of the various operating modes, see section 2.11.1 "re leds". Figure led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode double flash boot mode...

  • Page 760

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1398 760 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.11.7 input circuit diagram counter input data vdr input status i/o status led (green) gnd 24 v encoder 24 v ptc gnd standard input vdr input x input status i/o status led (green) 4.11.11.8 output circuit diagram ...

  • Page 761

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1398 x20 system user's manual 3.10 761 4.11.11.9 register description 4.11.11.9.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic configuration 7176 configoutput14 uint ● 7172 configadvanced udint ● communicatio...

  • Page 762

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1398 762 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.11.9.3 ssi encoder configuration register 4.11.11.9.3.1 standard configuration name: configoutput14 this configuration register is used to set the coding, the clock rate and the number of bits. Default = 0. This ...

  • Page 763

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1398 x20 system user's manual 3.10 763 4.11.11.9.4 ssi encoder - configuration registers 4.11.11.9.4.1 ssi position values name: encoder01 the ssi encoder value is displayed as a 32-bit position value. The ssi position value is generated synchronously with...

  • Page 764

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1976 764 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.12 x20dc1976 4.11.12.1 general information the module is equipped with 1 input for an abr incremental encoder with 5 v encoder signal. The encoder inputs are monitored (a, b, r). • 1 abr incremental encoder 5 v, ...

  • Page 765

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1976 x20 system user's manual 3.10 765 product id x20dc1976 switching threshold low high >15 vdc isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 v eff abr incremental encoder encoder inputs 5 v, asymmetrical (single-ended) counter size 16/32-bit input freque...

  • Page 766

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1976 766 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.12.4 led status indicators for a description of the various operating modes, see the 2.11.1 "re leds" section. Figure led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode double flash boot ...

  • Page 767

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1976 x20 system user's manual 3.10 767 4.11.12.7 input circuit diagram counter inputs 24 v encoder 24 v ptc vdr i/o status led (green) abr input status recipient with monitoring gnd gnd 24 v encoder 5 v dc dc standard inputs vdr input x input status i/o st...

  • Page 768

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1976 768 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.12.8 register description 4.11.12.8.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic encoder - communication 683 sdclifecount sint ● 6342 int 6340 encoder01 dint ● 63...

  • Page 769

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1976 x20 system user's manual 3.10 769 4.11.12.8.2 function model 254 - bus controller read write register offset 1) name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic encoder - communication 6342 0 encoder01 int ● 6310 2 encoder01timevalid int ● 6358 4 encoder0...

  • Page 770

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1976 770 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.12.8.3 encoder - configuration the following registers are used for setting functions and configuring the module. 4.11.12.8.3.1 enabling error monitoring for the signal lines name: cfo_bwcntenablemaskchannel7_0 t...

  • Page 771

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1976 x20 system user's manual 3.10 771 4.11.12.8.3.4 signal channels for triggering latch procedure name: cfo_latchcomparator this register defines the signal channels and their level for triggering the latch procedure. • this mainly configures which chann...

  • Page 772

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1976 772 x20 system user's manual 3.10 constant register "cfo_phyioconfigch03" name: cfo_phyioconfigch03 data type value information usint 0 only default in the bus controller module constant register "cfo_phyioconfigch04" name: cfo_phyioconfigch04 data ty...

  • Page 773

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1976 x20 system user's manual 3.10 773 4.11.12.8.4 encoder - communication 4.11.12.8.4.1 counter for verifying the data frame name: sdclifecount the 8-bit counter register is needed for the sdc software package. It is incremented with the system clock to a...

  • Page 774

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1976 774 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.12.8.4.5 counter value at the time of the last latch name: encoder01latch the counter value at the time of the last latch is displayed as a 16 or 32-bit value. Only the 16-bit value is available in the bus contro...

  • Page 775

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1976 x20 system user's manual 3.10 775 4.11.12.8.4.8 input status of signal lines name: encoder01_a encoder01_b encoder01_r digitalinput01 to digitalinput02 this register displays the input status of the signal lines from the encoder and the digital inputs...

  • Page 776

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1976 776 x20 system user's manual 3.10 acknowledging error status of signal lines name: bw_quitchannel_a bw_quitchannel_b bw_quitchannel_r this register can be used to acknowledge the latched error states of the signal lines from the encoder. However, if t...

  • Page 777

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1976 x20 system user's manual 3.10 777 manual acknowledgment of latched error states the latched error states of the signal lines from the encoder can be acknowledged manually. However, if there are still pending errors remaining, then the error status rem...

  • Page 778

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1976 778 x20 system user's manual 3.10 automatic acknowledgment of latched error states in addition to manual acknowledgment, automatic acknowledgment of the latched error states after a specified amount of time can also be enabled. Make sure that the time...

  • Page 779

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc1976 x20 system user's manual 3.10 779 4.11.12.8.4.10 status of encoder supplies name: powersupply01 to powersupply02 this register shows the status of the integrated encoder supplies. A faulty encoder power supply is displayed as a warning. Data type valu...

  • Page 780

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2190 780 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.13 x20dc2190 4.11.13.1 general information this module can be used to determine paths and to calculate speeds at the same time. The ultrasonic transducer rods are connected directly to the rs422 interface. Commun...

  • Page 781

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2190 x20 system user's manual 3.10 781 product id x20dc2190 encoder supply voltage 24 vdc, module-internal, max. 150 ma monitoring configurable overvoltage/undervoltage monitoring (±10%, ±15%, ±20%, ±25%) short circuit protection rev. D0 and higher input a...

  • Page 782

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2190 782 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.13.5 pinout 1 x2 0 d c 2 19 0 2 r e start + stop + +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc gnd start - stop - start + stop + start - stop - channel 1 channel 2 figure 285: pinout the ultrasonic transducers should be connected using ...

  • Page 783

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2190 x20 system user's manual 3.10 783 4.11.13.7 register description 4.11.13.7.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic synchronous register 0 position01 dint ● 4 position02 dint ● 8 position03 dint ● ...

  • Page 784

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2190 784 x20 system user's manual 3.10 read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic 166 statusinput14 udint ● 170 statusinput15 udint ● 174 statusinput16 udint ● 178 statusinput17 udint ● 182 statusinput18 udint ● 186 statusinput19 udin...

  • Page 785

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2190 x20 system user's manual 3.10 785 read write register offset 1) name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic 2000 - configoutput03read udint ● 2004 - configoutput04read udint ● 2008 - configoutput07read dint ● 2012 - configoutput08read dint ● 2024 - c...

  • Page 786: Information:

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2190 786 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.13.7.3 commissioning a transducer rod two registers need to be configured to initialize an ultrasonic transducer rod and receive valid measurements. The first step is to enter the length of the rod (see section 4...

  • Page 787

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2190 x20 system user's manual 3.10 787 4.11.13.7.7 status information about the transducer rods name: statusinput01 this register displays the status information for the transducer rods. Data type value usint see bit structure. Bit structure: bit name valu...

  • Page 788: Information:

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2190 788 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.13.7.9 applying new magnet offsets name: statusoutput01 this register makes it easier to more quickly determine new offsets (= zero positions) for the individual magnets. This approach is an alternative or additi...

  • Page 789

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2190 x20 system user's manual 3.10 789 4.11.13.7.11 channel configuration name: configoutput02 this register can be used to configure the individual channels. Data type value usint see bit structure. Bit structure: bit description value information 000 use...

  • Page 790

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2190 790 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.13.7.13 offset position on the transducer name: configoutput07 to configoutput08 configoutput15 to configoutput16 these registers are used to assign the respective magnet an offset position (= zero position) on t...

  • Page 791

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2190 x20 system user's manual 3.10 791 4.11.13.7.14.3 max. Plausible magnet speed name: configoutput13 to configoutput14 configoutput21 to configoutput22 these registers are used to assign the max. Plausible magnet speed. • max. Speed - magnet 1: configout...

  • Page 792: Information:

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2190 792 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.13.7.17.1 parameter overview the following parameters are stored in the status registers: register description supported by the protocol dp/ip ep statusinput09 rod length 1 [mm] ● ● statusinput10 rod length 2 [mm...

  • Page 793: Information:

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 793 4.11.14 x20dc2395 4.11.14.1 general information this module is a multifunctional counter module. It can be connected to one ssi encoder, one abr encoder, two ab encoders or four event counters. Two outputs are availab...

  • Page 794

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2395 794 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.14.3 technical data product id x20dc2395 short description i/o module 1 ssi absolute encoder, 24 v, 1 abr incremental encoder, 24 v, 2 ab incremental encoders, 24 v, 4x event counters or 2x pulse width modulation...

  • Page 795

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 795 product id x20dc2395 measurement type continuous or triggered digital outputs design push / pull / push-pull quantity 2 nominal voltage 24 vdc switching voltage 24 vdc -15% / +20% nominal output current 0.1 a total no...

  • Page 796

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2395 796 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.14.4 led status indicators for a description of the various operating modes, see the 2.11.1 "re leds" section. Figure led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode double flash boot ...

  • Page 797

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 797 4.11.14.7 function overview the following functions can be configured on the module. They cannot all be used at the same time due to the multiple use of the hardware channels and the limited cyclic data length. • 4 di...

  • Page 798

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2395 798 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.14.7.2 connection options channels 1 to 4 can be connected as follows: channel function 1 i event counter a a ssi data 2 i/o event counter b b ssi cycle pwm 3 i event counter a r 4 i/o event counter b enable refe...

  • Page 799

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 799 4.11.14.10 switching inductive loads 240 Ω 100 ma ≙ 0.1 h 100 h 10 h 1 h 0.01 h 0.1 1 10 100 1000 10000 1000 coil resistance [ ] Ω coil inductance max. Switching cycles / second (with 90% duty cycle) 4.11.14.11 calcul...

  • Page 800

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2395 800 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.14.12 register description 4.11.14.12.1 function model 0 - standard and function model 1 - 32-bit counter the following 2 models can be selected: • 16-bit counter, function model 0 • 32-bit counter, function mode...

  • Page 801

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 801 read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic 1,024 cfo_direktiooutevent0idwr uint ● 1,034 cfo_direktiooutsetmask0 usint ● 1,032 cfo_direktiooutclearmask0 usint ● 1,066 cfo_direktiooutsetmask1 usint...

  • Page 802

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2395 802 x20 system user's manual 3.10 read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic 4,108 cfo_fallingdisprotection usint ● 4,110 cfo_risingdisprotection usint ● configuration - time measurement 4,336 cfo_edgetimeglobalenable usint ● 434...

  • Page 803

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 803 4.11.14.12.3 general module registers 4.11.14.12.3.1 configuring led status indicators name: cfo_led0source to cfo_led3source these registers can be used to define how the module's led status indicators are used. Blin...

  • Page 804: Information:

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2395 804 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.14.12.4 digital inputs and outputs 4.11.14.12.4.1 configure physical channels name: cfo_cfgchannel01 to cfo_cfgchannel04 this register can be used to configure physical i/o channels 1 to 4. Information: except fo...

  • Page 805

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 805 4.11.14.12.4.3 set mask of the digital channels name: cfo_outsetmask the settings in this register only affect the values written to registers 4.11.14.12.4.5 "digitaloutput02 and 04". • 0 allows manual setting of digi...

  • Page 806: Information:

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2395 806 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.14.12.4.5 output states of the channels name: digitaloutput02 and digitaloutput04 the output status of a physical channel can be written using this register. In order to configure a channel as an output: 1 bit 0 ...

  • Page 807: Information:

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 807 4.11.14.12.5.1 list of event ids various hardware and software functions send event ids or require event ids in order to start. The following table shows all of the ids available to configure the module. Event id desc...

  • Page 808: Information:

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2395 808 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.14.12.5.2 edge events for each physical input channel there are 3 event functions • falling edge • rising edge • falling and rising edge the respective event is triggered when an edge is detected on the hardware ...

  • Page 809

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 809 enable limit for falling edges name: cfo_fallingdisprotection this register can be used to enable/disable the event frequency limit for falling edges on the respective channel. Data type value usint see bit structure....

  • Page 810

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2395 810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.14.12.5.3 direct input function the module features a direct input function. This event function is based on comparator functionality. If the event configured in the "cfo_direktioevent0idwr" register occurs, the ...

  • Page 811

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 811 configure the comparator mask for the input function name: cfo_ev0compmask if a bit is set, then the input status of the respective channel is compared with that bit in the "cfo_direktioeventcompstate" register. Data ...

  • Page 812

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2395 812 x20 system user's manual 3.10 configure channels for setting name: cfo_direktiooutsetmask0 to cfo_direktiooutsetmask1 writing "1" to the bit position that corresponds to a channel sets the output if the output event function is being executed. Thi...

  • Page 813

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 813 4.11.14.12.6 counters and encoders the module has 2 internal counter functions, each with 2 event counter registers. Each of these 2 counters is permanently assigned to 2 physical inputs. This assignment cannot be cha...

  • Page 814: Information:

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2395 814 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.14.12.6.2 sample configurations all of the settings available in automation studio for ab encoders, abr encoders, up/down counters and event counters are based on the two counter functions. The following configur...

  • Page 815: Information:

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 815 i/o configuration - abr encoder the following table shows how the module's various event functions can be linked in order to configure an abr encoder. Register value comment for the function cfo_counter1presetvalue1 (...

  • Page 816

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2395 816 x20 system user's manual 3.10 i/o configuration - event counter the following table shows how the module's various event functions can be linked in order to configure an event counter. [x] stands for the respective counter function, either 1 or 2 ...

  • Page 817

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 817 configure counter mode name: counter function 1: cfo_counter1config counter function 2: cfo_counter2config these registers are used to configure the mode of the counter function. Each counter function can be operated ...

  • Page 818

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2395 818 x20 system user's manual 3.10 offset value for referencing name: counter function 1: cfo_counter1presetvalue1 to cfo_counter2presetvalue1 counter function 1: cfo_counter1presetvalue1_32bit to cfo_counter2presetvalue1_32bit counter function 2: cfo_...

  • Page 819

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 819 status of the abr encoder name: statusabr01 the referencing status of the abr encoder is shown in this register. Data type value usint see bit structure. Bit structure: bit description value information 0 - 1 reserved...

  • Page 820

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2395 820 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.14.12.6.4 comparator functions the abr and ab encoders and the up/down counter have a comparator function. It always works the same and is described here globally for all three. The comparators are implemented in...

  • Page 821

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 821 configure calculation of comparator name: counter function 1: cfo_counter1event0config to cfo_counter1event1config counter function 2: cfo_counter2event0config to cfo_counter2event1config these registers are used to c...

  • Page 822

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2395 822 x20 system user's manual 3.10 comparator origin name: origincomparator01 this register is available for the ab and abr encoders and the up/down counters. It defines the position value at which the respective configured comparator output channel is...

  • Page 823: Information:

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 823 4.11.14.12.7 ssi encoder interface the module has 1 ssi encoders available, supported directly in the hardware. Two 24 v output channels are set for the ssi encoder and cannot be changed. (see also 4.11.14.7.1 "descri...

  • Page 824

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2395 824 x20 system user's manual 3.10 configure ssi name: cfo_ssi1cfg this configuration register is used to set the coding, the clock rate and the number of bits. Default = 0. This must be set once using an acyclic write command. Data type value uint see...

  • Page 825

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 825 read ssi position name: ssiencoder01 the last transferred ssi position can be read out from this register. The ssi encoder value is displayed as a 32- bit position value. This position value is generated synchronously...

  • Page 826

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2395 826 x20 system user's manual 3.10 configure calculation of ssi comparator name: cfo_ssi1event0config the calculation of the position value used for the comparator can be configured in this register. The window comparator condition is calculated as fol...

  • Page 827

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 827 4.11.14.12.8 pwm - pulse width modulation the module has 2 pwm functions available, supported directly by the hardware. A 24 v output channel is set for each pwm encoder and cannot be changed. (see also 4.11.14.7.1 "d...

  • Page 828: Information:

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2395 828 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.14.12.9 time measurement function the module has a time measurement function for each i/o channel. It can be configured separately for rising and falling edges on each channel. A starting edge can be configured f...

  • Page 829

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 829 4.11.14.12.9.3 configure time measurement function for the rising edge name: cfo_edgetimerisingmode01 to cfo_edgetimerisingmode04 these registers can be used to configure the time measurement function for the rising e...

  • Page 830

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2395 830 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.14.12.9.5 trigger rising edge detection name: triggerrisingch01 to triggerrisingch04 if bit 7 "trigger" is cleared in the 4.11.14.12.9.3 "cfo_edgetimerisingmode" register, then detection of a rising edge on the r...

  • Page 831

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 831 4.11.14.12.9.8 count falling trigger edges name: countfallingch01 to countfallingch04 these registers contain cyclic counters that are incremented with every detected falling edge on the respective channel. Data type ...

  • Page 832

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2395 832 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.14.12.10 minimum cycle time the minimum cycle time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced without communication errors occurring. It should be noted that very fast cycles decrease the idle time available fo...

  • Page 833

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2396 x20 system user's manual 3.10 833 4.11.15 x20dc2396 4.11.15.1 general information the module is equipped with two inputs for an abr incremental encoder with 24 v encoder signal. • 2 abr incremental encoder 24 v • 2 additional inputs e.G. For home enab...

  • Page 834

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2396 834 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20dc2396 input resistance 7.19 kΩ isolation voltage between home enable switch and bus 500 v eff switching threshold low high >15 vdc abr incremental encoder encoder inputs 24 v, asymmetrical counter size ...

  • Page 835

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2396 x20 system user's manual 3.10 835 4.11.15.4 led status indicators for a description of the various operating modes, see section 2.11.1 "re leds". Figure led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode double flash boot mode...

  • Page 836

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2396 836 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.15.7 input circuit diagram counter inputs abr x vdr input status i/o status led (green) gnd 24 v encoder x 24 v ptc gnd standard inputs vdr input x input status i/o status led (green).

  • Page 837

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2396 x20 system user's manual 3.10 837 4.11.15.8 register description 4.11.15.8.1 function model 0 - standard and function model 1 - standard with 32-bit encoder counter value the difference between function model 0 and function model 1 is the size of the ...

  • Page 838

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2396 838 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.15.8.3 abr encoder - configuration registers 4.11.15.8.3.1 reference pulse the following registers must be configured by a single acyclic write with the listed values so that the homing procedure is completed on ...

  • Page 839

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2396 x20 system user's manual 3.10 839 4.11.15.8.3.2 setting the home position name: cfo_presetabr01_1 to cfo_presetabr01_2 cfo_presetabr02_1 to cfo_presetabr02_2 cfo_presetabr01_1_32bit to cfo_presetabr01_2_32bit cfo_presetabr02_1_32bit to cfo_presetabr02...

  • Page 840

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2396 840 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.15.8.4 abr encoder - configuration registers 4.11.15.8.4.1 counter state of the encoders name: encoder01 to encoder02 the encoder values are displayed in this register. Data type value int -32,768 to 32,767 dint ...

  • Page 841

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2396 x20 system user's manual 3.10 841 4.11.15.8.4.4 status of the homing procedure name: statusinput01 (for encoder 1) to statusinput02 (for encoder 2) this register contains information regarding whether the referencing process is off, active or complete...

  • Page 842

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2396 842 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.15.8.5 minimum cycle time the minimum cycle time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced without communication errors occurring. It should be noted that very fast cycles decrease the idle time available for ...

  • Page 843

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2398 x20 system user's manual 3.10 843 4.11.16 x20dc2398 4.11.16.1 general information this module is equipped with two inputs for ssi absolute encoders with 24 v encoder signal. • 2 ssi absolute encoder 24 v • 2 additional inputs • 24 vdc and gnd for enco...

  • Page 844

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2398 844 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20dc2398 input resistance 7.19 kΩ switching threshold low high >15 vdc isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 v eff ssi absolute encoder encoder inputs 24 v, asymmetrical counter size 32-bit max. Tr...

  • Page 845

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2398 x20 system user's manual 3.10 845 4.11.16.4 led status indicators for a description of the various operating modes, see section 2.11.1 "re leds". Figure led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode double flash boot mode...

  • Page 846

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2398 846 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.16.7 input circuit diagram counter inputs data x vdr input status i/o status led (green) gnd 24 v encoder x 24 v ptc gnd standard inputs vdr input x input status i/o status led (green) 4.11.16.8 output circuit di...

  • Page 847

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2398 x20 system user's manual 3.10 847 4.11.16.9 register description 4.11.16.9.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic configuration 7176 configoutput15 uint ● 7432 configoutput16 uint ● 7172 configad...

  • Page 848

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2398 848 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.16.9.3.2 extended configuration name: configadvanced01 to configadvanced02 this configuration register is used to set the coding, the clock rate, the number of bits and the monostable multivi- brator settings. De...

  • Page 849

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc2398 x20 system user's manual 3.10 849 4.11.16.9.4 ssi encoder - configuration registers 4.11.16.9.4.1 ssi position values name: encoder01 to encoder02 the two ssi encoder values are displayed as 32-bit position values. The ssi position values are generate...

  • Page 850: Information:

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 850 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.17 x20dc4395 4.11.17.1 general information this module is a multifunctional counter module. It can be connected to two ssi encoders, two abr encoders, four ab encoders or eight event counters. Four outputs are av...

  • Page 851

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 851 4.11.17.3 technical data product id x20dc4395 short description i/o module 2 ssi absolute encoder, 24 v, 2 abr incremental encoder, 24 v, 4 ab incremental encoders, 24 v, 8x event counters or 4x pulse width modulation...

  • Page 852

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 852 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20dc4395 measurement type continuous or triggered digital outputs design push / pull / push-pull quantity 4 nominal voltage 24 vdc switching voltage 24 vdc -15% / +20% nominal output current 0.1 a total no...

  • Page 853

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 853 4.11.17.4 led status indicators for a description of the various operating modes, see the 2.11.1 "re leds" section. Figure led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode double flash boot ...

  • Page 854

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 854 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.17.7 function overview the following functions can be configured on the module. They cannot all be used at the same time due to the multiple use of the hardware channels and the limited cyclic data length. • 8 di...

  • Page 855

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 855 4.11.17.7.1 description of channel assignments the functions listed here are directly assigned to the respective hardware channels and cannot be changed: channel signal connections 1 • digital input 1 • event counter ...

  • Page 856

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 856 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.17.7.2 connection options channels 1 to 8 can be connected as follows: channel function 1 i event counter a a ssi data 2 i/o event counter b b ssi cycle pwm 3 i event counter a r 4 i/o event counter b enable refe...

  • Page 857

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 857 4.11.17.10 switching inductive loads 240 Ω 100 ma ≙ 0.1 h 100 h 10 h 1 h 0.01 h 0.1 1 10 100 1000 10000 1000 coil resistance [ ] Ω coil inductance max. Switching cycles / second (with 90% duty cycle) 4.11.17.11 calcul...

  • Page 858

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 858 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.17.12 register description 4.11.17.12.1 function model 0 - standard and function model 1 - 32-bit counter the following 2 models can be selected: • 16-bit counter, function model 0 • 32-bit counter, function mode...

  • Page 859

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 859 read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic 1,024 cfo_direktiooutevent0idwr uint ● 1034 + n * 32 cfo_direktiooutsetmaskn (index n = 0 to 3) usint ● 1032 + n * 32 cfo_direktiooutclearmaskn (index n...

  • Page 860

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 860 x20 system user's manual 3.10 read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic 7,248 origincomparator01 udint ● 7,504 origincomparator02 udint ● 7,252 margincomparator01 udint ● 7,508 margincomparator02 udint ● input states of the ...

  • Page 861

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 861 4.11.17.12.2 function model 254 - bus controller unlike the function models 0 and 1, this model only offers a selection of functions with a limited scope of config- uration on the module. The following functions are p...

  • Page 862

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 862 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.17.12.3 general module registers 4.11.17.12.3.1 configuring led status indicators name: cfo_led0source to cfo_led7source these registers can be used to define how the module's led status indicators are used. Blin...

  • Page 863: Information:

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 863 4.11.17.12.4 digital inputs and outputs 4.11.17.12.4.1 configure physical channels name: cfo_cfgchannel01 to cfo_cfgchannel08 this register can be used to configure physical i/o channels 1 to 8. Information: except fo...

  • Page 864

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 864 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.17.12.4.3 set mask of the digital channels name: cfo_outsetmask the settings in this register only affect the values written to registers 4.11.17.12.4.5 "digitaloutput02 to 08". • 0 allows manual setting of digit...

  • Page 865

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 865 4.11.17.12.4.4 input states of the channels name: see "name in the as i/o configuration" this register reads the input status of a physical channel. The polarity settings are accounted for in the value (bit 2 in 4.11....

  • Page 866: Information:

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 866 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.17.12.5 event functions the module provides configurable event functions. An event function can be connected to physical i/o and the values derived from them (e.G. Counters) or be purely used for internal process...

  • Page 867

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 867 4.11.17.12.5.1 list of event ids various hardware and software functions send event ids or require event ids in order to start. The following table shows all of the ids available to configure the module. Event id desc...

  • Page 868: Information:

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 868 x20 system user's manual 3.10 timer there are 8 timer events that the module can generate. Information: the timers have the highest event priority. All other system functions are interrupted when a timer event occurs, and jitter for the amount of ...

  • Page 869

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 869 generate event on rising edge name: cfo_edgedetectrising this register defines whether an event is generated on a rising edge. Data type value usint see bit structure. Bit structure: bit description value information ...

  • Page 870

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 870 x20 system user's manual 3.10 configure event id for input function name: cfo_direktioevent0idwr to cfo_direktioevent1idwr this register holds the event id generated by the direct input function. For a list of all possible event ids, see 4.11.17.1...

  • Page 871

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 871 4.11.17.12.5.4 direct output functions the module has 4 of these event functions the effect of executing this event function is similar to writing to the 4.11.17.12.4.5 "digitaloutput02 to 08" regis- ters. When this e...

  • Page 872

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 872 x20 system user's manual 3.10 configure channels for setting name: cfo_direktiooutsetmask0 to cfo_direktiooutsetmask3 writing "1" to the bit position that corresponds to a channel sets the output if the output event function is being executed. Thi...

  • Page 873

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 873 4.11.17.12.6 counters and encoders the module has 4 internal counter functions, each with 2 event counter registers. Each of these 4 counters is permanently assigned to 2 physical inputs. This assignment cannot be cha...

  • Page 874: Information:

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 874 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.17.12.6.2 sample configurations all of the settings available in automation studio for ab encoders, abr encoders, up/down counters and event counters are based on the two counter functions. The following configur...

  • Page 875: Information:

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 875 i/o configuration - abr encoder the following table shows how the module's various event functions can be linked in order to configure an abr encoder. Register value comment for the function cfo_counter1presetvalue1 c...

  • Page 876: Information:

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 876 x20 system user's manual 3.10 i/o configuration - up/down counter the following table shows how the module's various event functions can be linked in order to configure an up/ down counter. [x] stands for the respective counter function, from 1 to...

  • Page 877

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 877 4.11.17.12.6.3 general event functions each of the 4 counter functions has 2 counter event functions. These consist of: • event id that triggers the counter event function • a window comparator • latch register for sa...

  • Page 878

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 878 x20 system user's manual 3.10 configure calculation of internal counters name: cfo_counter1configreg0 to cfo_counter4configreg0 ("counter 1") cfo_counter1configreg1 to cfo_counter4configreg1 ("counter 2") the calculation of the internal "counter1"...

  • Page 879

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 879 counter register name: different names are used for these 8 registers depending on their function. These 8 registers show the results of the counter value calculation for the respective register. Depending on the func...

  • Page 880

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 880 x20 system user's manual 3.10 configure abr referencing mode name: referencemodeabr01 to referencemodeabr02 the bits in this register are used to configure the reaction to the configured reference pulse. Data type value usint see bit structure. Bi...

  • Page 881

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 881 configure calculation of comparator name: cfo_counter1event0config to cfo_counter4event0config (event function 1) cfo_counter1event1config to cfo_counter4event1config (event function 2) these registers are used to con...

  • Page 882

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 882 x20 system user's manual 3.10 comparator origin name: origincomparator01 to origincomparator02 (abr encoder) origincomparator01 and origincomparator03 (ab encoder and up/down counter) this register is available for the ab and abr encoders and the ...

  • Page 883: Information:

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 883 4.11.17.12.7 ssi encoder interface the module has 2 ssi encoders available, supported directly in the hardware. Two 24 v output channels are set for each ssi encoder and cannot be changed. (see also 4.11.17.7.1 "descr...

  • Page 884

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 884 x20 system user's manual 3.10 configure ssi name: cfo_ssi1cfg to cfo_ssi2cfg this configuration register is used to set the coding, the clock rate and the number of bits. Default = 0. This must be set once using an acyclic write command. Data type...

  • Page 885

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 885 read ssi position name: ssiencoder01 to ssiencoder02 the last transferred ssi position can be read out from this register. The ssi encoder value is displayed as a 32- bit position value. This position value is generat...

  • Page 886

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 886 x20 system user's manual 3.10 configure calculation of ssi comparator name: cfo_ssi1event0config and cfo_ssi2event0config the calculation of the position value used for the comparator can be configured in this register. The window comparator condi...

  • Page 887

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 887 4.11.17.12.8 pwm - pulse width modulation the module has 4 pwm functions available, supported directly by the hardware. A 24 v output channel is set for each pwm encoder and cannot be changed. (see also 4.11.17.7.1 "d...

  • Page 888: Information:

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 888 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.17.12.9 time measurement function the module has a time measurement function for each i/o channel. It can be configured separately for rising and falling edges on each channel. A starting edge can be configured f...

  • Page 889

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 889 4.11.17.12.9.3 configure time measurement function for the rising edge name: cfo_edgetimerisingmode01 to cfo_edgetimerisingmode08 these registers can be used to configure the time measurement function for the rising e...

  • Page 890

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 890 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.17.12.9.6 show first falling trigger edge name: busytriggerfallingch01 to busytriggerfallingch08 if edges are triggered via the bits in the 4.11.17.12.9.4 "triggerfallingch" register, then a set bit in this regis...

  • Page 891

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 891 4.11.17.12.9.11 time stamp of the rising edge name: timestamprisingch01 to timestamprisingch08 when a rising edge occurs on the respective channel, the current counter value of the module timer is copied to these regi...

  • Page 892

    X20 system modules • counter modules • x20dc4395 892 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.11.17.12.10 minimum cycle time the minimum cycle time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced without communication errors occurring. It should be noted that very fast cycles decrease the idle time available fo...

  • Page 893

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus x20 system user's manual 3.10 893 4.12 x20 cpus the x20 cpus are a powerful addition to the x20 system. With the exception of the entry level model, all cpus are based on intel atom ™ processors, which are available in various performance classes. Each cpu is available ...

  • Page 894

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • brief information 894 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.12.1 brief information product id short description on page x20cp1483 x20 cpu, x86 100 mhz intel compatible, 32 mb dram, 128 kb sram, removable application memory: com- pactflash, 1 insert slot for x20 interface mo...

  • Page 895

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • x20cp1483 and x20cp1483-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 895 4.12.2 x20cp1483 and x20cp1483-1 4.12.2.1 general information the x86 100 mhz-compatible x20cp1483 is the entry-level x20 cpu. With an optimal price/performance ratio, it has the same basic features as the la...

  • Page 896

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • x20cp1483 and x20cp1483-1 896 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.12.2.2 order data - x20cp148x model number short description x20 cpus x20cp1483 x20 cpu, x86 100 mhz intel compatible, 32 mb dram, 128 kb sram, removable application memory: compactflash, 1 insert slot for ...

  • Page 897

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • x20cp1483 and x20cp1483-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 897 4.12.2.3 technical data - x20cp148x product id x20cp1483 x20cp1483-1 short description interfaces 1x rs232, 1x ethernet, 1x powerlink (v1/v2), 2x usb, 1x x2x link system module cpu general information cooling...

  • Page 898

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • x20cp1483 and x20cp1483-1 898 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20cp1483 x20cp1483-1 diagnostics rs232 data transfer yes, using status led module run/error yes, using status led and software overload yes, using status led and software electrical isolation i/o ...

  • Page 899

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • x20cp1483 and x20cp1483-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 899 product id x20cp1483 x20cp1483-1 environmental conditions temperature operation horizontal installation -25 to 60°c vertical installation -25 to 50°c derating see section "derating" storage -40 to 85°c transp...

  • Page 900

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • x20cp1483 and x20cp1483-1 900 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.12.2.4 x20 cpus - status leds figure led color status description on application running green blinking boot mode system start: cpu initializing the application, all bus systems and i/o modules 1) on servic...

  • Page 901

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • x20cp1483 and x20cp1483-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 901 4.12.2.4.1.3 powerlink v2 red - error description on the module is in an error mode (failed ethernet frames, increased number of collisions on the network, etc.). If an error occurs in the following states, t...

  • Page 902

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • x20cp1483 and x20cp1483-1 902 x20 system user's manual 3.10 green - status description on mode the module is in pre_operational_2 mode. Pdo mapping is active and cyclic data is being evaluated. Blinking (approx. 2.5 hz) mode the module is in stopped mode. Managing nod...

  • Page 903

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • x20cp1483 and x20cp1483-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 903 4.12.2.5 led status indicators for the integrated power supply figure led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mode r green on run mode off no power ...

  • Page 904: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • x20cp1483 and x20cp1483-1 904 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.12.2.7 slot for application memory these cpus require application memory in order to operate. The application memory is provided in the form of a compactflash card. It is not included with the cpus, but mus...

  • Page 905

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • x20cp1483 and x20cp1483-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 905 4.12.2.10 cpu supply a power supply is integrated in the x20 cpus. It has a feed for the cpu, the x2x link and the internal i/o supply. Supply for the cpu and x2x link is electrically isolated. Pinout gnd +24...

  • Page 906: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • x20cp1483 and x20cp1483-1 906 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.12.2.11 rs232 interface (if1) the non-electrically isolated rs232 interface is primarily intended to serve as an online interface for communication with the programming device. I r e s tx rx gnd figure 295:...

  • Page 907

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • x20cp1483 and x20cp1483-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 907 4.12.2.13 powerlink interface (if3) powerlink v1 switch position description 0x00 operation as managing node. 0x01 - 0xfd node number of the powerlink node. Operation as controlled node. 0xfe - 0xff reserved,...

  • Page 908: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • x20cp1483 and x20cp1483-1 908 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.12.2.14 usb interfaces (if4 and if5) figure 298: x20 cpus - usb interfaces (if4 and if5) if4 and if5 are usb interfaces. The connection is made using a usb 1.1 interface. The usb interfaces can only be used...

  • Page 909: Warning!

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • x20cp1483 and x20cp1483-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 909 4.12.2.17 data / real-time clock buffering the cpus are buffered by a backup battery. The following areas are buffered: • remanent variables • user ram • system ram • real-time clock battery monitoring the ba...

  • Page 910: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • x20cp1483 and x20cp1483-1 910 x20 system user's manual 3.10 procedure for exreplacing the battery 1. Touch the mounting rail or ground connection (not the power supply!) in order to discharge any electrostatic charge from your body. 2. Remove the cover for the lithium...

  • Page 911

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • x20cp1483 and x20cp1483-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 911 4.12.2.19 programming the system flash memory general information in order for the application project to be executed on the cpu, the automation runtime operating system, the system components and the applica...

  • Page 912

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • x20cp158x and x20cp358x 912 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.12.3 x20cp158x and x20cp358x 4.12.3.1 general information based on state-of-the-art intel® atom™ processor technology, x20 cpus cover a wide spectrum of requirements. They can be implemented in solutions rang...

  • Page 913

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • x20cp158x and x20cp358x x20 system user's manual 3.10 913 4.12.3.2 order data - x20cp158x model number short description x20 cpus x20cp1583 x20 cpu, atom 333 mhz compatible, 128 mb ddr2 ram, 1 mb sram, removable application memory: compactflash, 1 insert slot for x20 ...

  • Page 914

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • x20cp158x and x20cp358x 914 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.12.3.3 technical data - x20cp158x product id x20cp1583 x20cp1584 x20cp1585 x20cp1586 short description interfaces 1x rs232, 1x ethernet, 1x powerlink (v1/v2), 2x usb, 1x x2x link system module cpu general inf...

  • Page 915

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • x20cp158x and x20cp358x x20 system user's manual 3.10 915 product id x20cp1583 x20cp1584 x20cp1585 x20cp1586 diagnostics rs232 data transfer yes, using status led module run/error yes, using status led and software yes, with status led and software status yes, using s...

  • Page 916

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • x20cp158x and x20cp358x 916 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20cp1583 x20cp1584 x20cp1585 x20cp1586 installation at elevations above sea level 0 to 2000 m no limitations >2000 m reduction of ambient temperature by 0.5°c per 100 m en 60529 protection ip20 envi...

  • Page 917

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • x20cp158x and x20cp358x x20 system user's manual 3.10 917 4.12.3.4 order data - x20cp358x model number short description x20 cpus x20cp3583 x20 cpu, atom 333 mhz compatible, 128 mb ddr2 ram, 1 mb sram, removable application memory: compactflash, 3 insert slots for x20...

  • Page 918

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • x20cp158x and x20cp358x 918 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.12.3.5 x20cp358x - technical data product id x20cp3583 x20cp3584 x20cp3585 x20cp3586 short description interfaces 1x rs232, 1x ethernet, 1x powerlink (v1/v2), 2x usb, 1x x2x link system module cpu general inf...

  • Page 919

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • x20cp158x and x20cp358x x20 system user's manual 3.10 919 product id x20cp3583 x20cp3584 x20cp3585 x20cp3586 diagnostics rs232 data transfer yes, using status led module run/error yes, using status led and software overload yes, using status led and software electrica...

  • Page 920

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • x20cp158x and x20cp358x 920 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20cp3583 x20cp3584 x20cp3585 x20cp3586 en 60529 protection ip20 environmental conditions temperature operation horizontal installation -25 to 60°c vertical installation -25 to 50°c derating see sect...

  • Page 921

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • x20cp158x and x20cp358x x20 system user's manual 3.10 921 4.12.3.6 x20 cpus - status leds figure led color status description on application running green blinking boot mode system start: cpu initializing the application, all bus systems and i/o modules 1) on service ...

  • Page 922

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • x20cp158x and x20cp358x 922 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.12.3.6.1.3 powerlink v2 red - error description on the module is in an error mode (failed ethernet frames, increased number of collisions on the network, etc.). If an error occurs in the following states, the...

  • Page 923

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • x20cp158x and x20cp358x x20 system user's manual 3.10 923 green - status description on mode the module is in pre_operational_2 mode. Pdo mapping is active and cyclic data is being evaluated. Blinking (approx. 2.5 hz) mode the module is in stopped mode. Managing node ...

  • Page 924

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • x20cp158x and x20cp358x 924 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.12.3.7 led status indicators for the integrated power supply figure led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mode r green on run mode off no power to...

  • Page 925

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • x20cp158x and x20cp358x x20 system user's manual 3.10 925 4.12.3.8 operating and connection elements x20cp158x mounting rail lock operating mode- switch compactflash led status indicators if1 - rs232 ethernet station address if2 - ethernet battery if4 - usb if5 - usb ...

  • Page 926: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • x20cp158x and x20cp358x 926 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.12.3.9 slot for application memory these cpus require application memory in order to operate. The application memory is provided in the form of a compactflash card. It is not included with the cpus, but must ...

  • Page 927

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • x20cp158x and x20cp358x x20 system user's manual 3.10 927 4.12.3.12 cpu supply a power supply is integrated in the x20 cpus. It has a feed for the cpu, the x2x link and the internal i/o supply. Supply for the cpu and x2x link is electrically isolated. Pinout gnd +24 v...

  • Page 928: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • x20cp158x and x20cp358x 928 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.12.3.13 rs232 interface (if1) the non-electrically isolated rs232 interface is primarily intended to serve as an online interface for communication with the programming device. I r e s tx rx gnd figure 309: x...

  • Page 929

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • x20cp158x and x20cp358x x20 system user's manual 3.10 929 4.12.3.15 powerlink interface (if3) powerlink v1 switch position description 0x00 operation as managing node. 0x01 - 0xfd node number of the powerlink node. Operation as controlled node. 0xfe - 0xff reserved, s...

  • Page 930: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • x20cp158x and x20cp358x 930 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.12.3.16 usb interfaces (if4 and if5) figure 311: x20 cpus - usb interfaces (if4 and if5) if4 and if5 are usb interfaces. The connection is made using a usb 1.1/2.0 interface. The usb interfaces can only be us...

  • Page 931: Warning!

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • x20cp158x and x20cp358x x20 system user's manual 3.10 931 4.12.3.19 data / real-time clock buffering the cpus are buffered by a backup battery. The following areas are buffered: • remanent variables • user ram • system ram • real-time clock battery monitoring the batt...

  • Page 932: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • x20cp158x and x20cp358x 932 x20 system user's manual 3.10 procedure for exreplacing the battery 1. Touch the mounting rail or ground connection (not the power supply!) in order to discharge any electrostatic charge from your body. 2. Remove the cover for the lithium b...

  • Page 933

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • x20cp158x and x20cp358x x20 system user's manual 3.10 933 4.12.3.21 programming the system flash memory general information in order for the application project to be executed on the cpu, the automation runtime operating system, the system components and the applicati...

  • Page 934

    X20 system modules • x20 cpus • x20cp158x and x20cp358x 934 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.12.3.22 information regarding switching from x20cpx48x to x20cpx58x • a hardware upgrade is required for some x20 ifxxxx interface modules. This can be installed from au- tomation studio by selecting tools/up...

  • Page 935

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • brief information x20 system user's manual 3.10 935 4.13 digital input modules digital input modules convert binary process signals into the internal signal level required by the plc. The states of the digital inputs are indicated with status leds. 4.13.1...

  • Page 936

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di2371 936 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.2 x20di2371 4.13.2.1 general information the module is equipped with 2 inputs for 3-wire connections. This module is designed for x20 6-pin terminal blocks. If needed (e.G. For logistical reasons), the 12-p...

  • Page 937

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di2371 x20 system user's manual 3.10 937 4.13.2.3 technical data product id x20di2371 short description i/o module 2 digital inputs 24 vdc for 3-wire connections general information b&r id code 0x1b8d status indicators i/o function per channel, operati...

  • Page 938

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di2371 938 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.2.4 status leds for a description of the various operating modes, see the 2.11.1 "re leds" section. Image led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode blinking preoperational ...

  • Page 939

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di2371 x20 system user's manual 3.10 939 4.13.2.7 input circuit diagram input x gnd gnd i/o status led (green) 24 v 24 v ptc gnd vdr input status 4.13.2.8 input filter an input filter is available for each input. The input delay can be set using regist...

  • Page 940

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di2371 940 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.2.9 register description 4.13.2.9.1 function model 0 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic digitalinput usint digitalinput01 bit 0 0 1 digitalinput02 bit 1...

  • Page 941

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di2371 x20 system user's manual 3.10 941 4.13.2.9.3.2 input status of digital inputs 1 to 2 name: digitalinput or digitalinput01 to digitalinput02 the input status of digital inputs 1 to 2 is mapped in this register. Function model 0 - standard only: t...

  • Page 942

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di2372 942 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.3 x20di2372 4.13.3.1 general information the module is equipped with 2 inputs for 3-wire connections. This module is designed for x20 6-pin terminal blocks. If needed (e.G. For logistical reasons), the 12-p...

  • Page 943

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di2372 x20 system user's manual 3.10 943 4.13.3.3 technical data product id x20di2372 short description i/o module 2 digital inputs 24 vdc for 3-wire connections general information b&r id code 0x22a7 status indicators i/o function per channel, operati...

  • Page 944

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di2372 944 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.3.4 status leds for a description of the various operating modes, see section 2.11.1 "re leds". Image led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mode...

  • Page 945

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di2372 x20 system user's manual 3.10 945 4.13.3.7 input circuit diagram gnd gnd 24 v 24 v ptc gnd vdr input x i/o status led (green) input status 4.13.3.8 input filter an input filter is available for each input. The input delay can be set using regist...

  • Page 946

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di2372 946 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.3.9 register description 4.13.3.9.1 function model 0 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic digitalinput usint digitalinput01 bit 0 0 1 digitalinput02 bit 1...

  • Page 947

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di2372 x20 system user's manual 3.10 947 4.13.3.9.3.2 input status of digital inputs 1 to 2 name: digitalinput or digitalinput01 to digitalinput02 the input status of digital inputs 1 to 2 is mapped in this register. Function model 0 - standard only: t...

  • Page 948

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di2377 948 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.4 x20di2377 4.13.4.1 general information the module is equipped with two inputs for 3-wire connections. Both inputs can be configured as event counters. Gate measurement is only ever possible on one channel...

  • Page 949

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di2377 x20 system user's manual 3.10 949 product id x20di2377 input filter hardware ≤10 μs software default 0 ms, can be configured between 0 and 25 ms in 0.2 ms intervals connection type 3-wire connections input circuit sink additional functions 50 kh...

  • Page 950

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di2377 950 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.4.4 status leds for a description of the various operating modes, see section 2.11.1 "re leds". Image led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mode...

  • Page 951: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di2377 x20 system user's manual 3.10 951 4.13.4.7 input circuit diagram input x gnd gnd gnd vdr i/o status led (green) input status 24 v 24 v ptc 4.13.4.8 input filter an input filter is available for each input. The input delay can be set using regist...

  • Page 952

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di2377 952 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.4.9 register description 4.13.4.9.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic digitalinput usint digitalinput01 bit 0 0 digitalinput02 bit 1 ● 4 counter01 ...

  • Page 953

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di2377 x20 system user's manual 3.10 953 4.13.4.9.4 digital inputs unfiltered the input state is collected with a fixed offset to the network cycle and transferred in the same cycle. Filtered the filtered status is collected with a fixed offset to the ...

  • Page 954: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di2377 954 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.4.9.5 counter operation the following operation modes can be selected: • event counter mode • event counter mode with software (processed after the input filter) • gate measurement event counter mode the ri...

  • Page 955

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di2377 x20 system user's manual 3.10 955 4.13.4.9.6 positive edge input latch using this function, the positive edges of the input signal can be latched with a resolution of 200 µs. With the "acknowledge - input latch" function, the input latch is eith...

  • Page 956: Danger!

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di2653 956 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.5 x20di2653 4.13.5.1 general information the module is equipped with 2 inputs for 3-wire connections. It is designed for an input voltage of 100 to 240 vac. • 2 digital inputs • 100 to 240 vac inputs • 50 h...

  • Page 957

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di2653 x20 system user's manual 3.10 957 4.13.5.3 technical data product id x20di2653 short description i/o module 2 digital inputs 100 to 240 vac for 3-wire connections general information b&r id code 0x2544 status indicators i/o function per channel,...

  • Page 958

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di2653 958 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.5.4 status leds for a description of the various operating modes, see section 2.11.1 "re leds". Image led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mode...

  • Page 959

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di2653 x20 system user's manual 3.10 959 4.13.5.7 input circuit diagram n l u ok input x input status diagnostics status voltage monitoring 4.13.5.8 input filter an input filter is available for each input. The input delay can be set using register 4.1...

  • Page 960

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di2653 960 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.5.9 register description 4.13.5.9.1 function model 0 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic digitalinput usint digitalinput01 bit 0 digitalinput02 bit 1 0 1...

  • Page 961

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di2653 x20 system user's manual 3.10 961 4.13.5.9.3.2 input status of digital inputs 1 to 2 name: digitalinput or digitalinput01 to digitalinput02 powersupply the input status of digital inputs 1 to 2 is mapped in this register. Function model 0 - stan...

  • Page 962

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di4371 962 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.6 x20di4371 4.13.6.1 general information the module is equipped with four inputs for 3-wire connections. • 4 digital inputs • sink connection • 3-wire connections • 4 counter inputs with 1 khz counter frequ...

  • Page 963

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di4371 x20 system user's manual 3.10 963 product id x20di4371 switching threshold low high >15 vdc isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 v eff event counter quantity 4 signal form square wave pulse evaluation configurable edge event, cyclic cou...

  • Page 964

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di4371 964 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.6.4 status leds for a description of the various operating modes, see section 2.11.1 "re leds". Image led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mode...

  • Page 965

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di4371 x20 system user's manual 3.10 965 4.13.6.7 input circuit diagram input x gnd gnd i/o status led (green) 24 v 24 v ptc gnd vdr input status 4.13.6.8 input filter an input filter is available for each input. The input delay can be set using regist...

  • Page 966

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di4371 966 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.6.9 register description 4.13.6.9.1 function model 0 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic digitalinput usint digitalinput01 bit 0 ... ... 0 1 digitalinput...

  • Page 967

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di4371 x20 system user's manual 3.10 967 4.13.6.9.4.1 digital input filter name: configoutput01 this register can be used to specify the filter value for all digital inputs. The filter value can be configured in steps of 100 μs. It makes sense to enter...

  • Page 968: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di4371 968 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.6.9.5.2 resets the counter registers name: resetcounter01 to resetcounter04 using these data points, the corresponding counter registers can be reset to 0. Data type value usint see bit structure. Bit struc...

  • Page 969

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di4372 x20 system user's manual 3.10 969 4.13.7 x20di4372 4.13.7.1 general information the module is equipped with 4 inputs for 3-wire connections. • 4 digital inputs • source connection • 3-wire connections • 24 vdc and gnd for sensor supply • softwar...

  • Page 970

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di4372 970 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.7.3 technical data product id x20di4372 short description i/o module 4 digital inputs 24 vdc for 3-wire connections general information b&r id code 0x22a8 status indicators i/o function per channel, operati...

  • Page 971

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di4372 x20 system user's manual 3.10 971 4.13.7.4 status leds for a description of the various operating modes, see section 2.11.1 "re leds". Image led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mode...

  • Page 972

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di4372 972 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.7.7 input circuit diagram gnd gnd 24 v 24 v ptc gnd vdr input x i/o status led (green) input status 4.13.7.8 input filter an input filter is available for each input. The input delay can be set using regist...

  • Page 973

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di4372 x20 system user's manual 3.10 973 4.13.7.9 register description 4.13.7.9.1 function model 0 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic digitalinput usint digitalinput01 bit 0 ... ... 0 1 digitalinput...

  • Page 974

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di4372 974 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.7.9.3.2 input status of digital inputs 1 to 4 name: digitalinput or digitalinput01 to digitalinput04 the input status of digital inputs 1 to 4 is mapped in this register. Function model 0 - standard only: t...

  • Page 975

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di4375 x20 system user's manual 3.10 975 4.13.8 x20di4375 4.13.8.1 general information the module is equipped with four inputs for 3-wire connections. It has open circuit and short circuit detection. This detection can be switched off individually for ...

  • Page 976

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di4375 976 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.8.3 technical data product id x20di4375 short description i/o module 4 digital inputs 24 vdc for 3-line connections, open line and short cir- cuit detection, detection can be switched off individually for e...

  • Page 977

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di4375 x20 system user's manual 3.10 977 4.13.8.4 status leds for a description of the various operating modes, see section 2.11.1 "re leds". Image led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode double flash boot mode (duri...

  • Page 978

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di4375 978 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.8.7 input circuit diagram input x 24 v 24 v ptc gnd vdr gnd gnd gnd r i gnd a/d converter input value i/o status led (green) gnd gnd gnd sensor supply status (s1 - s4) sensor supply status (s1 - s4) led (re...

  • Page 979

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di4375 x20 system user's manual 3.10 979 connection options to guarantee error-free functionality of the open circuit and short circuit detection, the +24 vdc sensor supply from the module must absolutely be used. Sensor connections description detecti...

  • Page 980

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di4375 980 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.8.13 register description 4.13.8.13.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic digitalinput usint digitalinput01 bit 0 ... ... Digitalinput04 bit 3 stated...

  • Page 981

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di4375 x20 system user's manual 3.10 981 4.13.8.13.3 digital inputs unfiltered the input state is collected with a fixed offset to the network cycle and transferred in the same cycle. Filtered the filtered status is collected with a fixed offset to the...

  • Page 982

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di4375 982 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.8.13.4 short circuit monitoring of channels 1 to 4 name: statusinput01 or sc_digitalinput01 to sc_digitalinput04 this register indicates whether a short circuit has occurred on the individual channels. Func...

  • Page 983

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di4375 x20 system user's manual 3.10 983 4.13.8.13.6 voltage monitoring on channels 1 to 4 name: statusinput03 or sm_digitalinput01 to sm_digitalinput04 this register monitors the voltage supply on the individual channels. Function model 0 - standard o...

  • Page 984: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di4375 984 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.8.13.9 configuration of line status monitoring name: configoutput01 this register is used to configure short circuit monitoring and line status monitoring on the inputs. Data type value uint see bit structu...

  • Page 985

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di4375 x20 system user's manual 3.10 985 4.13.8.13.10 minimum cycle time the minimum cycle time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced without communication errors occurring. It should be noted that very fast cycles decrease the idle time availab...

  • Page 986: Danger!

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di4653 986 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.9 x20di4653 4.13.9.1 general information the module is equipped with 4 inputs for 2-wire connections. It is designed for an input voltage of 100 to 240 vac. • 4 digital inputs • 100 to 240 vac inputs • 50 h...

  • Page 987

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di4653 x20 system user's manual 3.10 987 4.13.9.3 technical data product id x20di4653 short description i/o module 4 digital inputs 100 to 240 vac for 2-wire connections general information b&r id code 0x2545 status indicators i/o function per channel,...

  • Page 988

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di4653 988 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.9.4 status leds for a description of the various operating modes, see section 2.11.1 "re leds". Image led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mode...

  • Page 989

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di4653 x20 system user's manual 3.10 989 4.13.9.7 input circuit diagram n l u ok input x input status diagnostics status voltage monitoring 4.13.9.8 input filter an input filter is available for each input. The input delay can be set using register 4.1...

  • Page 990

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di4653 990 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.9.9 register description 4.13.9.9.1 function model 0 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic digitalinput usint digitalinput01 bit 0 ... ... Digitalinput04 b...

  • Page 991

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di4653 x20 system user's manual 3.10 991 4.13.9.9.3.2 input status of digital inputs 1 to 4 name: digitalinput or digitalinput01 to digitalinput04 powersupply the input status of digital inputs 1 to 4 is mapped in this register. Function model 0 - stan...

  • Page 992

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di4760 992 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.10 x20di4760 4.13.10.1 general information the module is used to transfer digital signals from namur encoders according to en 60947-5-6. In addition to namur encoders, normal switches can also be used. • 4 ...

  • Page 993

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di4760 x20 system user's manual 3.10 993 product id x20di4760 namur inputs open line detection input circuit for namur encoders in accordance with en 60947-5-6 isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 v eff short circuit detection >7 ma no load vo...

  • Page 994

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di4760 994 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.10.4 status leds for a description of the various operating modes, see section 2.11.1 "re leds". Image led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mod...

  • Page 995

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di4760 x20 system user's manual 3.10 995 4.13.10.7 input circuit diagram kx + kx - i/o status led (green) ptc signal- evaluation line state led (red) 4.13.10.8 input filter an input filter is available for each input. The input delay can be set using r...

  • Page 996

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di4760 996 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.10.9 examples of possible signal generators proximity switch switch in accordance with en 60947-5-6 (namur) + input x - input x mechanical contacts (instead of namur encoders) without open line detection an...

  • Page 997

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di4760 x20 system user's manual 3.10 997 4.13.10.10 register description 4.13.10.10.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic digitalinput usint digitalinput01 bit 0 ... ... 0 digitalinput04 bit 3 ● ...

  • Page 998

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di4760 998 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.10.10.3 digital inputs unfiltered the input state is collected with a fixed offset to the network cycle and transferred in the same cycle. Filtered the filtered status is collected with a fixed offset to th...

  • Page 999

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di4760 x20 system user's manual 3.10 999 4.13.10.10.5 status of channels 1 to 4 name: statusinput01 or shortcircuit01 to shortcircuit04 openline01 to openline04 this register indicates whether an open line or overflow has occurred on the individual cha...

  • Page 1000

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di4760 1000 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.10.10.6 function expansion firmware version 802 is offered for hardware variant 7 or higher of the module. This and subsequent firmware versions provide the user with new configuration possibilities. 4.13....

  • Page 1001

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di6371 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1001 4.13.11 x20di6371 4.13.11.1 general information the module is equipped with six inputs for 1 or 2-wire connections. The x20 6-pin terminal block can be used for universal 1-line wiring. Two-line wiring can be i...

  • Page 1002

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di6371 1002 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.11.3 technical data product id x20di6371 short description i/o module 6 digital inputs 24 vdc for 1- or 2-wire connections general information b&r id code 0x1b93 status indicators i/o function per channel,...

  • Page 1003

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di6371 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1003 4.13.11.4 status leds for a description of the various operating modes, see section 2.11.1 "re leds". Image led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mo...

  • Page 1004

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di6371 1004 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.11.7 input circuit diagram input x gnd 24 v 24 v ptc gnd vdr i/o status led (green) input status 4.13.11.8 input filter an input filter is available for each input. The input delay can be set using registe...

  • Page 1005

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di6371 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1005 4.13.11.9 register description 4.13.11.9.1 function model 0 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic digitalinput usint digitalinput01 bit 0 ... ... 0 1 digitalin...

  • Page 1006

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di6371 1006 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.11.9.3.2 input status of digital inputs 1 to 6 name: digitalinput or digitalinput01 to digitalinput06 the input status of digital inputs 1 to 6 is mapped in this register. Function model 0 - standard only:...

  • Page 1007

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di6372 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1007 4.13.12 x20di6372 4.13.12.1 general information the module is equipped with six inputs for 1 or 2-wire connections. The x20 6-pin terminal block can be used for universal 1-line wiring. Two-line wiring can be i...

  • Page 1008

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di6372 1008 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.12.3 technical data product id x20di6372 short description i/o module 6 digital inputs 24 vdc for 1- or 2-wire connections general information b&r id code 0x1b94 status indicators i/o function per channel,...

  • Page 1009

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di6372 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1009 4.13.12.4 status leds for a description of the various operating modes, see section 2.11.1 "re leds". Image led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mo...

  • Page 1010

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di6372 1010 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.12.7 input circuit diagram input x gnd gnd 24 v gnd vdr i/o status led (green) input status 4.13.12.8 input filter an input filter is available for each input. The input delay can be set using register 4.1...

  • Page 1011

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di6372 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1011 4.13.12.9 register description 4.13.12.9.1 function model 0 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic digitalinput usint digitalinput01 bit 0 ... ... 0 1 digitalin...

  • Page 1012

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di6372 1012 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.12.9.3.2 input status of digital inputs 1 to 6 name: digitalinput or digitalinput01 to digitalinput06 the input status of digital inputs 1 to 6 is mapped in this register. Function model 0 - standard only:...

  • Page 1013

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di6373 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1013 4.13.13 x20di6373 4.13.13.1 general information the module has 6 inputs. The input circuit can be sink or source thanks to the potential-free design of the inputs. • 6 digital inputs • sink/source connection • ...

  • Page 1014

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di6373 1014 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.13.3 technical data product id x20di6373 short description i/o module 6 digital floating inputs 24 vdc general information b&r id code 0xa7a2 status indicators i/o function per channel, operating state, mo...

  • Page 1015

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di6373 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1015 4.13.13.4 status leds for a description of the various operating modes, see section 2.11.1 "re leds". Image led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mo...

  • Page 1016

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di6373 1016 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.13.7 input circuit diagram input x+ input x- vdr i/o status led (green) input status 4.13.13.8 input filter an input filter is available for each input. The input delay can be set using register 4.13.13.9....

  • Page 1017

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di6373 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1017 4.13.13.9 register description 4.13.13.9.1 function model 0 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic digitalinput usint digitalinput01 bit 0 ... ... 0 1 digitalin...

  • Page 1018

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di6373 1018 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.13.9.3.2 input status of digital inputs 1 to 6 name: digitalinput or digitalinput01 to digitalinput06 the input status of digital inputs 1 to 6 is mapped in this register. Function model 0 - standard only:...

  • Page 1019: Danger!

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di6553 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1019 4.13.14 x20di6553 4.13.14.1 general information the module is equipped with 6 inputs for 1-wire connections. It is designed for an input voltage of 100 to 120 vac. • 6 digital inputs • 100 to 120 vac inputs • 5...

  • Page 1020

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di6553 1020 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.14.3 technical data product id x20di6553 short description i/o module 6 digital inputs 100 to 120 vac for 1-wire connections general information b&r id code 0x256f status indicators i/o function per channe...

  • Page 1021

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di6553 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1021 4.13.14.4 status leds for a description of the various operating modes, see section 2.11.1 "re leds". Image led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mo...

  • Page 1022

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di6553 1022 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.14.7 input circuit diagram n l u ok input x input status diagnostics status voltage monitoring 4.13.14.8 input filter an input filter is available for each input. The input delay can be set using register ...

  • Page 1023

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di6553 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1023 4.13.14.9 register description 4.13.14.9.1 function model 0 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic digitalinput usint digitalinput01 bit 0 ... ... Digitalinput0...

  • Page 1024

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di6553 1024 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.14.9.3.2 input status of digital inputs 1 to 6 name: digitalinput or digitalinput01 to digitalinput06 powersupply the input status of digital inputs 1 to 6 is mapped in this register. Function model 0 - st...

  • Page 1025

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di8371 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1025 4.13.15 x20di8371 4.13.15.1 general information the module is equipped with eight inputs for 1-wire connections. The module is designed for sink input wiring. • 8 digital inputs • sink connection • 1-wire conne...

  • Page 1026

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di8371 1026 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.15.3 technical data product id x20di8371 short description i/o module 8 digital inputs 24 vdc for 1-wire connections general information b&r id code 0xa4ab status indicators i/o function per channel, opera...

  • Page 1027

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di8371 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1027 4.13.15.4 status leds for a description of the various operating modes, see section 2.11.1 "re leds". Image led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mo...

  • Page 1028

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di8371 1028 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.15.7 input circuit diagram input x gnd gnd vdr i/o status led (green) input status 4.13.15.8 input filter an input filter is available for each input. The input delay can be set using register 4.13.15.9.3....

  • Page 1029

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di8371 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1029 4.13.15.9 register description 4.13.15.9.1 function model 0 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic digitalinput usint digitalinput01 bit 0 ... ... 0 1 digitalin...

  • Page 1030

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di8371 1030 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.15.9.3.2 input state of digital inputs 1 to 8 name: digitalinput or digitalinput01 to digitalinput08 this register is used to indicate the input state of digital inputs 1 to 8. Function model 0 - standard ...

  • Page 1031

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di9371 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1031 4.13.16 x20di9371 4.13.16.1 general information the module is equipped with 12 inputs for 1-wire connections. The module is designed for sink input wiring. • 12 digital inputs • sink connection • 1-wire connect...

  • Page 1032

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di9371 1032 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20di9371 switching threshold low high >15 vdc isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 v eff operating conditions mounting orientation horizontal yes vertical yes installation at elevations abo...

  • Page 1033

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di9371 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1033 4.13.16.5 pinout 1 7 9 x 20 d i 9 37 1 1 1 0 11 2 2 3 4 5 6 8 di 1 di 3 di 5 di 2 di 4 di 6 di 7 di 9 di 11 di 8 di 10 di 12 r e 4.13.16.6 connection example gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc di sensor 5 sensor 7 sensor ...

  • Page 1034

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di9371 1034 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.16.8 input filter an input filter is available for each input. The input delay can be set using register 4.13.16.10.3.1 "configoutput01". Disturbance pulses which are shorter than the input delay are suppr...

  • Page 1035

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di9371 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1035 4.13.16.10 register description 4.13.16.10.1 function model 0 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic - 1 digitalinput uint input status of digital inputs 1 to 8...

  • Page 1036

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di9371 1036 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.16.10.3.2 input status of digital inputs 1 to 12 name: digitalinput or digitalinput01 to digitalinput12 the input status of digital inputs 1 to 12 is mapped in this register. Function model 0 - standard on...

  • Page 1037

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di9372 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1037 4.13.17 x20di9372 4.13.17.1 general information the module is equipped with 12 inputs for 1-wire connections. The module is designed for source input wiring. • 12 digital inputs • source connection • 1-wire con...

  • Page 1038

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di9372 1038 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20di9372 isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 v eff operating conditions mounting orientation horizontal yes vertical yes installation at elevations above sea level 0 to 2000 m no limitatio...

  • Page 1039

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di9372 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1039 4.13.17.5 pinout 1 7 9 x 20 d i 9 37 2 1 1 0 11 2 2 3 4 5 6 8 di 1 di 3 di 5 di 2 di 4 di 6 di 7 di 9 di 11 di 8 di 10 di 12 r e 4.13.17.6 connection example gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc di sensor 5 sensor 7 sensor ...

  • Page 1040

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di9372 1040 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.17.8 input filter an input filter is available for each input. The input delay can be set using register 4.13.17.10.3.1 "configoutput01". Disturbance pulses which are shorter than the input delay are suppr...

  • Page 1041

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di9372 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1041 4.13.17.10 register description 4.13.17.10.1 function model 0 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic - 1 digitalinput uint input status of digital inputs 1 to 8...

  • Page 1042

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20di9372 1042 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.17.10.3.2 input status of digital inputs 1 to 12 name: digitalinput or digitalinput01 to digitalinput12 the input status of digital inputs 1 to 12 is mapped in this register. Function model 0 - standard on...

  • Page 1043

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20did371 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1043 4.13.18 x20did371 4.13.18.1 general information the module is equipped with 8 inputs for 1-wire or 2-wire connections. The module is designed for sink input wiring. • 8 digital inputs • sink connection • 2-wire...

  • Page 1044

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20did371 1044 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.18.3 technical data product id x20did371 short description i/o module 8 digital inputs 24 vdc for 1- or 2-wire connections general information b&r id code 0xc0e7 status indicators i/o function per channel,...

  • Page 1045

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20did371 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1045 4.13.18.4 status leds for a description of the various operating modes, see section 2.11.1 "re leds". Image led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mo...

  • Page 1046

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20did371 1046 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.18.7 input circuit diagram input x gnd 24 v 24 v ptc i/o status led (green) input status 4.13.18.8 input filter an input filter is available for each input. The input delay can be set using register 4.13.1...

  • Page 1047

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20did371 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1047 4.13.18.9 register description 4.13.18.9.1 function model 0 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic digitalinput usint digitalinput01 bit 0 ... ... 0 1 digitalin...

  • Page 1048

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20did371 1048 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.18.9.3.2 input state of digital inputs 1 to 8 name: digitalinput or digitalinput01 to digitalinput08 this register is used to indicate the input state of digital inputs 1 to 8. Function model 0 - standard ...

  • Page 1049

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20dif371 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1049 4.13.19 x20dif371 4.13.19.1 general information the module is equipped with 16 inputs for 1-wire connections. The module is designed for sink input wiring. • 16 digital inputs • sink connection • 1-wire connect...

  • Page 1050

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20dif371 1050 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.19.3 technical data product id x20dif371 short description i/o module 16 digital inputs 24 vdc for 1-wire connections general information b&r id code 0xc0e8 status indicators i/o function per channel, oper...

  • Page 1051

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20dif371 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1051 4.13.19.4 status leds for a description of the various operating modes, see section 2.11.1 "re leds". Image led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mo...

  • Page 1052

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20dif371 1052 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.19.7 input circuit diagram input x gnd gnd input status i/o status led (green) gnd 4.13.19.8 input filter an input filter is available for each input. The input delay can be set using register 4.13.19.9.3....

  • Page 1053

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20dif371 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1053 4.13.19.9 register description 4.13.19.9.1 function model 0 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic - 1 digitalinput uint input status of digital inputs 1 to 8 u...

  • Page 1054

    X20 system modules • digital input modules • x20dif371 1054 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.13.19.9.3.2 input status of digital inputs 1 to 16 name: digitalinput or digitalinput01 to digitalinput16 the input status of digital inputs 9 to 16 is mapped in this register. Function model 0 - standard onl...

  • Page 1055

    X20 system modules • digital mixed modules • brief information x20 system user's manual 3.10 1055 4.14 digital mixed modules digital mixed modules are a combination of digital input and output modules. The states of the digital inputs or outputs are shown by the status leds. 4.14.1 brief information...

  • Page 1056

    X20 system modules • digital mixed modules • x20dm9324 1056 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.14.2 x20dm9324 4.14.2.1 general information this module is equipped with 8 inputs and 4 outputs for 1-wire connections. The inputs are designed for sink connections, the outputs for source connections. • 8 di...

  • Page 1057

    X20 system modules • digital mixed modules • x20dm9324 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1057 product id x20dm9324 input resistance typ. 6.4 kΩ switching threshold low high >15 vdc isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 v eff digital outputs design fet positive switching switching voltage 24 vdc ...

  • Page 1058

    X20 system modules • digital mixed modules • x20dm9324 1058 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.14.2.4 status leds for a description of the various operating modes, see the 2.11.1 "re leds" section. Figure led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode blinking preoperationa...

  • Page 1059

    X20 system modules • digital mixed modules • x20dm9324 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1059 4.14.2.7 input circuit diagram input x gnd gnd vdr i/o status led (green) input status 4.14.2.8 output circuit diagram logic high-side 24 v gnd vdr output x gnd i/o status led (orange) output monitoring output ...

  • Page 1060

    X20 system modules • digital mixed modules • x20dm9324 1060 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.14.2.10 register description 4.14.2.10.1 function model 0 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic digitalinput usint digitalinput01 bit 0 ... ... 0 1 digitalin...

  • Page 1061

    X20 system modules • digital mixed modules • x20dm9324 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1061 4.14.2.10.3.1 input state of digital inputs 1 to 8 name: digitalinput or digitalinput01 to digitalinput08 this register is used to indicate the input state of digital inputs 1 to 8. Function model 0 - standard ...

  • Page 1062

    X20 system modules • digital mixed modules • x20dm9324 1062 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.14.2.10.5 monitoring status of the digital outputs on the module, the output states of the outputs are compared to the setpoint states. The control of the output driver is used for the setpoint states. A chan...

  • Page 1063

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • brief information x20 system user's manual 3.10 1063 4.15 digital output modules digital output modules are used to control external loads (relays, motors, solenoids). The states of the digital outputs are indicated by status leds. 4.15.1 brief informati...

  • Page 1064

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • calculation of the additional power dissipation resulting from actuators 1064 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.2 calculation of the additional power dissipation resulting from actuators calculation of power dissipation when specifying r ds(on) explaini...

  • Page 1065

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • calculation of the additional power dissipation resulting from actuators x20 system user's manual 3.10 1065 power dissipation calculation when specifying the contact resistance explaining output load with an x20do4649 example gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc do 2...

  • Page 1066

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2321 1066 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.3 x20do2321 4.15.3.1 general information the module is equipped with 2 outputs for 3-wire connections. It is designed for x20 6-pin terminal blocks. If needed (e.G. For logistical reasons), the 12-pin ter...

  • Page 1067

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2321 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1067 product id x20do2321 output protection thermal cutoff for overcurrent or short circuit (see value "peak short circuit current") internal inverse diode for switching ind. Loads (see section "switching inductive...

  • Page 1068

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2321 1068 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.3.4 status leds figure led color status description off module supply not connected single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mode on run mode r green flickering (ap- prox. 10 hz) module is in osp s...

  • Page 1069: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2321 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1069 4.15.3.8 output circuit diagram logic low-side 24 v gnd gnd vdr output x 24 v 24 v gnd i/o status led (orange) output monitoring output status ptc gnd gnd gnd figure 319: output circuit diagram 4.15.3.9 switch...

  • Page 1070

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2321 1070 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.3.10 register description 4.15.3.10.1 function model 0 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic digitaloutput usint digitaloutput01 bit 0 2 0 digitaloutput0...

  • Page 1071

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2321 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1071 4.15.3.10.4 digital outputs the output status is transferred to the output channels with a fixed offset ( (syncout). 4.15.3.10.4.1 switching state of digital outputs 1 to 2 name: digitaloutput digitaloutput01 ...

  • Page 1072: Warning!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2321 1072 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.3.10.6 "osp" function model in the "osp" function model (operator set predefined), the user defines an analog value or digital pattern. This osp value is output as soon as communication between the module...

  • Page 1073: Warning!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2321 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1073 4.15.3.10.6.2 setting the osp mode name: cfgospmode this register essentially controls a channel's behavior when osp is being used. Data type value description 0 replace with static value usint 1 retain last v...

  • Page 1074

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2322 1074 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.4 x20do2322 4.15.4.1 general information the module is equipped with 2 outputs for 3-wire connections. It is designed for x20 6-pin terminal blocks. If needed (e.G. For logistical reasons), the 12-pin ter...

  • Page 1075

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1075 product id x20do2322 output protection thermal cutoff for overcurrent or short circuit (see value "peak short circuit current") internal inverse diode for switching ind. Loads (see section "switching inductive...

  • Page 1076: Caution!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2322 1076 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.4.4 status leds figure led color status description off module supply not connected single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mode on run mode r green flickering (ap- prox. 10 hz) module is in osp s...

  • Page 1077: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1077 4.15.4.7 osp hardware requirements in order to best use osp mode, make sure when creating the application that the output module and cpu have separate power supplies. 4.15.4.8 output circuit diagram logic high...

  • Page 1078

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2322 1078 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.4.10 register description 4.15.4.10.1 function model 0 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic digitaloutput usint digitaloutput01 bit 0 2 0 digitaloutput0...

  • Page 1079

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1079 4.15.4.10.4 digital outputs the output status is transferred to the output channels with a fixed offset ( (syncout). 4.15.4.10.4.1 switching state of digital outputs 1 to 2 name: digitaloutput digitaloutput01 ...

  • Page 1080: Warning!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2322 1080 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.4.10.6 "osp" function model in the "osp" function model (operator set predefined), the user defines an analog value or digital pattern. This osp value is output as soon as communication between the module...

  • Page 1081: Warning!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1081 4.15.4.10.6.2 setting the osp mode name: cfgospmode this register essentially controls a channel's behavior when osp is being used. Data type value description 0 replace with static value usint 1 retain last v...

  • Page 1082: Danger!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2623 1082 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.5 x20do2623 4.15.5.1 general information the module is a digital output module that is equipped with 2 ssr outputs with zero cross-over switches and uses 3-line connections. The module is also equipped wi...

  • Page 1083

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2623 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1083 4.15.5.3 technical data product id x20do2623 brief description i/o module 2 digital ssr outputs 100 - 240 vac, 3-wire connections general information b&r id code 0x267b status indicators i/o function per chann...

  • Page 1084

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2623 1084 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20do2623 mechanical characteristics note order 1x x20tb32 terminal block separately order 1x x20bm12 bus module separately spacing 12.5 +0.2 mm table 344: x20do2623 - technical data 1) number of ou...

  • Page 1085

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2623 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1085 4.15.5.6 connection example gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc do l n l n l n l n actuator actuator figure 324: connection example 4.15.5.7 output circuit diagram output status zero ssr zc output x l n i/o status (led or...

  • Page 1086

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2623 1086 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.5.8 integrated full-wave control full-wave control is used to control power for electrical power consumers that are operated with ac voltage. Tem- perature control is a typical application unlike phase-an...

  • Page 1087

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2623 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1087 4.15.5.9 register description 4.15.5.9.1 function model 0 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic digitaloutput usint digitaloutput01 bit 0 2 0 digitaloutput02 ...

  • Page 1088: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2623 1088 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.5.9.3 digital outputs the output status is transferred to the control switch asynchronously to the connected network. The outputs switch on when the voltage crosses zero and switch off when the current cr...

  • Page 1089

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2623 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1089 4.15.5.9.4.2 setting the output configuration name: output configuration 1 - 2 configoutput01 each channel can be configured for either "digital" or "analog" operation in this register. The corresponding digit...

  • Page 1090

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2623 1090 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.5.9.6 minimum cycle time the minimum cycle time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced without communication errors occurring. It should be noted that very fast cycles decrease the idle time availab...

  • Page 1091: Danger!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2633 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1091 4.15.6 x20do2633 4.15.6.1 general information the module is a digital output module with phase-angle control that is equipped with 2 triac outputs using 3-line connections. The supply (l and n) is fed directly...

  • Page 1092

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2633 1092 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.6.3 technical data product id x20do2633 brief description i/o module 2 digital outputs 12-240 vac for 3-wire connections general information b&r id code 0xac39 status indicators i/o function per channel, ...

  • Page 1093

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2633 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1093 product id x20do2633 environmental conditions temperature operation horizontal installation -25 to 60°c vertical installation -25 to 50°c derating see section "derating" storage -40 to 85°c transport -40 to 85...

  • Page 1094

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2633 1094 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.6.6 connection example 2-wire connections gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc do l n l n actuator actuator t 10 a 3-wire connections gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc do l n l n l n l n actuator actuator t 10 a 4.15.6.7 osp ha...

  • Page 1095: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2633 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1095 4.15.6.9 external fuses the following protective circuit must be used for safe operation: protective circuit value for the supply lines fuse t 10 a for the outputs fuse melting integral i 2 t ≤ 78 a 2 s when t...

  • Page 1096

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2633 1096 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.6.13 operation with inductive loads as inherent to its functional principal, the triac output is cleared when the current crosses zero. Because zero crossing for current is delayed with inductive loads, i...

  • Page 1097

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2633 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1097 4.15.6.14 register description 4.15.6.14.1 function model 0 - standard and function model 2 - frequency mode the only difference between function model 2 and function model 0 is the possibility of generating h...

  • Page 1098: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2633 1098 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.6.14.4 general information the digital output module was designed for phase control of resistive and inductive loads. The triac outputs do not have short circuit protection, but have open line detection t...

  • Page 1099: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2633 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1099 4.15.6.14.6 analog outputs the output value of the outputs defined as analog outputs (unit percent) is switched through to the control ports in sync with power mains. The analog value is output to the triac co...

  • Page 1100: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2633 1100 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.6.14.7 output configuration 4.15.6.14.7.1 configuring the half-wave pattern name: cfo_frequency this register can only be used in function model 2 - frequency mode and makes it possible to configure the o...

  • Page 1101

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2633 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1101 4.15.6.14.7.2 setting the switch-off time name: cfo_switchoffvalue1 and cfo_switchoffvalue2 this register defines how far in front of the zero cross-over the internal control signal for the triac is switched o...

  • Page 1102: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2633 1102 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.6.14.7.4 switching behavior for zero-crossing errors name: cfo_outputtolerance this register can be used to set the switching behavior of the trigger. After the number of zero-crossing errors configured i...

  • Page 1103

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2633 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1103 4.15.6.14.8 status of the outputs name: lowcurrentstatus1 through lowcurrentstatus2 zerocrossinginput zerocrossingstatus statusinput01 the operating status of the outputs is mapped in this register. In order t...

  • Page 1104: Warning!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2633 1104 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.6.14.9 "osp" function model in the "osp" function model (operator set predefined), the user defines an analog value or digital pattern. This osp value is output as soon as communication between the module...

  • Page 1105: Warning!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2633 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1105 4.15.6.14.9.2 setting the osp mode name: cfgospmode this register essentially controls a channel's behavior when osp is being used. Data type value description 0 replace with static value usint 1 retain last v...

  • Page 1106: Danger!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2649 1106 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.7 x20do2649 4.15.7.1 general information the module has 2 relay outputs. • 2 digital outputs • relay module for 230 vac / 30 vdc • 2 change over contacts • single-channel isolated outputs danger! Risk of ...

  • Page 1107

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2649 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1107 product id x20do2649 nominal voltage 30 vdc / 230 vac switching voltage max. 110 vdc / 250 vac rated frequency dc / 45 to 63 hz nominal output current 5.0 a at 30 vdc / 5.0 a at 230 vac total nominal current 1...

  • Page 1108

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2649 1108 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.7.4 status leds figure led color status description off module supply not connected single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mode r green on run mode off module supply not connected or everything o...

  • Page 1109

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2649 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1109 4.15.7.7 output circuit diagram nc x no x com x output status i/o status led (orange) figure 329: output circuit diagram 4.15.7.8 electrical service life 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 1 2 5 10 20 50 100 250 vac / 30 vdc ...

  • Page 1110

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2649 1110 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.7.9 register description 4.15.7.9.1 function model 0 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic digitaloutput usint digitaloutput01 bit 0 2 0 digitaloutput02 ...

  • Page 1111

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do2649 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1111 4.15.7.9.4 minimum cycle time the minimum cycle time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced without communication errors occurring. It should be noted that very fast cycles decrease the idle time availab...

  • Page 1112

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4321 1112 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.8 x20do4321 4.15.8.1 general information the module is equipped with 4 outputs for 3-wire connections. • 4 digital outputs • sink connection • 3-wire connections • 24 vdc and gnd for actuator supply • int...

  • Page 1113

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4321 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1113 product id x20do4321 actuator supply 0.5 a in total for output-independent actuator supply diagnostic status output monitoring with 10 ms delay leakage current when switched off 75 µa r ds(on) 120 mΩ peak shor...

  • Page 1114

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4321 1114 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.8.4 status leds figure led color status description off module supply not connected single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mode on run mode r green flickering (ap- prox. 10 hz) module is in osp s...

  • Page 1115: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4321 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1115 4.15.8.8 output circuit diagram logic low-side 24 v gnd gnd vdr output x 24 v 24 v gnd i/o status led (orange) output monitoring output status ptc gnd gnd gnd figure 333: output circuit diagram 4.15.8.9 switch...

  • Page 1116

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4321 1116 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.8.10 register description 4.15.8.10.1 function model 0 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic digitaloutput usint digitaloutput01 bit 0 ... ... 2 0 digita...

  • Page 1117

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4321 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1117 4.15.8.10.4 digital outputs the output status is transferred to the output channels with a fixed offset ( (syncout). 4.15.8.10.4.1 switching state of digital outputs 1 to 4 name: digitaloutput digitaloutput01 ...

  • Page 1118: Warning!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4321 1118 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.8.10.6 "osp" function model in the "osp" function model (operator set predefined), the user defines an analog value or digital pattern. This osp value is output as soon as communication between the module...

  • Page 1119: Warning!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4321 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1119 4.15.8.10.6.2 setting the osp mode name: cfgospmode this register essentially controls a channel's behavior when osp is being used. Data type value description 0 replace with static value usint 1 retain last v...

  • Page 1120

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4322 1120 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.9 x20do4322 4.15.9.1 general information the module is equipped with 4 outputs for 3-wire connections. • 4 digital outputs • source connection • 3-wire connections • 24 vdc and gnd for actuator supply • i...

  • Page 1121

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1121 product id x20do4322 output protection thermal cutoff for overcurrent or short circuit (see value "peak short circuit current") internal inverse diode for switching ind. Loads (see section "switching inductive...

  • Page 1122: Caution!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4322 1122 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.9.4 status leds figure led color status description off module supply not connected single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mode on run mode r green flickering (ap- prox. 10 hz) module is in osp s...

  • Page 1123: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1123 4.15.9.7 osp hardware requirements in order to best use osp mode, make sure when creating the application that the output module and cpu have separate power supplies. 4.15.9.8 output circuit diagram logic high...

  • Page 1124

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4322 1124 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.9.10 register description 4.15.9.10.1 function model 0 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic digitaloutput usint digitaloutput01 bit 0 ... ... 2 0 digita...

  • Page 1125

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1125 4.15.9.10.4 digital outputs the output status is transferred to the output channels with a fixed offset ( (syncout). 4.15.9.10.4.1 switching state of digital outputs 1 to 4 name: digitaloutput digitaloutput01 ...

  • Page 1126: Warning!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4322 1126 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.9.10.6 "osp" function model in the "osp" function model (operator set predefined), the user defines an analog value or digital pattern. This osp value is output as soon as communication between the module...

  • Page 1127: Warning!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1127 4.15.9.10.6.2 setting the osp mode name: cfgospmode this register essentially controls a channel's behavior when osp is being used. Data type value description 0 replace with static value usint 1 retain last v...

  • Page 1128

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4331 1128 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.10 x20do4331 4.15.10.1 general information the module is equipped with 4 outputs for 3-wire connections. The rated output current is 2 a. • 4 digital outputs with 2 a • sink connection • 3-wire connection...

  • Page 1129

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4331 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1129 product id x20do4331 actuator supply 0.5 a in total for output-independent actuator supply diagnostic status output monitoring with 10 ms delay leakage current when switched off 75 µa r ds(on) 35 mΩ peak short...

  • Page 1130

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4331 1130 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.10.4 status leds figure led color status description off module supply not connected single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mode on run mode r green flickering (ap- prox. 10 hz) module is in osp ...

  • Page 1131

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4331 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1131 4.15.10.6 connection example gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc do ac tu at or 1 ac tu at or 2 ac tu at or 4 ac tu at or 3 figure 338: connection example 4.15.10.7 osp hardware requirements in order to best use osp mode,...

  • Page 1132: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4331 1132 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.10.9 switching inductive loads environmental temperature: 40°c, all outputs with the same load. 0.1 1 10 100 10 mh 100 mh 1 h 10 h 100 h 100 500 10 coil resistance [Ω] coil inductance max. Switching cycle...

  • Page 1133

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4331 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1133 4.15.10.10 operation with 2 a the outputs of the x20do4331 can handle up to 2a. To ensure optimal use of the module, it is important to assign the channels properly, and to keep in mind a potential derating. T...

  • Page 1134

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4331 1134 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.10.11 register description 4.15.10.11.1 function model 0 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic digitaloutput usint digitaloutput01 bit 0 ... ... 2 0 digi...

  • Page 1135

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4331 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1135 4.15.10.11.4 digital outputs the output status is transferred to the output channels with a fixed offset ( (syncout). 4.15.10.11.4.1 switching state of digital outputs 1 to 4 name: digitaloutput digitaloutput0...

  • Page 1136: Warning!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4331 1136 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.10.11.6 "osp" function model in the "osp" function model (operator set predefined), the user defines an analog value or digital pattern. This osp value is output as soon as communication between the modul...

  • Page 1137: Warning!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4331 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1137 4.15.10.11.6.2 setting the osp mode name: cfgospmode this register essentially controls a channel's behavior when osp is being used. Data type value description 0 replace with static value usint 1 retain last ...

  • Page 1138

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4332 1138 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.11 x20do4332 4.15.11.1 general information the module is equipped with 4 outputs for 3-wire connections. The rated output current is 2 a. • 4 digital outputs with 2 a • source connection • 3-wire connecti...

  • Page 1139

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4332 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1139 product id x20do4332 actuator supply 0.5 a in total for output-independent actuator supply diagnostic status output monitoring with 10 ms delay leakage current when switched off 5 µa r ds(on) 100 mΩ (rev. Max....

  • Page 1140

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4332 1140 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.11.4 status leds figure led color status description off module supply not connected single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mode on run mode r green flickering (ap- prox. 10 hz) module is in osp ...

  • Page 1141

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4332 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1141 4.15.11.6 connection example gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc do ac tu at or 1 ac tu at or 2 ac tu at or 4 ac tu at or 3 figure 342: connection example 4.15.11.7 osp hardware requirements in order to best use osp mode,...

  • Page 1142: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4332 1142 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.11.9 switching inductive loads (rev. H0 and higher) environmental temperature: 50°c, all outputs with the same load. 0.1 1 10 100 coil resistance [Ω] coil inductance 10 mh 100 mh 1 h 10 h 100 h 10 100 500...

  • Page 1143: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4332 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1143 4.15.11.10 operation with 2 a the outputs of the module can handle up to 2 a. With a total current of 4 a, no more than 2 channels are operable at full load. Correct channel assignments are important for achie...

  • Page 1144

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4332 1144 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.11.12 register description 4.15.11.12.1 function model 0 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic digitaloutput usint digitaloutput01 bit 0 ... ... 2 0 digi...

  • Page 1145

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4332 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1145 4.15.11.12.4 digital outputs the output status is transferred to the output channels with a fixed offset ( (syncout). 4.15.11.12.4.1 switching state of digital outputs 1 to 4 name: digitaloutput digitaloutput0...

  • Page 1146: Warning!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4332 1146 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.11.12.6 "osp" function model in the "osp" function model (operator set predefined), the user defines an analog value or digital pattern. This osp value is output as soon as communication between the modul...

  • Page 1147: Warning!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4332 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1147 4.15.11.12.6.2 setting the osp mode name: cfgospmode this register essentially controls a channel's behavior when osp is being used. Data type value description 0 replace with static value usint 1 retain last ...

  • Page 1148: Danger!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4529 1148 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.12 x20do4529 4.15.12.1 general information the module is equipped with 4 relay outputs. • 4 digital outputs • relay module for 115 vac • 4 change over contacts • single-channel isolated outputs danger! Ri...

  • Page 1149

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4529 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1149 product id x20do4529 nominal voltage 30 vdc / 115 vac switching voltage max. 110 vdc / 125 vac rated frequency dc / 45 to 63 hz nominal output current 1.0 a at 30 vdc / 0.5 a at 115 vac total nominal current 4...

  • Page 1150

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4529 1150 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.12.4 status leds figure led color status description off module supply not connected single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mode r green on run mode off module supply not connected or everything ...

  • Page 1151

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4529 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1151 4.15.12.7 output circuit diagram nc x no x com x output status i/o status led (orange) figure 346: output circuit diagram 4.15.12.8 maximum switching power dc resistive ac resistive 1 2 5 10 20 30 50 100 200 0...

  • Page 1152

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4529 1152 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.12.10 register description 4.15.12.10.1 function model 0 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic digitaloutput usint digitaloutput01 bit 0 ... ... 2 0 digi...

  • Page 1153

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4529 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1153 4.15.12.10.4 minimum cycle time the minimum cycle time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced without communication errors occurring. It should be noted that very fast cycles decrease the idle time avail...

  • Page 1154: Danger!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4613 1154 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.13 x20do4613 4.15.13.1 general information the module is a digital output module that is equipped with 4 opto-triac outputs using phase-angle control. L and n are fed to the module for zero-crossing detec...

  • Page 1155

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4613 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1155 4.15.13.3 technical data product id x20do4613 short description i/o module 4 digital outputs for controlling external power triacs or non-parallel thyristors general information b&r id code 0xad05 status indic...

  • Page 1156

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4613 1156 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20do4613 relative humidity operation 5 to 95%, non-condensing storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing mechanical characteristics note order 1x x20tb32 terminal block sep...

  • Page 1157

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4613 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1157 4.15.13.6 connection example gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc do l n l n l n t 0.5 a power thyristor twisted pair lines power triac lo ad 48 - 24 0 va c li ne fi lte r 4.15.13.7 output circuit diagram vdr vdr vdr vdr d...

  • Page 1158: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4613 1158 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.13.8 operating principle the digital output module do4613 was designed to control external triacs and thyristors. The module is equipped with internal zero-crossing detection. Zero-crossing detection is t...

  • Page 1159

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4613 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1159 4.15.13.10 register description 4.15.13.10.1 function model 0 - standard and function model 2 - frequency mode the only difference between function model 2 and function model 0 is the possibility of generating...

  • Page 1160: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4613 1160 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.13.10.4 general information the digital output module was designed for phase control of resistive and inductive loads. The module is equipped with internal zero-crossing detection. Zero crossing detection...

  • Page 1161: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4613 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1161 4.15.13.10.6 analog outputs the output value of the outputs defined as analog outputs (unit percent) is switched through to the control ports in sync with power mains. The analog value is output to the triac c...

  • Page 1162: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4613 1162 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.13.10.7 output configuration 4.15.13.10.7.1 configuring the half-wave pattern name: cfo_frequency this register can only be used in function model 2 - frequency mode and makes it possible to configure the...

  • Page 1163

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4613 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1163 4.15.13.10.7.2 setting the switch-off time name: configoutput01 to configoutput04 this register defines how far in front of the zero cross-over the internal control signal for the triac is switched off. Increa...

  • Page 1164: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4613 1164 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.13.10.7.4 switching behavior for zero-crossing errors name: cfo_outputtolerance this register can be used to set the switching behavior of the trigger. After the number of zero-crossing errors configured ...

  • Page 1165: Warning!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4613 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1165 4.15.13.10.9 "osp" function model in the "osp" function model (operator set predefined), the user defines an analog value or digital pattern. This osp value is output as soon as communication between the modul...

  • Page 1166: Warning!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4613 1166 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.13.10.9.2 setting the osp mode name: cfgospmode this register essentially controls a channel's behavior when osp is being used. Data type value description 0 replace with static value usint 1 retain last ...

  • Page 1167: Danger!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4623 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1167 4.15.14 x20do4623 4.15.14.1 general information the module is a digital output module that is equipped with 4 ssr outputs with zero cross-over switches and uses 2-line connections. The module is also equipped ...

  • Page 1168

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4623 1168 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.14.3 technical data product id x20do4623 brief description i/o module 4 digital ssr outputs 100 - 240 vac, 2-wire connections general information b&r id code 0x267c status indicators i/o function per chan...

  • Page 1169

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4623 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1169 product id x20do4623 mechanical characteristics note order 1x x20tb32 terminal block separately order 1x x20bm12 bus module separately spacing 12.5 +0.2 mm table 372: x20do4623 - technical data 1) number of ou...

  • Page 1170

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4623 1170 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.14.6 connection example gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc do l n l n act ua to r act ua to r t 10 a 4.15.14.7 output circuit diagram output status zero ssr zc output x l n i/o status (led orange) electrical separat...

  • Page 1171

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4623 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1171 4.15.14.8 integrated full-wave control full-wave control is used to control power for electrical power consumers that are operated with ac voltage. Tem- perature control is a typical application unlike phase-a...

  • Page 1172

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4623 1172 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.14.9 register description 4.15.14.9.1 function model 0 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic digitaloutput usint digitaloutput01 bit 0 ... ... 2 0 digita...

  • Page 1173: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4623 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1173 4.15.14.9.3 digital outputs the output status is transferred to the control switch asynchronously to the connected network. The outputs switch on when the voltage crosses zero and switch off when the current c...

  • Page 1174

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4623 1174 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.14.9.4.2 setting the output configuration name: output configuration 1 - 4 configoutput01 each channel can be configured for either "digital" or "analog" operation in this register. Depending on the setti...

  • Page 1175: Danger!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4633 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1175 4.15.15 x20do4633 4.15.15.1 general information the module is a digital output module with phase-angle control that is equipped with 4 triac outputs using 2-line connections. The supply (l and n) is fed direct...

  • Page 1176

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4633 1176 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.15.3 technical data product id x20do4633 short description i/o module 4 digital outputs 12 to 240 vac for 2-wire connections general information b&r id code 0xac3a status indicators i/o function per chann...

  • Page 1177

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4633 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1177 product id x20do4633 relative humidity operation 5 to 95%, non-condensing storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing mechanical characteristics note order 1x x20tb32 terminal block sep...

  • Page 1178

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4633 1178 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.15.6 connection example gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc do l n l n act ua to r act ua to r t 10 a 4.15.15.7 osp hardware requirements in order to best use osp mode, make sure when creating the application that th...

  • Page 1179: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4633 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1179 4.15.15.10 derating the derating listed below must be applied for the current: legend: horizontal installation vertical installation o ut pu t c ur re nt [a ] ambient temperature [°c] -25 0 1.25 0.938 25 50 35...

  • Page 1180

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4633 1180 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.15.13 operation with inductive loads as inherent to its functional principal, the triac output is cleared when the current crosses zero. Because zero crossing for current is delayed with inductive loads, ...

  • Page 1181

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4633 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1181 4.15.15.14 register description 4.15.15.14.1 function model 0 - standard and function model 2 - frequency mode the only difference between function model 2 and function model 0 is the possibility of generating...

  • Page 1182: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4633 1182 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.15.14.4 general information the digital output module was designed for phase control of resistive and inductive loads. The triac outputs do not have short circuit protection, but have open line detection ...

  • Page 1183: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4633 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1183 4.15.15.14.6 analog outputs the output value of the outputs defined as analog outputs (unit percent) is switched through to the control ports in sync with power mains. The analog value is output to the triac c...

  • Page 1184: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4633 1184 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.15.14.7 output configuration 4.15.15.14.7.1 configuring the half-wave pattern name: cfo_frequency this register can only be used in function model 2 - frequency mode and makes it possible to configure the...

  • Page 1185

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4633 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1185 4.15.15.14.7.2 setting the switch-off time name: cfo_switchoffvalue1 to cfo_switchoffvalue4 this register defines how far in front of the zero cross-over the internal control signal for the triac is switched o...

  • Page 1186: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4633 1186 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.15.14.7.4 switching behavior for zero-crossing errors name: cfo_outputtolerance this register can be used to set the switching behavior of the trigger. After the number of zero-crossing errors configured ...

  • Page 1187

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4633 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1187 4.15.15.14.8 status of the outputs name: lowcurrentstatus1 through lowcurrentstatus4 zerocrossinginput zerocrossingstatus statusinput01 the operating status of the outputs is mapped in this register. In order ...

  • Page 1188: Warning!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4633 1188 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.15.14.9 "osp" function model in the "osp" function model (operator set predefined), the user defines an analog value or digital pattern. This osp value is output as soon as communication between the modul...

  • Page 1189: Warning!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4633 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1189 4.15.15.14.9.3 define the osp digital output value name: cfgospvalue this register contains the digital output value, which is output in "replace with static value" mode during osp operation. Data type value u...

  • Page 1190: Danger!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4649 1190 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.16 x20do4649 4.15.16.1 general information the module is equipped with 4 relay outputs. • 4 digital outputs • relay module for 240 vac / 30 vdc • 4 normally open contacts • single-channel isolated outputs...

  • Page 1191

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4649 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1191 product id x20do4649 switching voltage max. 110 vdc / 250 vac rated frequency dc / 45 to 63 hz nominal output current 5.0 a at 30 vdc / 5.0 a at 240 vac total nominal current 10.0 a at 30 vdc / 10.0 a at 240 v...

  • Page 1192

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4649 1192 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.16.4 status leds figure led color status description off module supply not connected single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mode r green on run mode off module supply not connected or everything ...

  • Page 1193

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4649 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1193 4.15.16.7 output circuit diagram com x no x output status i/o status led (orange) aux aux aux aux figure 354: output circuit diagram 4.15.16.8 electrical service life 0.1 0.3 0.5 3 5 10 30 200 300 500 5000 ele...

  • Page 1194

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4649 1194 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.16.9 register description 4.15.16.9.1 function model 0 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic digitaloutput usint digitaloutput01 bit 0 ... ... 2 0 digita...

  • Page 1195

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do4649 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1195 4.15.16.9.4 minimum cycle time the minimum cycle time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced without communication errors occurring. It should be noted that very fast cycles decrease the idle time availa...

  • Page 1196

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do6321 1196 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.17 x20do6321 4.15.17.1 general information the module is equipped with 6 outputs for 1 or 2-wire connections. The x20 6-pin terminal block can be used for universal 1-line wiring. 2-line wiring can be imp...

  • Page 1197

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do6321 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1197 product id x20do6321 output circuit sink output protection thermal cutoff for overcurrent or short circuit (see value "peak short circuit current") internal inverse diode for switching ind. Loads (see section ...

  • Page 1198

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do6321 1198 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.17.4 status leds figure led color status description off module supply not connected single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mode r green on run mode off module supply not connected or everything ...

  • Page 1199: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do6321 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1199 4.15.17.7 output circuit diagram logic low-side 24 v gnd gnd vdr output x 24 v 24 v gnd i/o status led (orange) output monitoring output status figure 357: output circuit diagram 4.15.17.8 switching inductive ...

  • Page 1200

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do6321 1200 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.17.9 register description 4.15.17.9.1 function model 0 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic digitaloutput usint digitaloutput01 bit 0 ... ... 2 0 digita...

  • Page 1201

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do6321 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1201 4.15.17.9.4 monitoring status of the digital outputs on the module, the output states of the outputs are compared to the setpoint states. The control of the output driver is used for the setpoint states. A cha...

  • Page 1202

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do6322 1202 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.18 x20do6322 4.15.18.1 general information the module is equipped with 6 outputs for 1 or 2-wire connections. The x20 6-pin terminal block can be used for universal 1-line wiring. 2-line wiring can be imp...

  • Page 1203

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do6322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1203 product id x20do6322 total nominal current 3.0 a connection type 1- or 2-wire connections output circuit source output protection thermal cutoff for overcurrent or short circuit (see value "peak short circuit ...

  • Page 1204: Caution!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do6322 1204 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.18.4 status leds figure led color status description off module supply not connected single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mode on run mode r green flickering (ap- prox. 10 hz) module is in osp ...

  • Page 1205: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do6322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1205 4.15.18.7 osp hardware requirements in order to best use osp mode, make sure when creating the application that the output module and cpu have separate power supplies. 4.15.18.8 output circuit diagram logic hi...

  • Page 1206

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do6322 1206 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.18.10 register description 4.15.18.10.1 function model 0 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic digitaloutput usint digitaloutput01 bit 0 ... ... 2 0 digi...

  • Page 1207

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do6322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1207 4.15.18.10.4 digital outputs the output status is transferred to the output channels with a fixed offset ( (syncout). 4.15.18.10.4.1 switching state of digital outputs 1 to 6 name: digitaloutput digitaloutput0...

  • Page 1208: Warning!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do6322 1208 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.18.10.6 "osp" function model in the "osp" function model (operator set predefined), the user defines an analog value or digital pattern. This osp value is output as soon as communication between the modul...

  • Page 1209: Warning!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do6322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1209 4.15.18.10.6.2 setting the osp mode name: cfgospmode this register essentially controls a channel's behavior when osp is being used. Data type value description 0 replace with static value usint 1 retain last ...

  • Page 1210

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do6325 1210 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.19 x20do6325 4.15.19.1 general information the module is equipped with six outputs for 1 or 2-wire connections with diagnostic functions. The x20 6-pin terminal block can be used for universal 1-line wiri...

  • Page 1211

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do6325 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1211 product id x20do6325 output protection thermal cutoff for overcurrent or short circuit (see value "peak short circuit current") internal inverse diode for switching inductive loads (see section "switching indu...

  • Page 1212

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do6325 1212 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.19.4 led status indicators figure led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mode on run mode r green flickering (approx. 10 hz) module is in osp m...

  • Page 1213: Caution!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do6325 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1213 4.15.19.6 connection example gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc do actuator 5 actuator 3 actuator 1 actuator 6 actuator 4 actuator 2 figure 362: connection example caution! If the module is operated outside of specificat...

  • Page 1214: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do6325 1214 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.19.9 open line detection each output is equipped with an internal 200 kohm resistor to 24 v for open line detection. If the charging resistance at the terminal is greater than 25 to 100 kohm (tolerance ra...

  • Page 1215

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do6325 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1215 4.15.19.11 register description 4.15.19.11.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic digitaloutput usint digitaloutput01 bit 0 ... ... 2 digitaloutput...

  • Page 1216

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do6325 1216 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.19.11.3 function model 254 - bus controller read write register offset 1) name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic switching state of digital outputs 1 to 6 usint digitaloutput01 bit 0 ... ... 2...

  • Page 1217

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do6325 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1217 4.15.19.11.5 digital output status the status of the outputs is checked every 4 ms. To suppress disturbances on the feedback inputs, two readings are compared. The hardware diagnostics recognize the following ...

  • Page 1218

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do6325 1218 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.19.11.5.3 short circuit to voltage name: statusinput02 digitalstatusvcc01 to digitalstatusvcc06 in this register, a short circuit can be indicated by setting the corresponding channel bit. Function model ...

  • Page 1219

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do6325 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1219 4.15.19.11.5.5 cumulative status name: statusinput04 digitalstatussum01 to digitalstatussum06 powersupply01 every error found in the other status registers is also shown in this register. This provides an easy...

  • Page 1220: Warning!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do6325 1220 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.19.11.6 "osp" function model in the "osp" function model (operator set predefined), the user defines an analog value or digital pattern. This osp value is output as soon as communication between the modul...

  • Page 1221: Warning!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do6325 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1221 4.15.19.11.6.2 setting the osp mode name: cfgospmode this register essentially controls a channel's behavior when osp is being used. Data type value description 0 replace with static value usint 1 retain last ...

  • Page 1222: Danger!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do6529 1222 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.20 x20do6529 4.15.20.1 general information the module is equipped with 6 relay outputs. • 6 digital outputs • relay module for 115 vac • 6 normally open contacts • single-channel isolated outputs danger! ...

  • Page 1223

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do6529 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1223 product id x20do6529 nominal voltage 30 vdc / 115 vac switching voltage max. 110 vdc / 125 vac rated frequency dc / 45 to 63 hz nominal output current 1.0 a at 30 vdc / 0.5 a at 115 vac total nominal current 6...

  • Page 1224

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do6529 1224 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.20.4 status leds figure led color status description off module supply not connected single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mode r green on run mode off module supply not connected or everything ...

  • Page 1225

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do6529 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1225 4.15.20.7 output circuit diagram no x output status i/o status led (orange) com x figure 366: output circuit diagram 4.15.20.8 maximum switching power dc resistive ac resistive 1 2 5 10 20 30 50 100 200 0.1 0....

  • Page 1226

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do6529 1226 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.20.10 register description 4.15.20.10.1 function model 0 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic digitaloutput usint digitaloutput01 bit 0 ... ... 2 0 digi...

  • Page 1227

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do6529 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1227 4.15.20.10.4 minimum cycle time the minimum cycle time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced without communication errors occurring. It should be noted that very fast cycles decrease the idle time avail...

  • Page 1228: Danger!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do6639 1228 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.21 x20do6639 4.15.21.1 general information the module is equipped with 6 relay outputs. • 6 digital outputs • relay module for 240 vac / 30 vdc • switching current 2 a • 6 normally open contacts • single-...

  • Page 1229

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do6639 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1229 product id x20do6639 design relay / n.O. Channels are single-channel isolated actuator supply external contact resistance 15 mΩ at 6 vdc / 1a switching delay 0 -> 1 ≤10 ms 1 -> 0 ≤10 ms isolation voltage conta...

  • Page 1230

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do6639 1230 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.21.4 status leds figure led color status description off module supply not connected single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mode r green on run mode off module supply not connected or everything ...

  • Page 1231

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do6639 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1231 4.15.21.7 output circuit diagram com x no x output status i/o status led (orange) figure 371: output circuit diagram 4.15.21.8 electrical service life 0.1 0.3 0.5 3 5 30 200 300 500 5000 electrical service lif...

  • Page 1232

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do6639 1232 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.21.9 register description 4.15.21.9.1 function model 0 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic digitaloutput usint digitaloutput01 bit 0 ... ... 2 0 digita...

  • Page 1233

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do6639 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1233 4.15.21.9.4 minimum cycle time the minimum cycle time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced without communication errors occurring. It should be noted that very fast cycles decrease the idle time availa...

  • Page 1234

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8232 1234 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.22 x20do8232 4.15.22.1 general information the module is equipped with 8 outputs for 1-wire connections. The nominal output current is 2 a and the nominal voltage is 12 vdc. The output supply is fed direc...

  • Page 1235

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8232 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1235 product id x20do8232 switching voltage 12 vdc (-15% / +20%) nominal output current 2.0 a total nominal current 8.0 a connection type 1-wire connections output circuit source output protection thermal cutoff fo...

  • Page 1236: Caution!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8232 1236 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.22.4 status leds figure led color status description off module supply not connected single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mode r green on run mode off module supply not connected or everything ...

  • Page 1237

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8232 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1237 4.15.22.7 output circuit diagram 1 logic high-side 12 v monitoring 12 v external supply gnd output x 12 v gnd external power supply reverse polarity protection external supply 12 v gnd 1 gnd 12 v external supp...

  • Page 1238: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8232 1238 x20 system user's manual 3.10 environmental temperature: 60°c, 4 outputs (1,3,5,7 or 2,4,6,8) with the same load. 14.4 v 12.0 v 0.1 1 10 100 coil inductance 10 mh 100 mh 1 h 10 h 100 h 100 500 10 5 switching voltage: max. Switching cycles ...

  • Page 1239: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8232 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1239 4.15.22.9 operation with 2 a the outputs of the module can handle up to 2 a. With a total current of 8 a, no more than 4 channels are operable at full load. To ensure optimal use of the module, it is important...

  • Page 1240

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8232 1240 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.22.10 register description 4.15.22.10.1 function model 0 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic digitaloutput usint digitaloutput01 bit 0 ... ... 2 0 digi...

  • Page 1241

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8232 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1241 4.15.22.10.4 digital outputs the output status is transferred to the output channels with a fixed offset ( (syncout). 4.15.22.10.4.1 switching state of digital outputs 1 to 8 name: digitaloutput digitaloutput0...

  • Page 1242

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8232 1242 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.22.10.6 monitoring status of the digital outputs on the module, the output states of the outputs are compared to the setpoint states. The control of the output driver is used for the setpoint states. A ch...

  • Page 1243: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8232 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1243 4.15.22.10.8 additional function - switch digital outputs w/ delay using switching mask in function model 1 - output switching, it is possible to control the digital outputs with a delay. The outputdelay mask ...

  • Page 1244

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8232 1244 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.22.10.8.2 switching mask after the delay time has expired name: digitaloutput01delayenable to digitaloutput08delayenable these registers create the mask for outputdelay. They define which outputs are swit...

  • Page 1245

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1245 4.15.23 x20do8322 4.15.23.1 general information the module is equipped with 8 outputs for 1-wire connections and designed for source output wiring. • 8 digital outputs • source connection • 1-wire connections ...

  • Page 1246

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8322 1246 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20do8322 r ds(on) 210 mΩ max. Continuous current 6.0 a peak short circuit current switching on after overload or short circuit cutoff ca. 10 ms (depends on the module temperature) switching delay 0...

  • Page 1247

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1247 4.15.23.4 status leds figure led color status description off module supply not connected single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mode r green on run mode off module supply not connected or everything ...

  • Page 1248: Caution!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8322 1248 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.23.6 connection example gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc do gnd actuator 5 actuator 7 actuator 3 actuator 1 actuator 6 actuator 8 actuator 4 actuator 2 gnd figure 379: connection example caution! If the module is ...

  • Page 1249: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1249 4.15.23.8 switching inductive loads environmental temperature: 55°c, all outputs with the same load 50 0.1 1 10 100 1000 coil inductance 100 mh 1 h 10 h 100 h 10 mh coil resistance [Ω] 100 28.8 v 24.0 v switch...

  • Page 1250

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8322 1250 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.23.9 register description 4.15.23.9.1 function model 0 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic digitaloutput usint digitaloutput01 bit 0 ... ... 2 0 digita...

  • Page 1251

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1251 4.15.23.9.4.1 status of digital outputs 1 to 8 name: statusinput01 statusdigitaloutput01 to statusdigitaloutput08 this register is used to indicate the status of digital outputs 1 to 8. Function model 0 - stan...

  • Page 1252

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8323 1252 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.24 x20do8323 4.15.24.1 general information the module is an electrically isolated 8-channel digital output module. It can be configured as high-side or low-side or as a push/pull output for controlling 12...

  • Page 1253

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8323 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1253 4.15.24.3 technical data product id x20do8323 general information module type b&r x20 digital output module b&r id code 0xdf4e status indicators operating state, module status diagnostics module run/error yes,...

  • Page 1254

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8323 1254 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.24.4 status leds image led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mode r green on run mode off module supply not connected or everything ok on erro...

  • Page 1255

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8323 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1255 full bridge connection: do +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc + + m 4 + m 3 + m 1 + m 2 use as high-side or low-side: do +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc + actuator 1 actuator 3 actuator 5 actuator 7 actuator 8 ac...

  • Page 1256

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8323 1256 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.24.8 register description 4.15.24.8.1 function model 0 - default read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic digitalinput usint digitalinput01 bit 0 ... ... 0 1 digitalin...

  • Page 1257

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8323 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1257 4.15.24.8.3 digital outputs the output state is sent to the output ports acyclically to the network in the system timer (100 μsec). (max. Switch off jitter: 50 µsec, max. Switch on jitter: 150 µsec) the output...

  • Page 1258

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8323 1258 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.24.8.3.3 switching between inputs and outputs name: enabledigitaloutput enabdigitaloutput01 through enabdigitaloutput08 in this register, all channels can be connected as inputs or outputs. For each outpu...

  • Page 1259

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8323 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1259 4.15.24.8.5 cumulative status name: statusdigitaloutputs statussupplylo statussupplyhi the state of output monitoring and the supply voltage for all outputs are collected and mapped to this register. Data type...

  • Page 1260

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8331 1260 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.25 x20do8331 4.15.25.1 general information the module is equipped with 8 outputs for 1-wire connections. The rated output current is 2 a. The output supply is fed directly to the module. An additional sup...

  • Page 1261

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8331 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1261 product id x20do8331 output circuit sink output protection thermal cutoff for overcurrent or short circuit (see value "peak short circuit current") internal inverse diode for switching ind. Loads (see section ...

  • Page 1262

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8331 1262 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.25.4 status leds figure led color status description off module supply not connected single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mode r green on run mode off module supply not connected or everything ...

  • Page 1263

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8331 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1263 4.15.25.7 output circuit diagram 24 v monitoring 24 v gnd external power supply gnd logic low-side 24 v gnd gnd vdr output x gnd i/o status led (orange) output monitoring output status 24 v internal 24 v inter...

  • Page 1264: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8331 1264 x20 system user's manual 3.10 environmental temperature: 60°c, 4 outputs (1,3,5,7 or 2,4,6,8) with the same load. 28.8 v 24.0 v switching voltage: 0.1 1 10 100 10 mh 100 mh 1 h 10 h 100 h 100 500 10 coil resistance [Ω] coil inductance max....

  • Page 1265: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8331 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1265 4.15.25.9 operation with 2 a the outputs of the module can handle up to 2 a. With a total current of 8 a, no more than 4 channels are operable at full load. To ensure optimal use of the module, it is important...

  • Page 1266

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8331 1266 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.25.10 register description 4.15.25.10.1 function model 0 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic digitaloutput usint digitaloutput01 bit 0 ... ... 2 0 digi...

  • Page 1267

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8331 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1267 4.15.25.10.4 digital outputs the output status is transferred to the output channels with a fixed offset ( (syncout). 4.15.25.10.4.1 switching state of digital outputs 1 to 8 name: digitaloutput digitaloutput0...

  • Page 1268

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8331 1268 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.25.10.6 monitoring status of the digital outputs on the module, the output states of the outputs are compared to the setpoint states. The control of the output driver is used for the setpoint states. A ch...

  • Page 1269: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8331 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1269 4.15.25.10.8 additional function - switch digital outputs w/ delay using switching mask in function model 1 - output switching, it is possible to control the digital outputs with a delay. The outputdelay mask ...

  • Page 1270

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8331 1270 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.25.10.8.2 switching mask after the delay time has expired name: digitaloutput01delayenable to digitaloutput08delayenable these registers create the mask for outputdelay. They define which outputs are swit...

  • Page 1271

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8332 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1271 4.15.26 x20do8332 4.15.26.1 general information the module is equipped with 8 outputs for 1-wire connections. The rated output current is 2 a. The output supply is fed directly to the module. An additional sup...

  • Page 1272

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8332 1272 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20do8332 total nominal current per group 4.0 a per module 8.0 a 2) connection type 1-wire connections output circuit source output protection thermal cutoff for overcurrent or short circuit (see va...

  • Page 1273: Caution!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8332 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1273 4.15.26.4 status leds figure led color status description off module supply not connected single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mode r green on run mode off module supply not connected or everything ...

  • Page 1274

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8332 1274 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.26.7 output circuit diagram 1 logic high-side 24 v monitoring 24 v external supply gnd output x 24 v gnd external power supply reverse polarity protection external supply 24 v gnd 1 gnd 24 v external supp...

  • Page 1275: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8332 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1275 environmental temperature: 60°c, 4 outputs (1,3,5,7 or 2,4,6,8) with the same load. Switching voltage: 28.8 v 24.0 v coil resistance [Ω] coil inductance max. Switching cycles / second (with 90% duty cycle) 0.1...

  • Page 1276: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8332 1276 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.26.9 operation with 2 a the outputs of the module can handle up to 2 a. With a total current of 8 a, no more than 4 channels are operable at full load. To ensure optimal use of the module, it is important...

  • Page 1277

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8332 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1277 4.15.26.10 register description 4.15.26.10.1 function model 0 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic digitaloutput usint digitaloutput01 bit 0 ... ... 2 0 digi...

  • Page 1278

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8332 1278 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.26.10.4 digital outputs the output status is transferred to the output channels with a fixed offset ( (syncout). 4.15.26.10.4.1 switching state of digital outputs 1 to 8 name: digitaloutput digitaloutput0...

  • Page 1279

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8332 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1279 4.15.26.10.6 monitoring status of the digital outputs on the module, the output states of the outputs are compared to the setpoint states. The control of the output driver is used for the setpoint states. A ch...

  • Page 1280: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8332 1280 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.26.10.8 additional function - switch digital outputs w/ delay using switching mask in function model 1 - output switching, it is possible to control the digital outputs with a delay. The outputdelay mask ...

  • Page 1281

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do8332 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1281 4.15.26.10.8.2 switching mask after the delay time has expired name: digitaloutput01delayenable to digitaloutput08delayenable these registers create the mask for outputdelay. They define which outputs are swit...

  • Page 1282

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do9321 1282 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.27 x20do9321 4.15.27.1 general information the module is equipped with 12 outputs for 1-wire connections. The module is designed for sink output wiring. • 12 digital outputs • sink connection • 1-wire con...

  • Page 1283

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do9321 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1283 product id x20do9321 peak short circuit current switching on after overload or short circuit cutoff ca. 10 ms (depends on the module temperature) switching delay 0 -> 1 1 -> 0 switching frequency resistive loa...

  • Page 1284

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do9321 1284 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.27.5 pinout 1 x 20 d o 9 32 1 2 do 1 do 3 do 5 do 2 do 4 do 6 do 7 do 9 do 11 do 8 do 10 do 12 3 4 3 4 5 6 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 0 11 2 9 1 1 0 11 2 r e figure 399: pinout 4.15.27.6 connection example gnd +24 vdc...

  • Page 1285: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do9321 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1285 4.15.27.8 switching inductive loads environmental temperature: 55°c, all outputs with the same load max. Switching cycles / second (with 90% duty cycle) 100 mh 1 h 10 h 100 h 10 mh 50 0.1 1 10 100 100 1000 coi...

  • Page 1286

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do9321 1286 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.27.9 register description 4.15.27.9.1 function model 0 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic 1 digitaloutput uint ● switching state of digital outputs 1 ...

  • Page 1287

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do9321 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1287 4.15.27.9.3 digital outputs the output status is transferred to the output channels with a fixed offset ( (syncout). 4.15.27.9.3.1 switching state of digital outputs 1 to 12 name: digitaloutput digitaloutput01...

  • Page 1288

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do9321 1288 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.27.9.4 monitoring status of the digital outputs on the module, the output states of the outputs are compared to the setpoint states. The control of the output driver is used for the setpoint states. A cha...

  • Page 1289

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do9322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1289 4.15.28 x20do9322 4.15.28.1 general information the module is equipped with 12 outputs for 1-wire connections. The module is designed for source output wiring. • 12 digital outputs • source connection • 1-wire...

  • Page 1290

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do9322 1290 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20do9322 r ds(on) 210 mΩ max. Continuous current 6.0 a peak short circuit current switching on after overload or short circuit cutoff ca. 10 ms (depends on the module temperature) switching delay 2...

  • Page 1291

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do9322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1291 4.15.28.4 status leds figure led color status description off module supply not connected single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mode r green on run mode off module supply not connected or everything ...

  • Page 1292: Caution!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do9322 1292 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.28.6 connection example gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc do gnd actuator 5 actuator 7 actuator 9 actuator 11 actuator 3 actuator 1 actuator 6 actuator 8 actuator 10 actuator 12 actuator 4 actuator 2 gnd figure 403...

  • Page 1293: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do9322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1293 4.15.28.8 switching inductive loads environmental temperature: 55°c, all outputs with the same load 50 0.1 1 10 100 100 1000 coil inductance max. Switching cycles / second (with 90% duty cycle) 10 mh 100 mh 1 ...

  • Page 1294

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do9322 1294 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.28.9 register description 4.15.28.9.1 function model 0 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic 1 digitaloutput uint ● switching state of digital outputs 1 ...

  • Page 1295

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do9322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1295 4.15.28.9.3 digital outputs the output status is transferred to the output channels with a fixed offset ( (syncout). 4.15.28.9.3.1 switching state of digital outputs 1 to 12 name: digitaloutput digitaloutput01...

  • Page 1296

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20do9322 1296 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.28.9.4 monitoring status of the digital outputs on the module, the output states of the outputs are compared to the setpoint states. The control of the output driver is used for the setpoint states. A cha...

  • Page 1297

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20dod322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1297 4.15.29 x20dod322 4.15.29.1 general information the x20dod322 module is equipped with eight outputs for 1-wire or 2-wire connections. The x20dod322 is designed for source output wiring. • 8 digital outputs • s...

  • Page 1298

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20dod322 1298 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20dod322 leakage current when switched off 5 µa r ds(on) 140 mΩ max. Continuous current 6.0 a peak short circuit current switching on after overload or short circuit cutoff ca. 10 ms (depends on th...

  • Page 1299: Caution!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20dod322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1299 4.15.29.4 status leds figure led color status description off module supply not connected single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mode green on run mode off module supply not connected or everything ok...

  • Page 1300: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20dod322 1300 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.29.7 output circuit diagram logic high-side 24 v gnd output x gnd i/o status led (orange) output monitoring output status gnd figure 409: output circuit diagram 4.15.29.8 switching inductive loads environ...

  • Page 1301

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20dod322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1301 4.15.29.9 register description 4.15.29.9.1 function model 0 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic digitaloutput usint digitaloutput01 bit 0 ... ... 2 0 digita...

  • Page 1302

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20dod322 1302 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.29.9.4.1 status of digital outputs 1 to 8 name: statusdigitaloutput or statusdigitaloutput01 to statusdigitaloutput08 the status of digital outputs 1 to 8 is mapped in this register. Data type value usint...

  • Page 1303

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20dof322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1303 4.15.30 x20dof322 4.15.30.1 general information the x20dof322 module is equipped with 16 outputs for 1-wire connections. The x20dof322 is designed for source output wiring. • 16 digital outputs • source connec...

  • Page 1304

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20dof322 1304 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20dof322 max. Continuous current 6.0 a peak short circuit current switching on after overload or short circuit cutoff ca. 10 ms (depends on the module temperature) switching delay 2) 0 -> 1 1 -> 0 ...

  • Page 1305

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20dof322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1305 4.15.30.4 status leds figure led color status description off module supply not connected single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mode green on run mode off module supply not connected or everything ok...

  • Page 1306: Caution!

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20dof322 1306 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.30.6 connection example gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc do gnd actuator 5 actuator 7 actuator 9 actuator 13 actuator 11 actuator 15 actuator 3 actuator 1 actuator 6 actuator 8 actuator 10 actuator 14 actuator 12 ...

  • Page 1307: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20dof322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1307 4.15.30.8 switching inductive loads environmental temperature: 55°c, all outputs with the same load 100 mh 1 h 10 h 100 h 10 mh 50 0.1 1 10 100 1000 coil inductance coil resistance [Ω] 100 max. Switching cycle...

  • Page 1308

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20dof322 1308 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.30.9 register description 4.15.30.9.1 function model 0 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic 0 digitaloutput uint switching state of digital outputs 1 to...

  • Page 1309

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20dof322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1309 4.15.30.9.3 digital outputs the output status is transferred to the output channels with a fixed offset ( (syncout). 4.15.30.9.3.1 switching state of digital outputs 1 to 16 name: digitaloutput or digitaloutpu...

  • Page 1310

    X20 system modules • digital output modules • x20dof322 1310 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.15.30.9.4.1 status of digital outputs 1 to 16 name: statusdigitaloutput or statusdigitaloutput01 to statusdigitaloutput16 the status of digital outputs 1 to 16 is mapped in this register. Data type value uin...

  • Page 1311

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • brief information x20 system user's manual 3.10 1311 4.16 digital signal processing modules the highly flexible digital signal processor modules can be implemented for a wide range of tasks involving the creation or processing of digital signa...

  • Page 1312

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20cm1201 1312 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.16.2 x20cm1201 4.16.2.1 general information the module can be used to configure and carry out simple movements. For this purpose, the module has one ab encoder input and a total of 8 digital chann...

  • Page 1313

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20cm1201 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1313 4.16.2.3 technical data product id x20cm1201 short description i/o module 1 ab incremental encoder, 24 v, 4 digital inputs, 4 channels configurable as inputs or outputs general information input vol...

  • Page 1314

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20cm1201 1314 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20cm1201 isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 v eff operating conditions mounting orientation horizontal yes vertical yes installation at elevations above sea level 0 to 2000 m ...

  • Page 1315

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20cm1201 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1315 4.16.2.5 pinout shielded cables must be used for all signal lines. X 20 c m 1 20 1 r e encoder 24 v + encoder 24 v + gnd gnd channel 1 channel 2 channel 5 channel 6 channel 3 channel 7 channel 4 cha...

  • Page 1316

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20cm1201 1316 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.16.2.8 output circuit diagram output x 24 v push gnd pull vdr ptc output monitoring output status output status 4.16.2.9 switching inductive loads 240 Ω 100 ma ≙ 0.1 h 100 h 10 h 1 h 0.01 h 0.1 1 ...

  • Page 1317

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20cm1201 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1317 4.16.2.10 register description 4.16.2.10.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic configuration 130 cycletimecff ● communication - command inter...

  • Page 1318: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20cm1201 1318 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.16.2.10.3 general this is a low-end positioning module that supports 2 speed movements in positive and negative directions. No active position check is performed. The movements are started using a...

  • Page 1319

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20cm1201 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1319 4.16.2.10.3.3 movement generator when a movement start command is issued, the mode of the active movement step is calculated based on the preceding target position. Step parameters may also be chang...

  • Page 1320

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20cm1201 1320 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.16.2.10.4.3 enables the interface this command activates the movement interface. The status of the interface is displayed in the 4.16.2.10.5.5 "read status" register (bit 5). The interface is disa...

  • Page 1321

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20cm1201 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1321 trigger condition depending on bits 2 and 3 in the data structure of each movement block, either the "edge" or "comparator value" structure is selected as the trigger condition. Edge bit description...

  • Page 1322

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20cm1201 1322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 output states bit description value information 0 reserved 0 0 no action 1 channel 02 1 clear channel 2 reserved 0 0 no action 3 channel 04 1 clear channel 4 reserved 0 0 no action 5 channel 06 1 cl...

  • Page 1323

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20cm1201 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1323 i/o states this table shows the read display value. The parameter for the display command is 0. Bit description value information 0 input state - channel 01 0 or 1 ... ... 7 input state - channel 08...

  • Page 1324

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20cm1201 1324 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.16.2.10.4.9 start a movement block this command starts a movement block consisting of up to 8 steps. Code 0x08 (block 1) 0x09 (block 2) 0x0a (block 3) 0x0b (block 4) parameter see parameter struct...

  • Page 1325

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20cm1201 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1325 4.16.2.10.5 command interface a command interface is available to the user. A command consists of: • 4.16.2.10.5.2 "command" (in the command description: code) • 4.16.2.10.5.3 "command parameter" (i...

  • Page 1326

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20cm1201 1326 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.16.2.10.5.3 send command parameters name: sendcommandparam specific parameters for the command to be sent must be entered in this register. The required parameters are listed under 4.16.2.10.4 "co...

  • Page 1327

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20cm1201 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1327 4.16.2.10.5.6 read parameter number name: readindex the parameter number returned for a display command is shown in this register. See 4.16.2.10.4.2 "configure display mode" and 4.16.2.10.4.10 "sele...

  • Page 1328

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20cm1201 1328 x20 system user's manual 3.10 displays the error information name: errorinfo the error information is shown in this register. It corresponds with the parameter 0xc2 in section 4.16.2.10.4.4 "configure parameters". Data type valu...

  • Page 1329

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20cm1201 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1329 4.16.2.10.6 sample configurations 4.16.2.10.6.1 movement example the channels have been set as follows for this example: hardware channel direction function assignment 1 input abr encoder - signal a...

  • Page 1330

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20cm1201 1330 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.16.2.10.6.2 homing example configure parameters value code 0x03 parameter parameter numbers data 0 to 3 parameter data the following parameters must be configured: parameter data description 0x00 ...

  • Page 1331

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20cm1201 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1331 4.16.2.10.6.4 standard positioning example with stop configure parameters value code 0x03 parameter parameter numbers data 0 to 3 parameter data the following parameters must be configured: paramete...

  • Page 1332

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20dc1073 1332 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.16.3 x20dc1073 4.16.3.1 general information the module is equipped with a sincos encoder interface. The input signals are monitored. This makes it possible to detect open or shorted lines as well ...

  • Page 1333

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20dc1073 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1333 4.16.3.3 technical data product id x20dc1073 short description i/o module 1x sincos input general information b&r id code 0xaec6 status indicators counting direction, operating status, module status...

  • Page 1334

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20dc1073 1334 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.16.3.4 led status indicators for a description of the various operating modes, see the 2.11.1 "re leds" section. Figure led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode ...

  • Page 1335

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20dc1073 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1335 4.16.3.6 connection example sincos encoders sine-cosine reference track gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc dc a a\ b b\ r r\ 4.16.3.7 analog inputs - input circuit diagram a/d converter a/d converter evaluatio...

  • Page 1336

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20dc1073 1336 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.16.3.9 calculating the maximum encoder cable length the following encoder data is assumed for this sample calculation: encoder data input voltage 4.75 v – 5.25 v max. Input current 0.12 a module e...

  • Page 1337

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1337 4.16.4 x20ds1828 4.16.4.1 general information the x20ds1828 module is equipped with a hiperface encoder interface. This module can be used to evaluate encoders installed in motors from other manufac...

  • Page 1338

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 1338 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20ds1828 power consumption bus 0.01 w internal i/o 1.3 w additional power dissipation caused by the actua- tors (resistive) [w] - electrical isolation channel - bus yes channel - channel...

  • Page 1339

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1339 4.16.4.4 led status indicators figure led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode double flash boot mode (during firmware update) blinking preoperational mode r green...

  • Page 1340

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 1340 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.16.4.6 connection example hiperface encoder process data channel parameter channel gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc ds sin ref sin cos ref cos d\ d 4.16.4.7 input diagram for the process data channel (sine...

  • Page 1341

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1341 4.16.4.10 register description 4.16.4.10.1 register overview - function model 0 (standard) read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic module configuration 513 cfo_siframegenid ...

  • Page 1342

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 1342 x20 system user's manual 3.10 read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic analogchvalue03_u uint 3242 analogchvalue03_s int ● ● 3236 analogchtime03_32 dint ● ● 3238 analogchtime03_16 int ● ● 3097 analogadrch...

  • Page 1343

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1343 4.16.4.10.2 variable mapping in automation studio (x2x master) read write name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic basic functions sdclifecount sint ● positionhw udint positionlw udint position ...

  • Page 1344

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 1344 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.16.4.10.3 register overview - function model 254 (bus controller) read write register object offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic module configuration 513 - cfo_siframegenid usint ●...

  • Page 1345

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1345 read write register object offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic 2368 + index 9...13 rxbyte1_canio rxbyte[2...5]_canio usint ● 2400 0 outputsequence_canio usint ● 2400 + index 1...5 tx...

  • Page 1346

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 1346 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.16.4.10.5 module configuration the following configuration registers can be used to define various module settings. They can be used, for example, to modify the module's behavior on an x2x link ne...

  • Page 1347

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1347 4.16.4.10.6 basic functions this module can read a position when used together with a hiperface encoder. The received position data is prepared in two different formats and given a timestamp. Six re...

  • Page 1348

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 1348 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.16.4.10.6.5 postime (16-bit) names (pchannelname): postime postime_16 the sdc library requires a 16-bit value. The nettime value is therefore also generated in this format. Data type value int -32...

  • Page 1349

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1349 4.16.4.10.7 error management this module can be used to diagnose error states. There are two ways the x20ds1828 performs error diagnostics: • module-based diagnostics • hiperface-based diagnostics 4...

  • Page 1350

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 1350 x20 system user's manual 3.10 the state byte indicates any errors or warnings that have not yet been acknowledged. "errorinfo" structure: bit name information 0 no error 0 encodersupplyerror 1 encoder supply error 1 reserved - 0...

  • Page 1351

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1351 4.16.4.10.7.2 hiperface-based diagnostics memory areas are provided in the hiperface standard for error diagnostics. Error management has been ad- justed in order to use error detection in accordanc...

  • Page 1352

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 1352 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.16.4.10.8 sin/cos - analog interface configuration in addition to the digital hiperface interface, this module is also equipped with an analog interface for sampling a differential sine-cosine sig...

  • Page 1353: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1353 4.16.4.10.9 hiperface 4.16.4.10.9.1 hiperface - digital interface configuration hiperface builds upon the rs-485 (eia-485) specification and permits communication with multiple hiper- face slaves. T...

  • Page 1354

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 1354 x20 system user's manual 3.10 hfbaud names (pchannelname): hfbaud this register configures the baud rate (transfer rate) of the interface. The module does not allow a transfer rate of 600 baud. Data type value udint 1200, 2400, ...

  • Page 1355

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1355 4.16.4.10.9.2 hiperface - read id the digital interface provides the option of assigning a hiperface slave a specific id. Its parameter data can be queried when booting the plc, for example. Any dev...

  • Page 1356

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 1356 x20 system user's manual 3.10 hfrs485settings names (pchannelname): hfrs485settings this register temporarily stores the current network configuration expected by the slave. The register value is specifically structured for hipe...

  • Page 1357

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1357 hfdatafields names (pchannelname): hfdatafields this register indicates the number of data fields that have been written thus far. Data type value usint 0 to 255 hfextbyte names (pchannelname): hfex...

  • Page 1358

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 1358 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.16.4.10.9.3 hiperface - reading additional encoder positions this module can read up to two additional position values via the hiperface interface and provide them to the plc. Each position value ...

  • Page 1359

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1359 addposition (32-bit) names (pchannelname): addposition01 addposition02 addposition01_32 addposition02_32 these registers provide the corresponding position values as signed 4-byte values. Data type ...

  • Page 1360

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 1360 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.16.4.10.9.4 hiperface - reading additional analog values this module can read up to four analog values (16-bit) via the hiperface interface and provide them to the plc. Each analog value is accomp...

  • Page 1361

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1361 analogchokbyte names (pchannelname): analogchok01 analogchok02 analogchok03 analogchok04 this register's bits provide information about the validity of the values in temporary storage. Data type val...

  • Page 1362

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 1362 x20 system user's manual 3.10 analogchtime (32-bit) names (pchannelname): analogchtime01_32 analogchtime02_32 analogchtime03_32 analogchtime04_32 these registers provide the timestamps of the most recently received analog values...

  • Page 1363

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1363 4.16.4.10.10 flatstream communication 4.16.4.10.10.1 introduction b&r offers an additional communication method for some modules. "flatstream" was designed for x2x and powerlink networks and allows ...

  • Page 1364

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 1364 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.16.4.10.10.2 message, segment, sequence, mtu the physical properties of the bus system limit the amount of data that can be transmitted during one bus cycle. With flatstream communication, all mes...

  • Page 1365

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1365 4.16.4.10.10.3 the flatstream principle prerequisites and requirements before flatstream can be used, the respective communication direction must be synchronized, i.E. Both commu- nication partners ...

  • Page 1366: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 1366 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.16.4.10.10.4 registers for flatstream mode five registers are available for configuring flatstream. The default configuration can be used to transmit small amounts of data relatively easily. Infor...

  • Page 1367: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1367 flatstream operation when using flatstream, the communication direction is enormously important. For sending data to a module ("out- put" direction), the tx bytes are used. For receiving data from a...

  • Page 1368: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 1368 x20 system user's manual 3.10 messageendbit the "messageendbit" is set if the subsequent segment completes a message. The message has then been com- pletely transmitted and is ready for further processing. Information: in the ou...

  • Page 1369

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1369 communication status of the module name: inputsequence the "inputsequence" register contains information about the communication status of the module. It is written by the module and should only be ...

  • Page 1370: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 1370 x20 system user's manual 3.10 relationship between outputsequence and inputsequence 0 - 2 3 outputsequencecounter outputsyncbit 4 - 6 7 inputsequenceack inputsyncack 0 - 2 3 inputsequencecounter inputsyncbit 4 - 6 7 outputsequen...

  • Page 1371

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1371 synchronization during synchronization, a communication channel is opened. It is important to make sure that a module is present and that the current value of the sequencecounter is stored on the st...

  • Page 1372

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 1372 x20 system user's manual 3.10 transmitting and receiving if a channel is synchronized, then the opposite station is ready to receive messages from the transmitter. Before the transmitter can send data, it needs to first create a...

  • Page 1373

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1373 first, the messages must be split into segments. In the default configuration, it is important to ensure that each sequence can hold an entire segment, including the associated control byte. The seq...

  • Page 1374: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 1374 x20 system user's manual 3.10 transmitting data to a module (output) when transmitting data, the transmit array must be generated in the application program. Sequences are then transmitted one by one using flatstream and receive...

  • Page 1375

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1375 message larger than the outputmtu the transmit array, which needs to be created in the program sequence, consists of several elements. The user has to arrange the control and data bytes correctly an...

  • Page 1376

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 1376 x20 system user's manual 3.10 receiving data from a module (input) when receiving data, the transmit array is generated by the module, transferred via flatstream and must then be reproduced in the receive array. The structure of...

  • Page 1377

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1377 general flow chart se gm en t d at a ha nd lin g sy nc hr on is at io n no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no no no yes yes no yes no inputsyncack = 1 ? Inputsequenceack > 0 ? Inputsyncack = 1 (inp...

  • Page 1378: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 1378 x20 system user's manual 3.10 details it is recommended to store transmitted messages in separate receive arrays. After a set messageendbit is transmitted, the subsequent segment should be added to the receive array. The message...

  • Page 1379: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1379 flatstream mode name: flatstreammode in the input direction, the transmit array is generated automatically. This register offers two options to the user that allow an incoming data stream to have a ...

  • Page 1380: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 1380 x20 system user's manual 3.10 multisegmentmtus allowed with this option, the inputmtu is completely filled (if enough data is pending). The previously unfilled rx bytes transmit the next control bytes and their segments. This al...

  • Page 1381

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1381 using both options it is also possible to use both options at the same time. Bus cycle 1 control byte with messageendbit = 0 bus cycle 2 bus cycle 3 - - - me1 c me1 c me0 c me1 c control byte with m...

  • Page 1382

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 1382 x20 system user's manual 3.10 adjusting the flatstream if the way messages are structured is changed, then the way data in the transmit/receive array is arranged is also different. The following changes apply to the example give...

  • Page 1383: Warning!

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1383 first, the messages must be split into segments. As in the default configuration, it is important for each sequence to begin with a control byte. The free bits in the mtu at the end of a message are...

  • Page 1384: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 1384 x20 system user's manual 3.10 large segments segments are limited to a maximum of 63 bytes. This means they can be larger than the active mtu. These large segments are divided among several sequences when transmitted. It is poss...

  • Page 1385

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1385 large segments and multisegmentmtu example three autonomous messages (7 bytes, 2 bytes and 9 bytes) are being transmitted using an mtu with a width of 7 bytes. The configuration allows transmission ...

  • Page 1386

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 1386 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.16.4.10.10.5 example of forward functionality on x2x link forward functionality is a method that can be used to substantially increase the flatstream data rate. The basic principle is also used in...

  • Page 1387

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1387 configuration the forward function only has to be enabled for the input direction. Two additional configuration registers are available for doing so. Flatstream modules have been optimized in such a...

  • Page 1388

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 1388 x20 system user's manual 3.10 transmitting and receiving with forward the basic algorithm for transmitting and receiving data remains the same. With the forward function, up to seven unacknowledged sequences can be transmitted. ...

  • Page 1389: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1389 details/background 1. Illegal sequencecounter size (counter offset) error situation: mtu not enabled if the difference between sequencecounter and sequenceack is larger than allowed during transmiss...

  • Page 1390

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 1390 x20 system user's manual 3.10 errors when using forward in industrial environments, it is often the case that many different devices from various manufacturers are being used side by side. The electrical and/or electromagnetic p...

  • Page 1391

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1391 4.16.4.10.11 hiperface with flatstream hiperface is an asynchronous interface capable of half-duplex communication. Various features have been included to ensure that signals are transmitted without...

  • Page 1392

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 1392 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.16.4.10.11.3 set position (0x43) master command protocol bytes no. Name information master 1 address address of the hiperface slave 2 0x43 command byte (set position) 3 pos_hh 4 pos_hl 5 pos_lh 6 ...

  • Page 1393

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1393 4.16.4.10.11.6 increment counter (0x47) master command protocol bytes no. Name information master 1 address address of the hiperface slave 2 0x47 command byte (increment counter) slave slave respons...

  • Page 1394

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 1394 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.16.4.10.11.9 save data (0x4b) master command protocol bytes no. Name information master 1 address address of the hiperface slave 2 0x4b command byte (save data) 3 data field 4 byte address 5 count...

  • Page 1395

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1395 4.16.4.10.11.11 create data field (0x4d) master command protocol bytes no. Name information master 1 address address of the hiperface slave 2 0x4d command byte (create data field) 3 data field numbe...

  • Page 1396

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 1396 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.16.4.10.11.14 read encoder status (0x50) master command protocol bytes no. Name information master 1 address address of the hiperface slave 2 0x50 command byte (read encoder status) slave slave re...

  • Page 1397

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1397 4.16.4.10.11.17 allocate encoder address (0x55) master command protocol bytes no. Name information master 1 address address of the hiperface slave 2 0x55 command byte (allocate encoder address) 3 ne...

  • Page 1398

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1828 1398 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.16.4.10.12 minimum cycle time the minimum cycle time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced without causing a communication error or impaired functionality. It should be noted that very fast...

  • Page 1399

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1399 4.16.5 x20ds1928 4.16.5.1 general information the x20ds1928 module is equipped with an endat encoder interface. The x20ds1928 automatically detects whether an encoder is connected with endat 2.1 or ...

  • Page 1400

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 1400 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20ds1928 additional power dissipation caused by the actua- tors (resistive) [w] - electrical isolation channel - bus yes channel - channel no type of signal lines shielded cables should ...

  • Page 1401

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1401 image led color status description double flash system error - possible causes: • endat communication error • endat position error • endat error defining parameters tripple flash i/o error and syste...

  • Page 1402

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 1402 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.16.5.7 input diagram for the incremental signals (sine-cosine track) a/d converter a/d converter input value input value a b a\ b\ 4.16.5.8 input diagram for the serial endat interface rs485 drive...

  • Page 1403

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1403 4.16.5.10 register description 4.16.5.10.1 register overview - function model 0 (standard) read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic module configuration 513 cfo_siframegenid ...

  • Page 1404

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 1404 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.16.5.10.2 variable assignment in automation studio (x2x master) read write name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic basic functions sdclifecount sint ● positionhw udint ● positionlw udint posi...

  • Page 1405

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1405 4.16.5.10.3 register overview - bus controller function model 254 read write register object offset name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic module configuration 513 - cfo_siframegenid usint ● 6...

  • Page 1406

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 1406 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.16.5.10.4 variable assignment in automation studio (canio) read write name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic basic functions positionhw udint ● positionlw udint ● poscycle sint ● endat - rea...

  • Page 1407

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1407 4.16.5.10.5 module configuration the following configuration register can be used to configure different module settings. For example, the behavior on the x2x bus can be modified this way. The user ...

  • Page 1408

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 1408 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.16.5.10.6 basic functions this module can import a position when used together with an endat encoder. The received data is prepared in two different formats and given a time stamp. Six registers a...

  • Page 1409

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1409 4.16.5.10.6.5 postime (16 bit) names (pchannelname): postime postime_16 the sdc library requires a 16 bit value. This is why the nettime value is prepared in 16 bit format. Data type values [nettime...

  • Page 1410

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 1410 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.16.5.10.7 error management the module can also provide diagnostics about error states. There are two ways in which this is done: • module-based diagnostics • endat-based diagnostics 4.16.5.10.7.1 ...

  • Page 1411

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1411 the state byte indicates which error or warning is currently pending. Bit structure of "errorinfo": bit name information 0 error not present 0 encodersupplyerror 1 encoder supply error 1 reserved - ...

  • Page 1412

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 1412 x20 system user's manual 3.10 endat – reference warning: the digital interface provides an absolute position value that can be used to accurately describe the axis position. The position value is homed to this absolute value at ...

  • Page 1413

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1413 endatwarning names (pchannelname): endatwarning this register is used to indicate critical conditions on the endat encoder. Encoder still functional, but must be checked immediately. This generally ...

  • Page 1414

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 1414 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.16.5.10.8 sin/cos - analog interface configuration in addition to the digital endat, the module is also equipped with an analog interface for recording a differential sine-cosine signal. To increa...

  • Page 1415

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1415 4.16.5.10.9 endat 4.16.5.10.9.1 endat - digital interface configuration the endat interface allows you to establish a point-to-point connection with exactly one endat encoder. There are two ways to ...

  • Page 1416: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 1416 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.16.5.10.9.2 endat - read id the endat interface does more than just help the user specify axis positions. It can also be used to readout certain data stored in the encoder memory. The endat specif...

  • Page 1417

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1417 manufacturer parameters names (pchannelname): parammanuf_04 parammanuf_[05…47] these registers are used to prepare the manufacturer parameters according to the endat standard 2.1. The exact arrangem...

  • Page 1418

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 1418 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.16.5.10.9.3 endat - read additional information in addition to the identification data, other information can also be accessed from the encoder. However, the fol- lowing algorithm requires exact k...

  • Page 1419

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1419 call after proper configuration, the position value is transferred cyclically to the module. Two registers are available per channel as a buffer. The module confirms successful receipt by setting an...

  • Page 1420

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 1420 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.16.5.10.10 flatstream communication 4.16.5.10.10.1 introduction b&r offers an additional communication method for some modules. "flatstream" was designed for x2x and powerlink networks and allows ...

  • Page 1421

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1421 4.16.5.10.10.2 message, segment, sequence, mtu the physical properties of the bus system limit the amount of data that can be transferred during one bus cycle. With flatstream communication, all mes...

  • Page 1422

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 1422 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.16.5.10.10.3 the flatstream principle requirement: before flatstream can be used, the respective communication direction must be synchronized, i.E. Both commu- nication partners cyclically query t...

  • Page 1423: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1423 4.16.5.10.10.4 registers for flatstream mode five registers are available for configuring flatstream. The default configuration can be used to transmit small amounts of data relatively easily. Infor...

  • Page 1424: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 1424 x20 system user's manual 3.10 flatstream operation when using flatstream, the communication direction is enormously important. For sending data to a module ("out- put" direction), the tx bytes are used. For receiving data from a...

  • Page 1425

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1425 outputsequence the "outputsequence" register contains information about the communication status of the cpu. It is written by the cpu and read by the module. Data type values usint see bit structure...

  • Page 1426: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 1426 x20 system user's manual 3.10 inputsequence the "inputsequence" register contains information about the communication status of the module. It is written by the module and should only be read by the cpu. Data type values usint s...

  • Page 1427

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1427 synchronization during synchronization, a communication channel is opened. It is important to make sure that a module is present and that the current value of the sequencecounter is stored on the st...

  • Page 1428

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 1428 x20 system user's manual 3.10 sending and receiving if a channel is synchronized, then the opposite station is ready to receive messages from the transmitter. Before the transmitter can send data, it needs to first create a tran...

  • Page 1429

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1429 a unique control byte must be generated for each segment. In addition, the c0 control byte is generated to keep communication on standby. C0 (control byte 0) c1 (control byte 1) c2 (control byte 2) ...

  • Page 1430: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 1430 x20 system user's manual 3.10 transmitting data to a module (output) when transmitting data, the transmit array must be generated in the application program. Sequences are then transferred one by one using flatstream and receive...

  • Page 1431

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1431 message larger than the outputmtu: the transmit array, which needs to be created in the program sequence, consists of several elements. The user has to arrange the control and data bytes correctly a...

  • Page 1432

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 1432 x20 system user's manual 3.10 receiving data from a module (input) when receiving data, the transmit array is generated by the module, transferred via flatstream and must then be reproduced in the receive array. The structure of...

  • Page 1433

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1433 general flow chart: se gm en t d at a ha nd lin g sy nc hr on is at io n no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no no no yes yes no yes no inputsyncack = 1 ? Inputsequenceack > 0 ? Inputsyncack = 1 (in...

  • Page 1434: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 1434 x20 system user's manual 3.10 details it is recommended to store transmitted messages in separate receive arrays. After a set messageendbit is transmitted, the subsequent segment should be added to the receive array. The message...

  • Page 1435: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1435 flatstream mode register in the input direction, the transmit array is generated automatically. This register offers two options to the user that allow an incoming data stream to have a more compact...

  • Page 1436: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 1436 x20 system user's manual 3.10 multisegmentmtu allowed: with this option, the inputmtu is completely filled (if enough data is pending). The previously unfilled rx bytes transfer the next control bytes and their segments. This al...

  • Page 1437

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1437 using both options: it is also possible to use both options at the same time. Bus cycle 1 control byte with messageendbit = 0 bus cycle 2 bus cycle 3 - - - me1 c me1 c me0 c me1 c control byte with ...

  • Page 1438

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 1438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 flatstream adjustment if the way messages are structured is changed, then the way data in the transmit/receive array is arranged is also different. The following changes apply to the example given e...

  • Page 1439: Warning!

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1439 a unique control byte must be generated for each segment. In addition, the c0 control byte is generated to keep communication on standby. C1 (control byte 1) c2 (control byte 2) c3 (control byte 3) ...

  • Page 1440: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 1440 x20 system user's manual 3.10 large segments: segments are limited to a maximum of 63 bytes. This means they can be larger than the active mtu. These large segments are divided among several sequences when transferred. It is pos...

  • Page 1441

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1441 large segments and multisegmentmtu: example: three autonomous messages (7 bytes, 2 bytes, 9 bytes) are being transferred using an mtu with a width of 7 bytes. The configuration allows the transfer o...

  • Page 1442

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 1442 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.16.5.10.10.5 "forward" function example on the x2x bus the "forward" function is a method that can be used to substantially increase the flatstream data rate. The basic principle is also used in o...

  • Page 1443

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1443 configuration the forward function only has to be enabled for the input direction. Two additional configuration registers are available for doing so. Flatstream modules have been optimized in such a...

  • Page 1444

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 1444 x20 system user's manual 3.10 transmitting and receiving with forward the basic algorithm for transmitting and receiving data remains the same. With the forward function, up to seven unacknowledged sequences can be transmitted. ...

  • Page 1445: Information:

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1445 details/background: 1. Illegal sequencecounter size (counter offset) error situation: mtu not enabled if the difference between sequencecounter and sequenceack is larger than allowed during transmis...

  • Page 1446

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 1446 x20 system user's manual 3.10 errors when using forward in industrial environments, it's often the case that many different devices from various manufacturers are being used side by side. The electrical and/or electromagnetic pr...

  • Page 1447

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1447 4.16.5.10.11 endat on flatstream endat is a synchronous interface capable of half-duplex communication. A variety of safety measures are taken to ensure error-free signal transfer. • an automaticall...

  • Page 1448

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 1448 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.16.5.10.11.4 read parameter (0x04) master command protocol bytes no. Name information master 1 0x04 command (read parameter) 2 mrs code 3 parameter no. Memory area to read slave slave response pro...

  • Page 1449

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1449 4.16.5.10.11.6 read parameter from memory block (0x06) master command protocol bytes no. Name information master 1 0x06 command (read parameter from memory block) 2 mrs code 3 block no. 4 parameter ...

  • Page 1450

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 1450 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.16.5.10.11.8 read word 1 from additional information (0x08) master command protocol bytes no. Name information master 1 0x08 command (read word 1 from additional information) 2 mrs code memory are...

  • Page 1451

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1451 4.16.5.10.11.11 read word 4 from additional information (0x0b) master command protocol bytes no. Name information master 1 0x0b command (read word 4 from additional information) 2 mrs code memory ar...

  • Page 1452

    X20 system modules • digital signal processing modules • x20ds1928 1452 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.16.5.10.12 function models name number automation studio canopen devicenet modbus/tcp canio standard function model 0 ● bus controller function model 254 ● ● ● ● a function model specifies the reg...

  • Page 1453

    X20 system modules • dummy modules • x20if0000 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1453 4.17 dummy modules the dummy module is used as a placeholder to prevent configuration errors caused by empty slots. 4.17.1 brief information product id short description on page x20if0000 x20 dummy interface module (no...

  • Page 1454

    X20 system modules • dummy modules • x20if0000 1454 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20if0000 environmental conditions temperature operation horizontal installation -25 to 60°c vertical installation -25 to 50°c derating - storage -40 to 85°c transport -40 to 85°c relative humidity operation...

  • Page 1455

    X20 system modules • dummy modules • x20zf0000 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1455 4.17.3 x20zf0000 4.17.3.1 general information the x20zf0000 module is used as a place holder for later system expansion. • place holder for later system expansion • used as a terminal holder • module with no electrical...

  • Page 1456

    X20 system modules • dummy modules • x20zf0000 1456 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.17.3.3 technical data product id x20zf0000 short description accessories non-functional dummy module general information certification ce yes culus yes atex zone 2 yes gl yes operating conditions mounting orientation...

  • Page 1457

    X20 system modules • dummy modules • x20zf000f x20 system user's manual 3.10 1457 4.17.3.4 pinout x 20 z f 00 00 4.17.3.5 connection example gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc 4.17.4 x20zf000f 4.17.4.1 general information the x20zf000f module is used as a placeholder for later system expansion. • placeholder f...

  • Page 1458

    X20 system modules • dummy modules • x20zf000f 1458 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.17.4.2 order data model number short description figure dummy modules x20zf000f dummy x20 module (non-functional) required accessories bus modules x20bm01 x20 power supply bus module, 24 vdc keyed, internal i/o sup- ...

  • Page 1459

    X20 system modules • dummy modules • x20zf000f x20 system user's manual 3.10 1459 4.17.4.4 pinout 4.17.4.5 connection example gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc.

  • Page 1460

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • brief information 1460 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18 x20 electronics module communication the cs modules allow complex devices to be remotely connected to the x20 system via a serial interface. 4.18.1 brief information product id short...

  • Page 1461

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1011 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1461 4.18.2 x20cs1011 4.18.2.1 general information smartwire from the company moeller makes it possible to very easily integrate switching devices such as contac- tors or motor protection switches in ...

  • Page 1462

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1011 1462 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.2.3 technical data product id x20cs1011 short description communication module 1 smartwire master for controlling up to 16 slaves general information b&r id code 0xa38d status indicators sma...

  • Page 1463

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1011 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1463 product id x20cs1011 environmental conditions temperature operation horizontal installation 0 to 55°c vertical installation 0 to 50°c derating - storage -25 to 70°c transport -25 to 70°c relative...

  • Page 1464: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1011 1464 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.2.5 pinout s x 20 c s 1 01 1 r a r e u-aux gnd config.Button - u-aux gnd config.Button + smartwire interface 1 (green) 2 (yellow) 3 (red) 6 (black) 5 (brown) 4 (orange) information: x20ca4s0...

  • Page 1465

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1011 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1465 4.18.2.8 register description 4.18.2.8.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic configuration 5121 fastoutput01_02 usint ● 5123 fastoutput03_...

  • Page 1466

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1011 1466 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.2.8.3 communication module basic master for smartwire smartwire is essentially a master-slave system. • all data traffic is initiated by the master, but the system can only contain one maste...

  • Page 1467

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1011 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1467 4.18.2.8.5 show operating state of the master the current state of the master state machine is indicated in this register. Data type value code description 1 check_int_fram init state 2 check_lin...

  • Page 1468: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1011 1468 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.2.8.6 status of the master name: masterstatus the current status information for the master is shown in this register. Data type value uint see bit structure. Bit structure: bit description ...

  • Page 1469

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1011 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1469 4.18.2.8.7 status of all slaves name: slavestatus the current state of the slave is indicated collectively in this register. In the event of an error, the failed slaves are indicated in the respe...

  • Page 1470

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1011 1470 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.2.8.9 read input data from slave name: input01 to input16 each slave sends its input data and/or its status to the master. The data volume consumes 1 byte per slave. Each slave has one diagn...

  • Page 1471

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1011 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1471 4.18.2.8.12 basic application registers "smartwireenable" and "smartwiremode" by default, the smartwire bus is started automatically and must at least be configured using an external method (e.G....

  • Page 1472: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1011 1472 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.2.8.12.2 starting the bus after slave error status information after slave error in this case, a change to masteroperatingstate and masterstatus cannot be detected at first, although the res...

  • Page 1473

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1011 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1473 4.18.2.8.13 advanced applications the following registers are used for advanced diagnostics, for reading back the current configuration and for creat- ing a configuration from the application. Th...

  • Page 1474

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1011 1474 x20 system user's manual 3.10 import the configuration without starting the bus for safety reasons, it is possible to import the configuration for the connected bus without starting cyclic data transfer. This actual configura...

  • Page 1475

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1011 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1475 bus configuration settings manual start is configured, status information after startup: value (decimal) register information 1 masteroperatingstate init state 0 masterstatus 0 slavestatus a runn...

  • Page 1476

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 1476 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.3 x20cs1012 4.18.3.1 general information the x20 system is now being expanded to include a new m-bus master communication slice. This single-width module can be placed anywhere in an x20 i/o...

  • Page 1477

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1477 4.18.3.3 technical data product id x20cs1012 short description communication module 1 m-bus master for controlling up to 64 slaves general information b&r id code 0xcabf status indicators data tr...

  • Page 1478

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 1478 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.3.4 led status indicators for a description of the various operating modes, see the 2.11.1 "re leds" section. Figure led color status description off no power to module single flash unlink m...

  • Page 1479: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1479 4.18.3.7 m-bus 4.18.3.7.1 bus topology the bus topology has a significant influence on the maximum load of an m-bus network. In general a star structure is preferred over a tree structure and in ...

  • Page 1480

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 1480 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.3.7.5 calculating the resistive bus length the resistive cable length must be calculated in order to ensure a sufficient power supply of 12 v on the m-bus. What matters most here is the long...

  • Page 1481

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1481 4.18.3.8 register description 4.18.3.8.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic module configuration 774 cfo_functionmodel uint ● m-bus...

  • Page 1482

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 1482 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.3.8.2 function model 254 - bus controller read write register offset 1) name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic module configuration 774 - cfo_functionmodel uint ● m-bus - configu...

  • Page 1483: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1483 4.18.3.8.3 general information the m-bus standard is a serial bus system that handles half-duplex or asynchronous communication. The high level of variability provided by this protocol enables a ...

  • Page 1484: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 1484 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.3.8.5 m-bus - configuration separate configuration registers are provided for each value to read. These must be configured correctly in order to call up a counter value from the m-bus networ...

  • Page 1485

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1485 4.18.3.8.5.3 address name: cfo_padrdata1 to cfo_padrdata8 this register can be used to define the address where the desired values will be requested from. Data type value usint 1 to 250 (254) spe...

  • Page 1486

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 1486 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.3.8.5.7 timeout offset name: cfo_toutoffdata1 to cfo_toutoffdata8 the timeout for the m-bus communication generally depends on the currently defined transfer rate. The user can also define a...

  • Page 1487: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1487 4.18.3.8.6 m-bus - communication three important control and status bytes are provided in the b&r interface for communication with the m-bus slaves. For example the "mbuscommand" register can be ...

  • Page 1488

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 1488 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.3.8.6.3 m-bus status name: mbusstate this register contains the current m-bus network error state. All bits are managed in non-volatile memory. This means they must be reset via the "mbuscom...

  • Page 1489: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1489 4.18.3.8.6.6 data name: data1 to data8 each cyclic data register contains the respective pre-configured value from the m-bus network. The data type of the data register was designed to be variabl...

  • Page 1490

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 1490 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.3.8.7 flatstream communication 4.18.3.8.7.1 introduction b&r offers an additional communication method for some modules. "flatstream" was designed for x2x and powerlink networks and allows d...

  • Page 1491

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1491 4.18.3.8.7.2 message, segment, sequence, mtu the physical properties of the bus system limit the amount of data that can be transmitted during one bus cycle. With flatstream communication, all me...

  • Page 1492

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 1492 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.3.8.7.3 the flatstream principle requirements before flatstream can be used, the respective communication direction must be synchronized, i.E. Both commu- nication partners cyclically query ...

  • Page 1493: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1493 4.18.3.8.7.4 registers for flatstream mode five registers are available for configuring flatstream. The default configuration can be used to transmit small amounts of data relatively easily. Info...

  • Page 1494: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 1494 x20 system user's manual 3.10 flatstream operation when using flatstream, the communication direction is enormously important. For sending data to a module ("out- put" direction), the tx bytes are used. For receiving data fro...

  • Page 1495: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1495 messageendbit the "messageendbit" is set if the subsequent segment completes a message. The message has then been com- pletely transmitted and is ready for further processing. Information: in the...

  • Page 1496

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 1496 x20 system user's manual 3.10 communication status of the module name: inputsequence the "inputsequence" register contains information about the communication status of the module. It is written by the module and should only ...

  • Page 1497: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1497 relationship between outputsequence and inputsequence 0 - 2 3 outputsequencecounter outputsyncbit 4 - 6 7 inputsequenceack inputsyncack 0 - 2 3 inputsequencecounter inputsyncbit 4 - 6 7 outputseq...

  • Page 1498

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 1498 x20 system user's manual 3.10 synchronization during synchronization, a communication channel is opened. It is important to make sure that a module is present and that the current value of the sequencecounter is stored on the...

  • Page 1499

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1499 transmitting and receiving if a channel is synchronized, then the opposite station is ready to receive messages from the transmitter. Before the transmitter can send data, it needs to first creat...

  • Page 1500

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 1500 x20 system user's manual 3.10 first, the messages must be split into segments. In the default configuration, it is important to ensure that each sequence can hold an entire segment, including the associated control byte. The ...

  • Page 1501: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1501 transmitting data to a module (output) when transmitting data, the transmit array must be generated in the application program. Sequences are then transmitted one by one using flatstream and rece...

  • Page 1502

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 1502 x20 system user's manual 3.10 message larger than the outputmtu the transmit array, which needs to be created in the program sequence, consists of several elements. The user has to arrange the control and data bytes correctly...

  • Page 1503

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1503 receiving data from a module (input) when receiving data, the transmit array is generated by the module, transferred via flatstream and must then be reproduced in the receive array. The structure...

  • Page 1504

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 1504 x20 system user's manual 3.10 general flow chart se gm en t d at a ha nd lin g sy nc hr on is at io n no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no no no yes yes no yes no inputsyncack = 1 ? Inputsequenceack > 0 ? Inputsyncack = 1 (...

  • Page 1505: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1505 details it is recommended to store transmitted messages in separate receive arrays. After a set messageendbit is transmitted, the subsequent segment should be added to the receive array. The mess...

  • Page 1506: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 1506 x20 system user's manual 3.10 flatstream mode name: flatstreammode in the input direction, the transmit array is generated automatically. This register offers two options to the user that allow an incoming data stream to have...

  • Page 1507: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1507 multisegmentmtus allowed with this option, the inputmtu is completely filled (if enough data is pending). The previously unfilled rx bytes transmit the next control bytes and their segments. This...

  • Page 1508

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 1508 x20 system user's manual 3.10 using both options it is also possible to use both options at the same time. Bus cycle 1 control byte with messageendbit = 0 bus cycle 2 bus cycle 3 - - - me1 c me1 c me0 c me1 c control byte wit...

  • Page 1509

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1509 adjusting the flatstream if the way messages are structured is changed, then the way data in the transmit/receive array is arranged is also different. The following changes apply to the example g...

  • Page 1510: Warning!

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 1510 x20 system user's manual 3.10 first, the messages must be split into segments. As in the default configuration, it is important for each sequence to begin with a control byte. The free bits in the mtu at the end of a message ...

  • Page 1511: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1511 large segments segments are limited to a maximum of 63 bytes. This means they can be larger than the active mtu. These large segments are divided among several sequences when transmitted. It is p...

  • Page 1512

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 1512 x20 system user's manual 3.10 large segments and multisegmentmtu example three autonomous messages (7 bytes, 2 bytes and 9 bytes) are being transmitted using an mtu with a width of 7 bytes. The configuration allows transmissi...

  • Page 1513

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1513 4.18.3.8.7.5 example of forward functionality on x2x link forward functionality is a method that can be used to substantially increase the flatstream data rate. The basic principle is also used i...

  • Page 1514

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 1514 x20 system user's manual 3.10 configuration the forward function only has to be enabled for the input direction. Two additional configuration registers are available for doing so. Flatstream modules have been optimized in suc...

  • Page 1515

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1515 transmitting and receiving with forward the basic algorithm for transmitting and receiving data remains the same. With the forward function, up to seven unacknowledged sequences can be transmitte...

  • Page 1516: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 1516 x20 system user's manual 3.10 details/background 1. Illegal sequencecounter size (counter offset) error situation: mtu not enabled if the difference between sequencecounter and sequenceack is larger than allowed during transm...

  • Page 1517

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1517 errors when using forward in industrial environments, it is often the case that many different devices from various manufacturers are being used side by side. The electrical and/or electromagneti...

  • Page 1518

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 1518 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.3.8.8 m-bus with flatstream when using flatstream communication, the module acts as a bridge between the x2x master and an intelligent field device connected to the module. Flatstream mode c...

  • Page 1519: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1519 index record 0 configuration block the interface parameters for defining the module's behavior in the m-bus network must be chosen configuration part. Information: with the standard protocol, the...

  • Page 1520

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 1520 x20 system user's manual 3.10 index record 1 data query block the m-bus parameters to be retrieved from the memory of the m-bus slaves are requested in the request part. The user can request certain parameters from the slave ...

  • Page 1521

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1521 4.18.3.8.8.2 flatstream in input direction flatstream response the standard protocol has three different responses according to the request. Response error the error response is sent when the mod...

  • Page 1522

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 1522 x20 system user's manual 3.10 response - native m-bus this response corresponds with a successfully transferred m-bus frame created within the application. Bytes name value description 1 frame number: for synchronization in t...

  • Page 1523

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1012 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1523 4.18.3.8.9 minimum cycle time the minimum cycle time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced without communication errors occurring. It should be noted that very fast cycles decrease the idl...

  • Page 1524

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1013 1524 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.4 x20cs1013 4.18.4.1 general information the x20cs1013 module is a dali control device with an integrated power supply. Up to 64 operating devices can be connected. Dali stands for digital a...

  • Page 1525

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1013 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1525 4.18.4.3 technical data product id x20cs1013 short description communication module dali master general information b&r id code 0xde85 diagnostics module status yes, with status led and software ...

  • Page 1526: Warning!

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1013 1526 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.4.4 led status indicators figure led color status description off no power to module r green on run mode off no power to module or everything ok e red on error status tx yellow control devic...

  • Page 1527

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1013 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1527 4.18.4.7 register description 4.18.4.7.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic 258 dali_state uint ● 263 dali_requestcounter usint ● 261 dal...

  • Page 1528

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1013 1528 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.4.7.4 dali - communication the x20cs1013 provides the user with a channel for communicating with and controlling dali slaves in a dali network. The multi-master mode described in the dali st...

  • Page 1529: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1013 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1529 4.18.4.7.4.5 enabling the communication channel name: dali_enable this register is used to enable or disable the communication channel. Data type value usint see bit structure bit structure: bit ...

  • Page 1530: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1013 1530 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.4.7.4.8 addressing within a dali network name: dali_command this register provides the module with the command for the addressed receiver(s) in the dali network. Data type value information ...

  • Page 1531

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1013 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1531 code (dec.) function response 6 minimum brightness – no smooth transition – turns the light on 7 decrease brightness by one step (including switching off) – no smooth transition – command can tur...

  • Page 1532

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1013 1532 x20 system user's manual 3.10 code (dec.) function response 161 checks the maximum value maximum value 162 checks the minimum value minimum value 163 checks the switch-on power level switch-on power level […] 165 checks the d...

  • Page 1533

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1533 4.18.5 x20cs1020 4.18.5.1 general information in addition to the standard i/o, complex devices often need to be connected. The x20cs communication modules are designed precisely for cases like th...

  • Page 1534

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 1534 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.5.3 technical data product id x20cs1020 short description communication module 1x rs232 general information b&r id code 0x1fcf status indicators data transfer, operating status, module statu...

  • Page 1535

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1535 4.18.5.4 led status indicators for a description of the various operating modes, see the 2.11.1 "re leds" section. Figure led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mo...

  • Page 1536

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 1536 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.5.6 register description 4.18.5.6.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic module – configuration - asynsize - serial interface – ...

  • Page 1537: Note:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1537 4.18.5.6.2 function model 254 - bus controller read write register offset 1) name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic serial interface – configuration 257 - phymode_canio usint ● 268 - ...

  • Page 1538

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 1538 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.5.6.4 general information the module is connected to the cpu via x2x link and offers the possibility to manage an eia232 interface (rs232). This interface is handled either via the flatstrea...

  • Page 1539: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1539 4.18.5.6.5.5 parity_if name: phyparity phyparity_canio this register is used to define the parity check type. Possible values are ascii coded. Data type value description 48 "0" - (low) bit is al...

  • Page 1540: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 1540 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.5.6.6.3 rts evaluation name: hshrxf hshrxf_canio these registers can be used to configure how the hardware handshake line rts is controlled depending on the fill level of the receive buffer....

  • Page 1541: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1541 4.18.5.6.6.7 handshake repetition name: hssperiod hssperiod_canio when using a software handshake, some applications require periodic repetition of the current status. The repeat time can be defi...

  • Page 1542

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 1542 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.5.6.6.11 inverting rts/cts name: hshinv hshinv_canio this register can be used to create a logical inverse of the rts/cts signals. Data type value usint see bit structure. Bit structure: bit...

  • Page 1543

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1543 4.18.5.6.7.4 maximum number of bytes transmitted name: txeomsize txeomsize_canio these registers configure the maximum number of bytes in the transmit frame. The message is considered to be ended...

  • Page 1544

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 1544 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.5.6.8 status messages - configuration the status messages provide the user with information about the current situation in the downstream serial network. 4.18.5.6.8.1 error detection setting...

  • Page 1545

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1545 4.18.5.6.9 status messages - communication after configuration is completed, up to four status messages can be evaluated in the application. 4.18.5.6.9.1 error message status bits name: startbite...

  • Page 1546

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 1546 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.5.6.10 flatstream communication 4.18.5.6.10.1 introduction b&r offers an additional communication method for some modules. "flatstream" was designed for x2x and powerlink networks and allows...

  • Page 1547

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1547 4.18.5.6.10.2 message, segment, sequence, mtu the physical properties of the bus system limit the amount of data that can be transmitted during one bus cycle. With flatstream communication, all m...

  • Page 1548

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 1548 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.5.6.10.3 the flatstream principle requirements before flatstream can be used, the respective communication direction must be synchronized, i.E. Both commu- nication partners cyclically query...

  • Page 1549: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1549 4.18.5.6.10.4 registers for flatstream mode five registers are available for configuring flatstream. The default configuration can be used to transmit small amounts of data relatively easily. Inf...

  • Page 1550: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 1550 x20 system user's manual 3.10 flatstream operation when using flatstream, the communication direction is enormously important. For sending data to a module ("out- put" direction), the tx bytes are used. For receiving data fro...

  • Page 1551: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1551 messageendbit the "messageendbit" is set if the subsequent segment completes a message. The message has then been com- pletely transmitted and is ready for further processing. Information: in the...

  • Page 1552

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 1552 x20 system user's manual 3.10 communication status of the module name: inputsequence the "inputsequence" register contains information about the communication status of the module. It is written by the module and should only ...

  • Page 1553: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1553 relationship between outputsequence and inputsequence 0 - 2 3 outputsequencecounter outputsyncbit 4 - 6 7 inputsequenceack inputsyncack 0 - 2 3 inputsequencecounter inputsyncbit 4 - 6 7 outputseq...

  • Page 1554

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 1554 x20 system user's manual 3.10 synchronization during synchronization, a communication channel is opened. It is important to make sure that a module is present and that the current value of the sequencecounter is stored on the...

  • Page 1555

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1555 transmitting and receiving if a channel is synchronized, then the opposite station is ready to receive messages from the transmitter. Before the transmitter can send data, it needs to first creat...

  • Page 1556

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 1556 x20 system user's manual 3.10 first, the messages must be split into segments. In the default configuration, it is important to ensure that each sequence can hold an entire segment, including the associated control byte. The ...

  • Page 1557: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1557 transmitting data to a module (output) when transmitting data, the transmit array must be generated in the application program. Sequences are then transmitted one by one using flatstream and rece...

  • Page 1558

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 1558 x20 system user's manual 3.10 message larger than the outputmtu the transmit array, which needs to be created in the program sequence, consists of several elements. The user has to arrange the control and data bytes correctly...

  • Page 1559

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1559 receiving data from a module (input) when receiving data, the transmit array is generated by the module, transferred via flatstream and must then be reproduced in the receive array. The structure...

  • Page 1560

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 1560 x20 system user's manual 3.10 general flow chart se gm en t d at a ha nd lin g sy nc hr on is at io n no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no no no yes yes no yes no inputsyncack = 1 ? Inputsequenceack > 0 ? Inputsyncack = 1 (...

  • Page 1561: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1561 details it is recommended to store transmitted messages in separate receive arrays. After a set messageendbit is transmitted, the subsequent segment should be added to the receive array. The mess...

  • Page 1562: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 1562 x20 system user's manual 3.10 flatstream mode name: flatstreammode in the input direction, the transmit array is generated automatically. This register offers two options to the user that allow an incoming data stream to have...

  • Page 1563: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1563 multisegmentmtus allowed with this option, the inputmtu is completely filled (if enough data is pending). The previously unfilled rx bytes transmit the next control bytes and their segments. This...

  • Page 1564

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 1564 x20 system user's manual 3.10 using both options it is also possible to use both options at the same time. Bus cycle 1 control byte with messageendbit = 0 bus cycle 2 bus cycle 3 - - - me1 c me1 c me0 c me1 c control byte wit...

  • Page 1565

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1565 adjusting the flatstream if the way messages are structured is changed, then the way data in the transmit/receive array is arranged is also different. The following changes apply to the example g...

  • Page 1566: Warning!

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 1566 x20 system user's manual 3.10 first, the messages must be split into segments. As in the default configuration, it is important for each sequence to begin with a control byte. The free bits in the mtu at the end of a message ...

  • Page 1567: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1567 large segments segments are limited to a maximum of 63 bytes. This means they can be larger than the active mtu. These large segments are divided among several sequences when transmitted. It is p...

  • Page 1568

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 1568 x20 system user's manual 3.10 large segments and multisegmentmtu example three autonomous messages (7 bytes, 2 bytes and 9 bytes) are being transmitted using an mtu with a width of 7 bytes. The configuration allows transmissi...

  • Page 1569

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1569 4.18.5.6.10.5 example of forward functionality on x2x link forward functionality is a method that can be used to substantially increase the flatstream data rate. The basic principle is also used ...

  • Page 1570

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 1570 x20 system user's manual 3.10 configuration the forward function only has to be enabled for the input direction. Two additional configuration registers are available for doing so. Flatstream modules have been optimized in suc...

  • Page 1571

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1571 transmitting and receiving with forward the basic algorithm for transmitting and receiving data remains the same. With the forward function, up to seven unacknowledged sequences can be transmitte...

  • Page 1572: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 1572 x20 system user's manual 3.10 details/background 1. Illegal sequencecounter size (counter offset) error situation: mtu not enabled if the difference between sequencecounter and sequenceack is larger than allowed during transm...

  • Page 1573

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1573 errors when using forward in industrial environments, it is often the case that many different devices from various manufacturers are being used side by side. The electrical and/or electromagneti...

  • Page 1574: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1020 1574 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.5.6.11 serial with flatstream when using flatstream communication, the module acts as a bridge between the x2x link master and an intelligent field device connected to the module. Flatstream...

  • Page 1575

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1575 4.18.6 x20cs1030 4.18.6.1 general information in addition to the standard i/o, complex devices often need to be connected. The x20cs communication modules are designed precisely for cases like th...

  • Page 1576

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 1576 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.6.3 technical data product id x20cs1030 short description communication module 1x rs485 / rs422 general information b&r id code 0x1fd0 status indicators data transfer, terminating resistor, ...

  • Page 1577

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1577 4.18.6.4 led status indicators for a description of the various operating modes, see the 2.11.1 "re leds" section. Figure led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mo...

  • Page 1578

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 1578 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.6.6 terminating resistor on off terminating resistor switch a terminating resistor is integrated in the communication module. It can be turned on and off with a switch on the bottom of the h...

  • Page 1579

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1579 4.18.6.7 register description 4.18.6.7.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic module – configuration - asynsize - serial interface – ...

  • Page 1580: Note:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 1580 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.6.7.2 function model 254 - bus controller read write register offset 1) name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic serial interface – configuration 257 - phymode_canio usint ● 268 - ...

  • Page 1581

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1581 4.18.6.7.4 general information the module is connected to the cpu via x2x link and offers the possibility to manage an eia485/eia422 interface (rs485/rs422). This interface is handled either via ...

  • Page 1582: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 1582 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.6.7.5.5 parity_if name: phyparity phyparity_canio this register is used to define the parity check type. Possible values are ascii coded. Data type value description 48 "0" - (low) bit is al...

  • Page 1583

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1583 4.18.6.7.6.3 turn on software handshake name: hssxon hssxon_canio this register can be used to configure the xon character. The value 17 is the default, but any other value can also be configured...

  • Page 1584

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 1584 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.6.7.7 frame - configuration different message termination codes can be specified in order to correctly create transmitted tx frames and cor- rectly interpret received rx frames. 4.18.6.7.7.1...

  • Page 1585

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1585 4.18.6.7.7.5 define receive terminator name: rxeomchar0 to rxeomchar3 rxeomchar0_canio to rxeomchar3_canio it is possible to configure a receive terminator for all registers. The message is consi...

  • Page 1586

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 1586 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.6.7.8 status messages - configuration the status messages provide the user with information about the current situation in the downstream serial network. 4.18.6.7.8.1 error detection setting...

  • Page 1587

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1587 4.18.6.7.9 status messages - communication after configuration is completed, up to four status messages can be evaluated in the application. 4.18.6.7.9.1 error message status bits name: startbite...

  • Page 1588

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 1588 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.6.7.10 flatstream communication 4.18.6.7.10.1 introduction b&r offers an additional communication method for some modules. "flatstream" was designed for x2x and powerlink networks and allows...

  • Page 1589

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1589 4.18.6.7.10.2 message, segment, sequence, mtu the physical properties of the bus system limit the amount of data that can be transmitted during one bus cycle. With flatstream communication, all m...

  • Page 1590

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 1590 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.6.7.10.3 the flatstream principle requirements before flatstream can be used, the respective communication direction must be synchronized, i.E. Both commu- nication partners cyclically query...

  • Page 1591: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1591 4.18.6.7.10.4 registers for flatstream mode five registers are available for configuring flatstream. The default configuration can be used to transmit small amounts of data relatively easily. Inf...

  • Page 1592: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 1592 x20 system user's manual 3.10 flatstream operation when using flatstream, the communication direction is enormously important. For sending data to a module ("out- put" direction), the tx bytes are used. For receiving data fro...

  • Page 1593: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1593 messageendbit the "messageendbit" is set if the subsequent segment completes a message. The message has then been com- pletely transmitted and is ready for further processing. Information: in the...

  • Page 1594

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 1594 x20 system user's manual 3.10 communication status of the module name: inputsequence the "inputsequence" register contains information about the communication status of the module. It is written by the module and should only ...

  • Page 1595: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1595 relationship between outputsequence and inputsequence 0 - 2 3 outputsequencecounter outputsyncbit 4 - 6 7 inputsequenceack inputsyncack 0 - 2 3 inputsequencecounter inputsyncbit 4 - 6 7 outputseq...

  • Page 1596

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 1596 x20 system user's manual 3.10 synchronization during synchronization, a communication channel is opened. It is important to make sure that a module is present and that the current value of the sequencecounter is stored on the...

  • Page 1597

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1597 transmitting and receiving if a channel is synchronized, then the opposite station is ready to receive messages from the transmitter. Before the transmitter can send data, it needs to first creat...

  • Page 1598

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 1598 x20 system user's manual 3.10 first, the messages must be split into segments. In the default configuration, it is important to ensure that each sequence can hold an entire segment, including the associated control byte. The ...

  • Page 1599: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1599 transmitting data to a module (output) when transmitting data, the transmit array must be generated in the application program. Sequences are then transmitted one by one using flatstream and rece...

  • Page 1600

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 1600 x20 system user's manual 3.10 message larger than the outputmtu the transmit array, which needs to be created in the program sequence, consists of several elements. The user has to arrange the control and data bytes correctly...

  • Page 1601

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1601 receiving data from a module (input) when receiving data, the transmit array is generated by the module, transferred via flatstream and must then be reproduced in the receive array. The structure...

  • Page 1602

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 1602 x20 system user's manual 3.10 general flow chart se gm en t d at a ha nd lin g sy nc hr on is at io n no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no no no yes yes no yes no inputsyncack = 1 ? Inputsequenceack > 0 ? Inputsyncack = 1 (...

  • Page 1603: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1603 details it is recommended to store transmitted messages in separate receive arrays. After a set messageendbit is transmitted, the subsequent segment should be added to the receive array. The mess...

  • Page 1604: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 1604 x20 system user's manual 3.10 flatstream mode name: flatstreammode in the input direction, the transmit array is generated automatically. This register offers two options to the user that allow an incoming data stream to have...

  • Page 1605: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1605 multisegmentmtus allowed with this option, the inputmtu is completely filled (if enough data is pending). The previously unfilled rx bytes transmit the next control bytes and their segments. This...

  • Page 1606

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 1606 x20 system user's manual 3.10 using both options it is also possible to use both options at the same time. Bus cycle 1 control byte with messageendbit = 0 bus cycle 2 bus cycle 3 - - - me1 c me1 c me0 c me1 c control byte wit...

  • Page 1607

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1607 adjusting the flatstream if the way messages are structured is changed, then the way data in the transmit/receive array is arranged is also different. The following changes apply to the example g...

  • Page 1608: Warning!

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 1608 x20 system user's manual 3.10 first, the messages must be split into segments. As in the default configuration, it is important for each sequence to begin with a control byte. The free bits in the mtu at the end of a message ...

  • Page 1609: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1609 large segments segments are limited to a maximum of 63 bytes. This means they can be larger than the active mtu. These large segments are divided among several sequences when transmitted. It is p...

  • Page 1610

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 1610 x20 system user's manual 3.10 large segments and multisegmentmtu example three autonomous messages (7 bytes, 2 bytes and 9 bytes) are being transmitted using an mtu with a width of 7 bytes. The configuration allows transmissi...

  • Page 1611

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1611 4.18.6.7.10.5 example of forward functionality on x2x link forward functionality is a method that can be used to substantially increase the flatstream data rate. The basic principle is also used ...

  • Page 1612

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 1612 x20 system user's manual 3.10 configuration the forward function only has to be enabled for the input direction. Two additional configuration registers are available for doing so. Flatstream modules have been optimized in suc...

  • Page 1613

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1613 transmitting and receiving with forward the basic algorithm for transmitting and receiving data remains the same. With the forward function, up to seven unacknowledged sequences can be transmitte...

  • Page 1614: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 1614 x20 system user's manual 3.10 details/background 1. Illegal sequencecounter size (counter offset) error situation: mtu not enabled if the difference between sequencecounter and sequenceack is larger than allowed during transm...

  • Page 1615

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1615 errors when using forward in industrial environments, it is often the case that many different devices from various manufacturers are being used side by side. The electrical and/or electromagneti...

  • Page 1616: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1030 1616 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.6.7.11 serial with flatstream when using flatstream communication, the module acts as a bridge between the x2x link master and an intelligent field device connected to the module. Flatstream...

  • Page 1617

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1617 4.18.7 x20cs1070 4.18.7.1 general information in addition to the standard i/o, complex devices often need to be connected. The x20cs communication modules are designed precisely for cases like th...

  • Page 1618

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 1618 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.7.3 technical data product id x20cs1070 short description communication module 1x can bus general information b&r id code 0x1fd1 status indicators data transfer, terminating resistor, operat...

  • Page 1619

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1619 4.18.7.4 led status indicators for a description of the various operating modes, see the 2.11.1 "re leds" section. Figure led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mo...

  • Page 1620: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 1620 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.7.7 register description 4.18.7.7.1 function model 0 - flat in the "flat" function model, can information is transferred via cyclic input and output registers. All data for a can object (8 c...

  • Page 1621: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1621 4.18.7.7.2 function model 2 - stream and function model 254 - cyclic stream the "stream" and "cyclic stream" function models use a module-specific driver for the cpu's operating system. The inter...

  • Page 1622: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 1622 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.7.7.3 function model 254 - flatstream the "flatstream" function model provides independent communication between an x2x link master and the mod- ule. This interface was implemented as a sepa...

  • Page 1623: Note:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1623 4.18.7.7.4 function model 254 - bus controller the "bus controller" function model is a reduced form of the "flatstream" function model. Instead of up to 27 tx / rx bytes, a maximum of 7 tx / rx ...

  • Page 1624: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 1624 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.7.7.6 can object a can object is always made up of a 4-byte identifier and a maximum of 8 subsequent data bytes. This also results in the relationship between can object length and the amoun...

  • Page 1625

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1625 4.18.7.7.7 interface - configuration 4.18.7.7.7.1 transfer rate name: configbaudrate "baud rate" in the as i/o configuration. Configuration of the can transfer rate for the interface. Data type v...

  • Page 1626

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 1626 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.7.7.7.5 configuration of error messages name: cfo_errorid0007 this register must be used first to configure the error messages that have to be transferred. If the corresponding enable bit is...

  • Page 1627

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1627 4.18.7.7.8 interface - communication 4.18.7.7.8.1 can error status name: can error status the bits in this register indicate the error states defined in the can protocol. If an error occurs, the ...

  • Page 1628

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 1628 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.7.7.8.4 read "txcount" name: txcountreadback the value of "txcount" is copied from the module into this register. This makes it possible for the application task to verify that the can teleg...

  • Page 1629

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1629 4.18.7.7.8.7 read "rxcount" from the previous cycle name: rxcountlatch this register always contains the "rxcount" value from the previous cycle. It can be used to detect transfer errors from the...

  • Page 1630

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 1630 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.7.7.9 send buffer 4.18.7.7.9.1 number of can payload data bytes name: txdatasize number of can payload data bytes to be transmitted if a value less than 0 is specified here, this can telegra...

  • Page 1631

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1631 4.18.7.7.10 receive buffers 0 and 1 4.18.7.7.10.1 number of valid can payload data bytes name: rxdatasize0 rxdatasize1 number of valid can payload data bytes. This register also uses the value -1...

  • Page 1632

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 1632 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.7.7.11 flatstream communication 4.18.7.7.11.1 introduction b&r offers an additional communication method for some modules. "flatstream" was designed for x2x and powerlink networks and allows...

  • Page 1633

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1633 4.18.7.7.11.2 message, segment, sequence, mtu the physical properties of the bus system limit the amount of data that can be transmitted during one bus cycle. With flatstream communication, all m...

  • Page 1634

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 1634 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.7.7.11.3 the flatstream principle requirements before flatstream can be used, the respective communication direction must be synchronized, i.E. Both commu- nication partners cyclically query...

  • Page 1635: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1635 4.18.7.7.11.4 registers for flatstream mode five registers are available for configuring flatstream. The default configuration can be used to transmit small amounts of data relatively easily. Inf...

  • Page 1636: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 1636 x20 system user's manual 3.10 flatstream operation when using flatstream, the communication direction is enormously important. For sending data to a module ("out- put" direction), the tx bytes are used. For receiving data fro...

  • Page 1637: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1637 messageendbit the "messageendbit" is set if the subsequent segment completes a message. The message has then been com- pletely transmitted and is ready for further processing. Information: in the...

  • Page 1638

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 1638 x20 system user's manual 3.10 communication status of the module name: inputsequence the "inputsequence" register contains information about the communication status of the module. It is written by the module and should only ...

  • Page 1639: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1639 relationship between outputsequence and inputsequence 0 - 2 3 outputsequencecounter outputsyncbit 4 - 6 7 inputsequenceack inputsyncack 0 - 2 3 inputsequencecounter inputsyncbit 4 - 6 7 outputseq...

  • Page 1640

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 1640 x20 system user's manual 3.10 synchronization during synchronization, a communication channel is opened. It is important to make sure that a module is present and that the current value of the sequencecounter is stored on the...

  • Page 1641

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1641 transmitting and receiving if a channel is synchronized, then the opposite station is ready to receive messages from the transmitter. Before the transmitter can send data, it needs to first creat...

  • Page 1642

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 1642 x20 system user's manual 3.10 first, the messages must be split into segments. In the default configuration, it is important to ensure that each sequence can hold an entire segment, including the associated control byte. The ...

  • Page 1643: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1643 transmitting data to a module (output) when transmitting data, the transmit array must be generated in the application program. Sequences are then transmitted one by one using flatstream and rece...

  • Page 1644

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 1644 x20 system user's manual 3.10 message larger than the outputmtu the transmit array, which needs to be created in the program sequence, consists of several elements. The user has to arrange the control and data bytes correctly...

  • Page 1645

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1645 receiving data from a module (input) when receiving data, the transmit array is generated by the module, transferred via flatstream and must then be reproduced in the receive array. The structure...

  • Page 1646

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 1646 x20 system user's manual 3.10 general flow chart se gm en t d at a ha nd lin g sy nc hr on is at io n no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no no no yes yes no yes no inputsyncack = 1 ? Inputsequenceack > 0 ? Inputsyncack = 1 (...

  • Page 1647: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1647 details it is recommended to store transmitted messages in separate receive arrays. After a set messageendbit is transmitted, the subsequent segment should be added to the receive array. The mess...

  • Page 1648: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 1648 x20 system user's manual 3.10 flatstream mode name: flatstreammode in the input direction, the transmit array is generated automatically. This register offers two options to the user that allow an incoming data stream to have...

  • Page 1649: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1649 multisegmentmtus allowed with this option, the inputmtu is completely filled (if enough data is pending). The previously unfilled rx bytes transmit the next control bytes and their segments. This...

  • Page 1650

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 1650 x20 system user's manual 3.10 using both options it is also possible to use both options at the same time. Bus cycle 1 control byte with messageendbit = 0 bus cycle 2 bus cycle 3 - - - me1 c me1 c me0 c me1 c control byte wit...

  • Page 1651

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1651 adjusting the flatstream if the way messages are structured is changed, then the way data in the transmit/receive array is arranged is also different. The following changes apply to the example g...

  • Page 1652: Warning!

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 1652 x20 system user's manual 3.10 first, the messages must be split into segments. As in the default configuration, it is important for each sequence to begin with a control byte. The free bits in the mtu at the end of a message ...

  • Page 1653: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1653 large segments segments are limited to a maximum of 63 bytes. This means they can be larger than the active mtu. These large segments are divided among several sequences when transmitted. It is p...

  • Page 1654

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 1654 x20 system user's manual 3.10 large segments and multisegmentmtu example three autonomous messages (7 bytes, 2 bytes and 9 bytes) are being transmitted using an mtu with a width of 7 bytes. The configuration allows transmissi...

  • Page 1655

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1655 4.18.7.7.11.5 example of forward functionality on x2x link forward functionality is a method that can be used to substantially increase the flatstream data rate. The basic principle is also used ...

  • Page 1656

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 1656 x20 system user's manual 3.10 configuration the forward function only has to be enabled for the input direction. Two additional configuration registers are available for doing so. Flatstream modules have been optimized in suc...

  • Page 1657

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1657 transmitting and receiving with forward the basic algorithm for transmitting and receiving data remains the same. With the forward function, up to seven unacknowledged sequences can be transmitte...

  • Page 1658: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 1658 x20 system user's manual 3.10 details/background 1. Illegal sequencecounter size (counter offset) error situation: mtu not enabled if the difference between sequencecounter and sequenceack is larger than allowed during transm...

  • Page 1659

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1659 errors when using forward in industrial environments, it is often the case that many different devices from various manufacturers are being used side by side. The electrical and/or electromagneti...

  • Page 1660: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 1660 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.7.7.12 acyclical frame size name: asynsize when the stream is used, the data is switched internally between the module and the cpu. For this purpose, a defined amount of acyclical bytes are ...

  • Page 1661

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs1070 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1661 4.18.7.7.13 minimum cycle time the minimum cycle time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced without communication errors occurring. It should be noted that very fast cycles decrease the id...

  • Page 1662

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 1662 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.8 x20cs2770 4.18.8.1 general information in addition to the standard i/o, complex devices often need to be connected. The x20 cs communication modules are intended precisely for cases like t...

  • Page 1663

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1663 4.18.8.3 technical data product id x20cs2770 short description communication module 2x can bus general information b&r id code 0xa009 status indicators data transfer, terminating resistor, operat...

  • Page 1664

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 1664 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.8.4 led status indicators for a description of the various operating modes, see the 2.11.1 "re leds" section. Figure led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mo...

  • Page 1665: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1665 4.18.8.7 register description 4.18.8.7.1 function model 0 - flat in the "flat" function model, can information is transferred via cyclic input and output registers. All data for a can object (8 c...

  • Page 1666: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 1666 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.8.7.2 function model 2 - stream and function model 254 - cyclic stream the "stream" and "cyclic stream" function models use a module-specific driver for the cpu's operating system. The inter...

  • Page 1667: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1667 4.18.8.7.3 function model 254 - flatstream the "flatstream" function model provides independent communication between an x2x link master and the mod- ule. This interface was implemented as a sepa...

  • Page 1668: Note:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 1668 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.8.7.4 function model 254 - bus controller the "bus controller" function model is a reduced form of the "flatstream" function model. Instead of up to 27 tx / rx bytes, a maximum of 7 tx / rx ...

  • Page 1669: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1669 4.18.8.7.6 can object a can object is always made up of a 4-byte identifier and a maximum of 8 subsequent data bytes. This also results in the relationship between can object length and the amoun...

  • Page 1670

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 1670 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.8.7.7 interface - configuration 4.18.8.7.7.1 transfer rate name: config01baudrate config02baudrate "baud rate" in the as i/o configuration. Configuration of the can transfer rate for the res...

  • Page 1671

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1671 4.18.8.7.7.5 configuration of error messages name: cfo_errorid0007 this register must be used first to configure the error messages that have to be transferred. If the corresponding enable bit is...

  • Page 1672

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 1672 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.8.7.8 interface - communication 4.18.8.7.8.1 can error status name: can error status the bits in this register indicate the error states defined in the can protocol. If an error occurs, the ...

  • Page 1673

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1673 4.18.8.7.8.3 new can telegram for transmit buffer name: tx01count tx02count by increasing this value, the application notifies the module that a new can telegram should be transferred into the tr...

  • Page 1674

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 1674 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.8.7.9 transmit buffer for if1 and if2 4.18.8.7.9.1 number of can payload data bytes name: tx01datasize tx02datasize number of can payload data bytes to be transmitted if a value less than 0 ...

  • Page 1675

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1675 4.18.8.7.10 receive buffer for if1 and if2 4.18.8.7.10.1 number of valid can payload data bytes name: rx01datasize rx02datasize number of valid can payload data bytes. This register also uses the...

  • Page 1676

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 1676 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.8.7.11 flatstream communication 4.18.8.7.11.1 introduction b&r offers an additional communication method for some modules. "flatstream" was designed for x2x and powerlink networks and allows...

  • Page 1677

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1677 4.18.8.7.11.2 message, segment, sequence, mtu the physical properties of the bus system limit the amount of data that can be transmitted during one bus cycle. With flatstream communication, all m...

  • Page 1678

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 1678 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.8.7.11.3 the flatstream principle requirements before flatstream can be used, the respective communication direction must be synchronized, i.E. Both commu- nication partners cyclically query...

  • Page 1679: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1679 4.18.8.7.11.4 registers for flatstream mode five registers are available for configuring flatstream. The default configuration can be used to transmit small amounts of data relatively easily. Inf...

  • Page 1680: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 1680 x20 system user's manual 3.10 flatstream operation when using flatstream, the communication direction is enormously important. For sending data to a module ("out- put" direction), the tx bytes are used. For receiving data fro...

  • Page 1681: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1681 messageendbit the "messageendbit" is set if the subsequent segment completes a message. The message has then been com- pletely transmitted and is ready for further processing. Information: in the...

  • Page 1682

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 1682 x20 system user's manual 3.10 communication status of the module name: inputsequence the "inputsequence" register contains information about the communication status of the module. It is written by the module and should only ...

  • Page 1683: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1683 relationship between outputsequence and inputsequence 0 - 2 3 outputsequencecounter outputsyncbit 4 - 6 7 inputsequenceack inputsyncack 0 - 2 3 inputsequencecounter inputsyncbit 4 - 6 7 outputseq...

  • Page 1684

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 1684 x20 system user's manual 3.10 synchronization during synchronization, a communication channel is opened. It is important to make sure that a module is present and that the current value of the sequencecounter is stored on the...

  • Page 1685

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1685 transmitting and receiving if a channel is synchronized, then the opposite station is ready to receive messages from the transmitter. Before the transmitter can send data, it needs to first creat...

  • Page 1686

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 1686 x20 system user's manual 3.10 first, the messages must be split into segments. In the default configuration, it is important to ensure that each sequence can hold an entire segment, including the associated control byte. The ...

  • Page 1687: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1687 transmitting data to a module (output) when transmitting data, the transmit array must be generated in the application program. Sequences are then transmitted one by one using flatstream and rece...

  • Page 1688

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 1688 x20 system user's manual 3.10 message larger than the outputmtu the transmit array, which needs to be created in the program sequence, consists of several elements. The user has to arrange the control and data bytes correctly...

  • Page 1689

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1689 receiving data from a module (input) when receiving data, the transmit array is generated by the module, transferred via flatstream and must then be reproduced in the receive array. The structure...

  • Page 1690

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 1690 x20 system user's manual 3.10 general flow chart se gm en t d at a ha nd lin g sy nc hr on is at io n no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no no no yes yes no yes no inputsyncack = 1 ? Inputsequenceack > 0 ? Inputsyncack = 1 (...

  • Page 1691: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1691 details it is recommended to store transmitted messages in separate receive arrays. After a set messageendbit is transmitted, the subsequent segment should be added to the receive array. The mess...

  • Page 1692: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 1692 x20 system user's manual 3.10 flatstream mode name: flatstreammode in the input direction, the transmit array is generated automatically. This register offers two options to the user that allow an incoming data stream to have...

  • Page 1693: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1693 multisegmentmtus allowed with this option, the inputmtu is completely filled (if enough data is pending). The previously unfilled rx bytes transmit the next control bytes and their segments. This...

  • Page 1694

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 1694 x20 system user's manual 3.10 using both options it is also possible to use both options at the same time. Bus cycle 1 control byte with messageendbit = 0 bus cycle 2 bus cycle 3 - - - me1 c me1 c me0 c me1 c control byte wit...

  • Page 1695

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1695 adjusting the flatstream if the way messages are structured is changed, then the way data in the transmit/receive array is arranged is also different. The following changes apply to the example g...

  • Page 1696: Warning!

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 1696 x20 system user's manual 3.10 first, the messages must be split into segments. As in the default configuration, it is important for each sequence to begin with a control byte. The free bits in the mtu at the end of a message ...

  • Page 1697: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1697 large segments segments are limited to a maximum of 63 bytes. This means they can be larger than the active mtu. These large segments are divided among several sequences when transmitted. It is p...

  • Page 1698

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 1698 x20 system user's manual 3.10 large segments and multisegmentmtu example three autonomous messages (7 bytes, 2 bytes and 9 bytes) are being transmitted using an mtu with a width of 7 bytes. The configuration allows transmissi...

  • Page 1699

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1699 4.18.8.7.11.5 example of forward functionality on x2x link forward functionality is a method that can be used to substantially increase the flatstream data rate. The basic principle is also used ...

  • Page 1700

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 1700 x20 system user's manual 3.10 configuration the forward function only has to be enabled for the input direction. Two additional configuration registers are available for doing so. Flatstream modules have been optimized in suc...

  • Page 1701

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1701 transmitting and receiving with forward the basic algorithm for transmitting and receiving data remains the same. With the forward function, up to seven unacknowledged sequences can be transmitte...

  • Page 1702: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 1702 x20 system user's manual 3.10 details/background 1. Illegal sequencecounter size (counter offset) error situation: mtu not enabled if the difference between sequencecounter and sequenceack is larger than allowed during transm...

  • Page 1703

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1703 errors when using forward in industrial environments, it is often the case that many different devices from various manufacturers are being used side by side. The electrical and/or electromagneti...

  • Page 1704: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 1704 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.18.8.7.12 acyclical frame size name: asynsize when the stream is used, the data is switched internally between the module and the cpu. For this purpose, a defined amount of acyclical bytes are ...

  • Page 1705

    X20 system modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20cs2770 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1705 4.18.8.7.13 minimum cycle time the minimum cycle time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced without communication errors occurring. It should be noted that very fast cycles decrease the id...

  • Page 1706

    X20 system modules • expandable bus controllers • brief information 1706 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.19 expandable bus controllers the expandable bus controller is based on the powerlink bus controller x20bcx083. The bus modules expand- ed to the left allow connection of up to two interface or h...

  • Page 1707

    X20 system modules • expandable bus controllers • x20bc1083 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1707 4.19.2 x20bc1083 4.19.2.1 general information the x20bc1083 bus controller makes it possible to connect x2x link i/o nodes to powerlink v1 and v2. It is also possible to operate the x2x link cycle synchron...

  • Page 1708

    X20 system modules • expandable bus controllers • x20bc1083 1708 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.19.2.2 order data model number short description figure expandable bus controllers x20bc1083 x20 bus controller, 1 powerlink interface, integrated 2-port hub, supports x20 interface module expansions, 2 ...

  • Page 1709

    X20 system modules • expandable bus controllers • x20bc1083 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1709 4.19.2.3 technical data product id x20bc1083 short description bus controller powerlink (v1/v2) controlled node with up to two slots for interface modules general information b&r id code 0x2268 status indi...

  • Page 1710

    X20 system modules • expandable bus controllers • x20bc1083 1710 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.19.2.4 led status indicators figure led color status description off no power supply or mode is not_active. The controlled node (cn) is either not getting power, or it is in the not_active state. The cn ...

  • Page 1711

    X20 system modules • expandable bus controllers • x20bc1083 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1711 4.19.2.5 operating and connection elements led status indicator powerlink connection with 2 x rj45 connectors for simple wiring node number switches terminal block for bus controller and i/o supply slot fo...

  • Page 1712

    X20 system modules • expandable bus controllers • x20bc1083 1712 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.19.2.8 slot for interface modules depending on the bus base, up to two interface modules can be installed on the left side of the expandable bus controller: bus base slots for interface modules x20bb81 1...

  • Page 1713

    X20 system modules • expandable bus controllers • x20bc8083 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1713 4.19.3 x20bc8083 4.19.3.1 general information the x20bc8083 bus controller makes it possible to connect x2x link i/o nodes to powerlink. It is also possible to operate the x2x link cycle synchronously 1:1 ...

  • Page 1714

    X20 system modules • expandable bus controllers • x20bc8083 1714 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.19.3.3 technical data product id x20bc8083 short description bus controller powerlink (v1/v2) controlled node with up to two slots for hub expansion modules general information b&r id code 0x2673 status ...

  • Page 1715

    X20 system modules • expandable bus controllers • x20bc8083 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1715 4.19.3.4 led status indicators figure led color status description off no power supply or mode is not_active. In this mode, the bus controller waits for about 5 seconds after restarting. No communication w...

  • Page 1716

    X20 system modules • expandable bus controllers • x20bc8083 1716 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.19.3.5 operating and connection elements led status indicator powerlink connection with 2 x rj45 connectors for simple wiring node number switch terminal block for bus controller and i/o supply slot for ...

  • Page 1717

    X20 system modules • expandable bus controllers • x20bc8083 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1717 bus base slot for hub expansion modules x20bb81 1 x20bb82 2 table 506: slots for hub expansion modules for various bus bases the x20hb2880 hub expansion module for the bus controller is equipped with two r...

  • Page 1718

    X20 system modules • expandable bus controllers • x20bc8084 1718 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.19.4 x20bc8084 4.19.4.1 general information the x20bc8084 bus controller makes it possible to connect x2x link i/o nodes to powerlink. It is also possible to operate the x2x link cycle synchronously 1:1 ...

  • Page 1719

    X20 system modules • expandable bus controllers • x20bc8084 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1719 4.19.4.3 technical data product id x20bc8084 short description bus controller powerlink (v1/v2) controlled node with compact link selector general information b&r id code 0x2674 status indicators module st...

  • Page 1720

    X20 system modules • expandable bus controllers • x20bc8084 1720 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.19.4.4 led status indicators figure led color status description off no power supply or mode is not_active. In this mode, the bus controller waits for about 5 seconds after restarting. No communication w...

  • Page 1721

    X20 system modules • expandable bus controllers • x20bc8084 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1721 4.19.4.5 operating and connection elements led status indicator powerlink connection with 2 x rj45 connectors for simple wiring node number switch terminal block for bus controller and i/o supply slot for ...

  • Page 1722

    X20 system modules • expandable bus controllers • x20bc8084 1722 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.19.4.9 sg4 this module comes with preinstalled firmware. The firmware is also part of the automation runtime operating system for the plc. If the two versions are different, the automation runtime firmwa...

  • Page 1723: Information:

    X20 system modules • expandable bus controllers • x20bc8084 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1723 4.19.4.10 powerlink cable redundancy system it is often indispensable to have redundant network cabling, especially in systems that handle technical processes. The potential for danger, especially to the l...

  • Page 1724

    X20 system modules • expandable bus controllers • x20bc8084 1724 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.19.4.10.1 interface module x20if2181-2 interface module x20if2181-2 allows you to set up a completely redundant powerlink cable system beginning at the x20 cpu. X20hb8884 with 1x x20hb2880 x20hb8884 with...

  • Page 1725

    X20 system modules • expandable bus controllers • x20bc8084 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1725 4.19.4.10.2 link selector x20hb8884 the link selector was developed for connecting powerlink controlled nodes. The device structure follows the proven x20 philosophy. The 62.5 mm wide module is operated as...

  • Page 1726

    X20 system modules • expandable bus controllers • x20bc8084 1726 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.19.4.10.3 x20hb8884 with hub expansion modules expanding the x20hb8884 with two active x20hb2885 hub modules eliminates the need to connect external hubs. Two hot-swap capable modules are required so tha...

  • Page 1727

    X20 system modules • expandable bus controllers • x20bc8084 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1727 4.19.4.10.4 bus controller x20bc8084 for connecting an x20 system, the link selector function is integrated in the x20 bus controller x20bc8084. The bus controller is connected to the powerlink network via...

  • Page 1728

    X20 system modules • expandable bus controllers • x20bc8084 1728 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.19.4.10.5 x20bc8084 with hub expansion modules expanding the x20bc8084 with two active x20hb2885 hub modules eliminates the need to connect external hubs. Two hot-swap capable modules are required so tha...

  • Page 1729

    X20 system modules • expandable bus controllers • x20bc8084 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1729 4.19.4.10.6 topology examples topology 1 x20cp158x with 1x x20if2181-2 (managing node) x20hb8884 with 2x x20hb2885 x20hb8884 with 2x x20hb2885 x20bc8084 with 2x x20hb2885 x20hb8884 with 2x x20hb2885 motion...

  • Page 1730

    X20 system modules • expandable bus controllers • x20bc8084 1730 x20 system user's manual 3.10 topology 2 x20cp158x x20hb8884 with 2x x20hb2885 x20hb8884 with 2x x20hb2885 x20bc8084 with 2x x20hb2885 x20hb8884 with 1x x20hb2880 powerlink network 1 powerlink network 2 x20bc8084 redundant network key:...

  • Page 1731

    X20 system modules • expandable bus controllers • x20bc8084 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1731 connection example for supply modules x20ps9400 ps gnd +24 vdc + _ i/o- power supply bc/x2x link power supply + _ figure 562: the x20ps9400 is connected as usual x20ps3300 the supply module x20ps3300 is op...

  • Page 1732: Information:

    X20 system modules • expandable bus controllers • x20bc80g3 1732 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.19.5 x20bc80g3 4.19.5.1 general information ethercat is an ethernet-based fieldbus developed by beckhoff. The protocol is suitable for hard and soft real-time requirements in automation technology. In ad...

  • Page 1733

    X20 system modules • expandable bus controllers • x20bc80g3 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1733 4.19.5.2 order data model number short description figure expandable bus controllers x20bc80g3 x20 bus controller, ethercat interface, supports expansion with x20 ethercat junction modules, 2x rj45 connect...

  • Page 1734

    X20 system modules • expandable bus controllers • x20bc80g3 1734 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20bc80g3 environmental conditions temperature operation horizontal installation 0 to 55°c vertical installation 0 to 50°c derating - storage -25 to 70°c transport -25 to 70°c relative humidity ...

  • Page 1735

    X20 system modules • expandable bus controllers • x20bc80g3 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1735 4.19.5.5 operating and connection elements led status indicator ethercat connection with 2 x rj45 connectors for simple wiring network address switches terminal block for bus controller and i/o supply slot...

  • Page 1736

    X20 system modules • expandable bus controllers • x20bc80g3 1736 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.19.5.7 ethercat network address switch a slave alias address can be set using the two network address switches on the bus controller. During the initial- ization phase (during start-up), the bus controll...

  • Page 1737

    X20 system modules • expandable bus controllers system modules • brief information x20 system user's manual 3.10 1737 4.20 expandable bus controllers system modules the expandable x20 bus controllers are made up of a bus controller fieldbus interface, a bus controller system module and an x20tb12 te...

  • Page 1738: Information:

    X20 system modules • expandable bus controllers system modules • x20bb81 1738 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.20.2 x20bb81 4.20.2.1 general information the x20bb81 bus module has an expansion slot. The following modules are used on this module: • x20 base module (bc, hb, etc.) • x20 add-on module (i...

  • Page 1739

    X20 system modules • expandable bus controllers system modules • x20bb81 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1739 product id x20bb81 environmental conditions temperature operation horizontal installation -25 to 60°c vertical installation -25 to 50°c derating - storage -40 to 85°c transport -40 to 85°c rel...

  • Page 1740: Information:

    X20 system modules • expandable bus controllers system modules • x20bb82 1740 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.20.3 x20bb82 4.20.3.1 general information the x20bb82 bus module has two expansion slots. The following modules are used on this module: • x20 base module (bc, hb, etc.) • two x20 add-on mod...

  • Page 1741

    X20 system modules • expandable bus controllers system modules • x20bb82 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1741 product id x20bb82 environmental conditions temperature operation horizontal installation -25°c to +60°c vertical installation -25°c to +50°c derating - storage -40°c to +85°c transport -40°c ...

  • Page 1742

    X20 system modules • expandable bus controllers system modules • x20if1091-1 1742 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.20.4 x20if1091-1 4.20.4.1 general information the x20if1091-1 interface module is operated in the x20bc1083 expandable bus controller. It is equipped with an x2x link master interface. •...

  • Page 1743

    X20 system modules • expandable bus controllers system modules • x20if1091-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1743 4.20.4.3 technical data product id x20if1091-1 short description communication module 1x x2x link master general information b&r id code 0x2525 status indicators module status, data transf...

  • Page 1744

    X20 system modules • expandable bus controllers system modules • x20if1091-1 1744 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.20.4.5 led status indicators figure led color status description green on interface module active status red on bus controller booting x2x yellow on the module sends data via the x2x lin...

  • Page 1745

    X20 system modules • fieldbus cpus x20 system user's manual 3.10 1745 4.21 fieldbus cpus fieldbus cpus are a variation of compact cpus. Their modular structure makes it easy to meet the unique re- quirements of each application. Fieldbus cpu base x20 bb 3x/4x fieldbus cpu x20 xc 02xx terminal block ...

  • Page 1746

    X20 system modules • fieldbus cpus • brief information 1746 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.21.1 brief information product id short description on page x20xc0201 x20 cpu, fieldbus cpu µp 16, 100 kb sram, 1 mb flashprom, support of rs232, can and interface module, according to fieldbus cpu base, orde...

  • Page 1747

    X20 system modules • fieldbus cpus • x20xc0201, x20xc0202, x20xc0292 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1747 4.21.2 x20xc0201, x20xc0202, x20xc0292 4.21.2.1 general information fieldbus cpus are variations of compact cpus. In addition to these features, there is also the option of connecting fieldbus mod...

  • Page 1748

    X20 system modules • fieldbus cpus • x20xc0201, x20xc0202, x20xc0292 1748 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.21.2.2 order data xc0201, xc0202 xp0292 model number short description fieldbus cpus x20xc0201 x20 cpu, fieldbus cpu µp 16, 100 kb sram, 1 mb flashprom, support of rs232, can and interface modul...

  • Page 1749

    X20 system modules • fieldbus cpus • x20xc0201, x20xc0202, x20xc0292 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1749 4.21.2.3 technical data product id x20xc0201 x20xc0202 x20xc0292 short description interfaces - 1x onboard ethernet system module cpu general information b&r id code 0x2563 0x2564 0xa252 status in...

  • Page 1750

    X20 system modules • fieldbus cpus • x20xc0201, x20xc0202, x20xc0292 1750 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20xc0201 x20xc0202 x20xc0292 relative humidity operation 5 to 95%, non-condensing storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing mechanical characteristics note or...

  • Page 1751

    X20 system modules • fieldbus cpus • x20xc0201, x20xc0202, x20xc0292 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1751 4.21.2.5 operating and connection elements x20xc0201 and x20xc0202 led status indicators if1 - rs232 if3 - can bus (with bbx7) switch for can bus terminating resistor on bbx7 node number switch sl...

  • Page 1752

    X20 system modules • fieldbus cpus • x20xc0201, x20xc0202, x20xc0292 1752 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.21.2.6 node number switches figure 571: node number switches the node number is set using the two hex switches. The switch setting can be evaluated by the application program at any time. The op...

  • Page 1753: Information:

    X20 system modules • fieldbus cpus • x20xc0201, x20xc0202, x20xc0292 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1753 4.21.2.7 ethernet interface (if2) figure 572: x20 compact cpus - ethernet interface for x20cp0291 and x20cp0292 the x20xc0292 is equipped with an ethernet interface. The connection is made using a...

  • Page 1754: Information:

    X20 system modules • fieldbus cpus • x20xc0201, x20xc0202, x20xc0292 1754 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.21.2.9 programming the system flash memory general information cpus are delivered with a runtime system. When delivered, the node number switch is set to switch position 0x00 (bootstrap loader m...

  • Page 1755

    X20 system modules • fieldbus cpus system modules • brief information x20 system user's manual 3.10 1755 4.22 fieldbus cpus system modules the x20 system fieldbus cpus consist of the fieldbus cpu, fieldbus cpu system modules and the x20tb12 terminal block. Fieldbus cpu system modules include the bas...

  • Page 1756: Information:

    X20 system modules • fieldbus cpus system modules • x20bb32 1756 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.22.2 x20bb32 4.22.2.1 general information the x20bb32 bus module is the base for all x20 fieldbus cpus. The left and right end plates are included in the delivery. • base for all x20 fieldbus cpus • rs23...

  • Page 1757

    X20 system modules • fieldbus cpus system modules • x20bb32 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1757 product id x20bb32 environmental conditions temperature operation horizontal installation 0 to 55°c vertical installation 0 to 50°c storage -25 to 70°c transport -25 to 70°c relative humidity operation 5 t...

  • Page 1758: Information:

    X20 system modules • fieldbus cpus system modules • x20bb37 1758 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.22.3 x20bb37 4.22.3.1 general information the x20bb37 bus module is the base for all x20 fieldbus cpus. The left and right end plates are included in the delivery. • base for all x20 fieldbus cpus • rs23...

  • Page 1759

    X20 system modules • fieldbus cpus system modules • x20bb37 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1759 product id x20bb37 protection in accordance with en 60529 ip20 environmental conditions temperature operation horizontal installation 0 to 55°c vertical installation 0 to 50°c storage -25 to 70°c transport...

  • Page 1760: Information:

    X20 system modules • fieldbus cpus system modules • x20bb42 1760 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.22.4 x20bb42 4.22.4.1 general information the x20bb42 bus module is a base for all x20 fieldbus cpus. It is equipped with two slots for interface modules. The left and right end plates are included in th...

  • Page 1761

    X20 system modules • fieldbus cpus system modules • x20bb42 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1761 product id x20bb42 environmental conditions temperature operation horizontal installation -25 to 60°c vertical installation -25 to 50°c storage -40 to 85°c transport -40 to 85°c relative humidity operation...

  • Page 1762: Information:

    X20 system modules • fieldbus cpus system modules • x20bb47 1762 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.22.5 x20bb47 4.22.5.1 general information the x20bb47 bus module is a base for all x20 fieldbus cpus. It is equipped with two slots for interface modules. The left and right end plates are included in th...

  • Page 1763

    X20 system modules • fieldbus cpus system modules • x20bb47 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1763 product id x20bb47 installation at altitudes above sea level 0 to 2000 m no derating >2000 m reduction of ambient temperature by 0,5°c per 100 m protection in accordance with en 60529 ip20 environmental co...

  • Page 1764

    X20 system modules • fieldbus cpus system modules • x20if1074 1764 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.22.6 x20if1074 4.22.6.1 general information the x20if1074 module is an interface module for the x20 fieldbus cpu. • can bus connection • integrated terminating resistor 4.22.6.2 order data model number...

  • Page 1765

    X20 system modules • fieldbus cpus system modules • x20if1074 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1765 4.22.6.3 technical data product id x20if1074 short description communication module 1x can bus general information b&r id code 0xa399 status indicators module status, data transfer, terminating resistor ...

  • Page 1766

    X20 system modules • fieldbus cpus system modules • x20if1074 1766 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.22.6.4 led status indicators figure led color status description green on interface module active status red on cpu starting up txd yellow on the module is sending data via the can bus interface term y...

  • Page 1767

    X20 system modules • fieldbus cpus system modules • x20if1074 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1767 4.22.6.7 can bus interface the interface is a 5-pin multipoint plug. The 0tb2105 terminal block must be ordered separately. Interface pinout terminal function 1 can⊥ can ground 2 can_l can low 3 shld shi...

  • Page 1768

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • brief information 1768 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23 x20 interface module communication the interface modules are added to the x20 cpu as an application-specific interface expansion. 4.23.1 brief information product id short description ...

  • Page 1769

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1020 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1769 4.23.2 x20if1020 4.23.2.1 general information the x20if1020 interface module can be used to expand the x20 cpu for specific applications. It is equipped with an rs232 interface. • the rs232 interfa...

  • Page 1770

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1020 1770 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.2.3 technical data product id x20if1020 short description communication module 1x rs232 general information b&r id code 0x1f27 status indicators module status, data transfer diagnostics module...

  • Page 1771

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1020 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1771 4.23.2.4 led status indicators figure led color status description green on interface module active status red on cpu starting up rxd yellow on the module receives data via the rs232 interface txd ...

  • Page 1772

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1030 1772 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.3 x20if1030 4.23.3.1 general information the x20if1030 interface module can be used to expand the x20 cpu for specific applications. It is equipped with an rs485/rs422 interface. • rs485/rs422...

  • Page 1773

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1030 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1773 4.23.3.3 technical data product id x20if1030 short description communication module 1x rs485 / rs422 general information b&r id code 0x1f28 status indicators module status, data transfer diagnostic...

  • Page 1774

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1030 1774 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.3.4 led status indicators figure led color status description green on interface module active status red on cpu starting up rxd yellow on the module is receiving data via the rs485/rs422 inte...

  • Page 1775

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1041-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1775 4.23.4 x20if1041-1 4.23.4.1 general information the interface module is equipped with a canopen master interface. It can be operated in x20 cpus or in the expandable x20bc1083 powerlink bus contr...

  • Page 1776

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1041-1 1776 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.4.3 technical data product id x20if1041-1 short description communication module canopen master general information b&r id code 0xa709 status indicators module status, network status, data t...

  • Page 1777

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1041-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1777 4.23.4.4 led status indicators figure led color status description green/red off no power to module green on pci bus communication in progress blinking error when booting ready/run red on communi...

  • Page 1778

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1041-1 1778 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.4.6 can bus interface the interface is a 5-pin multipoint plug. The 0tb2105 terminal block must be ordered separately. Interface pinout terminal function 1 can⊥ can ground 2 can_l can low 3 ...

  • Page 1779

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1043-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1779 4.23.5 x20if1043-1 4.23.5.1 general information the interface module is equipped with a canopen slave interface. It can be operated in x20 cpus or in the expandable x20bc1083 powerlink bus contro...

  • Page 1780

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1043-1 1780 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.5.3 technical data product id x20if1043-1 short description communication module canopen slave general information b&r id code 0xa70b status indicators module status, network status, data tr...

  • Page 1781

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1043-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1781 4.23.5.4 led status indicators figure led color status description green/red off no power to module green on pci bus communication in progress blinking error when booting ready/run red on communi...

  • Page 1782

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1043-1 1782 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.5.6 can bus interface the interface is a 5-pin multipoint plug. The 0tb2105 terminal block must be ordered separately. Interface pinout terminal function 1 can⊥ can ground 2 can_l can low 3 ...

  • Page 1783

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1051-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1783 4.23.6 x20if1051-1 4.23.6.1 general information the interface module is equipped with a devicenet scanner interface. It can be operated in x20 cpus or in the expandable x20bc1083 powerlink bus co...

  • Page 1784

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1051-1 1784 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.6.3 technical data product id x20if1051-1 short description communication module devicenet scanner (master) general information b&r id code 0xa70c status indicators module status, network st...

  • Page 1785

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1051-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1785 4.23.6.4 led status indicators figure led color status description green/red off no power to module green on pci bus communication in progress ready/run red on communication on the pci bus has no...

  • Page 1786

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1051-1 1786 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.6.6 devicenet interface the interface is a 5-pin multipoint plug. The 0tb2105 terminal block must be ordered separately. Interface pinout terminal devicenet 1 can⊥ (v-) can ground 2 can_l ca...

  • Page 1787

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1053-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1787 4.23.7 x20if1053-1 4.23.7.1 general information the interface module is equipped with a devicenet slave (adapter) interface. It can be operated in x20 cpus or in the expandable x20bc1083 powerlin...

  • Page 1788

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1053-1 1788 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.7.3 technical data product id x20if1053-1 short description communication module devicenet adapter (slave) general information b&r id code 0xa715 status indicators module status, network sta...

  • Page 1789

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1053-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1789 4.23.7.5 operating and connection elements led status indicators if1 - devicenet terminating resistor switch on the bottom of the module.

  • Page 1790

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1053-1 1790 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.7.6 devicenet interface the interface is a 5-pin multipoint plug. The 0tb2105 terminal block must be ordered separately. Interface pinout terminal devicenet 1 can⊥ (v-) can ground 2 can_l ca...

  • Page 1791

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1061 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1791 4.23.8 x20if1061 4.23.8.1 general information the x20if1061 interface module can be used to expand the x20 cpu for specific applications. It is equipped with a profibus dp v1 master interface. • pr...

  • Page 1792

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1061 1792 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.8.3 technical data product id x20if1061 short description communication module profibus dp v0/v1 master general information b&r id code 0x1f22 status indicators module status, bus status diagn...

  • Page 1793

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1061 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1793 4.23.8.4 led status indicators figure led color status description green on interface module active status red on cpu starting up on communication running cyclic blinking communication stopped irre...

  • Page 1794

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1061-1 1794 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.9 x20if1061-1 4.23.9.1 general information the interface module functions as a dp v1 master. It can be operated in x20 cpus or in the expandable x20bc1083 powerlink bus controller. • profibu...

  • Page 1795

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1061-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1795 4.23.9.3 technical data product id x20if1061-1 short description communication module 1x profibus dp v0/v1 master general information b&r id code 0xa716 status indicators module status, data tran...

  • Page 1796

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1061-1 1796 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.9.4 led status indicators figure led color status description green/red off no power to module green on pci bus communication in progress blinking boot error ready/run red on communication o...

  • Page 1797

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1061-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1797 4.23.9.7 use with powerlink bus controllers when this module is connected to the expandable powerlink bus controller, the amount of cyclic data is limited by the powerlink frame to 1488 bytes in ...

  • Page 1798

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1063 1798 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.10 x20if1063 4.23.10.1 general information the x20if1063 interface module can be used to expand the x20 cpu for specific applications. It is equipped with a profibus dp v0 slave interface. • p...

  • Page 1799

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1063 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1799 4.23.10.3 technical data product id x20if1063 short description communication module 1x profibus dp v0 slave general information b&r id code 0x1f23 status indicators module status, data transfer di...

  • Page 1800

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1063 1800 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.10.5 operating and connection elements led status indicators if1 - profibus dp node number switches figure 582: operating and connection elements 4.23.10.6 node number switch the node number f...

  • Page 1801

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1063-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1801 4.23.11 x20if1063-1 4.23.11.1 general information the interface module functions as a dp v1 slave. It can be operated in x20 cpus or in the expandable x20bc1083 powerlink bus controller. • profib...

  • Page 1802

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1063-1 1802 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.11.3 technical data product id x20if1063-1 short description communication module 1x profibus dp v0/v1 slave general information b&r id code 0xa717 status indicators module status, data tran...

  • Page 1803

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1063-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1803 4.23.11.4 led status indicators figure led color status description green/red off no power to module green on pci bus communication in progress blinking boot error ready/run red on communication ...

  • Page 1804

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1063-1 1804 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.11.7 use with powerlink bus controllers when this module is connected to the expandable powerlink bus controller, the amount of cyclic data is limited by the powerlink frame to 1488 bytes in...

  • Page 1805

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1065 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1805 4.23.12 x20if1065 4.23.12.1 general information the x20if1065 interface module can be used to expand the x20 cpu for specific applications. It is equipped with a profibus dp v1 slave interface. • p...

  • Page 1806

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1065 1806 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.12.3 technical data product id x20if1065 short description communication module 1x profibus dp v0/v1 slave general information b&r id code 0xa4c6 status indicators module status, bus status di...

  • Page 1807

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1065 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1807 4.23.12.4 led status indicators figure led color status description green on interface module active status red on cpu starting up on communication running cyclic blinking communication stopped irr...

  • Page 1808

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1072 1808 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.13 x20if1072 4.23.13.1 general information the x20if1072 interface module can be used to expand the x20 cpu for specific applications. It is equipped with a can bus interface. • can bus connec...

  • Page 1809

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1072 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1809 4.23.13.3 technical data product id x20if1072 short description communication module 1x can bus general information b&r id code 0x1f20 status indicators module status, data transfer, terminating re...

  • Page 1810

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1072 1810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.13.4 led status indicators figure led color status description green on interface module active status red on cpu starting up txd yellow on the module is sending data via the can bus interface...

  • Page 1811

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1072 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1811 4.23.13.7 can bus interface the interface is a 5-pin multipoint plug. The 0tb2105 terminal block must be ordered separately. Interface pinout terminal function 1 can⊥ can ground 2 can_l can low 3 s...

  • Page 1812

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1082 1812 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.14 x20if1082 4.23.14.1 general information the x20if1082 interface module can be used to expand the x20 cpu for specific applications. It is equipped with an powerlink interface. The interface...

  • Page 1813

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1082 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1813 4.23.14.3 technical data product id x20if1082 short description communication module 1x powerlink (v1/v2) managing or controlled node general information b&r id code 0x1f1f status indicators module...

  • Page 1814

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1082 1814 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.14.4 led status indicators figure led color status description s/e green/red status/error led. The led indicators are described in section 4.23.14.4.1 ""s/ e" led". On a link to the remote sta...

  • Page 1815

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1082 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1815 green - status description off mode the module is in not_active mode or: • switched off • starting up • not configured correctly in automation studio • defective managing node (mn) the bus is monit...

  • Page 1816

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1082 1816 x20 system user's manual 3.10 200 200 1000 200 200 200 200 1000 200 200 all times in ms flickering blinking single flash triple flash 200 200 200 1000 double flash figure 585: led status indicators - blinking patterns 4.23.14.4...

  • Page 1817

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1082 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1817 4.23.14.6.1 powerlink v1 switch position description 0x00 operation as managing node. 0x01 - 0xfd node number of powerlink station. Operation as controlled node. 0xfe - 0xff reserved, switch positi...

  • Page 1818

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1082-2 1818 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.15 x20if1082-2 4.23.15.1 general information the x20if1082-2 interface module can be used to expand the x20 cpu for specific applications. It is equipped with an powerlink interface. The int...

  • Page 1819

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1082-2 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1819 4.23.15.3 technical data product id x20if1082-2 short description communication module 1x powerlink (v1/v2) managing or controlled node general information b&r id code 0xa7a3 status indicators mo...

  • Page 1820

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1082-2 1820 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.15.4 led status indicators figure led color status description s/e green/red status/error led. The led indicators are described in section 4.23.15.4.1 ""s/ e" led". On a link to the remote s...

  • Page 1821

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1082-2 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1821 green - status description off mode the module is in not_active mode or: • switched off • starting up • not configured correctly in automation studio • defective managing node (mn) the bus is mon...

  • Page 1822

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1082-2 1822 x20 system user's manual 3.10 200 200 1000 200 200 200 200 1000 200 200 all times in ms flickering blinking single flash triple flash 200 200 200 1000 double flash figure 587: led status indicators - blinking patterns 4.23.15...

  • Page 1823

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1082-2 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1823 4.23.15.6.1 powerlink v1 switch position description 0x00 operation as managing node. 0x01 - 0xfd node number of powerlink station. Operation as controlled node. 0xfe - 0xff reserved, switch posi...

  • Page 1824

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1086-2 1824 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.16 x20if1086-2 4.23.16.1 general information the x20if1086-2 interface module can be used to expand the x20 cpu for specific applications. It is equipped with an powerlink interface. This in...

  • Page 1825

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1086-2 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1825 4.23.16.3 technical data product id x20if1086-2 short description communication module 1x powerlink (v1/v2) managing or controlled node general information b&r id code 0xb455 status indicators mo...

  • Page 1826

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1086-2 1826 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.16.4 led status indicators figure led color status description s/e green/red status/error led. The led indicators are described in section 4.23.16.5 ""s/e" led". On a link to the remote stat...

  • Page 1827

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1086-2 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1827 green - status description off mode the module is in not_active mode or: • switched off • starting up • not configured correctly in automation studio • defective managing node (mn) the bus is mon...

  • Page 1828

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1086-2 1828 x20 system user's manual 3.10 200 200 1000 200 200 200 200 1000 200 200 all times in ms flickering blinking single flash triple flash 200 200 200 1000 double flash figure 589: led status indicators - blinking patterns 4.23.16...

  • Page 1829

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1086-2 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1829 4.23.16.7.1 powerlink v1 switch position description 0x00 operation as managing node. 0x01 - 0xfd node number of powerlink station. Operation as controlled node. 0xfe - 0xff reserved, switch posi...

  • Page 1830

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1091 1830 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.17 x20if1091 4.23.17.1 general information the x20if1091 interface module can be used to expand the x20 cpu for specific applications. It is equipped with an x2x link master interface. • x2x l...

  • Page 1831

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1091 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1831 4.23.17.3 technical data product id x20if1091 short description communication module 1x x2x link master general information b&r id code 0x1f24 status indicators module status, data transfer diagnos...

  • Page 1832

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if1091 1832 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.17.4 led status indicators figure led color status description green on interface module active status red on cpu starting up x2x yellow on module sending data via the x2x link interface table...

  • Page 1833

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if10a1-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1833 4.23.18 x20if10a1-1 4.23.18.1 general information the interface module is equipped with an as master interface. It can be operated in x20 cpus or in the expandable x20bc1083 powerlink bus control...

  • Page 1834

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if10a1-1 1834 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.18.3 technical data product id x20if10a1-1 short description communication module as interface master general information b&r id code 0xa718 status indicators module status, network status, ...

  • Page 1835

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if10a1-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1835 4.23.18.4 led status indicators figure led color status description green/red off no power to module green on pci bus communication in progress blinking error when booting ready/run red on commun...

  • Page 1836

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if10a1-1 1836 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.18.7 use with powerlink bus controllers when this module is connected to the expandable powerlink bus controller, the amount of cyclic data is limited by the powerlink frame to 1488 bytes in...

  • Page 1837

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if10d1-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1837 4.23.19 x20if10d1-1 4.23.19.1 general information the interface module functions as an ethernet/ip scanner (master). It can be operated in x20 cpus or in the expandable x20bc1083 powerlink bus co...

  • Page 1838

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if10d1-1 1838 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.19.3 technical data product id x20if10d1-1 short description communication module ethernet/ip scanner (master) general information b&r id code 0xa71b status indicators module status, network...

  • Page 1839

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if10d1-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1839 4.23.19.4 led status indicators figure led color status description green/red off no power to module green on pci bus communication in progress blinking boot error ready/run red on communication ...

  • Page 1840

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if10d1-1 1840 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.19.6 ethernet interface information about cabling x20 modules with an ethernet interface can be found in the module's download section on the b&r website ( www.Br-automation.Com ). If1 if2 p...

  • Page 1841

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if10d3-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1841 4.23.20 x20if10d3-1 4.23.20.1 general information the interface module functions as an ethernet/ip adapter (slave). It can be operated in x20 cpus or in the ex- pandable x20bc1083 powerlink bus c...

  • Page 1842

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if10d3-1 1842 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.20.3 technical data product id x20if10d3-1 short description communication module ethernet/ip adapter (slave) general information b&r id code 0xa71c status indicators module status, network ...

  • Page 1843

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if10d3-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1843 4.23.20.4 led status indicators figure led color status description green/red off no power to module green on pci bus communication in progress blinking boot error ready/run red on communication ...

  • Page 1844

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if10d3-1 1844 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.20.6 ethernet interface information about cabling x20 modules with an ethernet interface can be found in the module's download section on the b&r website ( www.Br-automation.Com ). If1 if2 p...

  • Page 1845

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if10e1-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1845 4.23.21 x20if10e1-1 4.23.21.1 general information the interface module functions as a profinet rt controller (master). It can be operated in x20 cpus or in the expandable x20bc1083 powerlink bus ...

  • Page 1846

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if10e1-1 1846 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.21.3 technical data product id x20if10e1-1 short description communication module profinet rt controller (master) general information b&r id code 0xa71d status indicators module status, netw...

  • Page 1847

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if10e1-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1847 4.23.21.4 led status indicators figure led color status description green/red off no power to module blinking boot error red on communication on the pci bus has not yet been started ready/run gre...

  • Page 1848

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if10e1-1 1848 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.21.6 ethernet interface information about cabling x20 modules with an ethernet interface can be found in the module's download section on the b&r website ( www.Br-automation.Com ). P1 (if1) ...

  • Page 1849

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if10e3-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1849 4.23.22 x20if10e3-1 4.23.22.1 general information the interface module functions as a profinet rt device (slave). It can be operated in x20 cpus or in the expandable x20bc1083 powerlink bus contr...

  • Page 1850

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if10e3-1 1850 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.22.3 technical data product id x20if10e3-1 short description communication module profinet rt device (slave) general information b&r id code 0xa71e status indicators module status, network s...

  • Page 1851

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if10e3-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1851 4.23.22.4 led status indicators figure led color status description green/red off no power to module blinking boot error red on communication on the pci bus has not yet been started ready/run gre...

  • Page 1852

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if10e3-1 1852 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.22.7 use with powerlink bus controllers when this module is connected to the expandable powerlink bus controller, the amount of cyclic data is limited by the powerlink frame to 1488 bytes in...

  • Page 1853

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if10g3-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1853 4.23.23 x20if10g3-1 4.23.23.1 general information the interface module functions as an ethercat slave. It can be operated in x20 cpus or in the expandable x20bc1083 powerlink bus controller. The ...

  • Page 1854

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if10g3-1 1854 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.23.3 technical data product id x20if10g3-1 short description communication module ethercat slave general information b&r id code 0xa72c status indicators module status, network status, data ...

  • Page 1855

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if10g3-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1855 4.23.23.4 led status indicators figure led color status description green/red off no power to module blinking boot error red on communication on the pci bus has not yet been started ready/run gre...

  • Page 1856

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if10g3-1 1856 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.23.6 ethernet interface information about cabling x20 modules with an ethernet interface can be found in the module's download section on the b&r website ( www.Br-automation.Com ). In (if1) ...

  • Page 1857

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if10x0 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1857 4.23.24 x20if10x0 4.23.24.1 general information interface module for the operation of redundant cpus. • cpu-cpu data synchronization module for redundant cpu systems 4.23.24.2 order data model numb...

  • Page 1858

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if10x0 1858 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20if10x0 environmental conditions temperature operation horizontal installation -25 to 60°c vertical installation -25 to 45°c derating - storage -25 to 70°c transport -25 to 70°c relati...

  • Page 1859: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if10x0 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1859 4.23.24.6 switch positions the cpu can be set to primary or secondary using the "prim/sec" selection switch. During configuration, make sure that one rcpu is set as primary and the other rcpu as se...

  • Page 1860

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if2181-2 1860 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.25 x20if2181-2 4.23.25.1 general information the x20if2181-2 interface module is used to expand the x20 cpu for specific applications. It is equipped with an powerlink interface. Powerlink i...

  • Page 1861

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if2181-2 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1861 product id x20if2181-2 electrical isolation plc - x1 yes plc - x2 yes certification ce yes culus yes atex zone 2 yes kc yes gl yes gost-r yes interfaces fieldbus powerlink managing or controlled ...

  • Page 1862

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if2181-2 1862 x20 system user's manual 3.10 green - status description on operates the interface as an ethernet interface table 649: status/error led - ethernet operating mode 4.23.25.4.1.2 powerlink red - error description on the module i...

  • Page 1863

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if2181-2 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1863 green - status description triple flash (approx. 1 hz) mode the module is in the ready_to_operate state. Managing node (mn) cyclic and asynchronous communication. The received pdo data is ignored...

  • Page 1864

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if2181-2 1864 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.25.5 operating and connection elements led status indicators station number switches powerlink connection with 2x rj45 ports for easy wiring figure 593: operating and connection elements 4.2...

  • Page 1865

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if2181-2 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1865 pinout interface pin ethernet 1 rxd receive data 2 rxd\ receive data\ 3 txd transmit data 4 termination 5 termination 6 txd\ transmit data\ 7 termination 1 shielded rj45 port 8 termination table ...

  • Page 1866: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if2181-2 1866 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.25.9 powerlink cable redundancy system it is often indispensable to have redundant network cabling, especially in systems that handle technical processes. The potential for danger, especiall...

  • Page 1867

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if2181-2 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1867 4.23.25.9.1 interface module x20if2181-2 interface module x20if2181-2 allows you to set up a completely redundant powerlink cable system beginning at the x20 cpu. X20hb8884 with 1x x20hb2880 x20h...

  • Page 1868

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if2181-2 1868 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.25.9.2 link selector x20hb8884 the link selector was developed for connecting powerlink controlled nodes. The device structure follows the proven x20 philosophy. The 62.5 mm wide module is o...

  • Page 1869

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if2181-2 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1869 4.23.25.9.3 x20hb8884 with hub expansion modules expanding the x20hb8884 with two active x20hb2885 hub modules eliminates the need to connect external hubs. Two hot-swap capable modules are requi...

  • Page 1870

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if2181-2 1870 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.25.9.4 bus controller x20bc8084 for connecting an x20 system, the link selector function is integrated in the x20 bus controller x20bc8084. The bus controller is connected to the powerlink n...

  • Page 1871

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if2181-2 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1871 4.23.25.9.5 x20bc8084 with hub expansion modules expanding the x20bc8084 with two active x20hb2885 hub modules eliminates the need to connect external hubs. Two hot-swap capable modules are requi...

  • Page 1872

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if2181-2 1872 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.25.9.6 topology examples topology 1 x20cp158x with 1x x20if2181-2 (managing node) x20hb8884 with 2x x20hb2885 x20hb8884 with 2x x20hb2885 x20bc8084 with 2x x20hb2885 x20hb8884 with 2x x20hb2...

  • Page 1873

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if2181-2 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1873 topology 2 x20cp158x x20hb8884 with 2x x20hb2885 x20hb8884 with 2x x20hb2885 x20bc8084 with 2x x20hb2885 x20hb8884 with 1x x20hb2880 powerlink network 1 powerlink network 2 x20bc8084 redundant ne...

  • Page 1874

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if2772 1874 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.26 x20if2772 4.23.26.1 general information the x20if2772 interface module can be used to expand the x20 cpu for specific applications. It is equipped with two can bus interfaces. • dual can bu...

  • Page 1875

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if2772 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1875 4.23.26.3 technical data product id x20if2772 short description communication module 2x can bus general information b&r id code 0x1f25 status indicators module status, data transfer, terminating re...

  • Page 1876

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if2772 1876 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.26.4 led status indicators figure led color status description green on interface module active status red on cpu starting up txd can 1 yellow on the module is sending data via the can bus int...

  • Page 1877

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if2772 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1877 4.23.26.7 interfaces can bus 1 and can bus 2 (if1 and if2) both interfaces feature a 5-pin multipoint plug. The 0tb2105 terminal block must be ordered separately. Interface pinout terminal function...

  • Page 1878

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if2792 1878 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.27 x20if2792 4.23.27.1 general information the x20if2792 interface module can be used to expand the x20 cpu for specific applications. It is equipped with both an x2x link interface and a can ...

  • Page 1879

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if2792 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1879 4.23.27.3 technical data product id x20if2792 short description communication module 1x x2x link master, 1x can bus general information b&r id code 0x1f26 status indicators module status, data tran...

  • Page 1880

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if2792 1880 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.23.27.4 led status indicators figure led color status description green on interface module active status red on cpu starting up txd can yellow on the module is sending data via the can bus inter...

  • Page 1881

    X20 system modules • x20 interface module communication • x20if2792 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1881 4.23.27.7 can bus node number the node number for the can bus interface (if2) is set with the two hex switches. 4.23.27.8 can bus interface the interface is a 5-pin multipoint plug. The 0tb2105 ter...

  • Page 1882

    X20 system modules • x20 hub system • brief information 1882 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.24 x20 hub system the x20hb8880 hub is a device that can be used universally in standard ethernet networks or powerlink net- works. It is suitable for 100 mbit/s (fast ethernet) networks. Due to its modular ...

  • Page 1883

    X20 system modules • x20 hub system • x20et8819 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1883 4.24.2 x20et8819 4.24.2.1 general information analyzing powerlink powerlink has proven itself in the field for years and rarely has problems during commissioning and production. Nonetheless, it is still possible for c...

  • Page 1884

    X20 system modules • x20 hub system • x20et8819 1884 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.24.2.2 order data model number short description figure x20 hub system x20et8819 x20 ethernet analysis tool, can be expanded with active hub modules, 2x rj45 required accessories system modules for bus controllers x...

  • Page 1885

    X20 system modules • x20 hub system • x20et8819 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1885 4.24.2.3 technical data product id x20et8819 short description ethernet analysis tool ethernet analysis tool with up to two slots for hub expansion modules general information status indicators module status, bus func...

  • Page 1886

    X20 system modules • x20 hub system • x20et8819 1886 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.24.2.4 led status indicators figure led color status description s/e 1) green/red status/error led. The statuses of this led are described in section 4.24.2.5 "s/ e led" on page 1886. On a link to the remote station...

  • Page 1887

    X20 system modules • x20 hub system • x20et8819 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1887 4.24.2.6 operating and connection elements led status indicators operating mode and address switch slot for hub expansion module terminal block for analysis tool and i/o supply rj45 ethernet connection digital input m...

  • Page 1888

    X20 system modules • x20 hub system • x20et8819 1888 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.24.2.8 rj45 ports information about cabling x20 modules with an ethernet interface can be found in the module's download section on the b&r website ( www.Br-automation.Com ). If1 if2 pinout interface pin ethernet 1 ...

  • Page 1889: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 hub system • x20et8819 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1889 4.24.2.9 hardware configuration 1 if the ethernet analysis tool is run without additional hub expansion modules, then recording is only possible on port t0. The analysis tool must be connected to an available hub port...

  • Page 1890: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 hub system • x20et8819 1890 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.24.2.10 hardware configuration 2 extending the ethernet analysis tool with an x20hb2880 or x20hb2881 allows even full-duplex lines to be recorded as well. In this case ports t1 and t2 are analyzed. Information: only...

  • Page 1891

    X20 system modules • x20 hub system • x20et8819 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1891 4.24.2.11 hardware configuration 3a simultaneous data recording at two locations in the network is possible by using two x20hb2880 or x20hb2881. Only data from t1 and t3 is analyzed. Analyzer phy phy phy p1 t1 t3 p2 t...

  • Page 1892

    X20 system modules • x20 hub system • x20et8819 1892 x20 system user's manual 3.10 analyzer phy phy phy p1 t1 t3 p2 t2 t4 phy phy phy x20et8819 x20hb288x x20hb288x unused figure 617: diagram of hardware configuration 3b 4.24.2.13 firmware update to update the firmware, the webpage of the x20et8819 m...

  • Page 1893

    X20 system modules • x20 hub system • x20et8819 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1893 4.24.2.14 analysis mode each time an incoming packet is analyzed, (see hardware configurations 1 to 3), the analysis tool saves the re- ception timestamp, various flags and the first 'n' bytes of data from the receive...

  • Page 1894

    X20 system modules • x20 hub system • x20et8819 1894 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.24.2.15 using trigger inputs the ethernet analysis tool launches the first connected i/o module in the standard function model. The x2x bus is configured with a fixed cycle of 1 ms. If this configuration contains di...

  • Page 1895

    X20 system modules • x20 hub system • x20et8819 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1895 example 2 a system containing multiple x20 i/o systems on the powerlink network is experiencing sporadic failures. An i/ o slave suddenly fails for no apparent reason after running properly for a long time. To analyze...

  • Page 1896: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 hub system • x20hb8815 1896 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.24.3 x20hb8815 4.24.3.1 general information the powerlink tcp/ip gateway x20hb8815 enables the exchange of all types of application data (hmi, diag- nostics, parameter data, etc.) between a powerlink v2 network and ...

  • Page 1897

    X20 system modules • x20 hub system • x20hb8815 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1897 4.24.3.2 order data model number short description figure x20 hub system x20hb8815 x20 powerlink - tcp/ip gateway, can be expanded with ac- tive hub modules, 2x rj45 required accessories system modules for bus control...

  • Page 1898

    X20 system modules • x20 hub system • x20hb8815 1898 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.24.3.3 technical data product id x20hb8815 short description gateway powerlink controlled node with up to 2 slots for hub expansion modules general information status indicators module status, bus function diagnosti...

  • Page 1899

    X20 system modules • x20 hub system • x20hb8815 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1899 4.24.3.4 led status indicators figure led color status description off no power supply or mode is not_active. The controlled node (cn) is either not getting power, or it is in the not_active state. The module waits in...

  • Page 1900

    X20 system modules • x20 hub system • x20hb8815 1900 x20 system user's manual 3.10 status led - blinking patterns 200 200 1000 200 200 200 200 1000 200 200 all times in ms flickering blinking single flash triple flash 200 200 200 1000 double flash figure 619: led status indicators - blinking pattern...

  • Page 1901

    X20 system modules • x20 hub system • x20hb8815 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1901 pinout interface pin ethernet 1 rxd receive data 2 rxd\ receive data\ 3 txd transmit data 4 termination 5 termination 6 txd\ transmit data\ 7 termination 1 shielded rj45 8 termination table 681: pinout 4.24.3.8 slot f...

  • Page 1902

    X20 system modules • x20 hub system • x20hb8815 1902 x20 system user's manual 3.10 example 2: use the powerlink network for tcp/ip services control system remote i/o systems motion control acoposmulti x20 system po w er li n k x20 system sensors actuators se ns or s ac tu at or s x20hb8815 module re...

  • Page 1903: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 hub system • x20hb8815 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1903 4.24.3.10 sg3 this module is not supported on sg3 targets. 4.24.3.11 firmware this module comes with preinstalled firmware. The firmware is a component of automation studio. The module is automatically updated to this...

  • Page 1904

    X20 system modules • x20 hub system • x20hb8880 1904 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.24.4 x20hb8880 4.24.4.1 general information the x20 hub is a device that can be used universally in standard ethernet networks or powerlink networks. It is suitable for 100 mbit/s (fast ethernet) networks. The bus m...

  • Page 1905

    X20 system modules • x20 hub system • x20hb8880 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1905 4.24.4.3 technical data product id x20hb8880 short description hub modular x20 hub with up to 2 slots for hub expansion modules general information status indicators module status, bus function diagnostics module stat...

  • Page 1906

    X20 system modules • x20 hub system • x20hb8880 1906 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.24.4.4 led status indicators figure led color status description s green on hub is active on a link to the remote station has been established. L/a ifx green blinking a link to the remote station has been establishe...

  • Page 1907

    X20 system modules • x20 hub system • x20hb8880 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1907 4.24.4.7 slot for hub expansion modules depending on the bus base, up to 2 hub expansion modules can be installed on the left side of the x20 hub: bus base slots for hub expansion modules x20bb81 1 x20bb82 2 table 686...

  • Page 1908

    X20 system modules • x20 hub system • x20hb88g0 1908 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.24.5 x20hb88g0 4.24.5.1 general information the x20bb81 bus module has an expansion slot on the left side, and therefore the x20hb88g0 junction base module has an additional slot available for an x20hb28g0 ethercat ...

  • Page 1909

    X20 system modules • x20 hub system • x20hb88g0 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1909 4.24.5.3 technical data product id x20hb88g0 short description junction module x20 ethercat junction base module with one slot for 1 junction module general information status indicators module status, bus function di...

  • Page 1910

    X20 system modules • x20 hub system • x20hb88g0 1910 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.24.5.4 led status indicators figure led color status description on junction base module is in operational mode. Blinking preoperational mode 1 pulse safe operational mode flickering the junction base module has sta...

  • Page 1911

    X20 system modules • x20 hub system • x20hb88g0 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1911 4.24.5.7 network address switch a slave alias address can be set using the two network address switches on the base module. During the initial- ization phase (during startup), the base module writes the value of the a...

  • Page 1912

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • brief information 1912 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25 motor controllers the motor controllers offer extensive possibilities for controlling motors, valves or resistive loads and are particularly well suited for controlling brush dc motors. Each output is ...

  • Page 1913

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm2436 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1913 4.25.2 x20mm2436 4.25.2.1 general information the motor bridge module is used to control 2 dc motors with a nominal voltage of 24 to 39 vdc ±25% at a nominal current up to 3 a. The module can be reconfigured and us...

  • Page 1914

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm2436 1914 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20mm2436 nominal voltage 24 vdc input voltage 24 vdc (-15% / +20%) input current at 24 vdc approx. 1.3 ma input filter hardware software - connection type 1-wire connections input circuit sink additiona...

  • Page 1915: Warning!

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm2436 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1915 4.25.2.4 led status indicators for a description of the various operating modes, see the 2.11.1 "re leds" section. Figure led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode double flash boo...

  • Page 1916: Information:

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm2436 1916 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.2.6 connection example information: this module can only be operated if supplied with power via the terminal block. _ + + _ gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc mm sensor 3 sensor 1 sensor 4 sensor 2 +24 vdc 24 - 39 vdc ac...

  • Page 1917

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm2436 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1917 4.25.2.8 output circuit diagram lpwm 24 v - 39 v hpwm lpwm\ hpwm\ lpwm hpwm lpwm\ hpwm\ pwm 1+ pwm 1- pwm 2+ current comparator 1 current comparator 2 pwm 1 controller pwm 2 controller voltage monitoring 24 v - 39 ...

  • Page 1918: Information:

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm2436 1918 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.2.9 protection the power supply line should be protected by a circuit breaker or a fuse. In general, dimensioning the supply line and overcurrent protection depends on the structure of the power supply (module...

  • Page 1919

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm2436 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1919 power loss derating for neighboring modules modules directly next to the motor module can have a power loss of 1.0 w. If the motor module is operated with the rated load over the entire temperature range (9.0 a²), ...

  • Page 1920

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm2436 1920 x20 system user's manual 3.10 hardware configuration for multiple motor modules if three or more motor modules are operated in a cluster, a dummy module must be inserted between the motor modules. There is no derating in this configuration. M o...

  • Page 1921

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm2436 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1921 4.25.2.14 register description 4.25.2.14.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic configuration 12 perioddurationpwm01pwm02 uint ● 14 pulsewidthcurrentpwm01 int...

  • Page 1922

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm2436 1922 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.2.14.2 function model 254 - bus controller read write register offset 1) name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic configuration 12 0 perioddurationpwm01pwm02 uint ● 14 2 pulsewidthcurrentpwm01 int ● 16 4 p...

  • Page 1923

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm2436 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1923 4.25.2.14.3 configuration 4.25.2.14.3.1 counter configuration 1 name: counterconfig01 this register can be used to configure counter 1. This function is available beginning with firmware version 4. Data type value ...

  • Page 1924: Information:

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm2436 1924 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.2.14.3.4 pwm pulse width name: pulsewidthcurrentpwm01 to pulsewidthcurrentpwm02 the pwm pulse width (pwm mode) or current setting (in current mode) is entered in this register according to the setting in the m...

  • Page 1925

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm2436 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1925 4.25.2.14.3.6 decay configuration name: decayconfig the decay configuration determines the method and dynamics of current reduction for inductive loads or motors. "slow decay" is configured by default. In this mode...

  • Page 1926

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm2436 1926 x20 system user's manual 3.10 operating dc motors in pwm mode, the motor current is limited to the maximum current (3.5 a), independent of the supply voltage. However, the motor switches to generator operation when braking. Because of the count...

  • Page 1927

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm2436 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1927 4.25.2.14.4 communication 4.25.2.14.4.1 numerator name: counter01 to counter02 this register indicates the status of counters 1 and 2. Configuration of the counters is described in sections 4.25.2.14.3.1 "counter c...

  • Page 1928

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm2436 1928 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.2.14.4.3 temperature name: temperature01 the module temperature is shown in this register. Data type value information sint -40 to 125 module temperature in °c 4.25.2.14.4.4 error status name: undervoltageerro...

  • Page 1929

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm2436 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1929 4.25.2.14.4.5 error acknowledgment and dither switch-off name: clearerror01 to clearerror02 counteroverflowdetectenable01 to counteroverflowdetectenable02 counterreset01 to counterreset02 ditherdisable01 to ditherd...

  • Page 1930

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm3332 1930 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.3 x20mm3332 4.25.3.1 general information the 3 outputs on the motor module are designed as full-bridge outputs. The continuous current per channel is 3 a at a peak current of up to 5 a. Integrated diagnostics ...

  • Page 1931

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm3332 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1931 4.25.3.3 technical data product id x20mm3332 short description i/o module 3 full-bridge outputs general information b&r id code 0xa982 status indicators i/o function per channel, operating state, module status diag...

  • Page 1932: Warning!

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm3332 1932 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.3.4 led status indicators for a description of the various operating modes, see the 2.11.1 "re leds" section. Figure led color color description off no power to module single flash reset mode blinking preopera...

  • Page 1933

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm3332 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1933 4.25.3.7 output circuit diagram logic high-side 24 v undervoltage monitoring 24 v external supply motor x + 24 v gnd ex te rn al po w er s up pl y 24 v external supply i/o status led (orange) output monitoring outp...

  • Page 1934: Information:

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm3332 1934 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.3.8 function description - motor operation three dc motors can be operated with the module. Each output is designed as a full-bridge output, therefore the motors can be moved in both directions. V cc gnd m low...

  • Page 1935

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm3332 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1935 4.25.3.10 derating in order to be able to operate the motor module over the entire temperature range, only modules with a maximum power loss of of 0.5 w can be installed next to the motor module or respective turn-...

  • Page 1936

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm3332 1936 x20 system user's manual 3.10 current derating 3 of the motor module current derating with multiple motor modules next to each other. M ot or m od ul e x2 0 m od ul e po w er lo ss ≤ 1 w x2 0 m od ul e po w er lo ss ≤ 1 w m ot or m od ul e m ot...

  • Page 1937

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm3332 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1937 4.25.3.11 switching inductive loads (e.G. Valves) with enabled short circuit channel - all outputs with same load 10 0,1 1 10 100 100 1,000 coil inductance max. Switching cycles / second (with 90% duty cycle) 10 mh...

  • Page 1938: Information:

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm3332 1938 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.3.12 monitoring the module supply the module supply is continually monitored. If the supply voltage drops below 18v, all channels are switched off and an error bit is set. Information: the undervoltage must be...

  • Page 1939

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm3332 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1939 4.25.3.16 register description 4.25.3.16.1 function model 0 - standard in this function model, control of full bridges takes place using 3 bits per channel. Read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic ...

  • Page 1940: Information:

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm3332 1940 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.3.16.3 configuration 4.25.3.16.3.1 motor configuration 1 - default name: startchannel01 to startchannel02 shortcircuitchannel01 to shortcircuitchannel02 directionchannel01 to directionchannel02 this register c...

  • Page 1941: Information:

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm3332 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1941 4.25.3.16.3.2 motor configuration 2 - default name: startchannel03 shortcircuitchannel03 directionchannel03 this register contains the control bits for the third channel. Data type value usint see bit structure. Bi...

  • Page 1942

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm3332 1942 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.3.16.3.4 error acknowledged name: overcurrentacknowledge01 to overcurrentacknowledge03 overtemperatureacknowledge undervoltageacknowledge this register contains bits used to acknowledge an overcurrent error, a...

  • Page 1943

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm3332 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1943 4.25.3.16.4.2 module and channel status name: overcurrenterror01 to overcurrenterror03 statusdigitaloutput01 to statusdigitaloutput03 overtemperatureerror undervoltageerror some operating states are monitored by th...

  • Page 1944

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm4331 1944 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.4 x20mm4331 4.25.4.1 general information the 4 outputs on the motor module are designed as half-bridge outputs. The continuous current per channel is 3 a at a peak current of up to 5 a. Integrated diagnostics ...

  • Page 1945

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm4331 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1945 product id x20mm4331 switching voltage 24 vdc (-15% / +20%) nominal current 3.0 a maximum current 5.0 a (250 ms) total nominal current 10.0 a current value measurement resolution 100 ma data collection on the high-...

  • Page 1946: Warning!

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm4331 1946 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.4.4 led status indicators for a description of the various operating modes, see the 2.11.1 "re leds" section. Figure led color status description off no power to module off reset mode blinking preoperational m...

  • Page 1947

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm4331 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1947 4.25.4.7 output circuit diagram logic high-side 24 v undervoltage monitoring 24 v external supply motor x + gnd 24 v gnd ex te rn al po w er s up pl y 24 v external supply i/o status led (orange) output monitoring ...

  • Page 1948: Information:

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm4331 1948 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.4.9 protection the power supply line should be protected by a circuit breaker or a fuse. In general, dimensioning the supply line and overcurrent protection depends on the structure of the power supply (module...

  • Page 1949

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm4331 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1949 current derating 1 of the motor module current derating for the motor module for neighboring modules with ≤1.8 w thermal power loss. M ot or m od ul e x2 0 m od ul e po w er lo ss ≤ 1 .8 w x2 0 m od ul e po w er lo...

  • Page 1950

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm4331 1950 x20 system user's manual 3.10 current derating 3 of the motor module current derating with multiple motor modules next to each other. M ot or m od ul e x2 0 m od ul e po w er lo ss ≤ 1 w x2 0 m od ul e po w er lo ss ≤ 1 w m ot or m od ul e m ot...

  • Page 1951: Information:

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm4331 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1951 4.25.4.12 monitoring the module supply the module supply is continually monitored. If the supply voltage drops below 18v, all channels are switched off and an error bit is set. Information: the undervoltage must be...

  • Page 1952

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm4331 1952 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.4.16 register description 4.25.4.16.1 function model 0 - standard in this function model, control of full bridges takes place using 3 bits per channel. Read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic ...

  • Page 1953: Information:

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm4331 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1953 4.25.4.16.3 configuration 4.25.4.16.3.1 motor configuration - default name: startchannel01 to startchannel04 shortcircuitchannel01 to shortcircuitchannel04 this register contains the control bits for all channels. ...

  • Page 1954

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm4331 1954 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.4.16.3.3 error acknowledged name: overcurrentacknowledge01 to overcurrentacknowledge04 overtemperatureacknowledge undervoltageacknowledge this register contains bits used to acknowledge an overcurrent error, a...

  • Page 1955

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm4331 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1955 4.25.4.16.4.3 module status name: overtemperatureerror undervoltageerror some operating states are monitored by the module. They are: • module supply • module temperature the states are stored in this register. For...

  • Page 1956

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm4456 1956 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.5 x20mm4456 4.25.5.1 general information the pwm motor bridge module is used to control 4 dc motors with a nominal voltage of 24 to 48 vdc ±25% at a nominal current up to 6 a. The module can be reconfigured an...

  • Page 1957

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm4456 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1957 4.25.5.3 technical data product id x20mm4456 short description i/o module 4-channel pwm motor bridge, 4 abr incremental encoders general information b&r id code 0xa177 status indicators i/o function per channel, op...

  • Page 1958

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm4456 1958 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20mm4456 pwm pulse width pwm mode 15-bit + sign ≥10 ns current mode 15-bit + sign ≥10 ns isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 v eff operating conditions mounting orientation horizontal yes inst...

  • Page 1959: Warning!

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm4456 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1959 4.25.5.5 connection elements in accordance with the en60204-1 standard, a cable cross section of 1.5 mm² or larger must be used for the motor outputs in order to handle the maximum motor current of 10 a. To ensure ...

  • Page 1960

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm4456 1960 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.5.5.3 terminal block x3 - module supply 24 - 48 vdc shield gnd 4.25.5.6 connection examples x1 and x2 terminal blocks the following image shows a connection example for the x1 terminal block. The connection ex...

  • Page 1961

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm4456 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1961 the functions can also be mixed: example 1 channel function di 1 digital input di 2 digital input di 3 digital input di 4 digital input di 5 digital input di 6 digital input di 7 digital input di 8 digital input di...

  • Page 1962: Information:

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm4456 1962 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.5.10 protection the power supply line should be protected by a circuit breaker or a fuse. In general, dimensioning the supply line and overcurrent protection depends on the structure of the power supply (modul...

  • Page 1963

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm4456 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1963 4.25.5.11 monitoring the module supply the module supply is continually monitored. If the following limits are exceeded in either direction, an error bit is set. Upper limit: >80 v warning stage: >60 v lower limit:...

  • Page 1964

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm4456 1964 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.5.15 register description 4.25.5.15.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic configuration 0 + (n-1) * 8 pulsewidthcurrentpwm0n (index n = 1 to 4) int ● 4 ...

  • Page 1965

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm4456 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1965 4.25.5.15.2 function model 254 - bus controller read write register offset 1) name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic configuration 0 + (n-1) * 8 0 + (n-1) * 8 pulsewidthcurrentpwm0n (index n = 1 to 4) int ● 4...

  • Page 1966

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm4456 1966 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.5.15.3 configuration 4.25.5.15.3.1 configuration name: configuration01 to configuration04 these registers can be used to configure the four dc motors. The following placeholders are used in the configuration t...

  • Page 1967

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm4456 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1967 4.25.5.15.3.2 control name: triggeredge01 to triggeredge04 starttrigger01 to starttrigger04 startlatch01 to startlatch04 ditherdisable01 to ditherdisable04 clearerror01 to clearerror04 showmeancurrent01 to showmean...

  • Page 1968

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm4456 1968 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.5.15.3.3 pwm period duration name: perioddurationpwm this register can be used to set the period duration between 20 μs (50 khz) and 65,535 μs (15 hz). Data type value information uint 20 to 65,535 time in µs ...

  • Page 1969

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm4456 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1969 dither frequency name: configoutput02 this register can be used to set the frequency in 2 hz steps. Data type value information usint 0 to 255 corresponds to 0 to 510 hz. Dither example valve specification valve sp...

  • Page 1970

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm4456 1970 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.5.15.4.4 status of inputs name: statusinput01 to statusinput16 nlatchpending01 to nlatchpending04 latchdone01 to latchdone04 endswitchreached01 to endswitchreached04 pwmerror01 to pwmerror0 these registers ind...

  • Page 1971

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm4456 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1971 4.25.5.15.4.5 channel errors name: currenterror01 to currenterror04 overcurrenterror01 to overcurrenterror04 if an error is detected, the corresponding error bit in this register remains set until the error is ackn...

  • Page 1972

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm4456 1972 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.5.15.4.6 global error name: overvoltageerror undervoltageerror voltagewarning overtemperatureerror this register indicates overtemperature and errors in the module supply. The error bits are automatically ackn...

  • Page 1973

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm4456 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1973 4.25.5.15.5.1 current control as its name suggests, mixed decay mode is a mix of "slow decay" and "fast decay". This occurs as follows: a check is made at the beginning of each pwm cycle to determine if the actual ...

  • Page 1974

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm4456 1974 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.5.15.5.2 pwm control when mixed decay mode is enabled, the outputs are driven in fast decay mode up until 50% of the period and in slow decay mode for the remainder of the switch-off phase. When slow decay mod...

  • Page 1975

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20mm4456 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1975 4.25.5.15.6 minimum cycle time the minimum cycle time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced without communication errors occurring. It should be noted that very fast cycles decrease the idle time available f...

  • Page 1976

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 1976 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.6 x20sm1426 4.25.6.1 general information the stepper motor module is used to control stepper motors with a rated voltage of 24 vdc at a motor current up to 1 a (1.2 a peak). Additionally, this module has four ...

  • Page 1977

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1977 4.25.6.3 technical data product id x20sm1426 short description i/o module 1 full bridge for controlling stepper motors general information b&r id code 0x2681 status indicators i/o function per channel, operating st...

  • Page 1978: Warning!

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 1978 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.6.4 led status indicators for a description of the various operating modes, see the 2.11.1 "re leds" section. Figure led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode double flash boo...

  • Page 1979

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1979 4.25.6.6 connection example gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc sm sensor 3 sensor 1 sensor 4 sensor 2 winding a winding b +24 vdc +24 vdc 4.25.6.7 connection options for digital inputs standard function model channel function...

  • Page 1980

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 1980 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.6.9 output circuit diagram la 24 v - 39 v ha la\ ha\ lb hb lb\ hb\ a a\ b b\ current comparator a current comparator b motor controller motor controller 4.25.6.10 overvoltage cutoff the module supply voltage i...

  • Page 1981

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1981 4.25.6.12 derating modules next to the sm module can have a maximum power consumption of 1 w. To ensure proper operation, the derating values listed below must be adhered to: power loss derating for neighboring mod...

  • Page 1982

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 1982 x20 system user's manual 3.10 ambient temperature [°c] 0 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 40 30 20 10 50 r at ed c ur re nt [a ] figure 623: current derating current derating for multiple sm modules if three or more sm modules are operated in a cluster, the...

  • Page 1983

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1983 4.25.6.13 register description 4.25.6.13.1 operation with bus controller the following function model can be used when the sm module is used together with a bus controller. Bus controller function model x20bc0083, ...

  • Page 1984

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 1984 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.6.13.3 function model 0 - standard with sdc read write register name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic configuration 44 stall threshold uint ● - module configuration 1 uint ● 33 holding current usi...

  • Page 1985

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1985 4.25.6.13.4 function model 254 - bus controller and ramp function model read write register offset 1) name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic configuration 48 - holding current usint ● 49 - nominal curre...

  • Page 1986

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 1986 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.6.13.5 register of the standard and standard+sdc function models 4.25.6.13.5.1 configuration registers - general information stall threshold name: configoutput01 the sm module features integrated sensorless lo...

  • Page 1987

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1987 counter configuration name: configoutput09 data type value usint see bit structure. Bit structure: bit description value information 0 negative edge: disable abr latch function. 0 abr latch function 1 positive edge...

  • Page 1988

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 1988 x20 system user's manual 3.10 mixed decay threshold name: configoutput16 the the mixed decay threshold can be set in this register. This value is used together with the stall threshold to achieve a balance between smooth operation and stall det...

  • Page 1989

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1989 full step threshold name: fullstepthreshold01 this register is used to configure a rotational speed. When this defined speed has been reached, the drive will automatically change from microsteps to full step mode. ...

  • Page 1990

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 1990 x20 system user's manual 3.10 module configuration 2 name: startlatch triggeredgepos triggeredgeneg starttrigger triggeredge clearerror the trigger functions for the stepper motor can be configured with this register. Data type value usint see ...

  • Page 1991: Note:

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1991 4.25.6.13.5.3 configuration registers with sdc sdc configuration name: sdcconfig01 this register can be used to enable/disable additional sdc information. Enabling/disabling the sdc information shows or hides addit...

  • Page 1992

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 1992 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.6.13.5.4 register for reading back the configuration read ing the holding current, rated current and maximum current configoutput03read (holding current) configoutput04read (rated current) configoutput05read (...

  • Page 1993

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1993 position sync 2 name: positionsync02 depending on counter configuration (bit 3), this register contains the state of either the position counter or the abr counter. It's an exact complement to the position sync reg...

  • Page 1994

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 1994 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.6.13.5.6 communication registers without sdc input counter state name: modulepowersupplyerror statusinput01 to statusinput04 this register is used to indicate the status of the digital inputs and counters. Dat...

  • Page 1995

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1995 motor stepx name: motorstep0 to motorstep3 these registers are used to specify the number and direction of steps that must be carried out by the module during the next x2x cycle, and to select the motor current (se...

  • Page 1996

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 1996 x20 system user's manual 3.10 position latched sync/async name: positionlatchedsync positionlatchedasync the position counter (internal position counter or abr counter) is applied at the latch event (see "module config- uration 2"). Bits 3 and ...

  • Page 1997

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1997 4.25.6.13.5.7 communication registers with sdc sdc life sign monitoring name: settime01 the module uses sdc life sign monitoring to check whether valid values have been received for the speed setpoint. Sdc life sig...

  • Page 1998

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 1998 x20 system user's manual 3.10 input counter value name: modulepowersupplyerror statusinput01 to statusinput04 this register is used to indicate the status of the digital inputs and the counter. Data type value usint see bit structure. Bit struc...

  • Page 1999

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1999 overcurrent error overcurrent occurs if the motor current measured in the motor windings is twice as high as it should be (e.G. Short circuit). Status of the drive the status of the drive is only shown when sdc inf...

  • Page 2000

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 2000 x20 system user's manual 3.10 home position name: refpulsepos01 these 2 registers contain the following: register description home position of the internal position counter this register indicates the home position of the internal position coun...

  • Page 2001: Information:

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2001 4.25.6.13.6 register description of the ramp function model 4.25.6.13.6.1 configuration registers holding current, rated current and maximum current name: configoutput03a (holding current) configoutput04a (rated cu...

  • Page 2002

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 2002 x20 system user's manual 3.10 maximum deceleration name: maxdec01 this register defines the maximum deceleration (also applies for homing modes). Data type value information uint 0 to 65,535 deceleration in microsteps / cycle² reversing loop na...

  • Page 2003

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2003 jolt time name: jolttime01 if a value other than 0 is assigned to this register, then jolt limitation is performed. This is done by averaging the values for the steps to be carried out (speed setpoint) in each cycl...

  • Page 2004

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 2004 x20 system user's manual 3.10 mixed decay threshold by default, mixed decay is always enabled (mixed decay threshold = 15). A self-stabilizing control loop in the current controller results in an optimal, sinusoidal current flow. This ensures a...

  • Page 2005

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2005 general configuration name: generalconfig01 bit 0 of this register can be used to switch the positioning mode. This register can also be used to configure the cycle time of the motion profile generator. • 0: "mode ...

  • Page 2006: Warning!

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 2006 x20 system user's manual 3.10 limit switch configuration name: limitswitchconfig01 this register can be used to configure the behavior of the limit switch. Data type value usint see bit structure. Bit structure: bit description value informatio...

  • Page 2007: Information:

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2007 software limit name: positionlimitmin01 positionlimitmax01 this register configures software limits. The function is active if at least one of the two registers is unequal to zero. These limits are effective in all...

  • Page 2008: Information:

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 2008 x20 system user's manual 3.10 control word name: mpgencontrol01 this register can be used to issue commands based on the module's state (see 4.25.6.13.7 "ramp function model operation"). Data type value uint see bit structure. Bit structure: bi...

  • Page 2009

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2009 mode 1 - position mode the position setpoint is specified in the set position/speed register. The motor is then moved to this new position. This is done with a ramp function that accounts for the defined maximum sp...

  • Page 2010

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 2010 x20 system user's manual 3.10 position setting the position setpoint can be defined in two different ways: type of setpoint definition description single setpoint once the position setpoint is reached, the target reached bit in the status word ...

  • Page 2011: Note:

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2011 "set of setpoints" mode when the change set immediately bit is set to 1 (Ⓑ in figure "principle for applying the setpoint"), then the module is operating in single setpoint mode. This means that the module receives...

  • Page 2012

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 2012 x20 system user's manual 3.10 mode -122: set the actual position the position setpoint set in the "position/speed" register is accepted as the current actual position in the internal position counter when the state machine is in the "operation ...

  • Page 2013

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2013 current position (cyclic) name: abspos01actval this cyclic register contains the current position. Default: value of the internal position counter, can be changed to abr counter data type value dint -2,147,483,648 ...

  • Page 2014

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 2014 x20 system user's manual 3.10 motor id name: motoridentification01 this register is used to identify the connected motor type for service purposes and to differentiate between motors in the application. Following measurement, this register cont...

  • Page 2015

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2015 current position (acyclic) name: abspos1actvalacyclic this acyclic register contains the current position. Default: value of the abr counter, can be changed to internal position counter data type value dint -2,147,...

  • Page 2016

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 2016 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.6.13.7.1 control word control word bits and their state for the commands of the state machine: command r es er ve d a b r c ou nt er s yn c/ as yn c c ur re nt e rr or d et ec tio n w ar ni ng re se t m ot or ...

  • Page 2017: Information:

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2017 4.25.6.13.7.2 status word the individual bits of this register and its states depend on the current state of the state machine: status r es er vi er t / m ot or lo ad b it 2 1) r es er vi er t / m ot or lo ad b it ...

  • Page 2018

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 2018 x20 system user's manual 3.10 (e.G. Temperature too high) enable operation shutdown fault reset fault reaction active fault quick stop active disable voltage quick stop shutdown switch on disable operation enable operation not ready to switch o...

  • Page 2019

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1426 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2019 4.25.6.13.8 minimum cycle time the minimum cycle time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced without communication errors occurring. It should be noted that very fast cycles decrease the idle time available f...

  • Page 2020

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 2020 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.7 x20sm1436 4.25.7.1 general information the stepper motor module is used to control stepper motors with a rated voltage of 24 to 39 vdc (±25%) at a motor current up to 3 a (3.5 a peak). Additionally, this mod...

  • Page 2021

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2021 4.25.7.3 technical data product id x20sm1436 short description i/o module 1 full bridge for controlling stepper motors general information b&r id code 0x2682 status indicators i/o function per channel, operating st...

  • Page 2022: Warning!

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 2022 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20sm1436 relative humidity operation 5 to 95%, non-condensing storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing mechanical characteristics note order 1x x20tb12 terminal block separate...

  • Page 2023: Information:

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2023 4.25.7.6 connection example information: this module can only be operated if supplied with power via the terminal block. _ + + _ gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc sm sensor 3 sensor 1 sensor 4 sensor 2 +24 vdc 24 - 39 vdc wi...

  • Page 2024

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 2024 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.7.8 input circuit diagram input x gnd gnd vdr input status i/o status led (green) 4.25.7.9 output circuit diagram la 24 v - 39 v ha la\ ha\ lb hb lb\ hb\ a a\ b b\ current comparator a current comparator b mot...

  • Page 2025

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2025 4.25.7.11 overtemperature cutoff (at 85°c) if the module temperature reaches or exceeds the limit value of 85°c, then the module executes the following actions: • setting the "overtemperature" error bit • the outpu...

  • Page 2026: Information:

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 2026 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.7.13 protection the power supply line should be protected by a circuit breaker or a fuse. In general, dimensioning the supply line and overcurrent protection depends on the structure of the power supply (modul...

  • Page 2027

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2027 4.25.7.14 derating modules next to the sm module can have a maximum power consumption of 1 w. To ensure proper operation, the derating values listed below must be adhered to: power loss derating for neighboring mod...

  • Page 2028

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 2028 x20 system user's manual 3.10 current derating of the sm module if the power loss of the neighboring modules to the sm module is 1 w, then the current of the sm module must be derated starting at 45°c. X2 0 m od ul e po w er lo ss = 1 w sm m od...

  • Page 2029

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2029 4.25.7.15 register description 4.25.7.15.1 operation with bus controller the following function model can be used when the sm module is used together with a bus controller. Bus controller function model x20bc0083, ...

  • Page 2030

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 2030 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.7.15.3 function model 0 - standard with sdc read write register name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic configuration 44 stall threshold uint ● - module configuration 1 uint ● 33 holding current usi...

  • Page 2031

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2031 4.25.7.15.4 function model 254 - bus controller and ramp function model read write register offset 1) name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic configuration 48 - holding current usint ● 49 - nominal curre...

  • Page 2032

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 2032 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.7.15.5 register of the standard and standard+sdc function models 4.25.7.15.5.1 configuration registers - general information stall threshold name: configoutput01 the sm module features integrated sensorless lo...

  • Page 2033

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2033 counter configuration name: configoutput09 data type value usint see bit structure. Bit structure: bit description value information 0 negative edge: disable abr latch function. 0 abr latch function 1 positive edge...

  • Page 2034

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 2034 x20 system user's manual 3.10 mixed decay threshold name: configoutput16 the the mixed decay threshold can be set in this register. This value is used together with the stall threshold to achieve a balance between smooth operation and stall det...

  • Page 2035

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2035 full step threshold name: fullstepthreshold01 this register is used to configure a rotational speed. When this defined speed has been reached, the drive will automatically change from microsteps to full step mode. ...

  • Page 2036

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 2036 x20 system user's manual 3.10 module configuration 2 name: startlatch triggeredgepos triggeredgeneg starttrigger triggeredge clearerror the trigger functions for the stepper motor can be configured with this register. Data type value usint see ...

  • Page 2037: Note:

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2037 4.25.7.15.5.3 configuration registers with sdc sdc configuration name: sdcconfig01 this register can be used to enable/disable additional sdc information. Enabling/disabling the sdc information shows or hides addit...

  • Page 2038

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 2038 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.7.15.5.4 register for reading back the configuration read ing the holding current, rated current and maximum current configoutput03read (holding current) configoutput04read (rated current) configoutput05read (...

  • Page 2039

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2039 position sync 2 name: positionsync02 depending on counter configuration (bit 3), this register contains the state of either the position counter or the abr counter. It's an exact complement to the position sync reg...

  • Page 2040

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 2040 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.7.15.5.6 communication registers without sdc input counter state name: modulepowersupplyerror statusinput01 to statusinput04 this register is used to indicate the status of the digital inputs and counters. Dat...

  • Page 2041

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2041 motor stepx name: motorstep0 to motorstep3 these registers are used to specify the number and direction of steps that must be carried out by the module during the next x2x cycle, and to select the motor current (se...

  • Page 2042

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 2042 x20 system user's manual 3.10 position latched sync/async name: positionlatchedsync positionlatchedasync the position counter (internal position counter or abr counter) is applied at the latch event (see "module config- uration 2"). Bits 3 and ...

  • Page 2043

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2043 4.25.7.15.5.7 communication registers with sdc sdc life sign monitoring name: settime01 the module uses sdc life sign monitoring to check whether valid values have been received for the speed setpoint. Sdc life sig...

  • Page 2044

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 2044 x20 system user's manual 3.10 input counter value name: modulepowersupplyerror statusinput01 to statusinput04 this register is used to indicate the status of the digital inputs and the counter. Data type value usint see bit structure. Bit struc...

  • Page 2045

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2045 overcurrent error overcurrent occurs if the motor current measured in the motor windings is twice as high as it should be (e.G. Short circuit). Status of the drive the status of the drive is only shown when sdc inf...

  • Page 2046

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 2046 x20 system user's manual 3.10 home position name: refpulsepos01 these 2 registers contain the following: register description home position of the internal position counter this register indicates the home position of the internal position coun...

  • Page 2047: Information:

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2047 4.25.7.15.6 register description of the ramp function model 4.25.7.15.6.1 configuration registers holding current, rated current and maximum current name: configoutput03a (holding current) configoutput04a (rated cu...

  • Page 2048

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 2048 x20 system user's manual 3.10 maximum deceleration name: maxdec01 this register defines the maximum deceleration (also applies for homing modes). Data type value information uint 0 to 65,535 deceleration in microsteps / cycle² reversing loop na...

  • Page 2049

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2049 jolt time name: jolttime01 if a value other than 0 is assigned to this register, then jolt limitation is performed. This is done by averaging the values for the steps to be carried out (speed setpoint) in each cycl...

  • Page 2050

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 2050 x20 system user's manual 3.10 mixed decay threshold by default, mixed decay is always enabled (mixed decay threshold = 15). A self-stabilizing control loop in the current controller results in an optimal, sinusoidal current flow. This ensures a...

  • Page 2051

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2051 general configuration name: generalconfig01 bit 0 of this register can be used to switch the positioning mode. This register can also be used to configure the cycle time of the motion profile generator. • 0: "mode ...

  • Page 2052: Warning!

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 2052 x20 system user's manual 3.10 limit switch configuration name: limitswitchconfig01 this register can be used to configure the behavior of the limit switch. Data type value usint see bit structure. Bit structure: bit description value informatio...

  • Page 2053: Information:

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2053 software limit name: positionlimitmin01 positionlimitmax01 this register configures software limits. The function is active if at least one of the two registers is unequal to zero. These limits are effective in all...

  • Page 2054: Information:

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 2054 x20 system user's manual 3.10 control word name: mpgencontrol01 this register can be used to issue commands based on the module's state (see 4.25.7.15.7 "ramp function model operation"). Data type value uint see bit structure. Bit structure: bi...

  • Page 2055

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2055 mode 1 - position mode the position setpoint is specified in the set position/speed register. The motor is then moved to this new position. This is done with a ramp function that accounts for the defined maximum sp...

  • Page 2056

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 2056 x20 system user's manual 3.10 position setting the position setpoint can be defined in two different ways: type of setpoint definition description single setpoint once the position setpoint is reached, the target reached bit in the status word ...

  • Page 2057: Note:

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2057 "set of setpoints" mode when the change set immediately bit is set to 1 (Ⓑ in figure "principle for applying the setpoint"), then the module is operating in single setpoint mode. This means that the module receives...

  • Page 2058

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 2058 x20 system user's manual 3.10 mode -122: set the actual position the position setpoint set in the "position/speed" register is accepted as the current actual position in the internal position counter when the state machine is in the "operation ...

  • Page 2059

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2059 current position (cyclic) name: abspos01actval this cyclic register contains the current position. Default: value of the internal position counter, can be changed to abr counter data type value dint -2,147,483,648 ...

  • Page 2060

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 2060 x20 system user's manual 3.10 motor id name: motoridentification01 this register is used to identify the connected motor type for service purposes and to differentiate between motors in the application. Following measurement, this register cont...

  • Page 2061

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2061 current position (acyclic) name: abspos1actvalacyclic this acyclic register contains the current position. Default: value of the abr counter, can be changed to internal position counter data type value dint -2,147,...

  • Page 2062

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 2062 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.25.7.15.7 ramp function model operation control for this model has been based on the canopen communication profile ds402. Commands for controlling the modules are written to the "control word". The current module...

  • Page 2063: Information:

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2063 4.25.7.15.7.2 status word the individual bits of this register and its states depend on the current state of the state machine: status r es er vi er t / m ot or lo ad b it 2 1) r es er vi er t / m ot or lo ad b it ...

  • Page 2064

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 2064 x20 system user's manual 3.10 (e.G. Temperature too high) enable operation shutdown fault reset fault reaction active fault quick stop active disable voltage quick stop shutdown switch on disable operation enable operation not ready to switch o...

  • Page 2065

    X20 system modules • motor controllers • x20sm1436 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2065 4.25.7.15.8 minimum cycle time the minimum cycle time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced without communication errors occurring. It should be noted that very fast cycles decrease the idle time available f...

  • Page 2066

    X20 system modules • other functions • brief information 2066 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26 other functions the following modules are included in this module group: • multi-measurement transformers / synchronization modules • universal mixed modules and combination modules • diode array modules...

  • Page 2067: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2067 4.26.2 x20cm4810 4.26.2.1 order data model number short description figure other functions x20cm4810 x20 analog input module for vibration measurement and analyse of condition monitoring exercises. 4 iepe analog inpu...

  • Page 2068

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2068 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20cm4810 open line detection per channel yes at minimum supply voltage 1) 17 v (or higher) for more than 1 ms at nominal supply voltage 2) 21.3 v (or higher) for more than 1 ms at maximum supply voltage 3...

  • Page 2069

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2069 4.26.2.2.3 pinout x 20 c m 4 81 0 e r 1 2 3 4 acceleration sensor 1+ acceleration sensor 1- acceleration sensor 1 shield acceleration sensor 3+ acceleration sensor 3- acceleration sensor shield 3 acceleration sensor ...

  • Page 2070

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2070 x20 system user's manual 3.10 po w er co ns um ptio n 1 .8 w po w er co ns um ptio n 1 w x2 0c m 48 10 po w er co ns um ptio n 1 .8 w po w er co ns um ptio n 1 w po w er co ns um ptio n 1 .8 w po w er co ns um ptio n 1 .8 w po w er co ns um ptio ...

  • Page 2071

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2071 vertical installation at ambient temperatures higher than 35°c, the x20cm4810 requires power derating: po w er c on su m pt io n n ei gh bo rin g m od ul es [w ] ambient temperature [°c] 35°c 1.8 - 1w 0 w 45°c if the...

  • Page 2072

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2072 x20 system user's manual 3.10 example: ambient temperature up to 35°c po w er co ns um ptio n 1 .8 w po w er co ns um ptio n 1 .8 w x2 0c m 48 10 po w er co ns um ptio n 1 .8 w po w er co ns um ptio n 1 .8 w po w er co ns um ptio n 1 .8 w po w er...

  • Page 2073

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2073 4.26.2.2.6 gain curve the following diagram shows a typical gain curve for the x20cm4810 module. Frequency in hz fi lte r d am pi ng in d b figure 641: typical gain curve 4.26.2.2.7 signal generation the following si...

  • Page 2074

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2074 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.2.2.8 filter configuration the x20cm4810 has a number of configurable filters. There is an adjustable high-pass filter for the whole module that can be configured using "highfrequencyconfig01". Possible settings...

  • Page 2075

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2075 4.26.2.2.11 characteristic value format characteristic value format unit "actspeed01-04" real hz "analoginput01-04" real mg or 1 when crest "peakhighfrequency01-04" real mg "rmshighfrequency01-04" real mg crestfactor...

  • Page 2076

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2076 x20 system user's manual 3.10 factor = 100 / (sensor sensitivity in mv/g) all characteristic values and values must be multiplied by the calculated factor. This also applies to the analog characteristic values if the characteristic value calculat...

  • Page 2077

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2077 4.26.2.3.8 firmware update time updates to the firmware can take some time due to the size of the files. The following firmware update times can be expected depending on the configured bus cycle time: bus cycle time ...

  • Page 2078

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2078 x20 system user's manual 3.10 each component is subject to the regularities of this curve, with a typical trend emerging as a result. • area 1 (early failures) is characterized by a decreasing failure rate. Early failures are caused almost ex- cl...

  • Page 2079

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2079 • sufficient warning time must be given in advance before a function fails. The consideration of the condition monitoring "tool" must not only be limited to the recognition of operating condi- tions, but should be in...

  • Page 2080: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2080 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.2.4.1.3 overview of condition monitoring methods method brief description of operation available signals / interfaces determination of the condition of coolants and lubri- cants visual assessment, filtration, fe...

  • Page 2081: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2081 magnitudes of influence on the sensors mounting direction - preferred direction oscillation sensors can be fitted at any location. The installation position usually results from the measuring task itself. Nevertheles...

  • Page 2082: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2082 x20 system user's manual 3.10 interference a backlash on the sensors occurs near electromechanical machines such as motors and generators due to elec- tromagnetic alternating fields, the associated induction and magnetostriction. This backlash is...

  • Page 2083: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2083 information: for optimal measurement, the base surface of the sensor must be flat and the sensor must be fully supported. In order to increase the quality of the measurement accordingly, a fixed connection to the mea...

  • Page 2084

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2084 x20 system user's manual 3.10 the choice of mounting is influenced by the resonance frequency and temperature. The following table shows how strongly these influences impact on the different mounting methods. Resonant frequency temperature stud i...

  • Page 2085

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2085 sensor positioning to ensure optimal detection and measurement of frequencies propagating from a point of damage, sensor posi- tioning plays an important role. The ideal position for mounting a sensor on a structure ...

  • Page 2086

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2086 x20 system user's manual 3.10 if a fixed medium is stimulated by an impact, structure-borne sound spreads throughout it. This consists of additional frequencies which are determined by the shape of the structure and the material it is made from (...

  • Page 2087

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2087 causes of oscillations: imbalance in accordance with din iso 1925 1) , an imbalance is present in a rotating system if forces or oscillation movements are transferred to the bearing as a consequence of imbalanced cen...

  • Page 2088: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2088 x20 system user's manual 3.10 oscillation parameters parameter explanation symbol formula rest position the structure's undisplaced position s 0 amplitude the greatest displacement from the rest position a period duration minimal time span for a ...

  • Page 2089

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2089 a harmonic oscillation can be clearly described by its amplitude, frequency and phase angle. • the amplitude in the path, velocity or acceleration indicates the instantaneous value. • the frequency describes how ofte...

  • Page 2090

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2090 x20 system user's manual 3.10 time [s] am pl itu de base frequency (gf) 3 x gf 5 x gf 7 x gf 9 x gf total figure 656: sinusoidal oscillation with one harmonic sinusoidal oscillation with 1 hertz and an amplitude of 1 and sinusoidal oscillation wi...

  • Page 2091: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2091 information about using fft window functions depending on the signal structure and boundary conditions, discontinuities may occur at the time window limits of the extract taken. These reflect partial oscillations tha...

  • Page 2092: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2092 x20 system user's manual 3.10 buffer storage the values that have been sampled are stored in the module's internal buffer. A copy of these values is transmitted every 300 ms. Writing selected values to the buffer the size of the buffer is constan...

  • Page 2093: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2093 resolution resolution refers to the difference between two two adjacent measurement data points. This specifies the size of the distance between two lines along both the horizontal ("time signal" or "frequency spectr...

  • Page 2094: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2094 x20 system user's manual 3.10 quantization to process the analog signal, an analog-to-digital converter (ad converter) is required. An ad converter can only measure voltage in stages, however. This is known as quantum voltage. The area to be meas...

  • Page 2095

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2095 2 impacts many types of machine damage can result in oscillations that cause the structure of the machine or adjacent machine parts to vibrate at their natural frequency. Impact-related causes of this are a result of...

  • Page 2096

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2096 x20 system user's manual 3.10 to make the actual result, or shock sequence, clearly visible, it is obviously not enough to simply provide the amplitude spectrum. It is much more important that the process of convolution that took place when the s...

  • Page 2097

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2097 displacement, velocity and acceleration sensors can record oscillation acceleration, oscillation velocity or oscillation displacement. Regardless of the phys- ical size that the sensor records, the oscillation can be...

  • Page 2098

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2098 x20 system user's manual 3.10 operator's limits - experience-based values operators draw on their own experience when assessing the status of the machine. Long-term observation of the characteristic values and the machine's history can provide re...

  • Page 2099: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2099 example this example will use the first and second derivative to determine the best time for repairs. The maximum service life will be taken into account when selecting a time to perform a replacement. The possibilit...

  • Page 2100

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2100 x20 system user's manual 3.10 dynamic speed change with the fft calculation in the x20cm4810 module, it is assumed that the lines do not shift during the calculation of a buffer. This is only the case when the system speed is constant. In the cas...

  • Page 2101

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2101 4.26.2.4.3 practical applications of damage recognition it is possible to gain good insight into the condition of a machine or system by measuring the parameters associ- ated with errors. This parameter data is used ...

  • Page 2102

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2102 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.2.4.3.1 characteristic values the following matrix shows the relationship between potential failures and the suitability of the characteristic values provided in the module. The potential failures refer to the i...

  • Page 2103

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2103 description of individual characteristic values sum of maximum value the maximum value is often also referred to as the peak value. The peak value of a mechanical oscillation signal indicate the maximum sum of indivi...

  • Page 2104

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2104 x20 system user's manual 3.10 iso10816 the rms value from the raw signal of the oscillation velocity in a frequency range from 10 hz to 1 khz according to iso 10816. This broad characteristic value is often used in the assessment of the machine c...

  • Page 2105: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2105 rmsvelenvelope the rms value formed from the envelope signal of the oscillation acceleration from the configured minimum fre- quency ("minfrequencyenvelope01") to the maximum frequency ("maxfrequencyenvelope01") of t...

  • Page 2106

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2106 x20 system user's manual 3.10 k(t) value the k(t) is described in the vdi 3832 guideline and is calculated from the rms value and the peak value of a broadband time signal of the oscillation acceleration. This ratio correlates to the reference va...

  • Page 2107: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2107 kurtosis kurtosis is an effective characteristic value for assessing the number of peaks in a signal. Kurtosis (peakedness, fourth statistical moment) is defined as the ratio of two statistical characteristic values/...

  • Page 2108

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2108 x20 system user's manual 3.10 speed-dependent rms am pl itu de frequency 1) 2) frequency band frequency bandwidth is formed of the lower and upper frequency band limits. 1) lower frequency band limit: "frequencybandxxlowerfrequency" 2) upper freq...

  • Page 2109

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2109 two neighboring lines (samples) in the spectrum that are already outside the set window (one above and one below the window) will be partially included in the calculation depending on their distance from the window. ...

  • Page 2110

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2110 x20 system user's manual 3.10 the following signals can be selected for each channel: • raw acceleration signal • raw velocity signal. Equal to 0 if the speed calculation is disabled. • enveloped acceleration signal • enveloped velocity signal. E...

  • Page 2111

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2111 frequencybandnoisevelraw the noise value formed from the envelope signal of the oscillation acceleration in a freely selectable frequency range. This frequency band is only calculated if the enablevelocitycalculation...

  • Page 2112

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2112 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.2.4.3.2 potential failures the direct effect on the oscillation behavior is dependent on the type and extent of damage. For this reason, it must be assessed individually. Application possibilities electric motor...

  • Page 2113

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2113 imbalance the term imbalance refers to rotating bodies with a mass that is not rotationally symmetrical. In other words, the center is not on the axis of rotation m u r u s e m s + m u ro tat ion of ax is ω figure 68...

  • Page 2114

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2114 x20 system user's manual 3.10 abrasive media dust foreign bodies overloading peakhighfrequency crestfactorhighfrequency vdi3832kthighfrequency peakraw crestfactorraw skewnessraw kurtosisraw vdi3832ktraw rmshighfrequency rmsaccraw rmsvelraw iso108...

  • Page 2115

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2115 misalignment during operation, a number of different factors can cause machine parts to fail to align or stop aligning with each other. Shafts should rotate around a linear axis at the coupling positions, so that the...

  • Page 2116

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2116 x20 system user's manual 3.10 belt damage belts often cause various problems during operation. A belt can be damaged if the tension is too low or too high or if the belt is incorrectly aligned. If the damaged belt part rolls over the pulley, this...

  • Page 2117

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2117 flat belts and v-belts with flat belts and v-belts, torque is transferred between the belt and the pulley through the contact surface. Belt drives are not particularly sensitive to alignment. If the deviation is too ...

  • Page 2118

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2118 x20 system user's manual 3.10 toothed belt with toothed belts, torque is transferred via the meshing of the teeth. In addition to the already known failure causes, there are also the failures caused by the toothing. Tension of the belt too low te...

  • Page 2119

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2119 loose parts, parts striking each other if individual parts in the machine are loose, they can cause unwanted oscillations. When individual parts strike housings or attachment parts, these appear very similar. As a re...

  • Page 2120

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2120 x20 system user's manual 3.10 slide bearing damage in a structure-borne sound measurement, the typical damage frequencies for a slide bearing do not manifest themselves until a very late stage. For this reason, this method is less suitable for ea...

  • Page 2121

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2121 installation errors installation errors warping damage during installation bearing rings tilting towards each other improper exposure to heat during installation foreign bodies (chippings, dirt) improper positioning,...

  • Page 2122

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2122 x20 system user's manual 3.10 peakhighfrequency crestfactorhighfrequency vdi3832kthighfrequency peakraw crestfactorraw skewnessraw kurtosisraw vdi3832ktraw rmshighfrequency rmsaccraw rmsvelraw iso10816 rmsaccenvelope rmsvelenvelope frequencybandr...

  • Page 2123

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2123 typical outer and inner ring damage outer ring damage in most cases the outer ring remains stationary while the inner ring turns. This gives a clearly defined fixed load zone. Most damage occurs in this load zone. If...

  • Page 2124

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2124 x20 system user's manual 3.10 formula for calculating the roller element damage frequency damage impacting the individual pitch line: 2 few = 1 · d d n d cos β c 1 - 60 d 2 · · · · figure 693: calculating the damage frequency on one roller elemen...

  • Page 2125

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2125 installation errors installation errors warping damage during installation bearing rings tilting towards each other improper exposure to heat during installation foreign bodies (chippings, dirt) improper positioning,...

  • Page 2126

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2126 x20 system user's manual 3.10 peakhighfrequency crestfactorhighfrequency vdi3832kthighfrequency peakraw crestfactorraw skewnessraw kurtosisraw vdi3832ktraw rmshighfrequency rmsaccraw rmsvelraw iso10816 rmsaccenvelope rmsvelenvelope frequencybandr...

  • Page 2127

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2127 installation errors installation errors warping damage during installation bearing rings tilting towards each other improper exposure to heat during installation foreign bodies (chippings, dirt) improper positioning,...

  • Page 2128

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2128 x20 system user's manual 3.10 peakhighfrequency crestfactorhighfrequency vdi3832kthighfrequency peakraw crestfactorraw skewnessraw kurtosisraw vdi3832ktraw rmshighfrequency rmsaccraw rmsvelraw iso10816 rmsaccenvelope rmsvelenvelope frequencybandr...

  • Page 2129

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2129 gear damage din 3979 provides a description of gear errors and defects. The most common errors in individual gearboxes are described below. The complexity of the machine dynamics must be taken into consideration in i...

  • Page 2130

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2130 x20 system user's manual 3.10 cyclic running errors and axial distance errors in din 3960, axial distance errors are defined as a deviation between the target/actual value. An error in the distance between the axes causes a change in the contact ...

  • Page 2131

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2131 electrical errors occasionally, bridges in the rotor bars or short circuit rings occur. They occur as a result of overloading as well as aging and the ongoing oscillation load. This leads to a very uneven distributio...

  • Page 2132

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2132 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.2.4.3.3 typical applications of damage recognition the examples listed in the following are typical application cases and should provide assistance during integration. Detailed planning of usage must still be ca...

  • Page 2133

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2133 fan with rigid coupling electric motor fan structure foundation roller bearing for electric motor cover plate for electric motor fan blade for electric motor cover plate for fan mounting for electric motor structure ...

  • Page 2134

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2134 x20 system user's manual 3.10 frequent problems electric motor fan peakhighfrequency crestfactorhighfrequency vdi3832kthighfrequency peakraw crestfactorraw skewnessraw kurtosisraw vdi3832ktraw rmshighfrequency rmsaccraw rmsvelraw iso10816 rmsacce...

  • Page 2135

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2135 fan with countershaft cover plate for electric motor fan blade for electric motor roller bearing for electric motor foundation roller bearing for countershaft fan structure mounting for electric motor structure cover...

  • Page 2136

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2136 x20 system user's manual 3.10 frequent problems electric motor fan coupling peakhighfrequency crestfactorhighfrequency vdi3832kthighfrequency peakraw crestfactorraw skewnessraw kurtosisraw vdi3832ktraw rmshighfrequency rmsaccraw rmsvelraw iso1081...

  • Page 2137

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2137 fan with belt drive intermediate bearing countershaft fan motor fan cover belt cover pulley electric motor mounting figure 708: structure of a fan with belt drive condition monitoring solutions: assembly a figure 709...

  • Page 2138

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2138 x20 system user's manual 3.10 assembly b figure 710: system diagram - structure of a fan with belt drive - alternative bearing sensor usage: number of sensors usually 4 sensors. One sensor is sufficient for smaller drive units. Sensor installatio...

  • Page 2139

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2139 frequent problems electric motor fan flat belts and v-belts toothed belt peakhighfrequency crestfactorhighfrequency vdi3832kthighfrequency peakraw crestfactorraw skewnessraw kurtosisraw vdi3832ktraw rmshighfrequency ...

  • Page 2140

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2140 x20 system user's manual 3.10 directly coupled pump cover plate electric motor mounting coupling + coupling cover screw pump fixed mounting figure 712: structure of a pump drive condition monitoring solution: figure 713: system diagram - structur...

  • Page 2141

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2141 frequent problems electric motor coupling pump peakhighfrequency crestfactorhighfrequency vdi3832kthighfrequency peakraw crestfactorraw skewnessraw kurtosisraw vdi3832ktraw rmshighfrequency rmsaccraw rmsvelraw iso108...

  • Page 2142

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2142 x20 system user's manual 3.10 gearbox gearbox structure foundation roller bearing for electric motor cover for electric motor figure 715: structure of a gearbox condition monitoring solution: figure 716: system diagram - structure of a gearbox se...

  • Page 2143

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2143 frequent problems application possibilities gearboxes peakhighfrequency crestfactorhighfrequency vdi3832kthighfrequency peakraw crestfactorraw skewnessraw kurtosisraw vdi3832ktraw rmshighfrequency rmsaccraw rmsvelraw...

  • Page 2144

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2144 x20 system user's manual 3.10 gearbox with countershaft gearbox countershaft electric motor figure 718: structure of a gearbox with countershaft condition monitoring solution: figure 719: system diagram - gearbox with countershaft sensor usage: n...

  • Page 2145

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2145 frequent problems electric motor coupling pump gearbox peakhighfrequency crestfactorhighfrequency vdi3832kthighfrequency peakraw crestfactorraw skewnessraw kurtosisraw vdi3832ktraw rmshighfrequency rmsaccraw rmsvelra...

  • Page 2146

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2146 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.2.4.4 further reading due to its extensive nature, the subject of oscillation analysis can only be outlined in this user's manual. The following book is well suited to beginners and recommended for those wishing...

  • Page 2147

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2147 4.26.2.5 register description 4.26.2.5.1 function models a function model specifies the storage model used, i.E. Which registers are available for the application. Only these registers are processed in the module dur...

  • Page 2148

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2148 x20 system user's manual 3.10 ° vdi3832ktraw01-04: requires peakrawref and rmsrawref as reference values and outputs the reference values used in the calculation to peakrawrefcalculated and rmsrawrefcalulated. ° crestfactorhighfrequency01-04: rat...

  • Page 2149

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2149 read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic index * 8 + 2820 rmsvelenvelopemin0n (index n = 1 bis 4) udint ● index * 8 + 3396 rmsvelrawmax0n (index n = 1 bis 4) udint ● index * 8 + 2756 rmsvelraw...

  • Page 2150

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2150 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.2.5.3 function model 1 - fast master the characteristic values calculated by the module are streamed to the master every 300 ms via flatstream. If the streamed data is not collected by the next transfer, the mea...

  • Page 2151

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2151 read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic index * 8 + 3716 frequencybandmaxnn (index nn = 01 bis 32) udint ● index * 8 + 3076 frequencybandminnn (index nn = 01 bis 32) udint ● index * 24 + 506 ...

  • Page 2152

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2152 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.2.5.4 function model 2 - slow master this function model was developed specifically for operating the x20cm4810 with "slow masters" and for conserv- ing resources on the plc. With this function model, it is not ...

  • Page 2153

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2153 read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic index * 8 + 3460 rmsvelenvelopemax0n (index n = 1 bis 4) udint ● index * 8 + 2820 rmsvelenvelopemin0n (index n = 1 bis 4) udint ● index * 8 + 3396 rmsv...

  • Page 2154

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2154 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.2.5.5 function model 254 - bus controller this function model can only be used with a canio bus controller. It includes the same functionality as function model 2 - slow master. Differences: • the order of cycli...

  • Page 2155

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2155 read write register offset 1) name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic 550 highfrequencyconfig01read uint ● 1306 maxfrequencyenvelope01 uint ● 558 maxfrequencyenvelope01read uint ● 526 maxfrequencyraw01 uint ● 55...

  • Page 2156

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2156 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.2.5.6 module registers - general information 4.26.2.5.6.1 analoginput function general information each of the four acceleration sensor inputs on the x20cm4810 can also be used directly as an analog input with v...

  • Page 2157: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2157 continuous mode with enable (continuous mode) this mode offers the following advantages: • when the parameters are configured correctly, nothing can be overlooked. • using "enable", measurement in the module can be s...

  • Page 2158

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2158 x20 system user's manual 3.10 analoginputconfig01 register for configuring the characteristic value calculation in "analoginput01-04". This is only needed if "sample- sanaloginput" of the respective channel is greater than 0. Bit description 15 s...

  • Page 2159: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2159 analoginputsamples name: analoginputsamples01 to analoginputsamples04 if bit 15 of the corresponding samplesanaloginput register is 1, then this register is used cyclically to set the number of samples for parameter ...

  • Page 2160

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2160 x20 system user's manual 3.10 samplesanaloginput name: samplesanaloginput01 to samplesanaloginput04 if the corresponding samplesanaloginput register is equal to 0, then the "analoginput01-04" data points will provide the current input value for t...

  • Page 2161

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2161 4.26.2.5.6.2 frequency bands general information the x20cm4810 has 32 frequency bands that can be configured as needed. It is important to note that the format varies depending on the configuration (see section 4.26....

  • Page 2162

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2162 x20 system user's manual 3.10 guidelines for configuring the frequency bands • the total range of the frequency band is at least 2 * 0.005 * max. Drive frequency [hz]. • the upper and lower frequency limits must not be less than 0.005 * max. Driv...

  • Page 2163

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2163 noise in this configuration, the noise from a quadrant of the respective signal on the selected channel that is within the frequency band is calculated. To do this, the configured maximum frequency of the signal on t...

  • Page 2164: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2164 x20 system user's manual 3.10 frequencybandconfig name: frequencyband01config to frequencyband32config general configuration of individual frequency bands. Each frequency band can be calculated on any channel with any of the four speed data point...

  • Page 2165

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2165 frequencybandconfigread name: frequencyband01configread to frequencyband32configread registers for reading the configuration of individual frequency bands. Data type value uint 0 to 65,535 frequencybanddmgfreq60rpm n...

  • Page 2166

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2166 x20 system user's manual 3.10 frequencybandlowerfrequencyread name: frequencyband01lowerfrequencyread to frequencyband32lowerfrequencyread registers for reading the minimum frequency of individual frequency bands. The minimum frequency is specifi...

  • Page 2167: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2167 requestbufferlock01 or requestdatalock01: function model 0 - standard and function model 1 - fast master: requestbufferlock01 can be used to lock all buffers and parameters on the x20cm4810 module. When the bit is se...

  • Page 2168

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2168 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.2.5.6.9 highfrequencyconfig01read register for reading the high-pass configuration for the envelope and high-frequency characteristic value ("peakhighfrequency" and "rmshighfrequency") of the module. 4.26.2.5.6....

  • Page 2169

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2169 4.26.2.5.6.12 maxfrequencyraw01 this register defines the maximum channel frequency. Reducing the maximum frequency allows the frequency resolution in the spectrum to be increased. Bit description 15-12 maximum frequ...

  • Page 2170: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2170 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.2.5.6.14 minfrequencyenvelope01 this register is used to configure the lowest frequency of the envelope signal still awaiting evaluation for the indi- vidual channels. This configuration only needs to be set for...

  • Page 2171: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2171 4.26.2.5.6.16 minfrequencyraw01 this register is used to configure the lowest frequency of the raw signal still awaiting evaluation for the individual channels. This configuration only needs to be set for channels wh...

  • Page 2172: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2172 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.2.5.6.18 overflowanaloginput01-04 indicates whether a signal is pending on the input that is greater than the configured "analoginputscale01". Information: this is always based on a 100 mv/g sensor. This registe...

  • Page 2173

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2173 4.26.2.5.6.25 rmshighfrequencyref01-04 reference (correct state) of the high frequency signal's root mean square used to calculate the vdi3832 k(t) of the high frequency signal. This register is only available in fun...

  • Page 2174

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2174 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.2.5.6.32 status01 general status register for the x20cm4810: bit description 15-13 reserved 12 analoginputtogglebit04 toggles with each new calculation and each new input value from analoginput04. 11 analoginput...

  • Page 2175

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2175 4.26.2.5.7 module registers - characteristic values (acyclic) the following applies to all characteristic value module registers: • these registers are only available in function model 2 - slow master and function mo...

  • Page 2176

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2176 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.2.5.7.5 peakhighfrequency01-04 asynchronous register for reading the characteristic value "peakhighfrequency" of the respective channel. Format resolution and unit value on overflow 24-bit unsigned 1/65536 g 167...

  • Page 2177

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2177 4.26.2.5.7.11 rmsvelenvelope01-04 asynchronous register for reading the characteristic value "rmsvelenvelope" of the respective channel. This value is only calculated if the enablevelocitycalculation bit (configured ...

  • Page 2178: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2178 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.2.5.8 module registers - minimum and maximum values the characteristic values of the x20cm4810 are recalculated every 300 ms. To prevent values from being lost, it is necessary to collect this data quickly enoug...

  • Page 2179

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2179 4.26.2.5.8.4 frequencybandmin01-32 asynchronous minimum value of the respective frequency band in thousandths of a mm/s or g depending on the configuration. See also section 4.26.2.5.8 "module registers - minimum and...

  • Page 2180

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2180 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.2.5.8.14 rmsaccenvelopemax01-04 asynchronous maximum value of the "rmsaccenvelope" characteristic value of the respective channel in thou- sandths of a g. See also 4.26.2.5.8 "module registers - minimum and maxi...

  • Page 2181

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2181 4.26.2.5.8.24 rmsvelrawmin01-04 asynchronous minimum value of the "rmsvelraw" characteristic value of the respective channel in thousandths of a mm/s. See also section 4.26.2.5.8 "module registers - minimum and maxim...

  • Page 2182

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2182 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.2.6 flatstream 4.26.2.6.1 flatstream communication 4.26.2.6.1.1 introduction b&r offers an additional communication method for some modules. "flatstream" was designed for x2x and pow- erlink networks and allows ...

  • Page 2183: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2183 4.26.2.6.1.3 the flatstream principle requirements before flatstream can be used, the respective communication direction must be synchronized, i.E. Both commu- nication partners cyclically query the sequence counter ...

  • Page 2184

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2184 x20 system user's manual 3.10 flatstream configuration to use flatstream, the program sequence must first be expanded. The cycle time of the flatstream routines must be set to a multiple of the bus cycle. Other program routines should be implemen...

  • Page 2185

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2185 flatstream operation when using flatstream, the communication direction is enormously important. For sending data to a module ("out- put" direction), the tx bytes are used. For receiving data from a module ("input" d...

  • Page 2186

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2186 x20 system user's manual 3.10 synchronization during synchronization, a communication channel is opened. It is important to make sure that a module is present and that the current value of the sequencecounter is stored on the station receiving th...

  • Page 2187

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2187 transmitting and receiving if a channel is synchronized, then the opposite station is ready to receive messages from the transmitter. Before the transmitter can send data, it needs to first create a transmit array in...

  • Page 2188: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2188 x20 system user's manual 3.10 first, the messages must be split into segments. In the default configuration, it is important to ensure that each sequence can hold an entire segment, including the associated control byte. The sequence is limited t...

  • Page 2189

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2189 algorithm cyclic status query: - the module monitors the outputsequencecounter. 0) cyclic checks: - the cpu must check outputsyncack. → if outputsyncack = 0: reset the outputsyncbit and resynchronize the channel. - t...

  • Page 2190

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2190 x20 system user's manual 3.10 message larger than the outputmtu the transmit array, which needs to be created in the program sequence, consists of several elements. The user has to arrange the control and data bytes correctly and transfer the arr...

  • Page 2191

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2191 receiving data from a module (input) when receiving data, the transmit array is generated by the module, transferred via flatstream and must then be reproduced in the receive array. The structure of the incoming data...

  • Page 2192

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2192 x20 system user's manual 3.10 general flow chart se gm en t d at a ha nd lin g sy nc hr on is at io n no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no no no yes yes no yes no inputsyncack = 1 ? Inputsequenceack > 0 ? Inputsyncack = 1 (inputsequencecounter ...

  • Page 2193: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2193 details it is recommended to store transmitted messages in separate receive arrays. After a set messageendbit is transmitted, the subsequent segment should be added to the receive array. The message is then complete ...

  • Page 2194: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2194 x20 system user's manual 3.10 flatstream mode register in the input direction, the transmit array is generated automatically. This register offers two options to the user that allow an incoming data stream to have a more compact arrangement. Once...

  • Page 2195

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2195 4.26.2.6.1.5 example of forward functionality on x2x link forward functionality is a method that can be used to substantially increase the flatstream data rate. The basic principle is also used in other technical are...

  • Page 2196

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2196 x20 system user's manual 3.10 configuration (defined by module) the forward function only has to be enabled for the input direction. Two additional configuration registers are available for doing so. Flatstream modules have been optimized in such...

  • Page 2197

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2197 transmitting and receiving with forward the basic algorithm for transmitting and receiving data remains the same. With the forward function, up to seven unacknowledged sequences can be transmitted. Sequences can be t...

  • Page 2198: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2198 x20 system user's manual 3.10 details/background: 1. Illegal sequencecounter size (counter offset) error situation: mtu not enabled if the difference between sequencecounter and sequenceack is larger than allowed during transmission, then a trans...

  • Page 2199

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2199 errors when using forward in industrial environments, it is often the case that many different devices from various manufacturers are being used side by side. The electrical and/or electromagnetic properties of these...

  • Page 2200

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2200 x20 system user's manual 3.10 the forward function on the x20cm4810 the forwarddelay for bufferflatstream can be asynchronously configured in function model 0 - standard and function model 1 - fast master in the i/o configuration of the x20cm4810...

  • Page 2201

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2201 4.26.2.6.2 transferring characteristic values via flatstream 4.26.2.6.2.1 general information for information about flatstream functionality, see section 4.26.2.6.1 "flatstream communication" on page 2182. Transferri...

  • Page 2202

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2202 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.2.6.3 uploading buffers via flatstream 4.26.2.6.3.1 general information for information about flatstream functionality, see section 4.26.2.6.1 "flatstream communication" on page 2182. Uploading buffers via flats...

  • Page 2203

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2203 4.26.2.6.3.3 buffer upload procedure before a buffer can be uploaded from the x20cm4810 module, it must first be locked on the module. This can be done by setting requestbufferlock01 = 1. The upload can only begin on...

  • Page 2204

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2204 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.2.7 x20cm4810 on the fieldbus 4.26.2.7.1 bus coupler with fieldbusdesigner support only function model 1 - fast master and function model 2 - slow master are available for this. The x20cm4810 module is configure...

  • Page 2205

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2205 product id 0acs100a.00-1 spectral noise 10 hz to 10 µg/hz 100 hz to 4 µg/hz 1 khz to 3 µg/hz current range 0.5 ma to 8 ma bias voltage 10 to 12 vdc settling time 2 seconds output impedance max. 200 Ω housing isolatio...

  • Page 2206

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2206 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.2.8.1.2 0acs100a.90-1 order data model number short description figure sensors 0acs100a.90-1 acceleration sensor, nominal sensitivity 100 mv/g, side exit table 771: 0acs100a.90-1 - order data technical data prod...

  • Page 2207

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2207 dimensions 25 mm 30 mm 23.5 mm 35 mm m12 m12 8.5 mm m8* *m8x30 mm screw is included in delivery. Figure 734: dimensions - 0acs100a.90-1 4.26.2.8.1.3 general information pinout pin description 1 not assigned 2 18 to 3...

  • Page 2208

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 2208 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.2.8.2 sensor cables 4.26.2.8.2.1 order data model number length short description 0acc0020.01-1 2 m 0acc0050.01-1 5 m 0acc0100.01-1 10 m 0acc0150.01-1 15 m 0acc0200.01-1 20 m cable for acceleration sensor, 2x 0....

  • Page 2209

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm4810 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2209 4.26.2.8.2.4 cable diagram 1 2 4 3 brown blue shield.

  • Page 2210

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm8281 2210 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.3 x20cm8281 4.26.3.1 general information the x20cm8281 module is a universal mixed module. On this module, digital i/o and analog i/o are combined. A current or voltage signal can be used for the analog i/o as d...

  • Page 2211

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm8281 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2211 product id x20cm8281 additional functions 20 khz event counting, gate measurement input resistance typ. 7.18 kΩ switching threshold low high >15 vdc isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 v eff event counter q...

  • Page 2212

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm8281 2212 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20cm8281 isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 v eff digital outputs design fet positive switching quantity 2 nominal voltage 24 vdc switching voltage 24 vdc -15% / +20% nominal output current 0.5...

  • Page 2213

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm8281 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2213 product id x20cm8281 relative humidity operation 5 to 95%, non-condensing storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing mechanical characteristics note order 1x x20tb12 terminal block separately...

  • Page 2214

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm8281 2214 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.3.6 connection example gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc gnd gnd cm +24 vdc +24 vdc + sensor 3 sensor 1 sensor 4 sensor 2 actuator 1 actuator 2 lo ad figure 737: connection example 4.26.3.7 input circuit diagram digital i...

  • Page 2215

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm8281 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2215 4.26.3.8 output circuit diagram digital outputs logic high-side 24 v vdr output x output monitoring output status i/o status led (orange) figure 740: output circuit diagram - digital outputs analog outputs ao +i ao +...

  • Page 2216

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm8281 2216 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.3.10 register description 4.26.3.10.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic digital inputs digital inputs usint digitalinput01 bit 0 ... ... 0 digital...

  • Page 2217

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm8281 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2217 4.26.3.10.2 function model 254 - bus controller read write register offset 1) name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic digital inputs digital inputs usint digitalinput01 bit 0 ... ... 0 0 digitalinput04 bit...

  • Page 2218

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm8281 2218 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.3.10.3 digital inputs unfiltered the input state is collected with a fixed offset to the network cycle and transferred in the same cycle. Filtered the filtered status is collected with a fixed offset to the netw...

  • Page 2219: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm8281 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2219 counter configuration name: configoutput02 this register can be used to configure and reset the individual counters. Data type value usint see bit structure. Bit structure: bit name value information 0 48 mhz 1 3 mhz...

  • Page 2220

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm8281 2220 x20 system user's manual 3.10 acknowledge digital inputs name: digitalinput01latchquitt to digitalinput04latchquitt this register is used to reset the input latches channel by channel. Data type value usint see bit structure. Bit structure: bit n...

  • Page 2221

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm8281 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2221 4.26.3.10.5.1 analog input register name: analoginput01 this register is used to indicate the analog input value depending on the configured operating mode. Data type value input signal: -32768 to 32767 voltage signa...

  • Page 2222

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm8281 2222 x20 system user's manual 3.10 example 2 a disturbance interferes with the input value. The diagram shows the adjusted input value with the following settings: input ramp limitation = 4 = 0x07ff = 2047 filter level = 2 0 8000 16000 t [ms] 1 2 3 4 ...

  • Page 2223

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm8281 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2223 the following examples show how filtering works in the event of an input jump or disturbance. Example 1 the input value jumps from 8,000 to 16,000. The diagram shows the calculated value with the following settings: ...

  • Page 2224: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm8281 2224 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.3.10.5.3 configuring the input filter name: configoutput03 this register is used to define the filter level and input ramp limitation of the input filter. Data type value usint see bit structure. Bit structure: ...

  • Page 2225

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm8281 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2225 4.26.3.10.5.6 status of the analog input name: statusinput01 this register is used to monitor the analog input on the module. A change in the monitoring status generates an error message. Data type value usint see bi...

  • Page 2226

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm8281 2226 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.3.10.8 minimum cycle time the minimum cycle time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced without communication errors occurring. It should be noted that very fast cycles decrease the idle time available for...

  • Page 2227

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm8323 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2227 4.26.4 x20cm8323 4.26.4.1 general information the module has digital outputs for switching electromechanical loads (e.G. Valves, relays) and additional functions. • 8 digital outputs • current trace • switching time ...

  • Page 2228: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm8323 2228 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20cm8323 reverse polarity protection no (must be protected externally) output voltage minimum 18 vdc nominal 24 vdc maximum 42 vdc operating conditions mounting orientation horizontal yes vertical yes ins...

  • Page 2229

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm8323 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2229 4.26.4.5 pinout do 1 do 3 do 2 do 4 do 5 do 7 do 6 do 8 com gnd gnd gnd x2 0 c m 8 32 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 r e figure 747: pinout 4.26.4.6 connection example gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc cm 18 - 42 vdc ≤36 v 1) _ + figure 74...

  • Page 2230: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm8323 2230 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.4.8 switching inductive loads 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35 0.4 0.45 0.5 0.55 0.6 1 10 100 switching cycles per second c oi l c ur re nt [a ] 50 mh 100 mh 150 mh 200 mh 250 mh figure 750: switching inductive loads ...

  • Page 2231

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm8323 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2231 4.26.4.9 register description 4.26.4.9.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic configuration 12 configoutput02 usint ● 13 configoutput03 usint ● 14 configo...

  • Page 2232

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm8323 2232 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.4.9.4 configuration registers 4.26.4.9.4.1 excitation time name: configoutput02 the excitation time is configured in this register. The output is switched fully on for the time set in this register after the mod...

  • Page 2233

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm8323 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2233 4.26.4.9.4.5 disables the high-speed cutoff name: configoutput21 this register can be used to enable or disable the high-speed cutoff for individual channels. Data type value usint see bit structure. Bit structure: b...

  • Page 2234

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm8323 2234 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.4.9.5 communication registers 4.26.4.9.5.1 uploading the current curves (function models 0 and 1) a current curve with 200 values is recorded for each channel. The interval between measurement points is equal to...

  • Page 2235

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm8323 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2235 programming example in ansi c for uploading the curves: #include #define ilen 200 typedef struct { usint data[ilen]; } curve_typ; typedef struct { bool ok; udint serial; uint id, hw, fwver; bool out[8]; uint delay; u...

  • Page 2236

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm8323 2236 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.4.9.5.2 uploading the current curves with can i/o a current curve with 200 values is recorded for each channel. The interval between measurement points is equal to the value set in the 4.26.4.9.4.6 "timebase" re...

  • Page 2237

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm8323 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2237 reading the line index name: lineid_act reads the lineid_set register. This register allows you to determine which line is providing the current values in registers analoginput01 to analoginput04. If the selected cha...

  • Page 2238

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm8323 2238 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.4.9.5.4 status of the outputs name: statusinput01 this register indicates whether a switching point has been found for a channel. Data type value usint see bit structure. Bit structure: bit description value inf...

  • Page 2239

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm8323 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2239 4.26.4.9.5.7 reads actual values of the current name: current01 to current08 these registers are used to read the actual value of the current from channels 1 to 8. These values have no units and are used only as char...

  • Page 2240

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm8323 2240 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.4.9.6 configuring di and dt 4.26.4.9.6.1 procedure - searching for switching points dt di figure 751: searching for switching points the current in the inductance gradually rises when the valve is switched on. T...

  • Page 2241

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm8323 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2241 4.26.4.9.6.3 modified switching point search (curvature method) the method described (searching for and detecting switching points by locating low-points in the current trace) may not provide the desired level of rel...

  • Page 2242

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm8323 2242 x20 system user's manual 3.10 example 1: configuration example of the modified switching point detection for a valve with a distinctive switching point. 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 figure 753: example 1 - v...

  • Page 2243

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20cm8323 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2243 example 2: configuration example of the modified switching point detection for a valve with a faintly distinctive switching point. 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 figure 756: example 2 - va...

  • Page 2244

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a 2244 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.5 x20ds438a 4.26.5.1 general information the module is an io-link master that can be used to connect intelligent sensors and actuators to the x20 system in accordance with the io-link standard. The module can op...

  • Page 2245

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a x20 system user's manual 3.10 2245 4.26.5.3 technical data product id x20ds438a short description i/o module io-link master with 4 io-link interfaces general information b&r id code 0xcac0 status indicators io-link, operating state, module status diag...

  • Page 2246

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a 2246 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20ds438a input current at 24 vdc typ. 3.5 ma input resistance typ. 7 kΩ isolation voltage between io-link and bus 500 v eff switching threshold low high >13 vdc operating conditions mounting orientation h...

  • Page 2247

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a x20 system user's manual 3.10 2247 4.26.5.4 led status indicators for a description of the various operating modes, see the 2.11.1 "re leds" section. Figure led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode blinking preoperat...

  • Page 2248

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a 2248 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.5.6 connection example gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc ds io -l in k de vi ce ac tu at or se ns or se ns or io-link device 4.26.5.7 input/output circuit diagram gate driver control gnd txen c/q txd c/q status led (orang...

  • Page 2249

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a x20 system user's manual 3.10 2249 4.26.5.9 register description 4.26.5.9.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic general module properties 513 cfo_supplyconfig usint ● index*1024 + 3073 cfo_opera...

  • Page 2250

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a 2250 x20 system user's manual 3.10 read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic index*8 + 6524 outputdata03_n (index n = 1 to 8) (u)dint real index*8 + 7545 outputdata04_n (index n = 1 to 8) (u)sint index*8 + 7546 outputdata04_n (i...

  • Page 2251

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a x20 system user's manual 3.10 2251 4.26.5.9.2 function model 254 - bus controller read write register offset 1) name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic general module properties 513 - cfo_supplyconfig usint ● index*1024 + 3073 - cfo_operatingmode...

  • Page 2252

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a 2252 x20 system user's manual 3.10 read write register offset 1) name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic index*1024 + 3233 - pdi_size0n (index n = 1 to 4) usint ● index*1024 + 3235 - pdo_size0n (index n = 1 to 4) usint ● index*1024 + 3237 - baudr...

  • Page 2253

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a x20 system user's manual 3.10 2253 4.26.5.9.3 general module properties the module has the option of supplying power to io-link devices. To prevent damage to hardware, each channel is monitored individually and equipped with its own overload pro- tect...

  • Page 2254: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a 2254 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.5.9.4 io-link - configuration in order to establish communication between the module and io-link device, the channelmode register must be configured at least. Additional registers allow the data stream to be adj...

  • Page 2255: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a x20 system user's manual 3.10 2255 4.26.5.9.4.3 identificationdeviceid name: cfo_identificationdeviceid01 to cfo_identificationdeviceid04 if the device id should be verified during startup, then the expected id of the io-link device must be specified ...

  • Page 2256: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a 2256 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.5.9.4.5 pdo_typeinfo name: cfo_pdo_typeinfo01 to cfo_pdo_typeinfo04 to transfer process data to an io-link device, this register can be used to configure which data types of the individual outputdata registers a...

  • Page 2257

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a x20 system user's manual 3.10 2257 4.26.5.9.4.6 timing of io-link communication at runtime, the module needs to manage data sets from 2 different communication standards. For efficient x2x link communication, it is important to make sure that the cycl...

  • Page 2258: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a 2258 x20 system user's manual 3.10 synchronous operation unlike to free-running operation, synchronous mode and the synchronization cycle time in this operating mode can be configured individually for each channel. The synchronized operating mode opti...

  • Page 2259

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a x20 system user's manual 3.10 2259 example of a configuration x2x cycle 1 ms timer cycle 1 ms timer offset (400 μs) synchronization cycle 2 ms cyclerequesetendnettime02 cyclestartnettime02 cycleendnettime02 synchronization cycle 3 ms 100 μs cycle offs...

  • Page 2260: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a 2260 x20 system user's manual 3.10 timeroffset name: cfo_timeroffset this register can be used to configure synchronous io-link communication. If the module timer should run with a timing offset to x2x link, this register can be used to define how man...

  • Page 2261: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a x20 system user's manual 3.10 2261 reqcycletime name: cfo_reqcycletime01 to cfo_reqcycletime04 this register is used with free-running (asynchronous) io-link communication. It contains the explicitly defined cycle time for the io-link query in µs. Inf...

  • Page 2262

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a 2262 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.5.9.5.3 sync (status byte) name: synchronized01 to synchronized04 cycleend01 to cycleend04 the module uses this status register to report whether error-free communication with the device was possible during the ...

  • Page 2263

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a x20 system user's manual 3.10 2263 4.26.5.9.5.5 channelstatus name: channelstatus01 to channelstatus04 this register is used to show the current status of the io-link channel. Data type value information status 0 channel inactive disabled 1 use as dig...

  • Page 2264

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a 2264 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.5.9.5.7 cyclestartnettime name: cyclestartnettime01 to cyclestartnettime04 this register can be used to read out the value of the net time at the start of the last io-link cycle. Data type value int -32,768 to 3...

  • Page 2265

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a x20 system user's manual 3.10 2265 4.26.5.9.6.1 dscontrol name: dscontrol01 to dscontrol04 this register can be used to control the parameter server manually. Each action is carried out exactly once when the corresponding value is set. If the same act...

  • Page 2266: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a 2266 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.5.9.6.4 cfo_ds_savectrl name: cfo_ds_savectrl01 to cfo_ds_savectrl04 this register is used together with 4.26.5.9.6.5 "cfo_ds_savedata". Some io-link devices must be instructed to save transferred data storage p...

  • Page 2267: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a x20 system user's manual 3.10 2267 4.26.5.9.7.2 iolinktimestampinstatusseq name: iolinktimestampinstatusseq01 to iolinktimestampinstatusseq04 this register indicates information about the timestamp input. Data type value usint see bit structure. Bit s...

  • Page 2268: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a 2268 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.5.9.7.5 iolinktimestampoutstatus name: iolinktimestampoutstatus01 to iolinktimestampoutstatus04 this register is used to show the status of the timestamp output. Data type value usint see bit structure. Bit stru...

  • Page 2269

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a x20 system user's manual 3.10 2269 4.26.5.9.8.1 outputdata name: outputdata01_1 to outputdata04_8 output data from the io-link device in io-link communication mode. A byte array is also a possible alternative. The user then has to make sure that the b...

  • Page 2270

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a 2270 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.5.9.9.4 cycletime name: cycletime01 to cycletime04 some io-link devices cannot handle high-speed cycles and require a higher cycle time. This register can be used to read back the channel's io-link cycle time cu...

  • Page 2271

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a x20 system user's manual 3.10 2271 4.26.5.9.9.11 iolinkversionid name: iolinkversionid01 to iolinkversionid04 this register can be used to read back the io-link version. Data type value information 16 (= 0x10) v1.0 usint 17 (= 0x11) v1.1 4.26.5.9.10 e...

  • Page 2272: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a 2272 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.5.9.10.3 eventcode name: eventcode the event code of the event being transferred is indicated in this register. The event codes may be vendor-specific event codes or event codes defined in the io-link specificat...

  • Page 2273

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a x20 system user's manual 3.10 2273 4.26.5.9.11.1 parameterindexout name: parameterindexout this register defines the index of the object in the object dictionary that should be accessed. Data type value uint 0 to 65,535 4.26.5.9.11.2 parametersubindex...

  • Page 2274

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a 2274 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.5.9.11.6 parameterdatain name: parameterdatain_0 after a successful read operation, this register contains the input data. In the event of an error, it contains the error codes. Data type value udint 0 to 4,294,...

  • Page 2275

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a x20 system user's manual 3.10 2275 4.26.5.9.12 flatstream communication 4.26.5.9.12.1 introduction b&r offers an additional communication method for some modules. "flatstream" was designed for x2x and powerlink networks and allows data transmission to...

  • Page 2276

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a 2276 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.5.9.12.2 message, segment, sequence, mtu the physical properties of the bus system limit the amount of data that can be transmitted during one bus cycle. With flatstream communication, all messages are viewed as...

  • Page 2277

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a x20 system user's manual 3.10 2277 4.26.5.9.12.3 the flatstream principle requirements before flatstream can be used, the respective communication direction must be synchronized, i.E. Both commu- nication partners cyclically query the sequence counter...

  • Page 2278: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a 2278 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.5.9.12.4 registers for flatstream mode five registers are available for configuring flatstream. The default configuration can be used to transmit small amounts of data relatively easily. Information: the cpu com...

  • Page 2279: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a x20 system user's manual 3.10 2279 flatstream operation when using flatstream, the communication direction is enormously important. For sending data to a module ("out- put" direction), the tx bytes are used. For receiving data from a module ("input" d...

  • Page 2280: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a 2280 x20 system user's manual 3.10 messageendbit the "messageendbit" is set if the subsequent segment completes a message. The message has then been com- pletely transmitted and is ready for further processing. Information: in the output direction, th...

  • Page 2281

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a x20 system user's manual 3.10 2281 communication status of the module name: inputsequence the "inputsequence" register contains information about the communication status of the module. It is written by the module and should only be read by the cpu. D...

  • Page 2282: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a 2282 x20 system user's manual 3.10 relationship between outputsequence and inputsequence 0 - 2 3 outputsequencecounter outputsyncbit 4 - 6 7 inputsequenceack inputsyncack 0 - 2 3 inputsequencecounter inputsyncbit 4 - 6 7 outputsequenceack outputsyncac...

  • Page 2283

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a x20 system user's manual 3.10 2283 synchronization during synchronization, a communication channel is opened. It is important to make sure that a module is present and that the current value of the sequencecounter is stored on the station receiving th...

  • Page 2284

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a 2284 x20 system user's manual 3.10 transmitting and receiving if a channel is synchronized, then the opposite station is ready to receive messages from the transmitter. Before the transmitter can send data, it needs to first create a transmit array in...

  • Page 2285

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a x20 system user's manual 3.10 2285 first, the messages must be split into segments. In the default configuration, it is important to ensure that each sequence can hold an entire segment, including the associated control byte. The sequence is limited t...

  • Page 2286: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a 2286 x20 system user's manual 3.10 transmitting data to a module (output) when transmitting data, the transmit array must be generated in the application program. Sequences are then transmitted one by one using flatstream and received by the module. I...

  • Page 2287

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a x20 system user's manual 3.10 2287 message larger than the outputmtu the transmit array, which needs to be created in the program sequence, consists of several elements. The user has to arrange the control and data bytes correctly and transfer the arr...

  • Page 2288

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a 2288 x20 system user's manual 3.10 receiving data from a module (input) when receiving data, the transmit array is generated by the module, transferred via flatstream and must then be reproduced in the receive array. The structure of the incoming data...

  • Page 2289

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a x20 system user's manual 3.10 2289 general flow chart se gm en t d at a ha nd lin g sy nc hr on is at io n no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no no no yes yes no yes no inputsyncack = 1 ? Inputsequenceack > 0 ? Inputsyncack = 1 (inputsequencecounter ...

  • Page 2290: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a 2290 x20 system user's manual 3.10 details it is recommended to store transmitted messages in separate receive arrays. After a set messageendbit is transmitted, the subsequent segment should be added to the receive array. The message is then complete ...

  • Page 2291: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a x20 system user's manual 3.10 2291 flatstream mode name: flatstreammode in the input direction, the transmit array is generated automatically. This register offers two options to the user that allow an incoming data stream to have a more compact arran...

  • Page 2292: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a 2292 x20 system user's manual 3.10 multisegmentmtus allowed with this option, the inputmtu is completely filled (if enough data is pending). The previously unfilled rx bytes transmit the next control bytes and their segments. This allows the enabled r...

  • Page 2293

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a x20 system user's manual 3.10 2293 using both options it is also possible to use both options at the same time. Bus cycle 1 control byte with messageendbit = 0 bus cycle 2 bus cycle 3 - - - me1 c me1 c me0 c me1 c control byte with messageendbit = 1 s...

  • Page 2294

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a 2294 x20 system user's manual 3.10 adjusting the flatstream if the way messages are structured is changed, then the way data in the transmit/receive array is arranged is also different. The following changes apply to the example given earlier. Multise...

  • Page 2295: Warning!

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a x20 system user's manual 3.10 2295 first, the messages must be split into segments. As in the default configuration, it is important for each sequence to begin with a control byte. The free bits in the mtu at the end of a message are filled with data ...

  • Page 2296: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a 2296 x20 system user's manual 3.10 large segments segments are limited to a maximum of 63 bytes. This means they can be larger than the active mtu. These large segments are divided among several sequences when transmitted. It is possible for sequences...

  • Page 2297

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a x20 system user's manual 3.10 2297 large segments and multisegmentmtu example three autonomous messages (7 bytes, 2 bytes and 9 bytes) are being transmitted using an mtu with a width of 7 bytes. The configuration allows transmission of large segments ...

  • Page 2298

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a 2298 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.5.9.12.5 example of forward functionality on x2x link forward functionality is a method that can be used to substantially increase the flatstream data rate. The basic principle is also used in other technical ar...

  • Page 2299

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a x20 system user's manual 3.10 2299 configuration the forward function only has to be enabled for the input direction. Two additional configuration registers are available for doing so. Flatstream modules have been optimized in such a way that they sup...

  • Page 2300

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a 2300 x20 system user's manual 3.10 transmitting and receiving with forward the basic algorithm for transmitting and receiving data remains the same. With the forward function, up to seven unacknowledged sequences can be transmitted. Sequences can be t...

  • Page 2301: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a x20 system user's manual 3.10 2301 details/background 1. Illegal sequencecounter size (counter offset) error situation: mtu not enabled if the difference between sequencecounter and sequenceack is larger than allowed during transmission, then a transm...

  • Page 2302

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a 2302 x20 system user's manual 3.10 errors when using forward in industrial environments, it is often the case that many different devices from various manufacturers are being used side by side. The electrical and/or electromagnetic properties of these...

  • Page 2303

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a x20 system user's manual 3.10 2303 4.26.5.9.13 using io-link with flatstream with this module, the user has the option of communicating with the connected io-link device via flatstream. Communication takes place separately with respect to timing, i.E....

  • Page 2304

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a 2304 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.5.9.13.2 io-link information for the flatstream to be able to use io-link communication via flatstream, you must define an individual array in the application. The following must be defined for the query in the ...

  • Page 2305

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a x20 system user's manual 3.10 2305 4.26.5.9.13.3 io-link data depending on the type of query, different io-link data results that must be appended to the flatstream array. Access to object dictionary request bytes name value description 1 to 3 module-...

  • Page 2306

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a 2306 x20 system user's manual 3.10 announcement of forwarded event after enabling event forwarding, events no longer have to be queried cyclically. The module generates the event as soon as the corresponding event occurs. Message bytes name value desc...

  • Page 2307

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ds438a x20 system user's manual 3.10 2307 4.26.5.9.16 minimum i/o update time the minimum i/o update time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced while still allowing an i/o update to take place in each cycle. Minimum i/o update time without io-link (al...

  • Page 2308: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20pd0011 2308 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.6 x20pd0011 4.26.6.1 general information the potential distributor module provides 12x ground (from the internal i/o supply) on the terminal connections and opens up additional wiring possibilities for actuators...

  • Page 2309

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20pd0011 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2309 4.26.6.3 technical data product id x20pd0011 short description potential distributor module 12x ground on the terminal connections general information b&r id code 0x267d status indicators operating state, module stat...

  • Page 2310

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20pd0011 2310 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.6.4 led status indicators figure led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mode r green on run mode off no power to module or everything ok on error or r...

  • Page 2311

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20pd0011 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2311 4.26.6.7 register description 4.26.6.7.1 function model 1 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic module status usint 0 1 statusfuse bit 0 ● fixed modules requir...

  • Page 2312

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20pd0012 2312 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.7 x20pd0012 4.26.7.1 general information the potential distributor module provides 12x 24 vdc (from the internal i/o supply) on the terminal connections and opens up additional wiring possibilities for actuators...

  • Page 2313

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20pd0012 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2313 4.26.7.3 technical data product id x20pd0012 short description potential distributor module 12x 24 vdc on the terminal connections general information b&r id code 0x267e status indicators operating state, module stat...

  • Page 2314

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20pd0012 2314 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.7.4 led status indicators figure led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mode r green on run mode off no power to module or everything ok on error or r...

  • Page 2315

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20pd0012 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2315 4.26.7.7 register description 4.26.7.7.1 function model 1 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic module status usint 0 1 statusfuse bit 0 ● fixed modules requir...

  • Page 2316

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20pd0016 2316 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.8 x20pd0016 4.26.8.1 general information the potential distributor module provides 5x 24 vdc and 5x ground connections (from an external supply) at the terminals. There is no connection to the internal i/o suppl...

  • Page 2317

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20pd0016 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2317 4.26.8.3 technical data product id x20pd0016 short description potential distributor module 5x 24 vdc on the terminal connections, 5x ground on the terminal connections general information b&r id code 0x2680 status i...

  • Page 2318

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20pd0016 2318 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.8.4 led status indicators figure led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mode r green on run mode off no power to module or everything ok on error or r...

  • Page 2319

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20pd0016 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2319 4.26.8.7 register description 4.26.8.7.1 function model 1 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic module status usint statusfuse bit 0 0 1 statuspowersupply bit ...

  • Page 2320: Information:

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20pd2113 2320 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.9 x20pd2113 4.26.9.1 general information the potential distributor module with feed can provide 6x 24 vdc and 6x ground connections from the internal i/o supply on the terminals. This module can also be used ins...

  • Page 2321

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20pd2113 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2321 4.26.9.3 technical data product id x20pd2113 short description potential distributor module with feed 6x 24 vdc on the terminal connections, 6x ground on the terminal connections general information b&r id code 0x267...

  • Page 2322

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20pd2113 2322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.9.4 led status indicators figure led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mode r green on run mode off no power to module or everything ok on error or r...

  • Page 2323

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20pd2113 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2323 4.26.9.6 connection examples connection example with external supply gnd +24 vdc pd + _ load load load load i/o supply load figure 780: x20pd2113 - connection example with external supply connection example with inte...

  • Page 2324

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20pd2113 2324 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.9.7 register description 4.26.9.7.1 function model 1 - standard read write register fixed offset name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic module status usint statusfuse bit 0 0 1 statuspowersupply bit ...

  • Page 2325

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ps4951 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2325 4.26.10 x20ps4951 4.26.10.1 general information in order to connect potentiometers, modules must first be supplied with the appropriate voltage. The potentiometer supply module can be used to supply four potentiomete...

  • Page 2326

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ps4951 2326 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.10.3 technical data product id x20ps4951 brief description system module supplies 4 potentiometers with ±10 v general information b&r id code 0x1f43 status indicators potentiometer supply monitoring by channel, ...

  • Page 2327

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ps4951 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2327 4.26.10.4 led status indicators figure led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mode r green on run mode off no power to module or everything ok on error or ...

  • Page 2328

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ps4951 2328 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.26.10.7 output circuit diagram channel x +10 v gnd supply status led (green) ptc supply monitoring channel x -10 v ptc supply monitoring figure 784: output circuit diagram.

  • Page 2329

    X20 system modules • other functions • x20ps4951 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2329 4.26.10.8 register description 4.26.10.8.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic supply status usint shortcircuit01 bit 0 ... ... Shortcircuit01 bit 3 open...

  • Page 2330

    X20 system modules • power supply modules • brief information 2330 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.27 power supply modules the internal i/os and the x2x link are fed by the supply modules. 4.27.1 brief information product id short description on page x20ps2100 x20 supply module for internal i/o supp...

  • Page 2331

    X20 system modules • power supply modules • x20ps2100 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2331 4.27.2 x20ps2100 4.27.2.1 general information the x20ps2100 supply module is used for the internal i/o supply. • 24 vdc supply module for internal i/o supply 4.27.2.2 order data model number short description fi...

  • Page 2332

    X20 system modules • power supply modules • x20ps2100 2332 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.27.2.3 technical data product id x20ps2100 short description power supply module 24 vdc supply module for internal i/o supply general information b&r id code 0x1bbf status indicators operating state, module st...

  • Page 2333

    X20 system modules • power supply modules • x20ps2100 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2333 4.27.2.5 pinout x 20 p s 2 10 0 gnd +24 v i/o +24 v i/o r e figure 785: pinout 4.27.2.6 connection example + _ gnd +24 vdc ps i/o power supply 10 a slow-blow figure 786: connection example 4.27.2.7 shutting the ...

  • Page 2334

    X20 system modules • power supply modules • x20ps2100 2334 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.27.2.8 register description 4.27.2.8.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic module status usint statusinput01 bit 0 0 statusinput02 bit 2 ● 4 suppl...

  • Page 2335

    X20 system modules • power supply modules • x20ps2110 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2335 4.27.3 x20ps2110 4.27.3.1 general information the supply module is used for the internal i/o supply. The module has an integrated replaceable fuse for the i/ o supply. • 24 vdc supply module for internal i/o sup...

  • Page 2336

    X20 system modules • power supply modules • x20ps2110 2336 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20ps2110 en 60529 protection ip20 environmental conditions temperature operation horizontal installation -25 to 60°c vertical installation -25 to 50°c derating - storage -40 to 85°c transport -40 to ...

  • Page 2337

    X20 system modules • power supply modules • x20ps2110 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2337 4.27.3.5 pinout x 20 p s 2 11 0 gnd +24 v i/o +24 v i/o r e figure 787: pinout 4.27.3.6 connection example gnd +24 vdc ps + _ i/o- power supply figure 788: connection example 4.27.3.7 shutting the potential grou...

  • Page 2338

    X20 system modules • power supply modules • x20ps2110 2338 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.27.3.8 register description 4.27.3.8.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic module status usint statusinput01 bit 0 statusinput02 bit 1 0 statusinp...

  • Page 2339

    X20 system modules • power supply modules • x20ps2110 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2339 4.27.3.8.5 minimum cycle time the minimum cycle time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced without communication errors occurring. It should be noted that very fast cycles decrease the idle time available...

  • Page 2340

    X20 system modules • power supply modules • x20ps3300 2340 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.27.4 x20ps3300 4.27.4.1 general information the supply module is equipped with a feed for the x2x link as well as the internal i/o supply. • feed for x2x link and internal i/o supply • electrical isolation of ...

  • Page 2341

    X20 system modules • power supply modules • x20ps3300 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2341 product id x20ps3300 reverse polarity protection no output i/o supply rated output voltage 24 vdc behavior if a short circuit occurs required line fuse permitted contact load 10.0 a operating conditions mounting...

  • Page 2342

    X20 system modules • power supply modules • x20ps3300 2342 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.27.4.5 pinout x 20 p s 3 30 0 gnd +24 v i/o +24 v i/o gnd +24v x2x link +24v x2x link i r e figure 789: pinout 4.27.4.6 connection examples with 2 separate supplies ps gnd +24 vdc + _ + _ i/o- power supply x2x...

  • Page 2343

    X20 system modules • power supply modules • x20ps3300 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2343 4.27.4.7 derating the rated output current for the supply is 7.0 w. Derating must be taken into consideration based on mounting orientation. Ambient temperature [°c] -25 0 5 7 40 45 50 55 installation position h...

  • Page 2344

    X20 system modules • power supply modules • x20ps3300 2344 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.27.4.8 register description 4.27.4.8.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic module status usint statusinput01 bit 0 0 statusinput02 bit 2 ● 2 suppl...

  • Page 2345

    X20 system modules • power supply modules • x20ps3300 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2345 4.27.4.8.6 minimum cycle time the minimum cycle time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced without communication errors occurring. It should be noted that very fast cycles decrease the idle time available...

  • Page 2346

    X20 system modules • power supply modules • x20ps3310 2346 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.27.5 x20ps3310 4.27.5.1 general information the supply module is equipped with a feed for the x2x link as well as the internal i/o supply. The module has an integrated replaceable fuse for the i/o supply. • fe...

  • Page 2347

    X20 system modules • power supply modules • x20ps3310 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2347 product id x20ps3310 input current max. 6.0 a fuse integrated 6.3 a, slow-blow, can be replaced reverse polarity protection no output i/o supply rated output voltage 24 vdc behavior if a short circuit occurs int...

  • Page 2348

    X20 system modules • power supply modules • x20ps3310 2348 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.27.5.5 pinout x 20 p s 3 31 0 gnd +24 v i/o +24 v i/o gnd +24v x2x link +24v x2x link i r e figure 792: pinout 4.27.5.6 connection examples with 2 separate supplies ps gnd +24 vdc + _ + _ i/o- power supply x2x...

  • Page 2349

    X20 system modules • power supply modules • x20ps3310 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2349 4.27.5.7 derating the rated output current for the supply is 7.0 w. Derating must be taken into consideration based on mounting orientation. Ambient temperature [°c] -25 0 5 7 40 45 50 55 installation position h...

  • Page 2350

    X20 system modules • power supply modules • x20ps3310 2350 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.27.5.8 register description 4.27.5.8.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic non-cyclic cyclic non-cyclic module status usint statusinput01 bit 0 0 statusinput02 bit 2 ● 2 suppl...

  • Page 2351

    X20 system modules • power supply modules • x20ps3310 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2351 4.27.5.8.6 minimum cycle time the minimum cycle time defines how far the bus cycle can be reduced without communication errors occurring. It should be noted that very fast cycles decrease the idle time available...

  • Page 2352

    X20 system modules • x20 redundancy system • brief information 2352 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.28 x20 redundancy system redundant network cabling is often essential to safe operation, especially in processing plants. The potential for danger, especially to the lines that run through the plant, ...

  • Page 2353

    X20 system modules • x20 redundancy system • x20hb8884 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2353 4.28.2 x20hb8884 4.28.2.1 general information powerlink is a standard protocol for fast ethernet with hard real-time properties. The ethernet power- link standardization group (epsg) ensures that the standard r...

  • Page 2354

    X20 system modules • x20 redundancy system • x20hb8884 2354 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20hb8884 transmission physical interfaces 100 base-tx half-duplex yes full-duplex no autonegotiation yes auto-mdi / mdix yes operating conditions mounting orientation horizontal yes vertical yes ins...

  • Page 2355

    X20 system modules • x20 redundancy system • x20hb8884 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2355 4.28.2.5 operating and connection elements led - status indicators slot for hub expansion module powerlink station number powerlink connection with 2x rj45 ports for easy wiring terminal block for compact link ...

  • Page 2356: Information:

    X20 system modules • x20 redundancy system • x20hb8884 2356 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.28.2.8 powerlink cable redundancy system it is often indispensable to have redundant network cabling, especially in systems that handle technical processes. The potential for danger, especially to the lines t...

  • Page 2357

    X20 system modules • x20 redundancy system • x20hb8884 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2357 4.28.2.8.1 interface module x20if2181-2 interface module x20if2181-2 allows you to set up a completely redundant powerlink cable system beginning at the x20 cpu. X20hb8884 with 1x x20hb2880 x20hb8884 with 2x x2...

  • Page 2358

    X20 system modules • x20 redundancy system • x20hb8884 2358 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.28.2.8.2 link selector x20hb8884 the link selector was developed for connecting powerlink controlled nodes. The device structure follows the proven x20 philosophy. The 62.5 mm wide module is operated as a sta...

  • Page 2359

    X20 system modules • x20 redundancy system • x20hb8884 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2359 4.28.2.8.3 x20hb8884 with hub expansion modules expanding the x20hb8884 with two active x20hb2885 hub modules eliminates the need to connect external hubs. Two hot-swap capable modules are required so that devi...

  • Page 2360

    X20 system modules • x20 redundancy system • x20hb8884 2360 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.28.2.8.4 bus controller x20bc8084 for connecting an x20 system, the link selector function is integrated in the x20 bus controller x20bc8084. The bus controller is connected to the powerlink network via exter...

  • Page 2361

    X20 system modules • x20 redundancy system • x20hb8884 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2361 4.28.2.8.5 x20bc8084 with hub expansion modules expanding the x20bc8084 with two active x20hb2885 hub modules eliminates the need to connect external hubs. Two hot-swap capable modules are required so that i/os...

  • Page 2362

    X20 system modules • x20 redundancy system • x20hb8884 2362 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.28.2.8.6 topology examples topology 1 x20cp158x with 1x x20if2181-2 (managing node) x20hb8884 with 2x x20hb2885 x20hb8884 with 2x x20hb2885 x20bc8084 with 2x x20hb2885 x20hb8884 with 2x x20hb2885 motion contr...

  • Page 2363

    X20 system modules • x20 redundancy system • x20hb8884 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2363 topology 2 x20cp158x x20hb8884 with 2x x20hb2885 x20hb8884 with 2x x20hb2885 x20bc8084 with 2x x20hb2885 x20hb8884 with 1x x20hb2880 powerlink network 1 powerlink network 2 x20bc8084 redundant network key: non-...

  • Page 2364

    X20 system modules • x20 redundancy system • x20hb8884 2364 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.28.2.9 redundant supply voltage when operating the x20hb8884 with two x20hb2885 hub modules, a redundant supply voltage for the system can be easily implemented using two x20 supply modules. Hardware configur...

  • Page 2365

    X20 system modules • x20 redundancy system • x20hb8884 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2365 x20ps3300 the supply module x20ps3300 is operated with a x20bm01 bus module. Only the supply for the x20hb8884 is connected. For correct operation of the error led, a jumper is required. Power supply jumper ps ...

  • Page 2366

    X20 system modules • system modules for the x20 hub system • brief information 2366 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.29 system modules for the x20 hub system the x20 hub system has a modular structure. In addition to the basis modules, the following system modules are also required, • bus base • hub ...

  • Page 2367

    X20 system modules • system modules for the x20 hub system • x20hb1881 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2367 4.29.2 x20hb1881 4.29.2.1 general information the powerlink bus controllers x20bc8083, x20bc8084 (revision d0 or higher) and the stand-alone hub x20hb8880 are equipped with a modular hub expansi...

  • Page 2368

    X20 system modules • system modules for the x20 hub system • x20hb1881 2368 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.29.2.3 technical data product id x20hb1881 short description hub 1 fast ethernet fiber optic interface for hub expansion general information status indicators module status, bus function diagn...

  • Page 2369

    X20 system modules • system modules for the x20 hub system • x20hb1881 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2369 4.29.2.4 led status indicators figure led color status description err red on slot not detected rdy orange on slow detected, module is active on a link to the remote station has been established...

  • Page 2370

    X20 system modules • system modules for the x20 hub system • x20hb2880 2370 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.29.3 x20hb2880 4.29.3.1 general information the powerlink bus controller x20bc8083 and the stand-alone hubs x20hb8880 and x20hb8815 are equipped with a modular hub expansion. An additional 1 o...

  • Page 2371

    X20 system modules • system modules for the x20 hub system • x20hb2880 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2371 4.29.3.3 technical data product id x20hb2880 short description hub 2x fast ethernet hub for hub expansion general information status indicators module status, bus function diagnostics module sta...

  • Page 2372

    X20 system modules • system modules for the x20 hub system • x20hb2880 2372 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.29.3.4 led status indicators figure led color status description err red on slot not detected rdy orange on slow detected, module is active on a link to the remote station has been established...

  • Page 2373

    X20 system modules • system modules for the x20 hub system • x20hb2881 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2373 4.29.4 x20hb2881 4.29.4.1 general information the powerlink bus controller x20bc8083 and the stand-alone hubs x20hb8880 and x20hb8815 are equipped with a modular hub expansion. An additional 1 o...

  • Page 2374

    X20 system modules • system modules for the x20 hub system • x20hb2881 2374 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.29.4.3 technical data product id x20hb2881 short description hub 2 fast ethernet fiber optic interfaces for hub expansion general information status indicators module status, bus function diag...

  • Page 2375

    X20 system modules • system modules for the x20 hub system • x20hb2881 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2375 4.29.4.4 led status indicators figure led color status description err red on slot not detected rdy orange on slow detected, module is active on a link to the remote station has been established...

  • Page 2376

    X20 system modules • system modules for the x20 hub system • x20hb28g0 2376 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.29.5 x20hb28g0 4.29.5.1 general information the x20bc80g3 expandable ethercat bus controller and the x20hb88g0 stand-alone ethercat junction base module are equipped with an additional slot. T...

  • Page 2377

    X20 system modules • system modules for the x20 hub system • x20hb28g0 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2377 4.29.5.3 technical data product id x20hb28g0 short description junction module 2x ethercat junction for expansion general information status indicators module status, bus function diagnostics mo...

  • Page 2378

    X20 system modules • system modules for the x20 hub system • x20hb28g0 2378 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.29.5.4 led status indicators figure led color status description run green on module is active blinking the respective led blinks when ethernet activity is present (port open) on the correspon...

  • Page 2379

    X20 system modules • system modules for the x20 hub system • x20ps8002 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2379 4.29.6 x20ps8002 4.29.6.1 general information the supply module is used to supply x20 stand-alone devices. These include e.G. The x20hb8884 powerlink compact link selector and the x20hb8880 stan...

  • Page 2380

    X20 system modules • system modules for the x20 hub system • x20ps8002 2380 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20ps8002 environmental conditions temperature operation horizontal installation -25 to 60°c vertical installation -25 to 50°c derating see section "derating" storage -40 to 85°c tran...

  • Page 2381

    X20 system modules • system modules for the x20 hub system • x20ps8002 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2381 4.29.6.6 connection example ps + _ power supply figure 811: connection example 4.29.6.7 derating for the supply the rated output current for the supply is 7.0 w. Derating must be taken into cons...

  • Page 2382

    X20 system modules • system modules for the x20 redundancy system • brief information 2382 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.30 system modules for the x20 redundancy system the x20 redundancy system has a modular structure. In addition to the basis modules, the following system mod- ules are also requ...

  • Page 2383

    X20 system modules • system modules for the x20 redundancy system • x20hb2885 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2383 4.30.2 x20hb2885 4.30.2.1 general information the x20bc8084 powerlink bus controller and the x20hb8884 module are equipped with an integrated link selector function. An additional 1 or 2 ...

  • Page 2384

    X20 system modules • system modules for the x20 redundancy system • x20hb2885 2384 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.30.2.3 technical data product id x20hb2885 short description hub 2x fast ethernet hub for redundant wiring general information status indicators module status, bus function diagnostics ...

  • Page 2385

    X20 system modules • system modules for the x20 redundancy system • x20hb2885 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2385 4.30.2.4 led status indicators figure led color status description red on module inactive. Module is in the reset state. Run green on module active off normal operation blinking no x20bc8...

  • Page 2386

    X20 system modules • system modules for the x20 redundancy system • x20hb2886 2386 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.30.3 x20hb2886 4.30.3.1 general information the x20bc8084 powerlink bus controller and the x20hb8884 module are equipped with an integrated link selector function. An additional 1 or 2 ...

  • Page 2387

    X20 system modules • system modules for the x20 redundancy system • x20hb2886 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2387 4.30.3.3 technical data product id x20hb2886 short description hub 2 fast ethernet fiber optic interfaces for redundant wiring general information status indicators module status, bus fun...

  • Page 2388

    X20 system modules • system modules for the x20 redundancy system • x20hb2886 2388 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.30.3.4 led status indicators figure led color status description red on module inactive. Module is in the reset state. Run green on module active off normal operation blinking no x20bc8...

  • Page 2389

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • brief information x20 system user's manual 3.10 2389 4.31 temperature modules temperature measurement values are converted into number values which can be processed by the plc using temperature modules. In the plc, the number values are always in 16-bit 2s ...

  • Page 2390: Information:

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • measurement methods 2390 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.31.2 measurement methods depending on the area to be measured, there are two different methods for determining the temperature. Method 1: direct measurement using measurement resistor the temperature ...

  • Page 2391

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20at2222 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2391 4.31.3 x20at2222 4.31.3.1 general information the module is equipped with two inputs for pt100/pt1000 resistance temperature measurement. This module is designed for x20 6-pin terminal blocks. If needed (e.G. For...

  • Page 2392

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20at2222 2392 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.31.3.3 technical data product id x20at2222 short description i/o module 2 inputs for pt100 or pt1000 resistance temperature measurement general information b&r id code 0x1ba6 status indicators i/o function per ...

  • Page 2393

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20at2222 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2393 product id x20at2222 temperature measurement monitoring range exceeded (neg.) 0x8001 above upper range limit 0x7fff open line 0x7fff general error 0x8000 open inputs 0x7fff resistance measurement monitoring above...

  • Page 2394

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20at2222 2394 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.31.3.4 led status indicators for a description of the various operating modes, see the 2.11.1 "re leds" section. Figure led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode blinking preop...

  • Page 2395

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20at2222 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2395 4.31.3.7 input circuit diagram 2-wire connections channel 1 channel 2 channel 1 m ul tip le xe r a/d converter 250 µa sensor + x sense - x channel 2 switch closed for 2-wire connections input value i/o status led...

  • Page 2396

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20at2222 2396 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.31.3.8 register description 4.31.3.8.1 function model 0 - "3-wire connections" and function model 1 - "2-wire connections" for this module, the connection type is selected using function models 0 and 1. Functio...

  • Page 2397: Information:

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20at2222 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2397 4.31.3.8.3 analog inputs this module stores converted analog values in the registers. Different resistance or temperature measurements will result in different value ranges and data types. Information: operating ...

  • Page 2398

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20at2222 2398 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.31.3.8.8 input filter name: configoutput01 this register can be used to configure the filter time for all analog inputs. Data type value filters filter time 0 15 hz 66.7 ms 1 25 hz 40 ms 2 30 hz 33.3 ms 3 50 hz...

  • Page 2399

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20at2222 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2399 4.31.3.8.10 input status name: statusinput01 this register is used to monitor the module inputs. A change in the monitoring status generates an error message. Data type value usint see bit structure. Bit structur...

  • Page 2400

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20at4222 2400 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.31.4 x20at4222 4.31.4.1 general information the module is equipped with four inputs for pt100/pt1000 resistance temperature measurement. • 4 inputs for resistance temperature measurement • for pt100 and pt1000 ...

  • Page 2401

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20at4222 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2401 4.31.4.3 technical data product id x20at4222 short description i/o module 4 inputs for pt100 or pt1000 resistance temperature measurement general information b&r id code 0x1ba7 status indicators i/o function per ...

  • Page 2402

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20at4222 2402 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20at4222 temperature measurement monitoring range exceeded (neg.) 0x8001 above upper range limit 0x7fff open line 0x7fff general error 0x8000 open inputs 0x7fff resistance measurement monitoring above...

  • Page 2403

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20at4222 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2403 4.31.4.4 led status indicators for a description of the various operating modes, see the 2.11.1 "re leds" section. Figure led color status description off no power to module single flash reset mode blinking preop...

  • Page 2404

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20at4222 2404 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.31.4.7 input circuit diagram 2-wire connections channel 1 channel 2 - 4 channel 1 channel 2 - 4 m ul tip le xe r a/d converter 250 µa sensor + x sense - x switch closed for 2-wire connections input value i/o st...

  • Page 2405

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20at4222 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2405 4.31.4.8 register description 4.31.4.8.1 function model 0 - "3-wire connections" and function model 1 - "2-wire connections" for this module, the connection type is selected using function models 0 and 1. Functio...

  • Page 2406: Information:

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20at4222 2406 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.31.4.8.3 analog inputs this module stores converted analog values in the registers. Different resistance or temperature measurements will result in different value ranges and data types. Information: operating ...

  • Page 2407

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20at4222 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2407 4.31.4.8.8 input filter name: configoutput01 this register can be used to configure the filter time for all analog inputs. Data type value filters filter time 0 15 hz 66.7 ms 1 25 hz 40 ms 2 30 hz 33.3 ms 3 50 hz...

  • Page 2408

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20at4222 2408 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.31.4.8.10 input status name: statusinput01 this register is used to monitor the module inputs. A change in the monitoring status generates an error message. Data type value usint see bit structure. Bit structur...

  • Page 2409

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20ata312 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2409 4.31.5 x20ata312 4.31.5.1 general information the x20ata312 module is equipped with two inputs for pt100 4-line resistance temperature measurement. • 2 inputs for resistance temperature measurement • pt100 sensor...

  • Page 2410

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20ata312 2410 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20ata312 isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 v eff linearization method internal measuring current 1 ma temperature sensor standardization -200 to 850°c reference 1568 Ω ±0.1% temperature me...

  • Page 2411

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20ata312 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2411 4.31.5.4 status leds for a description of the various operating modes, see the 2.11.1 "re leds" section. Image led color status description off module supply not connected single flash reset mode double flash boo...

  • Page 2412

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20ata312 2412 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.31.5.6 connection example gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc at se ns or 1 se ns or 2 + _ _ 4-wire connection 4-wire connection + + _ _ + to ensure accuracy, modules with a power consumption modules. X 20 m od ule ** p ow...

  • Page 2413

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20ata312 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2413 4.31.5.8 register description 4.31.5.8.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic configuration 130 inputfilter uint ● 134 modeadc uint ● 514 sensortype01 578 s...

  • Page 2414: Information:

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20ata312 2414 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.31.5.8.2 function model 254 - bus controller read write register offset 1) name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic configuration 130 - inputfilter uint ● 134 - modeadc uint ● 514 - sensortype01 578 - senso...

  • Page 2415

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20ata312 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2415 4.31.5.8.3.2 a/d converter operating mode name: modeadc this register can be used to set the operating mode for the analog/digital converter. The individual options allow faster digitalization of the analog value...

  • Page 2416: Information:

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20ata312 2416 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.31.5.8.5.1 preparation interval name: preparationinterval01 to preparationinterval02 this register defines the time interval in which the measured value is checked before being passed on. Data type value uint 0...

  • Page 2417

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20ata312 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2417 4.31.5.8.6.2 lower limit value name: lowerlimit01 to lowerlimit02 this register specifies the lower limit value. The values entered should be within the valid measurement range. Data type value dint -2,147,483,64...

  • Page 2418: Information:

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20ata312 2418 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.31.5.8.8.2 measured value – resistance name: resistor01 to resistor02 if the channel is configured for resistance measurement, the current resistance value is made available in this register. Data type value ud...

  • Page 2419: Information:

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20ata312 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2419 4.31.5.8.8.6 status messages name: status01 to status02 the register bits are set if an error has been diagnosed and the error remains longer than the delay configured in the "errordelay0x" register. Data type va...

  • Page 2420

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20ata492 2420 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.31.6 x20ata492 4.31.6.1 general information the x20ata492 module is equipped with two inputs for j, k, n, s, b, r, e, c and t thermocouple sensors. The two measurement channels are electrically isolated from ea...

  • Page 2421

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20ata492 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2421 product id x20ata492 measurement range sensor temperature type j: fe-cuni -210 to 1200°c type k: nicr-ni -270 to 1372°c type n: nicrsi-nisi -270 to 1298°c type s: ptrh10-pt -50 to 1768°c type b: ptrh30-ptrh6 0 to...

  • Page 2422

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20ata492 2422 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20ata492 common-mode rejection dc >110 db 50 hz >110 db 60 hz >110 db common-mode range ±50 v crosstalk between channels >70 db non-linearity channel ±0.004% 3) terminal temperature ±0.004% 4) isolati...

  • Page 2423

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20ata492 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2423 4.31.6.4 status leds image led color status description off module supply not connected single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mode green on run mode off module supply not connected or everything is ok o...

  • Page 2424

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20ata492 2424 x20 system user's manual 3.10 tc 1 tc 2 + _ + _ gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc at remote temperature compensation the 16x standard terminal x20tb1f is used for remote temperature compensation. The external pt1000 sensors are connected to the module ...

  • Page 2425

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20ata492 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2425 4-wire connections tc 1 + _ + _ + _ gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc at intermediate terminal sensor 1 4-wire connection copper wire external temperature compensation external compensation does not require the pt1000 valu...

  • Page 2426

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20ata492 2426 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.31.6.7 input circuit diagram j tc+ 1 tc- 1 v cc1 1 1 1 v cc1 j tc+ 2 tc- 2 v cc2 2 2 2 v cc2 24 vdc a/d converter internal temperature measurement input value 1 terminal temperature 1 a/d converter internal tem...

  • Page 2427

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20ata492 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2427 4.31.6.8 increased precision 4.31.6.8.1 internal temperature compensation when using internal terminal temperature compensation, a temperature model must be defined in order to increase precision. A temperature m...

  • Page 2428

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20ata492 2428 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.31.6.9 register description 4.31.6.9.1 register overview - function model 0 (standard) read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic data register – channel 01 0 temperatureevaluated01 int ● ...

  • Page 2429

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20ata492 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2429 4.31.6.9.2 variable mapping in automation studio (x2x master) read write name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic variables – channel 01 temperature01 int ● int sampletime01 dint ● sint iocyclecount01 int ● c...

  • Page 2430

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20ata492 2430 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.31.6.9.3 register overview - function model 254 (bus controller) read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic data register – channel 01 0 0 1) temperatureevaluated01 int ● 281 statusinput01...

  • Page 2431

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20ata492 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2431 4.31.6.9.4 variable mapping in automation studio (canio) read write name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic variables – channel 01 temperature01 int ● int sampletime01 dint ● sint iocyclecount01 int ● compen...

  • Page 2432

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20ata492 2432 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.31.6.9.5 temperature measurement 4.31.6.9.5.1 data registers the module stores converted analog values in the registers. The configured sensor type will affect the value ranges. The channels for group 01 – temp...

  • Page 2433

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20ata492 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2433 4.31.6.9.5.5 "compensationvalue0x" registers the two internal cold junction temperatures on the module can be read in standard operation. These are not available when using an internal temperature model for compe...

  • Page 2434

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20ata492 2434 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.31.6.9.6 configuration 4.31.6.9.6.1 configuration registers the following registers are used to configure the necessary operating settings for the temperature inputs and the cold junction readings. 4.31.6.9.6.2...

  • Page 2435

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20ata492 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2435 4.31.6.9.6.3 "cfo_inputfilterch0x" registers these registers are used to configure the filter/sampling time for a galvanic group. The defined filter/sampling time applies to the temperature input as well as the i...

  • Page 2436: Information:

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20ata492 2436 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.31.6.9.6.8 "cfo_replaceupperch0x" registers these registers are used to define the upper replacement value for the respective temperature channel. If limit value monitoring is active in the replacement value st...

  • Page 2437

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20ata492 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2437 4.31.6.9.7 error handling 4.31.6.9.7.1 "statusinput0x" registers the module's temperature inputs are monitored. A change in the monitoring status generates an error message. Some error information is only enabled...

  • Page 2438

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20ata492 2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.31.6.9.7.5 "comptemperaturerror0x" data points these data points generate the error status (composite message) for the cold junction temperature measurement on the respective channel. For more detailed informat...

  • Page 2439

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20ata492 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2439 4.31.6.9.7.10 "compensationstatus0x" registers the module's cold junction temperature inputs are monitored. A change in the monitoring status generates an error message. Some error information is only enabled aft...

  • Page 2440

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20ata492 2440 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.31.6.9.7.14 "compconversionerror0x" data points these data points generate the error status for the respective cold junction channel. The error is triggered when the conversion time is exceeded on the hardware....

  • Page 2441

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20ata492 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2441 4.31.6.9.8 function models a function model specifies the registers on the module (storage model) that are available for the application. Only these registers are processed on the module during each cycle and tra...

  • Page 2442

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20atb312 2442 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.31.7 x20atb312 4.31.7.1 general information the x20atb312 module is equipped with four inputs for pt100 4-line resistance temperature measurement. • 4 inputs for resistance temperature measurement • pt100 senso...

  • Page 2443

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20atb312 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2443 product id x20atb312 isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 v eff linearization method internal measuring current 1 ma temperature sensor standardization -200 to 850°c reference 1568 Ω ±0.1% temperature me...

  • Page 2444

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20atb312 2444 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.31.7.4 status leds for a description of the various operating modes, see the 2.11.1 "re leds" section. Image led color status description off module supply not connected single flash reset mode double flash boo...

  • Page 2445

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20atb312 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2445 4.31.7.6 connection example gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc at se ns or 1 se ns or 2 + _ _ 4-wire connection 4-wire connection + + _ _ + se ns or 4 + _ _ + se ns or 3 + _ _ + to ensure accuracy, modules with a power cons...

  • Page 2446

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20atb312 2446 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.31.7.8 register description 4.31.7.8.1 function model 0 - standard read write register name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic configuration 130 inputfilter uint ● 134 modeadc uint ● index * 64 + 450 senso...

  • Page 2447: Information:

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20atb312 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2447 4.31.7.8.2 function model 254 - bus controller read write register offset 1) name data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic configuration 130 - inputfilter uint ● 134 - modeadc uint ● index * 64 + 450 - sensortype0...

  • Page 2448: Information:

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20atb312 2448 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.31.7.8.4 configuring the measurement channels each temperature measurement channel can be configured independently. All the registers required for this pur- pose by each channel are arranged separately. 4.31.7....

  • Page 2449: Information:

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20atb312 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2449 4.31.7.8.5.2 static replacement value when exceeding the upper limit name: replaceupper01 to replaceupper04 this register is used to defined a replacement value that is output in place of the invalid measured val...

  • Page 2450

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20atb312 2450 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.31.7.8.6.3 hysteresis name hysteresis01 to hysteresis04 a hysteresis can be set in order to avoid frequent status changes in the measurement range close to the limit value. Here, a small section is defined at t...

  • Page 2451: Information:

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20atb312 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2451 4.31.7.8.8.3 measured value – unweighted name: measurand01 to measurand04 when using the asioacc library, the unweighted measurement can be accessed via this register. This refers to a measured value that is with...

  • Page 2452: Information:

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20atb312 2452 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.31.7.8.8.7 status messages for function model 254 name: status01to04 the bits in this register are set if an error has been detected. Data type value usint see bit structure. Bit structure: bit name value infor...

  • Page 2453

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20atc402 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2453 4.31.8 x20atc402 4.31.8.1 general information the x20atc402 module is equipped with six inputs for j, k, n, s, b, r, e, c and t thermocouple sensors. This module can also be equipped with the x20tb1e thermocouple...

  • Page 2454

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20atc402 2454 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20atc402 conversion time internal terminal temperature comp. N channels (n + 2) * 4 * x ms 1) external terminal temperature comp. 1 channel x ms 1) n channels n * 4 * x ms 1) remote temperature comp. ...

  • Page 2455

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20atc402 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2455 product id x20atc402 terminal temperature compensation operating modes internal/remote or external basic accuracy at 25°c without taking the pt1000 sensor into consideration ±0.06% accuracy of the internal termin...

  • Page 2456

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20atc402 2456 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.31.8.4 status leds image led color status description off module supply not connected single flash reset mode blinking preoperational mode green on run mode off module supply not connected or everything is ok o...

  • Page 2457

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20atc402 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2457 tc 1 tc 2 tc 4 tc 6 + _ + + + _ _ _ + + _ _ tc 3 tc 5 gnd +24 vdc gnd +24 vdc at remote temperature compensation the 16x standard terminal x20tb1f is used for remote temperature compensation. The external pt1000 ...

  • Page 2458

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20atc402 2458 x20 system user's manual 3.10 external temperature compensation external compensation does not require the pt1000 values to be converted internally in the module. Instead, the reference temperatures have to be pre-processed in the program bef...

  • Page 2459

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20atc402 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2459 4.31.8.8 increased precision 4.31.8.8.1 internal temperature compensation when using internal terminal temperature compensation, a temperature model must be defined in order to increase precision. A temperature m...

  • Page 2460

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20atc402 2460 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.31.8.9 x20atc402 - register description 4.31.8.9.1 register overview - function model 0 (default) read write register product id data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic module configuration 1026 cfo_inputfilter...

  • Page 2461

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20atc402 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2461 4.31.8.9.2 variable assignment in automation studio (x2x master) read write product id data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic compensation compensationvaluea compensationvalueb int ● compensationstatusa compensa...

  • Page 2462

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20atc402 2462 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.31.8.9.3 register overview - bus controller function model 254 read write register product id data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic module configuration 1026 cfo_inputfilter uint ● ● compensation 1030 1034 cf...

  • Page 2463

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20atc402 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2463 4.31.8.9.4 variable assignment in automation studio (canio) read write product id data type cyclic acyclic cyclic acyclic compensation compensationvaluea compensationvalueb int ● compensationstatusa compensations...

  • Page 2464: Information:

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20atc402 2464 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.31.8.9.5 module configuration the x20atc402 is an i/o module for temperature measurement. It has six non electrically isolated channels. The module requires a 16-pin standard terminal or the 16-pin terminal wit...

  • Page 2465: Information:

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20atc402 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2465 4.31.8.9.6 compensation the measurement process is based on the interaction between the temperature sensors and the thermocouples. Each thermocouple measures the difference in temperature between the measurement ...

  • Page 2466

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20atc402 2466 x20 system user's manual 3.10 compensationvalue designations (pchannelname): compensationvaluea compensationvalueb the "compensationvalue" registers can be used to read the compensation value. Depending on how the "clamp- type" register is se...

  • Page 2467

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20atc402 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2467 4.31.8.9.7 temperature measurement - configuration the temperature measurement channels can be configured independently of each other. All the registers required for each channel are arranged separately. The "sen...

  • Page 2468: Information:

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20atc402 2468 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.31.8.9.7.2 preparationinterval name (pchannelname): cfo_preparationinterval01 cfo_preparationinterval[02…06] if the last valid measurement value should be kept when violating the limit value, then preparationin...

  • Page 2469: Information:

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20atc402 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2469 4.31.8.9.7.5 hysteresis designations (pchannelname): cfo_hysteresis01 cfo_hysteresis[02…06] if the user-specific limit values are being used, then a hysteresis range should also be defined. The "hysteresis" regis...

  • Page 2470

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20atc402 2470 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.31.8.9.8 temperature measurement the received temperature data is prepared in two different formats and given a time stamp. For each channel there are two separate registers for transmitting the measurement val...

  • Page 2471

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20atc402 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2471 4.31.8.9.8.3 iocyclecounter designations (pchannelname): iocyclecounter01_8bit iocyclecounter[02…06]_8bit iocyclecounter01_16bit iocyclecounter[02…06]_16bit the "iocyclecounter" is a cyclic counter that is increm...

  • Page 2472

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20atc402 2472 x20 system user's manual 3.10 status messages in function model 254 (canio) in function model 254 there is no configuration required in advance to activate error detection. It is always activated during startup. To streamline the transfer, ho...

  • Page 2473

    X20 system modules • temperature modules • x20atc402 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2473 4.31.8.9.9 function models a function model specifies the registers on the module (storage model) that are available for the application. Only these registers are processed on the module during each cycle and tra...

  • Page 2474

    X20 system modules • terminal blocks • brief information 2474 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.32 terminal blocks various terminal blocks are available for wiring x20 modules. 4.32.1 brief information product id short description on page x20tb06 x20 terminal block, 6-pin, 24 v coded 2475 x20tb12 x20 ...

  • Page 2475

    X20 system modules • terminal blocks • x20tb06/x20tb12 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2475 4.32.2 x20tb06/x20tb12 4.32.2.1 general information the x20 24 vdc modules are wired using the x20tb06 and x20tb12 terminal blocks. • tool-free wiring with push-in technology • simple wire release using lever •...

  • Page 2476: Warning!

    X20 system modules • terminal blocks • x20tb06/x20tb12 2476 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.32.2.3 technical data product id x20tb06 x20tb12 general information certification ce yes culus yes atex zone 2 yes gl yes gost-r yes terminal block number of pins 6 12 type of terminal clamp push-in terminal...

  • Page 2477

    X20 system modules • terminal blocks • x20tb1e x20 system user's manual 3.10 2477 4.32.3 x20tb1e 4.32.3.1 general information the x20tb1e terminal block is equipped with two integrated pt1000 sensors. It is therefore optimally suited for internal terminal temperature compensation. The terminal block...

  • Page 2478: Warning!

    X20 system modules • terminal blocks • x20tb1e 2478 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.32.3.3 technical data product id x20tb1e general information certification ce yes culus yes atex zone 2 yes gl yes gost-r yes terminal block number of pins 12 type of terminal clamp push-in terminal cable type only c...

  • Page 2479: Information:

    X20 system modules • terminal blocks • x20tb1f x20 system user's manual 3.10 2479 4.32.4 x20tb1f 4.32.4.1 general information x20 24 vdc modules with 16 connections are wired using the x20tb1f terminal block. • tool-free wiring with push-in technology • simple wire release using a screwdriver • abil...

  • Page 2480: Warning!

    X20 system modules • terminal blocks • x20tb1f 2480 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.32.4.3 technical data product id x20tb1f general information certification ce yes culus yes atex zone 2 yes gl yes gost-r yes terminal block number of pins 16 type of terminal clamp push-in terminal cable type only c...

  • Page 2481

    X20 system modules • terminal blocks • x20tb32 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2481 4.32.5 x20tb32 4.32.5.1 general information the x20 240 vac modules are wired using x20tb32 terminal blocks. • tool-free wiring with push-in technology • simple wire release using lever • ability to label each terminal...

  • Page 2482: Warning!

    X20 system modules • terminal blocks • x20tb32 2482 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4.32.5.3 technical data product id x20tb32 general information certification ce yes culus yes atex zone 2 yes gl yes gost-r yes terminal block number of pins 12 type of terminal clamp push-in terminal cable type only c...

  • Page 2483: 5 Coated Modules

    Coated modules x20 system user's manual 3.10 2483 5 coated modules coated modules are x20 modules with a protective coating for the electronics component. This coating protects x20c modules from condensation and corrosive gases. The modules' electronics are fully compatible with the corresponding x2...

  • Page 2484

    Coated modules • module overview: alphabetical 2484 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.1 module overview: alphabetical product id short description on page x20cai2438 x20 analog input module, coated, 2 inputs, 4-20 ma, 16-bit converter resolution, single channel electrically isolated and with separate ...

  • Page 2485

    Coated modules • module overview: alphabetical x20 system user's manual 3.10 2485 product id short description on page x20cdm9324 x20 digital mixed module, coated, 8 inputs, 24 vdc, sink, configurable input filter, 4 outputs, 24 vdc, 0.5 a, source, 1-wire connections 2570 x20cdo4332 x20 digital outp...

  • Page 2486

    Coated modules • module overview: grouped 2486 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.2 module overview: grouped product id short description on page analog inputs x20cai2438 x20 analog input module, coated, 2 inputs, 4-20 ma, 16-bit converter resolution, single channel electrically isolated and with separ...

  • Page 2487

    Coated modules • module overview: grouped x20 system user's manual 3.10 2487 product id short description on page other functions x20cpd2113 x20 potential distributor, coated, 6x gnd, 6x 24 vdc, with supply option, integrated microfuse 2628 power supplies x20cps2100 x20 power supply module, coated, ...

  • Page 2488

    Coated modules • analog input modules • brief information 2488 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.3 analog input modules analog input modules convert measured values (voltages, currents) into numerical values, which can be processed by the plc. In the plc, analog data is always in 16-bit 2s complement ...

  • Page 2489

    Coated modules • analog input modules • x20cai2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2489 5.3.2 x20cai2438 5.3.2.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • enviro...

  • Page 2490

    Coated modules • analog input modules • x20cai2438 2490 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.3.2.3 technical data product id x20cai2438 short description i/o module 2 analog inputs, 4 to 20 ma or 0 to 25 ma general information b&r id code 0xe1ee status indicators i/o function per channel, operating state...

  • Page 2491

    Coated modules • analog input modules • x20cai2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2491 product id x20cai2438 short circuit protection yes, continuous electrical isolation sensor supply - channel no sensor supply - sensor supply yes max. Voltage ripple up to 100 khz ≤2.2 mv up to 1 mhz ≤22 mv higher ≤...

  • Page 2492

    Coated modules • analog input modules • x20cai4622 2492 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.3.3 x20cai4622 5.3.3.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • enviro...

  • Page 2493

    Coated modules • analog input modules • x20cai4622 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2493 5.3.3.3 technical data product id x20cai4622 short description i/o module 4 analog inputs ± 10 v or 0 to 20 ma / 4 to 20 ma general information b&r id code 0xe1ef status indicators i/o function per channel, operati...

  • Page 2494

    Coated modules • analog input modules • x20cai4622 2494 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20cai4622 nonlinearity voltage 4) current 5) isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 v eff operating conditions mounting orientation horizontal yes vertical yes installation at elevations above se...

  • Page 2495

    Coated modules • analog input modules • x20cai4632 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2495 5.3.4 x20cai4632 5.3.4.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • enviro...

  • Page 2496

    Coated modules • analog input modules • x20cai4632 2496 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.3.4.3 technical data product id x20cai4632 short description i/o module 4 analog inputs, ±10 v or 0 to 20 ma general information b&r id code 0xe1f0 status indicators i/o function per channel, operating state, mod...

  • Page 2497

    Coated modules • analog input modules • x20cai4632 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2497 product id x20cai4632 nonlinearity voltage 4) current 5) isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 v eff operating conditions mounting orientation horizontal yes vertical yes installation at elevations above se...

  • Page 2498

    Coated modules • analog input modules • x20cai4632-1 2498 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.3.5 x20cai4632-1 5.3.5.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • en...

  • Page 2499

    Coated modules • analog input modules • x20cai4632-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2499 5.3.5.3 technical data product id x20cai4632-1 short description i/o module 4 analog inputs, ±11 v or 0 to 22 ma general information b&r id code 0xd57a status indicators i/o function per channel, operating state,...

  • Page 2500

    Coated modules • analog input modules • x20cai4632-1 2500 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20cai4632-1 nonlinearity voltage 4) current 5) isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 v eff operating conditions mounting orientation horizontal yes vertical yes installation at elevations abov...

  • Page 2501

    Coated modules • analog input modules • x20cap3121 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2501 5.3.6 x20cap3121 5.3.6.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • enviro...

  • Page 2502

    Coated modules • analog input modules • x20cap3121 2502 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20cap3121 max. Display value 655 vac resolution 10 mv, with voltage connected directly rated frequency 50 and 60 hz current inputs quantity 4 ac inputs nominal current secondary 1 a primary 65 a directl...

  • Page 2503

    Coated modules • analog output modules • brief information x20 system user's manual 3.10 2503 5.4 analog output modules analog output modules convert plc internal numerical values into voltages or currents. The numerical values which are to be converted must be in 16-bit 2s complement. The conversio...

  • Page 2504

    Coated modules • analog output modules • x20cao2437 2504 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.4.2 x20cao2437 5.4.2.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • envir...

  • Page 2505

    Coated modules • analog output modules • x20cao2437 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2505 product id x20cao2437 max. Error at 25°c gain 4 to 20 ma 0.025% 1) 0 to 20 ma 0.022% 1) 0 to 24 ma 0.020% 1) offset 4 to 20 ma 0.025% 2) 0 to 20 ma 0.022% 2) 0 to 24 ma 0.020% 2) output protection short circuit pr...

  • Page 2506

    Coated modules • analog output modules • x20cao2438 2506 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.4.3 x20cao2438 5.4.3.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • envir...

  • Page 2507

    Coated modules • analog output modules • x20cao2438 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2507 5.4.3.3 technical data product id x20cao2438 brief description i/o module 2 analog outputs 4 to 20 ma, 0 to 20 ma or 0 to 24 ma general information b&r id code 0xe211 status indicators i/o function per channel, op...

  • Page 2508

    Coated modules • analog output modules • x20cao2438 2508 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20cao2438 transmission amplitude minimum 400 mv pp typical 500 mv pp maximum 600 mv pp receiving amplitude minimum 120 mv pp maximum 1500 mv pp operating conditions mounting orientation horizontal yes ...

  • Page 2509

    Coated modules • analog output modules • x20cao4622 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2509 5.4.4 x20cao4622 5.4.4.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • envir...

  • Page 2510

    Coated modules • analog output modules • x20cao4622 2510 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20cao4622 power on/off behavior internal enable relay for booting max. Error at 25°c voltage gain 0.080% 1) offset 0.050% 2) current gain 0.090% 1) offset 0.050% 2) output protection short circuit prot...

  • Page 2511

    Coated modules • analog output modules • x20cao4632 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2511 5.4.5 x20cao4632 5.4.5.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • envir...

  • Page 2512

    Coated modules • analog output modules • x20cao4632 2512 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20cao4632 max. Error at 25°c voltage gain 0.040% 1) offset 0.022% 2) current gain 0.090% 1) offset 0.045% 2) output protection short circuit protection output format voltage int 0x8001 - 0x7fff / 1 lsb...

  • Page 2513

    Coated modules • analog output modules • x20cao4632-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2513 5.4.6 x20cao4632-1 5.4.6.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • e...

  • Page 2514

    Coated modules • analog output modules • x20cao4632-1 2514 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20cao4632-1 max. Error at 25°c voltage gain 0.05% 1) offset 0.015% 2) current gain 0.08% 1) offset 0.05% 2) output protection short circuit proof output format voltage int 0x8000 - 0x7fff / 1 lsb = 0...

  • Page 2515

    Coated modules • bus controllers • brief information x20 system user's manual 3.10 2515 5.5 bus controllers the bus controllers adhere to the completely modular strategy used for the i/o modules. Made up of a base module, a supply module to supply the voltage for the entire system, and a fieldbus in...

  • Page 2516

    Coated modules • bus controllers • x20cbc0083 2516 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.5.2 x20cbc0083 5.5.2.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • environment...

  • Page 2517

    Coated modules • bus controllers • x20cbc0083 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2517 5.5.2.3 technical data product id x20cbc0083 brief description bus controllers powerlink (v1/v2) controlled node general information b&r id code 0xe216 status indicators module status, bus function diagnostics module st...

  • Page 2518

    Coated modules • bus controllers • x20cbc0087 2518 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.5.3 x20cbc0087 5.5.3.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • environment...

  • Page 2519

    Coated modules • bus controllers • x20cbc0087 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2519 5.5.3.3 technical data product id x20cbc0087 brief description bus controllers modbus tcp/udp slave general information b&r id code 0xd577 status indicators module status, bus function diagnostics module status yes, usi...

  • Page 2520

    Coated modules • bus controllers • x20cbc0088 2520 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.5.4 x20cbc0088 5.5.4.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • environment...

  • Page 2521

    Coated modules • bus controllers • x20cbc0088 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2521 5.5.4.3 technical data product id x20cbc0088 short description bus controller ethernet/ip adapter (slave) general information b&r id code 0xe67f status indicators module status, network status, bus function diagnostics ...

  • Page 2522

    Coated modules • bus controllers system modules • brief information 2522 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.6 bus controllers system modules the x20 system bus controllers are made up of a bus controller fieldbus interface, a bus controller system module and an x20tb12 terminal block. Bus controller sy...

  • Page 2523

    Coated modules • bus controllers system modules • x20cbb80 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2523 5.6.2 x20cbb80 5.6.2.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • ...

  • Page 2524

    Coated modules • bus controllers system modules • x20cbb80 2524 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.6.2.3 technical data product id x20cbb80 brief description bus module bus base - backplane for bus controller fieldbus interface and bus controller power supply module general information power consumptio...

  • Page 2525

    Coated modules • bus controllers system modules • x20cps9400 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2525 5.6.3 x20cps9400 5.6.3.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module i...

  • Page 2526

    Coated modules • bus controllers system modules • x20cps9400 2526 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20cps9400 reverse polarity protection yes bus controller / x2x link supply output nominal output power 7.0 w parallel operation yes 2) redundant operation yes overload behavior short circuit /...

  • Page 2527

    Coated modules • bus modules • brief information x20 system user's manual 3.10 2527 5.7 bus modules in the x20 system, a bus module takes the place of a rack. Bus supply contacts bus data contacts i/o supply contacts x20bm11 x20bm01 figure 814: the bus module replaces the rack in the x20 system the ...

  • Page 2528

    Coated modules • bus modules • x20cbm01 2528 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.7.2 x20cbm01 5.7.2.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • environmental condi...

  • Page 2529

    Coated modules • bus modules • x20cbm01 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2529 5.7.2.3 technical data product id x20cbm01 brief description bus module supply bus module, internal i/o supply interrupted to the left general information power consumption bus 0.13 w internal i/o - additional power dissipati...

  • Page 2530

    Coated modules • bus modules • x20cbm11 2530 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.7.3 x20cbm11 5.7.3.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • environmental condi...

  • Page 2531

    Coated modules • bus modules • x20cbm11 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2531 5.7.3.3 technical data product id x20cbm11 brief description bus module bus module for 24 vdc i/o modules, internal i/o supply continuous general information power consumption bus 0.13 w internal i/o - additional power dissip...

  • Page 2532

    Coated modules • bus modules • x20cbm12 2532 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.7.4 x20cbm12 5.7.4.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • environmental condi...

  • Page 2533

    Coated modules • bus modules • x20cbm12 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2533 5.7.4.3 technical data product id x20cbm12 brief description bus module bus module for 240 vac i/o modules, internal i/o supply continuous general information power consumption bus 0.13 w internal i/o - additional power dissi...

  • Page 2534

    Coated modules • bus modules • x20cbm31 2534 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.7.5 x20cbm31 5.7.5.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • environmental condi...

  • Page 2535

    Coated modules • bus modules • x20cbm31 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2535 5.7.5.3 technical data product id x20cbm31 short description bus module bus module for double-width modules, 24 vdc keyed, internal i/o supply continuous general information power consumption bus 0.13 w internal i/o - additio...

  • Page 2536

    Coated modules • bus modules • x20cbm32 2536 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.7.6 x20cbm32 5.7.6.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • environmental condi...

  • Page 2537

    Coated modules • bus modules • x20cbm32 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2537 5.7.6.3 technical data product id x20cbm32 brief description bus module double-width bus module for 240 vac i/o modules, internal i/o supply continuous general information power consumption bus 0.13 w internal i/o - additiona...

  • Page 2538

    Coated modules • bus receivers and bus transmitters • brief information 2538 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.8 bus receivers and bus transmitters the bus receiver x20br9300is used to connect the x20 system directly to the remote x2x link backplane. The bus transmitter x20bt9100 is used to connect to...

  • Page 2539

    Coated modules • bus receivers and bus transmitters • x20cbr9300 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2539 5.8.2 x20cbr9300 5.8.2.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • modu...

  • Page 2540

    Coated modules • bus receivers and bus transmitters • x20cbr9300 2540 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20cbr9300 redundant operation yes overload behavior short circuit / temporary overload protection input i/o supply input voltage 24 vdc -15% / +20% fuse required line fuse: max. 10 a, slow...

  • Page 2541

    Coated modules • bus receivers and bus transmitters • x20cbt9100 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2541 5.8.3 x20cbt9100 5.8.3.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • modu...

  • Page 2542

    Coated modules • bus receivers and bus transmitters • x20cbt9100 2542 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.8.3.3 technical data product id x20cbt9100 brief description bus transmitter x2x link bus transmitter with supply for i/o general information b&r id code 0xe219 status indicators x2x bus function, o...

  • Page 2543

    Coated modules • counter modules • brief information x20 system user's manual 3.10 2543 5.9 counter modules counter modules are used for position detection. Each signal on a counter module is assigned to a status led. 5.9.1 brief information product id short description on page x20cdc1198 x20 digita...

  • Page 2544

    Coated modules • counter modules • x20cdc1198 2544 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.9.2 x20cdc1198 5.9.2.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • environment...

  • Page 2545

    Coated modules • counter modules • x20cdc1198 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2545 product id x20cdc1198 connection type 3-wire connections input circuit sink input resistance 7.19 kΩ switching threshold low high >15 vdc isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 v eff ssi absolute encoder encoder ...

  • Page 2546

    Coated modules • counter modules • x20cdc1396 2546 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.9.3 x20cdc1396 5.9.3.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • environment...

  • Page 2547

    Coated modules • counter modules • x20cdc1396 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2547 product id x20cdc1396 input circuit sink input current at 24 vdc approx. 3.3 ma input resistance 7.19 kΩ isolation voltage between home enable switch and bus 500 v eff switching threshold low high >15 vdc abr incrementa...

  • Page 2548

    Coated modules • counter modules • x20cdc2395 2548 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.9.4 x20cdc2395 5.9.4.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • environment...

  • Page 2549

    Coated modules • counter modules • x20cdc2395 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2549 5.9.4.3 technical data product id x20cdc2395 short description i/o module 1 ssi absolute encoder, 24 v, 1 abr incremental encoder, 24 v, 2 ab incremental encoders, 24 v, 4x event counters or 2x pulse width modulation, t...

  • Page 2550

    Coated modules • counter modules • x20cdc2395 2550 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20cdc2395 digital outputs design push / pull / push-pull quantity 2 nominal voltage 24 vdc switching voltage 24 vdc -15% / +20% nominal output current 0.1 a total nominal current 0.2 a output circuit sink or...

  • Page 2551

    Coated modules • x20 cpus • brief information x20 system user's manual 3.10 2551 5.10 x20 cpus the x20 cpus are a powerful addition to the x20 system. With the exception of the entry level model, all cpus are based on intel atom ™ processors, which are available in various performance classes. Each ...

  • Page 2552

    Coated modules • x20 cpus • x20ccpx58x 2552 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.10.2 x20ccpx58x 5.10.2.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • environmental co...

  • Page 2553

    Coated modules • x20 cpus • x20ccpx58x x20 system user's manual 3.10 2553 product id x20ccp1584 x20ccp3584 x20ccp1586 x20ccp3586 system module cpu general information cooling fanless b&r id code 0xe21b 0xe21d 0xe21c 0xe21e status indicators cpu function, overtemperature, ethernet, powerlink, compact...

  • Page 2554

    Coated modules • x20 cpus • x20ccpx58x 2554 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20ccp1584 x20ccp3584 x20ccp1586 x20ccp3586 real-time clock nonvolatile memory, resolution 1 second fpu yes processor type atom™ e620t atom™ e680t clock frequency 0.6 ghz 1.6 ghz l1 cache data code 24 kb program cod...

  • Page 2555

    Coated modules • x20 cpus • x20ccpx58x x20 system user's manual 3.10 2555 product id x20ccp1584 x20ccp3584 x20ccp1586 x20ccp3586 relative humidity operation up to 100%, condensing storage 5 to 95%, non-condensing transport 5 to 95%, non-condensing mechanical characteristics note order application me...

  • Page 2556

    Coated modules • digital input modules • brief information 2556 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.11 digital input modules digital input modules convert binary process signals into the internal signal level required by the plc. The states of the digital inputs are indicated with status leds. 5.11.1 br...

  • Page 2557

    Coated modules • digital input modules • x20cdi4371 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2557 5.11.2 x20cdi4371 5.11.2.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • env...

  • Page 2558

    Coated modules • digital input modules • x20cdi4371 2558 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20cdi4371 input resistance typ. 6.4 kΩ switching threshold low high >15 vdc isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 v eff event counter quantity 4 signal form square wave pulse evaluation configu...

  • Page 2559

    Coated modules • digital input modules • x20cdi4375 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2559 5.11.3 x20cdi4375 5.11.3.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • env...

  • Page 2560

    Coated modules • digital input modules • x20cdi4375 2560 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.11.3.3 technical data product id x20cdi4375 brief description i/o module four 24 vdc digital inputs for 3-wire connections, open line and short cir- cuit detection, detection can be switched off individually for...

  • Page 2561

    Coated modules • digital input modules • x20cdi4760 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2561 5.11.4 x20cdi4760 5.11.4.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • env...

  • Page 2562

    Coated modules • digital input modules • x20cdi4760 2562 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20cdi4760 input frequency 1 input active max. 1600 hz 2 inputs active max. 1100 hz 3 inputs active max. 870 hz 4 inputs active max. 680 hz namur inputs open line detection input circuit for namur encod...

  • Page 2563

    Coated modules • digital input modules • x20cdi6371 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2563 5.11.5 x20cdi6371 5.11.5.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • env...

  • Page 2564

    Coated modules • digital input modules • x20cdi6371 2564 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.11.5.3 technical data product id x20cdi6371 brief description i/o module 6 digital inputs 24 vdc in 1-wire or 2-wire connections general information b&r id code 0xe222 status indicators i/o function per channel,...

  • Page 2565

    Coated modules • digital input modules • x20cdi9371 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2565 5.11.6 x20cdi9371 5.11.6.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • env...

  • Page 2566

    Coated modules • digital input modules • x20cdi9371 2566 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.11.6.3 technical data product id x20cdi9371 brief description i/o module 12 digital inputs 24 vdc for 1-wire connections general information b&r id code 0xd574 status indicators i/o function per channel, operati...

  • Page 2567

    Coated modules • digital input modules • x20cdi9372 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2567 5.11.7 x20cdi9372 5.11.7.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • env...

  • Page 2568

    Coated modules • digital input modules • x20cdi9372 2568 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.11.7.3 technical data product id x20cdi9372 brief description i/o module 12 digital inputs 24 vdc for 1-wire connections general information b&r id code 0xe224 status indicators i/o function per channel, operati...

  • Page 2569

    Coated modules • digital mixed modules • brief information x20 system user's manual 3.10 2569 5.12 digital mixed modules digital mixed modules are a combination of digital input and output modules. The states of the digital inputs or outputs are shown by the status leds. 5.12.1 brief information pro...

  • Page 2570

    Coated modules • digital mixed modules • x20cdm9324 2570 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.12.2 x20cdm9324 5.12.2.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • env...

  • Page 2571

    Coated modules • digital mixed modules • x20cdm9324 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2571 product id x20cdm9324 switching threshold low high >15 vdc isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 v eff digital outputs design fet positive switching switching voltage 24 vdc -15% / +20% nominal output curr...

  • Page 2572

    Coated modules • digital output modules • brief information 2572 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.13 digital output modules digital output modules are used to control external loads (relays, motors, solenoids). The states of the digital outputs are indicated by status leds. 5.13.1 brief information p...

  • Page 2573

    Coated modules • digital output modules • x20cdo4332 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2573 5.13.2 x20cdo4332 5.13.2.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • en...

  • Page 2574

    Coated modules • digital output modules • x20cdo4332 2574 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20cdo4332 diagnostic status output monitoring with 10 ms delay leakage current when switched off 5 µa r ds(on) 100 mΩ (rev. Max. Continuous current 8.0 a peak short circuit current switching on after ...

  • Page 2575

    Coated modules • digital output modules • x20cdo6321 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2575 5.13.3 x20cdo6321 5.13.3.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • en...

  • Page 2576

    Coated modules • digital output modules • x20cdo6321 2576 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20cdo6321 diagnostic status output monitoring with 10 ms delay leakage current when switched off 75 µa r ds(on) 120 mΩ peak short circuit current switching on after overload or short circuit cutoff ca...

  • Page 2577

    Coated modules • digital output modules • x20cdo6639 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2577 5.13.4 x20cdo6639 5.13.4.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • en...

  • Page 2578

    Coated modules • digital output modules • x20cdo6639 2578 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20cdo6639 actuator supply external contact resistance 15 mΩ at 6 vdc / 1a switching delay 0 -> 1 ≤10 ms 1 -> 0 ≤10 ms isolation voltage contact - contact tested at 750 vac contact - coil tested at 230...

  • Page 2579

    Coated modules • digital output modules • x20cdo8331 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2579 5.13.5 x20cdo8331 5.13.5.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • en...

  • Page 2580

    Coated modules • digital output modules • x20cdo8331 2580 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20cdo8331 output circuit sink output protection thermal cutoff for overcurrent or short circuit (see value "peak short circuit current") internal inverse diode for switching ind. Loads (see section "s...

  • Page 2581

    Coated modules • digital output modules • x20cdo9321 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2581 5.13.6 x20cdo9321 5.13.6.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • en...

  • Page 2582

    Coated modules • digital output modules • x20cdo9321 2582 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20cdo9321 diagnostic status output monitoring with 10 ms delay leakage current when switched off 75 µa r ds(on) 120 mΩ peak short circuit current switching on after overload or short circuit cutoff ca...

  • Page 2583

    Coated modules • digital output modules • x20cdo9322 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2583 5.13.7 x20cdo9322 5.13.7.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • en...

  • Page 2584

    Coated modules • digital output modules • x20cdo9322 2584 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20cdo9322 leakage current when switched off 5 µa r ds(on) 210 mΩ max. Continuous current 6 a peak short circuit current switching on after overload or short circuit cutoff ca. 10 ms (depends on the mo...

  • Page 2585

    Coated modules • digital signal processing modules • brief information x20 system user's manual 3.10 2585 5.14 digital signal processing modules the highly flexible digital signal processor modules can be implemented for a wide range of tasks involving the creation or processing of digital signals. ...

  • Page 2586

    Coated modules • digital signal processing modules • x20cds1119 2586 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.14.2 x20cds1119 5.14.2.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • mod...

  • Page 2587

    Coated modules • digital signal processing modules • x20cds1119 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2587 5.14.2.3 technical data product id x20cds1119 brief description i/o module 3 digital 5 v (symmetric) input channels configurable as inputs or outputs, 2 digital 24 v (asymmet- ric) input channels, 1 un...

  • Page 2588

    Coated modules • digital signal processing modules • x20cds1119 2588 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20cds1119 evaluation ab counter 4x event counter 2x up/down counter 2x encoder supply 5 vdc module-internal, max. 300 ma 24 vdc module-internal, max. 300 ma digital outputs 5 vdc quantity u...

  • Page 2589

    Coated modules • x20 electronics module communication • brief information x20 system user's manual 3.10 2589 5.15 x20 electronics module communication the cs modules allow complex devices to be remotely connected to the x20 system via a serial interface. 5.15.1 brief information product id short des...

  • Page 2590

    Coated modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20ccs1030 2590 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.15.2 x20ccs1030 5.15.2.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • ...

  • Page 2591

    Coated modules • x20 electronics module communication • x20ccs1030 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2591 5.15.2.3 technical data product id x20ccs1030 short description communication module 1x rs485/rs422 general information b&r id code 0xe500 status indicators data transfer, terminating resistor, oper...

  • Page 2592

    Coated modules • expandable bus controllers • brief information 2592 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.16 expandable bus controllers the expandable bus controller is based on the powerlink bus controller x20bcx083. The bus modules expand- ed to the left allow connection of up to two interface or hub e...

  • Page 2593

    Coated modules • expandable bus controllers • x20cbc1083 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2593 5.16.2 x20cbc1083 5.16.2.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id ...

  • Page 2594

    Coated modules • expandable bus controllers • x20cbc1083 2594 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.16.2.3 technical data product id x20cbc1083 short description bus controller powerlink (v1/v2) controlled node with up to two slots for interface modules general information b&r id code 0xe217 status indica...

  • Page 2595

    Coated modules • expandable bus controllers • x20cbc8083 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2595 5.16.3 x20cbc8083 5.16.3.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id ...

  • Page 2596

    Coated modules • expandable bus controllers • x20cbc8083 2596 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.16.3.3 technical data product id x20cbc8083 brief description bus controllers powerlink (v1/v2) controlled node with up to two slots for hub expansion modules general information b&r id code 0xe218 status i...

  • Page 2597

    Coated modules • expandable bus controllers • x20cbc8084 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2597 5.16.4 x20cbc8084 5.16.4.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id ...

  • Page 2598

    Coated modules • expandable bus controllers • x20cbc8084 2598 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.16.4.3 technical data product id x20cbc8084 brief description bus controllers powerlink (v1/v2) controlled node with compact link selector general information b&r id code 0xdf10 status indicators module sta...

  • Page 2599

    Coated modules • expandable bus controllers system modules • brief information x20 system user's manual 3.10 2599 5.17 expandable bus controllers system modules the expandable x20 bus controllers are made up of a bus controller fieldbus interface, a bus controller system module and an x20tb12 termin...

  • Page 2600

    Coated modules • expandable bus controllers system modules • x20cbb81 2600 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.17.2 x20cbb81 5.17.2.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number •...

  • Page 2601

    Coated modules • expandable bus controllers system modules • x20cbb81 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2601 5.17.2.3 technical data product id x20cbb81 brief description bus module bus base with one expansion slot general information power consumption bus 0.35 w internal i/o - additional power dissipat...

  • Page 2602

    Coated modules • expandable bus controllers system modules • x20cbb82 2602 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.17.3 x20cbb82 5.17.3.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number •...

  • Page 2603

    Coated modules • expandable bus controllers system modules • x20cbb82 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2603 5.17.3.3 technical data product id x20cbb82 brief description bus module bus base with two expansion slots general information power consumption bus 0.35 w internal i/o - additional power dissipa...

  • Page 2604

    Coated modules • x20 hub system • brief information 2604 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.18 x20 hub system the x20hb8880 hub is a device that can be used universally in standard ethernet networks or powerlink net- works. It is suitable for 100 mbit/s (fast ethernet) networks. Due to its modular stru...

  • Page 2605

    Coated modules • x20 hub system • x20chb8880 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2605 5.18.2 x20chb8880 5.18.2.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • environmen...

  • Page 2606

    Coated modules • x20 hub system • x20chb8880 2606 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.18.2.3 technical data product id x20chb8880 brief description hub modular x20 hub with up to 2 slots for hub expansion modules: general information status indicators module status, bus function diagnostics module statu...

  • Page 2607

    Coated modules • motor controllers • brief information x20 system user's manual 3.10 2607 5.19 motor controllers the motor controllers offer extensive possibilities for controlling motors, valves or resistive loads and are particularly well suited for controlling brush dc motors. Each output is assi...

  • Page 2608

    Coated modules • motor controllers • x20cmm2436 2608 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.19.2 x20cmm2436 5.19.2.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • environ...

  • Page 2609

    Coated modules • motor controllers • x20cmm2436 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2609 product id x20cmm2436 connection type 1-wire connections input circuit sink additional functions 2x ab incremental encoder, 1x abr counter, 2x event counter, 2x period duration/gate measurement input resistance typ. 1...

  • Page 2610

    Coated modules • x20 interface module communication • brief information 2610 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.20 x20 interface module communication the interface modules are added to the x20 cpu as an application-specific interface expansion. 5.20.1 brief information product id short description on p...

  • Page 2611

    Coated modules • x20 interface module communication • x20cif1030 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2611 5.20.2 x20cif1030 5.20.2.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • mo...

  • Page 2612

    Coated modules • x20 interface module communication • x20cif1030 2612 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.20.2.3 technical data product id x20cif1030 brief description communication module 1x rs485/rs422 general information b&r id code 0xe233 status indicators module status, data transfer diagnostics mo...

  • Page 2613

    Coated modules • x20 interface module communication • x20cif1061-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2613 5.20.3 x20cif1061-1 5.20.3.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number ...

  • Page 2614

    Coated modules • x20 interface module communication • x20cif1061-1 2614 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.20.3.3 technical data product id x20cif1061-1 brief description communication module 1x profibus dp v0/v1 master general information b&r id code 0xe234 status indicators module status, data transf...

  • Page 2615

    Coated modules • x20 interface module communication • x20cif1063-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2615 5.20.4 x20cif1063-1 5.20.4.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number ...

  • Page 2616

    Coated modules • x20 interface module communication • x20cif1063-1 2616 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.20.4.3 technical data product id x20cif1063-1 brief description communication module 1x profibus dp v0/v1 slave general information b&r id code 0xe235 status indicators module status, data transfe...

  • Page 2617

    Coated modules • x20 interface module communication • x20cif1082-2 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2617 5.20.5 x20cif1082-2 5.20.5.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number ...

  • Page 2618

    Coated modules • x20 interface module communication • x20cif1082-2 2618 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.20.5.3 technical data product id x20cif1082-2 brief description communication module 1x powerlink (v1/v2) managing or controlled node general information b&r id code 0xe236 status indicators modul...

  • Page 2619

    Coated modules • x20 interface module communication • x20cif10d3-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2619 5.20.6 x20cif10d3-1 5.20.6.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number ...

  • Page 2620

    Coated modules • x20 interface module communication • x20cif10d3-1 2620 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.20.6.3 technical data product id x20cif10d3-1 brief description communication module ethernet/ip adapter (slave) general information b&r id code 0xe237 status indicators module status, network sta...

  • Page 2621

    Coated modules • x20 interface module communication • x20cif10e3-1 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2621 5.20.7 x20cif10e3-1 5.20.7.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number ...

  • Page 2622

    Coated modules • x20 interface module communication • x20cif10e3-1 2622 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.20.7.3 technical data product id x20cif10e3-1 brief description communication module profinet rt device (slave) general information b&r id code 0xe238 status indicators module status, network stat...

  • Page 2623

    Coated modules • x20 interface module communication • x20cif10x0 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2623 5.20.8 x20cif10x0 5.20.8.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • mo...

  • Page 2624

    Coated modules • x20 interface module communication • x20cif10x0 2624 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.20.8.3 technical data product id x20cif10x0 short description communication module cpu redundancy link module general information b&r id code 0xe239 status indicators module status, bus function dia...

  • Page 2625

    Coated modules • x20 interface module communication • x20cif2181-2 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2625 5.20.9 x20cif2181-2 5.20.9.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number ...

  • Page 2626

    Coated modules • x20 interface module communication • x20cif2181-2 2626 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.20.9.3 technical data product id x20cif2181-2 brief description communication module 1x powerlink managing or controlled node general information b&r id code 0xe23a status indicators module status...

  • Page 2627

    Coated modules • other functions • brief information x20 system user's manual 3.10 2627 5.21 other functions the following modules are included in this module group: • multi-measurement transformers / synchronization modules • universal mixed modules and combination modules • diode array modules • p...

  • Page 2628

    Coated modules • other functions • x20cpd2113 2628 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.21.2 x20cpd2113 5.21.2.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • environme...

  • Page 2629

    Coated modules • other functions • x20cpd2113 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2629 5.21.2.3 technical data product id x20cpd2113 brief description potential distributor module with feed 6x 24 vdc on the terminals, 6x ground on the terminals general information b&r id code 0xe23b status indicators oper...

  • Page 2630

    Coated modules • power supply modules • brief information 2630 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.22 power supply modules the internal i/os and the x2x link are fed by the supply modules. 5.22.1 brief information product id short description on page x20cps2100 x20 power supply module, coated, for inter...

  • Page 2631

    Coated modules • power supply modules • x20cps2100 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2631 5.22.2 x20cps2100 5.22.2.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • envi...

  • Page 2632

    Coated modules • power supply modules • x20cps2100 2632 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.22.2.3 technical data product id x20cps2100 brief description power supply module 24 vdc supply module for internal i/o supply general information b&r id code 0xe23c status indicators operating state, module stat...

  • Page 2633

    Coated modules • power supply modules • x20cps2110 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2633 5.22.3 x20cps2110 5.22.3.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • envi...

  • Page 2634

    Coated modules • power supply modules • x20cps2110 2634 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.22.3.3 technical data product id x20cps2110 brief description power supply module 24 vdc supply module for internal i/o supply general information b&r id code 0xe23d status indicators operating state, module stat...

  • Page 2635

    Coated modules • power supply modules • x20cps3300 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2635 5.22.4 x20cps3300 5.22.4.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • envi...

  • Page 2636

    Coated modules • power supply modules • x20cps3300 2636 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20cps3300 redundant operation yes overload behavior short circuit / temporary overload protection input i/o supply input voltage 24 vdc -15% / +20% fuse required line fuse: max. 10 a, slow-blow reverse ...

  • Page 2637

    Coated modules • power supply modules • x20cps3310 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2637 5.22.5 x20cps3310 5.22.5.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • envi...

  • Page 2638

    Coated modules • power supply modules • x20cps3310 2638 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20cps3310 overload behavior short circuit / temporary overload protection input i/o supply input voltage 24 vdc -15% / +20% input current max. 6.0 a fuse integrated 6.3 a, slow-blow, can be replaced rev...

  • Page 2639

    Coated modules • x20 redundancy system • brief information x20 system user's manual 3.10 2639 5.23 x20 redundancy system redundant network cabling is often essential to safe operation, especially in processing plants. The potential for danger, especially to the lines that run through the plant, can ...

  • Page 2640

    Coated modules • x20 redundancy system • x20chb8884 2640 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.23.2 x20chb8884 5.23.2.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • env...

  • Page 2641

    Coated modules • x20 redundancy system • x20chb8884 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2641 5.23.2.3 technical data product id x20chb8884 short description powerlink compact link selector connecting powerlink devices to a redundant powerlink network general information status indicators module status, bu...

  • Page 2642

    Coated modules • system modules for the x20 hub system • brief information 2642 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.24 system modules for the x20 hub system the x20 hub system has a modular structure. In addition to the basis modules, the following system modules are also required, • bus base • hub expa...

  • Page 2643

    Coated modules • system modules for the x20 hub system • x20chb1881 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2643 5.24.2 x20chb1881 5.24.2.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number •...

  • Page 2644

    Coated modules • system modules for the x20 hub system • x20chb1881 2644 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.24.2.3 technical data product id x20chb1881 short description hub 1 fast ethernet interface for fiber optic cable for hub expansion general information status indicators module status, bus functi...

  • Page 2645

    Coated modules • system modules for the x20 hub system • x20chb2880 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2645 5.24.3 x20chb2880 5.24.3.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number •...

  • Page 2646

    Coated modules • system modules for the x20 hub system • x20chb2880 2646 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.24.3.3 technical data product id x20chb2880 brief description hub 2x fast ethernet hub for hub expansion general information status indicators module status, bus function diagnostics module statu...

  • Page 2647

    Coated modules • system modules for the x20 hub system • x20chb2881 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2647 5.24.4 x20chb2881 5.24.4.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number •...

  • Page 2648

    Coated modules • system modules for the x20 hub system • x20chb2881 2648 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.24.4.3 technical data product id x20chb2881 brief description hub two fast ethernet fiber optic ports for hub expansion general information status indicators module status, bus function diagnosti...

  • Page 2649

    Coated modules • system modules for the x20 hub system • x20cps8002 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2649 5.24.5 x20cps8002 5.24.5.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number •...

  • Page 2650

    Coated modules • system modules for the x20 hub system • x20cps8002 2650 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.24.5.3 technical data product id x20cps8002 short description power supply module 24 vdc supply module for x20 stand alone devices general information status indicators operating state, module st...

  • Page 2651

    Coated modules • system modules for the x20 redundancy system • brief information x20 system user's manual 3.10 2651 5.25 system modules for the x20 redundancy system the x20 redundancy system has a modular structure. In addition to the basis modules, the following system mod- ules are also required...

  • Page 2652

    Coated modules • system modules for the x20 redundancy system • x20chb2885 2652 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.25.2 x20chb2885 5.25.2.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model n...

  • Page 2653

    Coated modules • system modules for the x20 redundancy system • x20chb2885 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2653 5.25.2.3 technical data product id x20chb2885 brief description hub 2 fast ethernet hubs for redundant wiring general information status indicators module status, bus function diagnostics mo...

  • Page 2654

    Coated modules • temperature modules • brief information 2654 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.26 temperature modules temperature measurement values are converted into number values which can be processed by the plc using temperature modules. In the plc, the number values are always in 16-bit 2s comp...

  • Page 2655

    Coated modules • temperature modules • x20cat4222 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2655 5.26.2 x20cat4222 5.26.2.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • envir...

  • Page 2656

    Coated modules • temperature modules • x20cat4222 2656 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.26.2.3 technical data product id x20cat4222 brief description i/o module 4 inputs for pt100 or pt1000 resistance temperature measurement general information b&r id code 0xe215 status indicators i/o function per ch...

  • Page 2657

    Coated modules • temperature modules • x20cat4222 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2657 product id x20cat4222 temperature measurement monitoring range exceeded (neg.) 0x8001 above upper range limit 0x7fff open line 0x7fff general error 0x8000 open inputs 0x7fff resistance measurement monitoring above u...

  • Page 2658

    Coated modules • temperature modules • x20cat6402 2658 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5.26.3 x20cat6402 5.26.3.1 general information with regard to hardware and software, this module is identical to the uncoated module of the same name. The only differences are the: • model number • module id • envir...

  • Page 2659

    Coated modules • temperature modules • x20cat6402 x20 system user's manual 3.10 2659 5.26.3.3 technical data product id x20cat6402 short description i/o module 6 inputs for thermocouples general information b&r id code 0xdd57 status indicators i/o function per channel, operating state, module status...

  • Page 2660

    Coated modules • temperature modules • x20cat6402 2660 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id x20cat6402 common-mode rejection dc >70 db 50 hz >70 db common-mode range ±15 v crosstalk between channels non-linearity ±0.001% 3) isolation voltage between channel and bus 500 v eff terminal temperature...

  • Page 2661: 6 Accessories

    Accessories x20 system user's manual 3.10 2661 6 accessories 6.1 additional equipment for x20 modules accessories available for the x20 modules include a plain text tag, an accessory locking clip and a tag holder. Installation of these accessories is described in the section 7.7 "installing accessor...

  • Page 2662

    Accessories 2662 x20 system user's manual 3.10 6.1.1 tag holders, terminal locking clips model number short description figure tag holders, terminal locking clips x20ac0sc1 x20 terminal locking clip and tag holder for plain text tag x20ac0sc1.0100 x20 terminal locking clip and tag holder for plain t...

  • Page 2663

    Accessories x20 system user's manual 3.10 2663 6.2 locking plates the locking plate protects the modules on the outside against dirt and damage. Model number short description figure locking plates x20ac0sl1 x20 locking plate, left x20ac0sr1 x20 locking plate, right x20ac0sl1.0010 x20 locking plate,...

  • Page 2664

    Accessories 2664 x20 system user's manual 3.10 6.5 terminal labeling each terminal connection is identified clearly directly on the terminal. It is also possible to attach tags to label the terminals individually. The labeling tool is needed for attachment (see 7.8 "label tags"). X20ac0m0x / x20ac0m...

  • Page 2665

    Accessories x20 system user's manual 3.10 2665 6.8 powerlink cables pre-assembled powerlink cables with various lengths and connector combinations (rj45 to rj45, rj45 to m12) ensure quick connectivity, thus saving time setting up the system. 6.8.1 rj45 to rj45 not for use in cable drag chains model ...

  • Page 2666

    Accessories 2666 x20 system user's manual 3.10 6.9 x2x link cables 6.9.1 x2x link connection cable pre-assembled model number short description figure x2x link cables x20ca0x68.0003 x2x link connection cable, 0.3 m x20ca0x68.0010 x2x link connection cable, 1 m x20ca0x68.0020 x2x link connection cabl...

  • Page 2667: 7 Mechanical Handling

    Mechanical handling x20 system user's manual 3.10 2667 7 mechanical handling 7.1 solid mechanics with all the advantages that the three-part modularity of the x20 system offers, one emphasis has always been solid mechanical design. Its robust design, long guides and strengthened housing guarantee th...

  • Page 2668: Information:

    Mechanical handling 2668 x20 system user's manual 3.10 7.3 assembling an x20 system there are several ways to assemble an x20 system. Two methods are described below: assembling an x20 system description variant 1 the x20 system is completely assembled and then installed on the top-hat rail. Variant...

  • Page 2669

    Mechanical handling x20 system user's manual 3.10 2669 7.3.1 variant 1 the x20 system is completely assembled and then installed on the top-hat rail. 1. Remove x20 modules from protective packaging. Check modules for obvious mechanical damages. 2. Insert electronic module in the guides on the bus mo...

  • Page 2670

    Mechanical handling 2670 x20 system user's manual 3.10 5. Rotate the terminal block up into place. Figure 820: rotate the terminal block up into place 6. The terminal block latch must close with an audible click. If the latch does not catch, the lever must be pushed up. "click" figure 821: if the la...

  • Page 2671

    Mechanical handling x20 system user's manual 3.10 2671 12.Insert the right locking plate into the guides on the bus module from the front and push it all the way in. Figure 823: insert the right locking plate into the guides on the bus module from the front 13.Insert the electronic module into the b...

  • Page 2672

    Mechanical handling 2672 x20 system user's manual 3.10 7.3.2 variant 2 the x20 system is installed and assembled directly on the top-hat rail. 1. Remove x20 modules from protective packaging. Check modules for obvious mechanical damages. 2. Push the locking lever all the way up on all of the bus mod...

  • Page 2673

    Mechanical handling x20 system user's manual 3.10 2673 8. Push the electronic module and the bus module flush together. Figure 828: push the electronic module and the bus module flush together 9. Proceed like this until the second to last electronic module. 10.Insert the right locking plate into the...

  • Page 2674

    Mechanical handling 2674 x20 system user's manual 3.10 13.Rotate the terminal block up into place. Figure 831: rotate the terminal block up into place 14.The terminal block latch must close with an audible click. If the latch does not catch, the lever must be pushed up. "click" figure 832: if the la...

  • Page 2675

    Mechanical handling x20 system user's manual 3.10 2675 7.4 installing the x20 system on the top-hat rail complete the following steps to install an assembled x20 system on the top-hat rail. 1. Push the locking lever all the way up on all of the bus modules. This opens the locking mechanism for top- ...

  • Page 2676

    Mechanical handling 2676 x20 system user's manual 3.10 7.5 removing the x20 system from the top-hat rail 7.5.1 remove the entire system from the top-hat rail 1. Push the locking lever all the way up on all of the bus modules. This opens the locking mechanism for top- hat rail installation. Locking m...

  • Page 2677

    Mechanical handling x20 system user's manual 3.10 2677 7.5.2 removing a block of modules from the top-hat rail 1. Push the locking lever all the way up on all of the modules that you wish to remove from the top-hat rail. This opens the locking mechanism for top-hat rail installation. Locking mechani...

  • Page 2678

    Mechanical handling 2678 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4. Put the removed terminal block back on the module. To do this, hang the bottom in place in the bus module. Figure 839: hang the bottom edge of the terminal block in its place on the bus module 5. Rotate the terminal block up into place. Figur...

  • Page 2679

    Mechanical handling x20 system user's manual 3.10 2679 7.6 expanding an x20 system if you want to expand an existing x20 system to the right, the right locking plate must be removed. 1. Remove the terminal block from the rightmost module. To do this, push down on the locking lever on the terminal bl...

  • Page 2680

    Mechanical handling 2680 x20 system user's manual 3.10 7.7 installing accessories 7.7.1 additional locking mechanisms some specific areas require additional locking mechanisms to prevent accidental release of the mechanical components. 7.7.1.1 accessory locking clips the accessory locking clip attac...

  • Page 2681

    Mechanical handling x20 system user's manual 3.10 2681 7.7.1.2 terminal locking clip the terminal locking clip attaches the terminal block securely to the electronic module. 1. Set the terminal locking clip on the terminal block locking lever as shown. Figure 846: set the terminal locking clip on th...

  • Page 2682

    Mechanical handling 2682 x20 system user's manual 3.10 4. Rotate the terminal block up into place. Figure 849: rotate the terminal block up into place 5. Secure the terminal block in the electronic module by pushing in the terminal locking clip. Figure 850: secure the terminal block in the electroni...

  • Page 2683

    Mechanical handling x20 system user's manual 3.10 2683 7.7.2 plain text tags tags are available for x20 modules into which plain text slide-in labels can be inserted. The tags are attached to the terminal locking clips. 1. Hold the plain text tag at a 90° angle to the terminal locking clip. 2. Push ...

  • Page 2684

    Mechanical handling 2684 x20 system user's manual 3.10 7.8 label tags label tags can serve the following purposes: labeling the terminal connection labeling the module labeling the terminal blocks labeling the terminals the labeling tool is needed to attach the label tags. Figure 853: labeling tool.

  • Page 2685

    Mechanical handling x20 system user's manual 3.10 2685 7.8.1 labeling the terminal connection this section explains how to label the terminal connection. The terminal connection, terminal blocks and modules are labeled in a similar manner. Figure 854: terminal block with label tags 1. Grip the desir...

  • Page 2686

    Mechanical handling 2686 x20 system user's manual 3.10 3. Center the label tags over the slot on the terminal block. Figure 857: center the label tags over the slot 4. Hold the labeling tool at approximately an 80° angle to the terminal block. ≈80 ° figure 858: hold the labeling tool at an approxima...

  • Page 2687

    Mechanical handling x20 system user's manual 3.10 2687 7.8.2 labeling the terminals to prevent errors, the x20 terminal blocks can be coded. This helps prevent terminal blocks from being inserted in the wrong electronic module. Figure 860: terminal coding helps prevent errors from the start. 1. Grip...

  • Page 2688

    Mechanical handling 2688 x20 system user's manual 3.10 6. Use the labeling tool to push the left feet of the label into the slot. Figure 863: press left feet of the label into the holes 7. With the labeling tool, press the right feet of the label into the slot. Figure 864: press right feet of the la...

  • Page 2689: Information:

    Standards and certifications x20 system user's manual 3.10 2689 8 standards and certifications 8.1 directives and explanations ce mark product complies with all applicable directives and their harmonized en standards. Emc directive these devices meet the requirements of ec directive "electromagnetic...

  • Page 2690: Information:

    Standards and certifications 2690 x20 system user's manual 3.10 8.2 certifications products and services from b&r comply with applicable standards. They are international standards from organi- zations such as iso, iec and cenelec, as well as national standards from organizations such as ul, csa, gl...

  • Page 2691

    Standards and certifications x20 system user's manual 3.10 2691 gost-r products with this mark have been tested by an accredited testing laboratory and approved for import to the russian federation (based on eu compliance). Eac products with this mark have been tested by an accredited testing labora...

  • Page 2692: Appendix A Abbreviations

    Appendix a 2692 x20 system user's manual 3.10 appendix a abbreviations a.1 general information abbreviations appear throughout this user's manual in technical data tables or descriptions of pinouts, for example. A.2 overview abbreviation stands for description normally closed a normally closed relay...

  • Page 2693: Appendix B B&r Id Codes

    Appendix b x20 system user's manual 3.10 2693 appendix b b&r id codes b.1 general information this appendix contains two overviews of b&r id codes: • b&r id codes sorted by id code • b&r id codes sorted by model number the b&r id code is displayed in automation studio for error messages, for example...

  • Page 2694

    Appendix b 2694 x20 system user's manual 3.10 b.2 b&r id codes sorted by id code product id b&r id code (hex.) b&r id code (dec.) on page x20di2371 0x1b8d 7053 936 x20di2377 0x1b8e 7054 948 x20di4371 0x1b92 7058 962 x20di6371 0x1b93 7059 1001 x20di6372 0x1b94 7060 1007 x20di9371 0x1b95 7061 1031 x20...

  • Page 2695

    Appendix b x20 system user's manual 3.10 2695 product id b&r id code (hex.) b&r id code (dec.) on page x20di2372 0x22a7 8871 942 x20di4372 0x22a8 8872 969 x20do2321 0x22b3 8883 1066 x20do4321 0x22b4 8884 1112 x20do4331 0x22b5 8885 1128 x20do8331 0x22eb 8939 1260 x20cm8281 0x24c3 9411 2210 x20if1091-...

  • Page 2696

    Appendix b 2696 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id b&r id code (hex.) b&r id code (dec.) on page x20ao2438 0xb3aa 45994 401 x20if1086-2 0xb455 46165 1824 x20dc11a6 0xb76b 46955 701 x20ai2437 0xb784 46980 176 x20ao2437 0xb785 46981 390 x20bc00e3 0xbb7d 47997 552 x20ata492 0xbb98 48024 2420 x20a...

  • Page 2697

    Appendix b x20 system user's manual 3.10 2697 product id b&r id code (hex.) b&r id code (dec.) on page x20cdi4375 0xe220 57888 2559 x20cdi4760 0xe221 57889 2561 x20cdi6371 0xe222 57890 2563 x20cdi9372 0xe224 57892 2567 x20cdm9324 0xe225 57893 2570 x20cdo4332 0xe227 57895 2573 x20cdo6321 0xe228 57896...

  • Page 2698

    Appendix b 2698 x20 system user's manual 3.10 b.3 b&r id codes sorted by model number product id b&r id code (hex.) b&r id code (dec.) on page x20ai1744 0x1cde 7390 129 x20ai1744-3 0xa4ef 42223 129 x20ai2222 0xcab0 51888 144 x20ai2237 0xc9c4 51652 152 x20ai2322 0xcab2 51890 167 x20ai2437 0xb784 4698...

  • Page 2699

    Appendix b x20 system user's manual 3.10 2699 product id b&r id code (hex.) b&r id code (dec.) on page x20cs1030 0x1fd0 8144 1575 x20cs1070 0x1fd1 8145 1617 x20cs2770 0xa009 40969 1662 x20dc1073 0xaec6 44742 1332 x20dc1176 0xa706 42758 653 x20dc1178 0xa708 42760 669 x20dc1196 0x1baf 7087 684 x20dc11...

  • Page 2700

    Appendix b 2700 x20 system user's manual 3.10 product id b&r id code (hex.) b&r id code (dec.) on page x20if1053-1 0xa715 42773 1787 x20if1061 0x1f22 7970 1791 x20if1061-1 0xa716 42774 1794 x20if1063 0x1f23 7971 1798 x20if1063-1 0xa717 42775 1801 x20if1065 0xa4c6 42182 1805 x20if1072 0x1f20 7968 180...

  • Page 2701

    Appendix b x20 system user's manual 3.10 2701 product id b&r id code (hex.) b&r id code (dec.) on page x20cdi4375 0xe220 57888 2559 x20cdi4760 0xe221 57889 2561 x20cdi6371 0xe222 57890 2563 x20cdi9371 0xd574 54644 2565 x20cdi9372 0xe224 57892 2567 x20cdm9324 0xe225 57893 2570 x20cdo4332 0xe227 57895...

  • Page 2702

    Index 2702 x20 system user's manual 3.10 1 1, 2, 3-wire connections....................................................................................................................................... 73 2 2d illustration................................................................................

  • Page 2703

    Index x20 system user's manual 3.10 2703 b b&r id codes................................................................................................................................................... 2693 b&r industrial products safety notices.........................................................

  • Page 2704

    Index 2704 x20 system user's manual 3.10 x20cbr9300................................................................................................................................................. 2539 bus supply...........................................................................................

  • Page 2705

    Index x20 system user's manual 3.10 2705 x20ds1928.................................................................................................................................................. 1399 counter functions - coated x20cdc1198................................................................

  • Page 2706

    Index 2706 x20 system user's manual 3.10 x20do2322.................................................................................................................................................. 1074 x20do2623............................................................................................

  • Page 2707

    Index x20 system user's manual 3.10 2707 x20ap3121..................................................................................................................................................... 303 x20ap3131..........................................................................................

  • Page 2708

    Index 2708 x20 system user's manual 3.10 x20 electronics module communication............................................................................................ 1460, 2589 x20 hub system............................................................................................................

  • Page 2709

    Index x20 system user's manual 3.10 2709 mounting mechanical handling..................................................................................................................................... 2667 o other functions x20cm4810....................................................................

  • Page 2710

    Index 2710 x20 system user's manual 3.10 printer.................................................................................................................................................................... 81 protection.............................................................................

  • Page 2711

    Index x20 system user's manual 3.10 2711 x20cps2100................................................................................................................................................. 2631 x20cps2110...........................................................................................

  • Page 2712

    Index 2712 x20 system user's manual 3.10 x20bb80......................................................................................................................................................... 570 x20bb81..........................................................................................

  • Page 2713

    Index x20 system user's manual 3.10 2713 x x20 cpus x20cp1483.................................................................................................................................................... 895 x20cp1483-1..............................................................................

  • Page 2714

    Index 2714 x20 system user's manual 3.10 x20 interface module communication - coated x20cif1030.................................................................................................................................................. 2611 x20cif1061-1............................................

  • Page 2715

    Model number index x20 system user's manual 3.10 2715 0acs100a.00-1..................................................................................................................................................2204 0acs100a.90-1........................................................................

  • Page 2716

    Model number index 2716 x20 system user's manual 3.10 x20bc0063.......................................................................................................................................................... 527 x20bc0073........................................................................

  • Page 2717

    Model number index x20 system user's manual 3.10 2717 x20cp1583.......................................................................................................................................................... 913 x20cp1584........................................................................

  • Page 2718

    Model number index 2718 x20 system user's manual 3.10 x20do4633........................................................................................................................................................1175 x20do4649..........................................................................

  • Page 2719

    Model number index x20 system user's manual 3.10 2719 x20mm4456....................................................................................................................................................... 1956 x20pd0011..........................................................................

  • Page 2720

    Model number index 2720 x20 system user's manual 3.10 x20cdc2395...................................................................................................................................................... 2548 x20cdi4371.........................................................................